Ais 137 (Part - 4) Bs Vi

AIS-137 (Part 4)
FINALIZED DRAFT
(September 2018)
AUTOMOTIVE INDUSTRY STANDARD
Test Method, Testing Equipment and Related

Procedures for Testing Type Approval and
Conformity of Production (Cop) of Vehicles
for BS-VI Emission Norms
PART-4
BS VI Emission Norms for M&N Category
Vehicles with GVW exceeding 3.5 tonnes
Date of hosting on website: ----------------

Last date for comments: ----------------
I
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Status chart of the Standard to be used by the purchaser for updating the record
Sr. Corrigenda Amendment Revision Date Remark Misc.
No.
General Remarks:
II
AIS-137 (Part 4)
INTRODUCTION
In India, the mass emission norms based on Indian Driving Cycle (IDC) were
notified under CMVR in 1989. The first mass emission norms for vehicles were
enforced from 1st April 1991 for Gasoline vehicles and from 1st April 1992 for
Diesel vehicles. Since then, progressively emission norms have been tightened.
Government of India has notified migration to Bharat Stage VI (BS VI) emissions
norms for 2, 3 and 4 wheeled vehicles from 1st April 2020. For Agricultural
Tractors, Construction Equipment Vehicles and Combine Harvesters (vehicles
having power exceeding 37 kW) next stage emission norms Bharat Stage
(CEV/TREM) – IV) are notified from 1st October 2020 and Bharat Stage
(CEV/TREM) – V) from 1st April 2024. Test procedure for Type Approval and COP
for above emission norms shall be as per various parts of AIS-137, as applicable.
This Part 4 of AIS-137 prescribes Test Method, Testing Equipment and Related
Procedures for Testing Type Approval and Conformity of Production (Cop) of
Vehicles for BS-VI Emission Norms : Part-4 : BS VI Emission Norms for M and N
Category Vehicles with GVW exceeding 3.5 tonnes
While preparing this standard, considerable assistance has been taken from
following regulations/documents:
UN Regulation 49 (Supplement 3 to the 06 series of Amendment date of Entry into

Force 20.01.2016) Uniform provisions concerning the measures to be taken against
the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants from compression-ignition
engines and positive ignition engines for use in vehicles
The Committee Composition for formulation of this standard is given in Annexure 1

(To be included)
After approval of the standard by SCOE, The Automotive Research Association of

India, (ARAI), Pune, being the Secretariat of the AIS Committee, has published this
standard. For better dissemination of this information ARAI may publish this
standard on their web site.
******
III
AIS-137 (Part 4)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER & CONTENTS PAGE NO

APPENDIX NO (To be
included)
Chapter 1 Overall Requirement
Appendix 1 Procedure For Production Conformity Testing
Appendix 2 Summary Of Approval Process For Engines Fuelled With
Natural Gas, Engines Fuelled With LPG And Dual Fuel
Engines Fuelled With Natural Gas /Biomethane Or LPG.
Chapter 2 Essential Characteristics Of The Vehicle And
Engine And Information Concerning The
Conduct Of Tests
Chapter 3 Test Procedure
Chapter 3 - WHTC Engine Dynamometer Schedule
Appendix 1
Chapter 3 - Emission Measurement Equipment
Appendix 2
Chapter 3 - Statistics
Appendix 3
Chapter 3 - Carbon Flow Check
Appendix 4
Chapter 3 - Example Of Calculation Procedure
Appendix 5
Chapter 3 - Installation Of Auxiliaries And Equipment For Emission
Appendix 6 Test
Chapter 3 - Procedure For The Measurement Of Ammonia
Appendix 7
Chapter 3 - Particle Number Emissions Measurement Equipment
Appendix 8
Chapter 4 Technical Characteristics of Reference Fuels
Chapter 5 Emission Data Required At Type Approval For
Roadworthiness Purposes.
Chapter 6 Verifying The Durability Of Engine Systems.
Chapter 7 Conformity of In Service Engines Or Vehicles
Chapter7- Test procedure for vehicle emissions testing with
Appendix1 portable emission measurement system
Chapter7- Portable emission measurement equipment
Appendix2
IV
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Chapter7- Calibration of portable measurement equipment

Appendix3
Chapter7- Method to check the conformity of the ECU torque-
Appendix4 signal
Chapter 8A On Board Diagnostic Systems (OBD)
Chapter 8A Assessment of the in-use performance of the on-board
Appendix 1 diagnostic system
Chapter 8A Model of an obd in-use performance compliance
Appendix 2 statement
CHAPTER 8B Technical Requirements for on board diagnostic
systems(OBD)
Chapter 8B Approval of installation of OBD systems
Appendix 1
Chapter 8B Malfunctions illustration of the dtc status
Appendix 2
Chapter 8B Monitoring Requirements
Appendix 3
Chapter 8B Technical Compliance Report
Appendix 4
Chapter 8B Freeze frame and data stream information
Appendix 5
Chapter 8B Reference Standard Documents
Appendix 6
Chapter 8B Performance Monitoring
Appendix 7
Chapter 8B Demonstration Requirements in case of performance
Appendix 8 monitoring of a wall-flow diesel particulate filter
Chapter 8C Technical requirements for assessing the in-use
performance of on-board diagnostic systems (OBD)
Chapter 8c Group of moniters
Appendix 1
Chapter 9 Technical Requirements on off-cycle emissions (oce)
and in use emissions
Chapter 9- PEMS Demonstration Test at Type Approval
Appendix 1:
Chapter 10 Requirements to ensure the correct operation of nox
control measures
Chapter 10- Demonstration requirements
Appendix 1
Chapter 10 - Description of the driver warning and inducement
Appendix 2 activation and deactivation mechanisms
V
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Chapter 10 - Low level inducement torque reduction scheme

Appendix 3
Chapter 10- Demonstration of correct installation on a vehicle in the
Appendix 4 case of engines type-approved as a system
Chapter 10 - Access to "nox control information"
Appendix 5
Chapter 10 - Demonstration of the minimum acceptable reagent
Appendix 6 concentration cd min
CHAPTER 11 CO2 Emissions and Fuel Consumption
Appendix1: Provisions on co2 emissions and fuel consumption for
extension of a type approval for a vehicle type approved under
this standard with a reference mass exceeding 2,380 kg but not
exceeding 2,610 kg
Chapter 12 Type Approval of Replacement Pollution Control

Devices As Separate Technical Unit
Chapter 12- Model Information Document
Appendix 1
Chapter 12- Communication concerning the approval of a
Appendix 2 replacement pollution control device pursuant to ais 137
part4 and its amendments
Chapter 12- Ageing procedure for evaluation of durability
Appendix 3
Chapter 13 Access to vehicle OBD information
Chapter 14 Additional Technical Requirements For Diesel-Gas
Dual-Fuel Engines and Vehicles
Chapter 14 – Types of HDDF engines and vehicles illustration of the
Appendix 1 definitions and main requirements
Chapter 14 – Activation and deactivation mechanisms of the
Appendix 2 counter(s), warning system, operability restriction,
service mode in case of dual-fuel engines and vehicles -
description and illustrations
Chapter 14 – Hddf dual-fuel indicator, warning system, operability
Appendix 3 restriction - demonstration requirements
Chapter 14 – Additional emission test procedure requirements for
Appendix 4 dual- fuel engines
Chapter 14 – Additional pems emission test procedure requirements
Appendix 5 for dual-fuel engines
Chapter 14 – Determination of molar component ratios and ugas values
Appendix 6 for Dual-Fuel engines
VI
AIS-137 (Part 4)
CHAPTER 1
OVERALL REQUIREMENTS
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This part of AIS-137 standard applies to the engines fitted in all
M & N Category vehicles with GVW above 3.5 tons for Bharat Stage
VI.
1.1.1 This Part of AIS 137 applies to the control of gaseous and particulate
pollutants, useful life of emission control devices, Off-cycle
emissions (OCE), In-Service emission measurement, and on-board
diagnostic (OBD) systems of all motor vehicles equipped with
compression-ignition engines and / or positive-ignition engines
fuelled with natural gas or LPG or any other alternate fuel or
combination of fuels thereof approved through gazette notification for
automotive use with the exception of those vehicles of category M1,
with a technically permissible maximum laden mass less than or equal
to 3,500 kg and of compression-ignition engines of those vehicles of
category N1, N2 and M2 and of positive-ignition engines fuelled with
natural gas or LPG of those vehicles of category N1 for which type-
approval has been granted under Part 3 of AIS 137.
1.2 If a vehicle is tested for type approval on Chassis Dynamometer

having Reference Mass up to 2610 kg, manufacturer may seek type
approval extensions up to reference mass of 2840 kg for its variants
exceeding GVW of 3500 kg. In such cases mass emission testing on
Engine Dynamometer shall not be required.
1.3 This Part should be read in conjunction with applicable Gazette

Notification for which the engines is subjected to test.
1/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
1.4 APPLICABILITY:
The applicability of AIS-137 (Part 3) and AIS-137 Part (4) for various
vehicle categories using different fuels covered in this standard is
summarized in the Table 1 below
Table 1
Test Applicability
a Natural Gas.
b Liquefied Petroleum Gas.
c AIS-137 (Part 3) applies for vehicles with a reference mass ≤ 2,610 kg
and by extension of an approval for vehicles with a reference mass ≤ 2,840 kg
2/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
1.5 TEST APPLICABILITY:

Applicability of Test requirements for engine type approval and
post-type approval are given in the Table below, as specified in
Gazette Notification GSR-889(E) dated 16 th Sep 2016 published by
Ministry of Road Transport and Highways (MoRTH).
Table 2
Test Requirements of BSVI Emission Norms
Notes:
(1) The vehicles/engines fuelled with bio diesel blends up to 7%shall be
tested with reference diesel (B7) and vehicles fuelled with Bio diesel
above 7% will be tested with respective blends.
(2) The test applicability requirements for dual fuel engine depends on
the Gas Energy Ratio (GER) measured over the hot part of the WHTC
test-cycle. GER classification shall be as defined in Chapter-14 of this
part of AIS-137. and as amended from time to time by Govt of India.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this Part o f AI S-1 37 the following definitions
shall apply:
2.1 Ageing cycle" means the vehicle or engine operation (speed, load, power)
to be executed during the service accumulation period
2.2 "Approval of an engine (engine family)" means the approval of an
engine type (engine family) with regard to the level of the emission of
gaseous and particulate pollutants, smoke and the on-board diagnostic
(OBD) system.
2.3 "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of vehicle type with regard
to the level of the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants and
smoke by its engine as well as the on-board diagnostic (OBD) system and
the engine installation on the vehicle.
3/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
2.4 "Auxiliary Emission Strategy" (AES) means an emission strategy that

becomes active and replaces or modifies a base emission strategy for a
specific purpose and in response to a specific set of ambient and/or
operating conditions and only remains operational as long as those
conditions exist.
2.5 "Base Emission Strategy" (BES) means an emission strategy that is
active throughout the speed and load operating range of the engine unless
an AES is activated.
2.6 "Continuous regeneration “means the regeneration process of an
exhaust after-treatment system that occurs either permanently or at least
once per World Harmonised Transient Driving Cycle (WHTC) hot start
test.
2.7 "Crankcase" means the spaces in, or external to, an engine which are
connected to the oil sump by internal or external ducts through which
gases and vapours can be emitted.
2.8 "Critical emission-related components" means the following
components which are designed primarily for emission control: any
exhaust after treatment system, the ECU and its associated sensors and
actuators, and the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system including all
related filters, coolers, control valves and tubing.
2.9 "Critical emission-related maintenance" means the maintenance to be
performed on critical emission-related components.
2.10 "Defeat strategy" means an emission strategy that does not meet the
performance requirements for a base and/or auxiliary emission strategy
as specified in this chapter.
2.11 "deNOx system" means an exhaust after-treatment system designed to
reduce emissions of oxides of nitrogen (NOx) (e.g. passive and active lean
NOx catalysts, NOx absorbers and selective catalytic reduction (SCR)
systems).
2.12 "Diagnostic trouble code" (DTC) means a numeric or alphanumeric
identifier which identifies or labels a malfunction;
2.13 “Diesel Mode” means the normal operating mode of a dual-fuel engine
during which the engine does not use any gaseous fuel for any engine
operating condition.
2.14 "Driving cycle" means a sequence consisting of an engine start, an
operating period (of the vehicle), an engine shut-off, and the time until
the next engine start
2.15 “Dual-fuel engine" means an engine system that is designed to
simultaneously operate with diesel fuel and a gaseous fuel, both fuels
being metered separately, where the consumed amount of one of the fuels
relative to the other one may vary depending on the operation.
2.16 "Dual-fuel mode" means the normal operating mode of a dual-fuel
engine during which the engine simultaneously uses diesel fuel and a
gaseous fuel at some engine operating conditions.
4/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
2.17 "Dual-fuel vehicle" means a vehicle that is powered by a dual-fuel

engine and that supplies the fuels used by.
2.18 " “Element of design" means in respect of a vehicle or engine:
(a) Any element of the engine system;
(b) Any control system, including: computer software; electronic control
systems; and computer logic;
(c) Any control system calibration; or
(d) The results of any interaction of engine systems
2.19 "Emission control monitoring system" means the system that ensures
correct operation of the NOx control measures implemented in the engine
system according to the requirements of clause 5.5 of this Chapter.
“Emission control system” means the elements of design and emission
strategies developed or calibrated for the purpose of controlling
emissions.
2.20 "Emission related maintenance" means the maintenance which
substantially affects emissions or which is likely to affect emissions
deterioration of the vehicle or the engine during normal in-use operation.
2.21 "Emission strategy" means an element or set of elements of design that
is incorporated into the overall design of an engine system or vehicle and
used in controlling emissions.
2.22 "Engine after-treatment system family" means a manufacturer’s
grouping of engines that comply with the definition of engine family, but
which are further grouped into engines utilising a similar exhaust after-
treatment system.
2.23 "Engine family" means a manufacturer’s grouping of engines which

through their design, as defined in clause 7. of this chapter, have similar
exhaust emission characteristics.
2.24 "Engine system" means the engine, the emission control system and the
communication interface (hardware and messages) between the engine
system electronic control unit or units (ECU) and any other powertrain or
vehicle control unit.
2.25 "Engine start" consists of the Ignition-On, cranking and start of
combustion, and is completed when the engine speed reaches 150 min -1
below the normal, warmed-up idle speed.
2.26 "Engine type” or Engine Model” means a category of engines which do
not differ in essential engine characteristics as set out in chapter 2.
2.27 "Exhaust after-treatment system" means a catalyst (oxidation, 3-way
or another), particulate filter, deNOx system, combined deNOx
particulate filter, or any other emission reducing device, that is installed
downstream of the engine; This definition excludes exhaust gas
recirculation, which, where fitted, is considered as an integral part of the
engine system.
5/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
2.28 Gaseous pollutants" means the exhaust gas emissions of carbon

monoxide, NOx, expressed in NO2 equivalent, hydrocarbons (i.e. total
hydrocarbons, non-methane hydrocarbons and methane).
2.29 "General Denominator" means a counter indicating the number of times

a vehicle has been operated, taking into account general conditions.
2.30 Group of monitors" means, for the purpose of assessing the in-use
performance of an OBD engine family, a set of OBD monitors used for
determining the correct operation of the emission control system
2.31 "Ignition cycle counter" means a counter indicating the number of
engine starts a vehicle has experienced.
2.32 "In-Use performance ratio" (IUPR) means the ratio of the number of
times that the conditions have existed under which a monitor, or group of
monitors, should have detected a malfunction relative to the number of
driving cycles relevant for the operation of that monitor or group of
monitors.
2.33 "Low speed (n lo)" means the lowest engine speed where 55 per cent of
the declared maximum power occurs.
2.34 "Malfunction" means a failure or deterioration of an engine system,
including the OBD system, that might reasonably be expected to lead
either to an increase in any of the regulated pollutants emitted by the
engine system or to a reduction in the effectiveness of the OBD system.
2.35 "Malfunction indicator" (MI) means an indicator which is part of the
alert system and which clearly informs the driver of the vehicle in the
event of a malfunction;
2.36 "Manufacturer" means the person or body who is responsible to the test
agency for all aspects of the type approval or authorisation process and
for ensuring conformity of production. It is not essential that the person
or body be directly involved in all stages of the construction of the
vehicle, system, component or separate technical unit which is the subject
of the approval process;
2.37 "Maximum net power" means the maximum value of the net power
measured at full engine load;
2.38 "Net power" means the power obtained on a test bench at the end of the
crankshaft or its equivalent at the corresponding engine or motor speed
with the auxiliaries according to AIS 137 Part 5 and determined under
reference atmospheric conditions.
2.39 "Non-emission-related maintenance" means the maintenance which
does not substantially affect emissions and which does not have a lasting
effect on the emissions deterioration of the vehicle or the engine during
normal in-use operation once the maintenance is performed
6/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
2.40 "On-board diagnostic system" (OBD system) means a system on-board

of a vehicle or engine which has the capability of:
(a) Detecting malfunctions, affecting the emission performance of the
engine system;
(b) Indicating their occurrence by means of an alert system.
(c) Identifying the likely area of the malfunction by means of information
stored in computer memory and communicating that information off
board.
2.41 "OBD engine family" means a manufacturer’s grouping of engine
systems having common methods of monitoring and diagnosing
emission-related malfunctions;
2.42 "Operating sequence" means a sequence consisting of an engine start,
an operating period (of the engine), an engine shut-off, and the time until
the next start, where a specific OBD monitor runs to completion and a
malfunction would be detected if present.
2.43 "Original pollution control device" means a pollution control device or
an assembly of such devices covered by the type approval granted for the
vehicle concerned.
2.44 "Parent engine" means an engine selected from an engine family in such
a way that its emissions characteristics will be representative for that
engine family.
2.45 "Particulate after-treatment device" means an exhaust after-treatment
system designed to reduce emissions of particulate pollutants (PT)
through a mechanical, aerodynamic, diffusional or inertial separation.
2.46 "Particulate matter (PM)" means any material collected on a specified
filter medium after diluting exhaust with a clean filtered diluent to a
temperature between 315 K (42 °C) and 325 K (52 °C); this is primarily
carbon, condensed hydrocarbons, and sulphates with associated water;
2.47 "Per cent load" means the fraction of the maximum available torque at
an engine speed;
2.48 "Performance monitoring" means malfunction monitoring, that
consists of functionality checks and the monitoring of parameters that
are not directly correlated to emission thresholds, and that is done on
components or systems to verify that they are operating within the
proper range.
2.49 "Periodic regeneration" means the regeneration process of an emission
control device that occurs periodically in less than 100 hours of normal
engine operation.
2.50 "Portable emissions measurement system" (PEMS) means a portable
emissions measurement system meeting the requirements specified in
Appendix 2 of chapter 7 of this standard.
7/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
2.51 "Power take-off unit" means an engine driven output device for the
purposes of powering auxiliary, vehicle mounted, equipment;
2.52 "Qualified deteriorated component or system" (QDC) means a
component or system that has been intentionally deteriorated such as by
accelerated ageing or by having been manipulated in a controlled
manner and which has been accepted by the Test agency according to
the provisions set out in chapter 8B to this standard for use when
demonstrating the OBD performance of the engine system;
2.53 "Reagent" means any medium that is stored on-board the vehicle in a
tank and provided to the exhaust after-treatment system (if required)
upon request of the emission control system
2.54 "Recalibration" means a fine tuning of a natural gas engine in order to
provide the same performance (power, fuel consumption) in a different
range of natural gas
2.55 “Reference mass" means the "unladen mass" of the vehicle increased
by a uniform figure of 150kg;
2.56 “Replacement pollution control device" means a pollution control
device or an assembly of such devices intended to replace an original
pollution control device and which can be approved as a separate
technical unit;
2.57 "Scan-tool" means external test equipment used for standardised off-
board communication with the OBD system in accordance with the
requirements of this standard.
2.58 "Service accumulation schedule" means the ageing cycle and the
service accumulation period for determining the deterioration factors for
the engine after- treatment system family;
2.59 “Service mode” means a special mode of a dual-fuel engine that is
activated for the purpose of repairing, or of moving the vehicle from the
traffic when operation in the dual-fuel mode is not possible
2.60 "Tailpipe emissions" means the emission of gaseous and particulate
pollutants.
2.61 "Tampering" means inactivation, adjustment or modification of the
vehicle emissions control or propulsion system, including any software
or other logical control elements of those systems, that has the effect,
whether intended or not, of worsening the emissions performance of the
vehicle.
2.62 "Unladen mass" "Unladen mass" means the mass of the vehicle in
running order without the uniform mass of the driver of 75kg,
passengers or load, but with the fuel tank 90 per cent full and the usual
set of tools and spare wheel on board, where applicable;
2.63 "Useful life" means the relevant period of distance and/or time over
which compliance with the relevant gaseous and particulate emission
limits has to be assured.
8/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
2.64 "Vehicle type or vehicle model with regard to emissions" means a

group of vehicles which do not differ in essential engine and vehicle
characteristics as set out in chapter2;
2.65 "Wall flow Diesel Particulate Filter" means a Diesel Particulate Filter
("DPF") in which all the exhaust gas is forced to flow through a wall
which filters out the solid matter;
2.66 "Wobbe index (lower Wl; or upper Wu)" means the ratio of the
corresponding calorific value of a gas per unit volume and the square
root of its relative density under the same reference conditions:
𝜌
𝑊=𝐻 × 𝜌
2.67 "λ-shift factor (Sλ)" means an expression that describes the required
flexibility of the engine management system regarding a change of the
excess-air ratio λ if the engine is fuelled with a gas composition different
from pure methane (see Appendix 5 to chapter3 for the calculation of
Sλ.
3.0 Application for approval
3.1 Application for type approval of an engine system or engine family
as a separate technical unit.
3.1.1 The manufacturer or his authorized representative shall submit to the
Test Agency an application for type approval of an engine system or
engine family as a separate technical unit;
3.1.2 The application referred to in clause 3.1.1. above shall have technical
specifications set out in chapter 2.
3.1.3 Together with the application, the manufacturer shall provide a
documentation package that fully explains any element of design which
affects emissions, the emission control strategy of the engine system,
the means by which the engine system controls the output variables
which have a bearing upon emissions, whether that control is direct or
indirect, and fully explains the warning and inducement system required
by paragraphs 4 and 5 of chapter 10. The documentation package shall
consist of the following parts including the information set out in
paragraph 5.1.4 of this chapter.
(a) A formal documentation package that shall be retained by the test
agency. Formal documentation package shall be in two parts; the first
part shall be the brief technical specifications as per Table 7 of the
standard AIS-007 and the second part shall be the detailed technical
specifications as per Table 4F of the standard AIS-007. The first part
of formal documentation may be made available to the interested
parties upon request. The second part of formal documentation shall
be retained by the test agency as confidential information.
(b) An extended documentation package that shall remain confidential.
The extended documentation package may be kept by the test
agency or be retained by the manufacturer, at the discretion of the
test agency, but shall be made available for inspection by the test
9/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
agency at the time of approval or at any time during the validity of

the approval. When the documentation package is retained by the
manufacturer, the test agency shall take the necessary measures to
ensure that the documentation is not being altered after approval.
3.1.4 In addition to the information referred to in clause 3.1.3. of this chapter
the manufacturer shall submit the following information:
a) In the case of positive-ignition engines, a declaration by the
manufacturer of the minimum percentage of misfires out of a total
number of firing events that either would result in emissions
exceeding the limits set out in chapter 8A if that percentage of
misfire had been present from the start of the emission test as set
out in Chapter 4 or could lead to an exhaust catalyst, or catalysts,
overheating prior to causing irreversible damage
b) A description of the provisions taken to prevent tampering with and
modification of the emission control computer(s), including the
facility for updating using a manufacturer-approved programme or
calibration;
c) Documentation of the OBD system, in accordance with the
requirements set out in clause 8. of chapter 8B;\
d) OBD related information for the purpose of access to OBD, in
accordance with the requirements of chapter 13 of this documents.
e) A Statement of off-cycle emission compliance, with the
requirements of clause 5.1.3. and clause 10. of chapter 9;
f) A Statement of OBD in-use performance compliance, with the
requirements of Appendix 2 to chapter 8A;
g) The initial plan for in-service testing according to clause 2.4. of
chapter7;
h) Where appropriate, copies of other type approvals with the relevant
data to enable extension of approvals and establishment of
deterioration factors.
i) Where appropriate, the documentation packages required by this
Standard for the correct installation of the engine type-approved as
separate technical unit
3.1.5 The manufacturer shall submit to the Test agency for the type approval
tests an engine or, as appropriate, a parent engine representative of the
type to be approved.
3.1.6 Changes to the make of a system, component or separate technical unit
that occur after a type approval shall not automatically invalidate a type
approval, unless its original characteristics or technical parameters are
changed in such a way that the functionality of the engine or pollution
control system is affected.
10/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
3.2 Application for type approval of a vehicle with an approved engine

system with regard to emissions.
Test agency an application for type approval of a vehicle with an
approved engine system with regard to emissions.
specifications set out in chapter2. This application shall be
accompanied by a copy of the type approval certificate for the engine
system or engine family as a separate technical unit.
3.2.3 The manufacturer shall provide a documentation package that fully
explains the elements of the warning and inducement system that is on
board of the vehicle and required by chapter 10. This documentation
package shall be provided in accordance with clause 3.1.3 of this
chapter.
3.2.4 In addition to the information referred to in clause 3.2.3. of this chapter,
the manufacturer shall submit the following information:
(a) A description of the measures taken to prevent tampering with and
modification of the vehicle control units covered by this standard,
including the facility for updating using a manufacturer-approved
programme or calibration;
(b) A description of the OBD components on board of the vehicle, in
accordance with the requirements of clause 8. of chapter 8B;
(c) Information related to the OBD components on board of the vehicle
for the purpose of access to OBD;
(d) Where appropriate, copies of other type approvals with the relevant
data to enable extension of approvals.
3.3 Application for type approval of a vehicle with regard to emissions
test agency an application for type approval of a vehicle with regard to
emissions.
specifications set out in chapter 2 of this document.
11/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
3.3.3 The manufacturer shall provide a documentation package that fully

explains any element of design which affects emissions, the emission
control strategy of the engine system, the means by which the engine
system controls the output variables which have a bearing upon
emissions, whether that control is direct or indirect, and fully explains
the warning and inducement system required by chapter 10. This
documentation package shall be provided in accordance with clause
3.1.3. of this chapter.
3.3.4 In addition to the information referred to in clause 3.3.3. of this chapter,

the manufacturer shall submit the information required by clause 3.1.4.
(a) to (h) and clause 3.2.4. (a) to (d).
3.3.5 The manufacturer shall submit to the test agency responsible for the
type approval tests an engine representative of the type to be approved.

3.4. Application for type approval of a type of replacement pollution

control device as a separate technical unit.
3.4.1 The manufacturer shall submit to the test agency an application for type
approval of a type of replacement pollution control device as a separate
technical unit.
3.4.2 The application shall have technical specifications set out in chapter2.
3.4.3 The manufacturer shall submit a Statement of compliance with the

requirements on access to OBD information.
3.4.4 The manufacturer shall submit to the test agency responsible for the type
approval test the following:
(a) An engine system or engine systems of a type approved in
accordance with this standard equipped with a new original equipment
pollution control device;
(b) One sample of the type of the replacement pollution control device;
(c) An additional sample of the type of the replacement pollution
control device, in the case of a replacement pollution control device
intended to be fitted to a vehicle equipped with an OBD system.
3.4.5 For the purposes of point (a) of clause 3.4.4. above, the test engines shall
be selected by the applicant with the agreement of the Type. Test
agency. The test conditions shall comply with the requirements set out
in clause 6. of chapter 3.
The test engines shall respect the following requirements
12/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
(a) They shall have no emission control system defects;

(b) Any malfunctioning or excessively worn emission-related original
part shall be repaired or replaced;
(c) They shall be tuned properly and set to the manufacturer's
specification prior to emission testing.
3.4.6 For the purposes of points (b) and (c) of clause 3.4.4.of this chapter the
sample shall be clearly and indelibly marked with the applicant's trade
name or mark and its commercial designation.
3.4.7 For the purposes of point (c) of clause 3.4.4. of this chapter, the sample shall
be a qualified deteriorated component.
4.0 APPROVAL
4.1 In order to receive a type-approval of an engine system or engine family
as a separate technical unit, or type-approval of a vehicle with an
approved engine system with regard to emissions, or a type-approval of
a vehicle with regard to emissions, the manufacturer shall, in
accordance with the provisions of this standard demonstrate that the
vehicles or engine systems are subject to the tests and comply with the
requirements set out in the gazette notification G.S.R 889(E)dated
16.09.2016 published by Ministry of Road Transport and Highways
(MoRTH).. The Test agency shall also ensure compliance with the
specifications of reference fuels set out in chapter 4.
In order to receive type-approval of a vehicle with an approved engine
system with regard to emissions or a type-approval of a vehicle with
regard to emissions the manufacturer shall ensure compliance with the
installation requirements set out in clause 6 of this chapter.
4.2 In order to receive an extension of the type-approval of a vehicle with
regard to emissions type approved under this standard with a reference
mass exceeding 2,380 kg but not exceeding 2,610kg the manufacturer
shall meet the requirements set out in Appendix 1 to chapter 11.
4.3 In order to receive a type-approval of a dual-fuel engine or engine family
as a separate technical unit, or type-approval of a dual-fuel vehicle with
an approved dual-fuel engine with regard to emissions, or a type-
approval of a dual-fuel vehicle with regard to emissions, the
manufacturer shall, in addition to the requirements of clause 4.1. of this
Chapter demonstrate that the dual-fuel vehicles or engine are subject to
the tests and comply with the requirements set out in Chapter 14.
4.4 Reserved
4.5 In order to receive a type-approval of an engine system or engine family
as a separate technical unit or a type-approval of a vehicle with regard
to emissions, the manufacturer shall ensure compliance with the
requirements on fuel range for a universal fuel approval or in case of a
positive ignition engine fuelled with natural gas and LPG a restricted
fuel range approval as specified in clause 4.6 and 4.7 of this chapter
respectively.
13/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
4.5.1 Tables summarizing the requirements for approval of NG-Fuelled

engines, LPG-Fuelled engines and dual-fuelled engines are provided in
Appendix 2 to this Chapter.
4.6 Requirements On Universal Fuel Range Type-Approval
A universal fuel range approval shall be granted subject to the
requirements specified in clauses 4.6.1 to 4.6.6.1.
4.6.1 The parent engine shall meet the requirements of this standard on the
appropriate reference fuels specified in chapter 4. Specific requirements
shall apply to natural gas fuelled engines, as laid down in clause 4.6.3
4.6.2 If the manufacturer permits to operate the engine family to run on market
fuels not included in chapter 4, the manufacturer shall, in addition to the
requirements in clause 4.6.1:
(a) Declare the fuels the engine family is capable to run in Chapter 2
(b) Demonstrate the capability of the parent engine to meet the
requirements of this standard on the fuels declared;
(c)Be liable to meet the requirements of in-service conformity specified in
clause 9 of this Chapter on the fuels declared, including any blend
between the declared fuels and the relevant market fuels and standards
4.6.3 In the case of a natural gas /biomethane fuelled engines, including dual
fuel engines, the manufacturer shall demonstrate the parent engines
capability to adapt to any natural gas/biomethane composition that may
occur across the market. This demonstration shall be carried out
according to this clause and, in case of dual-fuel engines, also according
to the additional provisions regarding the fuel adaptation procedure set
out in clause 6.4. of Chapter 14 of this part.
4.6.3.1 In the case of compressed natural gas/biomethane there are generally
two types of fuel, high calorific fuel (H-gas) and low calorific fuel (L-
gas), but with a significant spread with in both ranges; they differ
significantly in their energy content expressed by the Wobbe Index and
in their λ-shift factor (Sλ). Natural gases with a λ-shift factor between
0.89 and 1.08 (0.89 ≤ Sλ ≤ 1.08) are considered to belong to H-range,
while natural gases with a λ-shift factor between 1.08 and 1.19 (1.08 ≤
Sλ ≤ 1.19) are considered to belong to L-range. The composition of the
reference fuels reflects the extreme variations of Sλ.
The parent engine shall meet the requirements of this standard on the
reference fuels GR (fuel 1) and G25 (fuel 2), as specified in
Chapter4.without any readjustment to the fuelling system between the
two tests (Self adaptation is required). One adaptation run over one
WHTC hot cycle without measurement is permitted after the change of
the fuel. After the adaptation run the engine shall be cooled down in
accordance with clause 7.6.1 of Chapter 3 of this part.
14/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
4.6.3.1.1 At the manufacturer’s request, the engine may be tested on third fuel
(fuel 3) in the λ-shift factor (Sλ) lies between 0.89 (that is the lower range
of GR) and 1.19 (that is the upper range of G25), for example when fuel
3 is a market fuel. The results of this test may be used as a basis for the
evaluation of the conformity of the production
4.6.3.2 In the case of liquefied natural gas/liquefied biomethane (LNG) the
parent engine shall meet the requirements of this standard on the
reference fuels GR (Fuel 1) and G20 (Fuel 2), as specified in chapter 4,
without any manual readjustment to the engine fuelling system between
the two tests (self-adaptation is required). One adaptation run over one
WHTC hot cycle without measurement is permitted after the change of
the fuel. After the adaptation run, the engine shall be cooled down in
accordance with clause 7.6.1. of chapter 3 of this part.
4.6.4 In the case of an engine fuelled with compressed natural gas/biomethane
(CNG) which is self-adaptive for the range of H-gases on the one hand
and the range of L-gases on the other hand, and which switches between
the H-range and the L-range by means of a switch, the parent engine
shall be tested on the relevant reference fuel as specified in chapter 4 for
each range, at each position of the switch. The fuels are GR(fuel 1) and
G23 (fuel 3) for the H-range of gases and G25(fuel 2) and G23 (fuel 3) for
the L-range of gases. The parent engine shall meet the requirements of
this standard at both positions of the switch without any readjustment to
the fuelling between the two tests at each position of the switch. One
adaptation run over one WHTC hot cycle without measurement is
permitted after the change of the fuel. After the adaptation run the engine
shall be cooled down in accordance with Clause 7.6.1 of Chapter 3
4.6.4.1. At the manufacturer's request the engine may be tested on a third fuel
instead of G23 (fuel 3) if the λ-shift factor (Sλ) lies between 0.89 (that is
the lower range of G R ) and 1.19 (that is the upper range of G25 ), for
example when fuel 3 is a market fuel. The results of this test may be
used as a basis for the evaluation of the conformity of the production
4.6.5 In the case of natural gas/bio-methane engines, the ratio of the emission
results ‘r’ shall be determined for each pollutant as follows:
𝑒𝑚𝑖𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑢𝑙𝑡 𝑜𝑛 𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑓𝑢𝑒𝑙 2

𝑟=
Or
𝑟 =
and
𝑟 =
4.6.6 In the case of LPG, the manufacturer shall demonstrate the parent
engines capability to adapt to any fuel composition that may occur
across the market
15/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
In the case of LPG there are variations in C3 /C4 composition. These

variations are reflected in the reference fuels. The parent engine shall
meet the emission requirements on the reference fuels A and B as
specified in chapter-4 without any readjustment to the fuelling between
the two tests. One adaptation run over one WHTC hot cycle without
measurement is permitted after the change of the fuel. After the
adaptation run the engine shall be cooled down in accordance with
Clause 7.6.1 of Chapter 3.
4.6.6.1 The ratio of emission results ‘r’ shall be determined for each pollutant
as follows
𝑒𝑚𝑖𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑢𝑙𝑡 𝑜𝑛 𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑓𝑢𝑒𝑙 𝐵
𝑟=
𝑒𝑚𝑖𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑢𝑙𝑡 𝑜𝑛 𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑓𝑢𝑒𝑙 𝐴
4.7 Requirements on restricted fuel range type-approval in case of
positive-ignition engines fuelled with natural gas/biomethane or
LPG including dual-fuel engines.
Restricted Fuel range type approval shall be granted subject to the
requirements specified in clauses 4.7.1 to 4.7.2.3
4.7.1 Exhaust emissions type-approval of an engine running on CNG and laid
out for operation on either the range of H-gases or on the range of L-
gases
4.7.1.1 The parent engine shall be tested on the relevant reference fuel, as
specified in chapter 4, for the relevant range. The fuels are GR (fuel 1)
and G23 (fuel 3) for the H-range of gases and G25 (fuel 2) and G23 (fuel
3) for the L-range of gases. The parent engine shall meet the
requirements of this standard without any readjustment to the fuelling
between the two tests. One adaptation run over one WHTC hot cycle
without measurement is permitted after the change of the fuel. After the
adaptation run the engine shall be cooled down in accordance with
Clause 7.6.1 of Chapter 3.
4.7.1.2 At the manufacturer's request the engine may be tested on a third fuel
instead of G23 (fuel 3) if the λ-shift factor (Sλ) lies between 0.89 (that is
the lower range of GR) and 1.19 (that is the upper range of G25), for
example when fuel 3 is a market fuel. The results of this test may be
used as a basis for the evaluation of the conformity of the production
4.7.1.3 In the case of natural gas/bio-methane engines, the ratio of the emission
results ‘r’ shall be determined for each pollutant as follows:
𝑟=
Or
𝑟 =
and
𝑟 =
4.7.1.4 On delivery to the customer the engine should bear a label as specified
in clause 4.12.1 stating for which range of gases the engine is approved.
16/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
4.7.2 Exhaust emission type-approval of an engine running on natural gas or

LPG and designed for operation on one specific fuel composition.
4.7.2.1 The parent engine shall meet the emission requirements on the reference
fuels GR and G25 in the case of CNG, on the reference fuels GR and G20
in the case of LNG, or on the reference fuels A and B in the case of LPG,
as specified in Chapter 4. Fine tuning of the fuelling system is allowed
between the tests. This fine tuning will consist of a recalibration of the
fuelling database, without any alteration to either the basic control
strategy or the basic structure of the database. If necessary, the exchange
of parts that are directly related to the amount of fuel flow such as
injector nozzles is allowed.
4.7.2.2 In the case of CNG, at the manufacturer's request the engine may be
tested on the reference fuels GR and G23, or on the reference fuels G25and
G23, in which case the type-approval is only valid for the H-range or the
L-range of gases respectively.
4.7.2.3 On delivery to the customer the engine shall bear a label as specified in
clause 4.12.1 below stating for which fuel range composition the engine
has been calibrated.
4.8 Requirements on Fuel-specific Type-approval in the case of Engines
Fuelled with Liquefied Natural Gas/Liquefied Biomethane (LNG).
In case of liquefied natural gas/liquefied biomethane, a fuel specific
type-approval may be granted subject to the requirements specified in
clauses 4.8.1 to 4.8.2.
4.8.1 Conditions for Applying for a Fuel-specific Type-approval in the Case

of Engines Fuelled with Liquefied Natural Gas/Liquefied Biomethane
(LNG).
4.8.1.1 The manufacturer can only apply for a fuel specific type-approval in the
case of the engine being calibrated for a specific LNG gas composition
resulting in a λ-shift factor not differing by more than 3% from the λ-
shift factor of the G20 fuel specified in chapter 4, and the ethane content
of which does not exceed 1.5%.
4.8.1.2 In all other cases the manufacturer shall apply for a universal fuel type
approval according to the specifications of clause4.6.3.2.
4.8.2 Specific Test Requirements in the Case of a Fuel-specific Type-approval
(LNG).
4.8.2.1 In the case of a dual-fuel engine family where the engines are calibrated
for a specific LNG gas composition (1) resulting in a λ-shift factor not
differing by more than 3% from the λ-shift factor of the G20 fuel
specified in chapter 4, and the ethane content of which does not exceed
1.5%, the parent engine shall only be tested on the G20 reference gas
fuel, as specified in chapter 4.
17/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
4.9 Exhaust Emissions Type-Approval of A Member of a Family

4.9.1 With the exception of the case mentioned in clause 2.2, the type-
approval of a parent engine shall be extended to all family members,
without further testing, for any fuel composition within the range for
which the parent engine has been approved (in the case of engines
described in clause 1.2.2) or the same range of fuels (in the case of
engines described in either clause 1.1 or 1.2) for which the parent engine
has been type-approved
4.9.2 If the test agency determines that, with regard to the selected parent
engine the submitted application does not fully represent the engine
family specified in technical specifications submitted by manufacturer
as per Chapter 2, an alternative and if necessary an additional reference
test engine may be selected by the test agency and tested.
4.10 Requirements for approval regarding the on-board diagnostic
systems.
4.10.1 Manufacturers shall ensure that all engine systems and vehicles are
equipped with an OBD system.
4.10.2 The OBD system shall be designed, constructed and installed on a
vehicle in accordance with chapter 8A, so as to enable it to identify,
record, and communicate the types of deterioration or malfunction
specified in that chapter over the entire life of the vehicle.
4.10.3 The manufacturer shall ensure that the OBD system complies with the
requirements set out in chapter 8A, including the OBD in-use
performance requirements, under all normal and reasonably foreseeable
driving conditions, including the conditions of normal use specified in
chapter 8B.
4.10.4 When tested with a qualified deteriorated component, the OBD system
malfunction indicator shall be activated in accordance with chapter 8B.
The OBD system malfunction indicator may also be activated at levels
of emissions below the OBD thresholds limits specified in chapter8A
4.10.5 The manufacturer shall ensure that the provisions for in-use
performance of an OBD engine family laid down in chapter 8A are
followed.
4.10.6 The OBD in-use performance related data shall be stored and made
available without any encryption through the standard OBD
communication protocol by the OBD system in accordance with the
provisions of chapter 8A.
4.10.7 If the manufacturer chooses, until the date of implementation of BS-VI-
OBD II for new type approvals, as specified in the MoRTH gazette
notification G.S.R 889(E) dated 16.09.2016, OBD systems may comply
with alternative provisions as specified in chapter 8A and referring to
this clause.
4.10.8 If the manufacturer chooses, until the date specified in in G.S.R
889(E)dated 16.09.2016 for OBD I from 1st April 2020 and for OBD II
1st April 2023. for new type approvals, he may use alternative provisions
18/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
for the monitoring of the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) as set out in
clause 2.3.2.2. Chapter 8A.
If the manufacturer chooses, until the date of implementation of BS-VI
OBD-II for new type approvals as specified in in the MoRTH gazette
notification G.S.R 889(E) dated 16.09.2016, he may use alternative
provisions for the monitoring of the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) as
set out in clause 2.3.2.2. of Chapter 8A.
4.11 Requirements for approval regarding replacement pollution
control devices.
4.11.1 The manufacturer shall ensure that replacement pollution control
devices intended to be fitted to type-approved engine systems or
vehicles covered by this standard are type-approved, as separate
technical units in accordance with the requirements of clauses 4.11.2. to
4.11.5. Catalytic converters, deNOx devices and particulate filters shall
be considered to be pollution control devices for the purposes of this
standard.
4.11.2 Original replacement pollution control devices, which fall within the
type covered by the technical specifications submitted as per Chapter 2
and are intended for fitment to a vehicle to which the relevant type
approval document refers, do not need to comply with all provisions of
chapter 12 provided that they fulfil the requirements of clauses 2.1., 2.2.
and 2.3. of that chapter
4.11.3 The manufacturer shall ensure that the original pollution control device
carries identification markings.
4.11.4 The identification markings referred to in clause 4.11.3. shall comprise
the following:
(a) The vehicle or engine manufacturer's name or trade mark;
(b) The make and identifying part number of the original pollution
control device as specified in technical specifications submitted as per
Chapter 2
4.11.5 Replacement pollution control devices shall only be type approved
according to this standard once the specific testing requirements are
introduced in Chapter12 of this documents.
4.12 Approval marks and labeling for engine systems and vehicles
(Reserved)
4.12.1 Labels for natural gas/biomethane and LPG fuelled engines
In the case of natural gas and LPG fuelled engines with a restricted
fuel range
type-approval, the following labels are applicable:
19/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
4.12.1.1 Content:
The following information shall be given:

In the case of clause 4.7.1.4. of this chapter, the label shall state
"ONLY FOR USE WITH NATURAL GAS RANGE H". If
applicable, "H" is replaced by "L".
In the case of clause 4.7.2.3. of this chapter, the label shall state
"ONLY FOR USE WITH NATURAL GAS SPECIFICATION ..." or
"ONLY FOR USE WITH LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GAS
SPECIFICATION ...", as applicable. All the information in the
relevant table(s) in Chapter 4 shall be given with the individual
constituents and limits specified by the engine manufacturer.
The letters and figures shall be at least 4 mm in height.
Note: If lack of space prevents such labelling, a simplified code may

be used. In this event, explanatory notes containing all the above
information shall be easily accessible to any person filling the fuel
tank or performing maintenance or repair on the engine and its
accessories, as well as to the test agencies concerned. The site and
content of these explanatory notes will be determined by agreement
between the manufacturer and the Test Agency.
4.12.1.2 Properties
Labels shall be durable for the useful life of the engine. Labels shall
be clearly
legible and their letters and figures shall be indelible. Additionally,
labels shall be attached in such a manner that their fixing is durable
for the useful life of the engine, and the labels cannot be removed
without destroying or defacing them
4.12.1.3 Placing
Labels shall be secured to an engine part necessary for normal engine
operation and not normally requiring replacement during engine life.
Additionally, these labels shall be located so as to be readily visible
after the engine has been completed with all the auxiliaries necessary
for engine operation.
4.12.2 In case of an application for approval for a vehicle type in respect of
its engine, the marking specified in clause 4.12.1 shall also be placed
close to fuel filling aperture.
4.12.3 In case of an application for approval for a vehicle type with an
approved engine, the marking specified in clause 4.12.1 shall also be
placed close to the fuel filling aperture.
20/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
5 REQUIREMENTS AND TESTS

5.1 General
5.1.1 Manufacturers shall equip vehicles and engines so that the
components likely to affect emissions are designed, constructed and
assembled so as to enable the vehicle or engine, in normal use, to
comply with this standard.
5.1.2 The manufacturer shall take technical measures so as to ensure that
the tailpipe emissions are effectively limited, in accordance with this
standard, throughout the normal life of the vehicle and under normal
conditions of use.
5.1.2.1 Those measures referred to in clause 5.1.2. shall include ensuring that
the security of hoses, joints and connections, used within the emission
control systems, are constructed so as to conform to the original
design intent.
5.1.2.2 The manufacturer shall ensure that the emissions test results comply
with the applicable limit value under the test conditions specified in
this standard.
5.1.2.3 Any engine system and any element of design liable to affect the
emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants shall be designed,
constructed, assembled and installed so as to enable the engine, in
normal use, to comply with the provisions of this standard. The
manufacturer shall also ensure compliance with off-cycle
requirements set out in clause 5.1.3. of this chapter and
chapter 9.
5.1.2.4 The use of defeat strategies that reduce the effectiveness of emission
control equipment shall be prohibited.
5.1.2.5 In order to receive a type approval in the case of a petrol or E85
fuelled engine, the manufacturer shall ensure that the specific
requirements for inlets to fuel tanks for petrol and E85 fuelled
vehicles laid down in clause 6.3. of this chapter are fulfilled.
5.1.3 Requirements to limit off-cycle emissions

5.1.3.1 When meeting the requirements of clause 5.1.2. of this chapter, the
technical measures undertaken shall take the following into account:
21/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
(a) The general requirements, including the performance

requirements and the prohibition of defeat strategies, as
specified in chapter9.
(b) The requirements to effectively limit the tailpipe emissions under
the range of ambient conditions under which the vehicle may be
expected to operate, and under the range of operating conditions
that may be encountered;
(c) The requirements with respect to off-cycle laboratory testing at
type approval;
(d) The requirements with respect to the PEMS demonstration test
at type approval and any additional requirements with respect to
off-cycle in use vehicle testing, as provided The in-service
conformity factors shall be applicable from the dates specified
in Gazette Notification GSR-889(E) dated 16th Sep 2016
published by MoRTH or as amended from time to time;
(e) The requirement for the manufacturer to provide a statement of
compliance with the requirements limiting off-cycle emissions.
5.1.3.2 The manufacturer shall fulfil the specific requirements, together with
the associated test procedures, set out in chapter9.
5.1.4 Documentation Requirements
5.1.4.1 The documentation package required by clause 3 of this chapter.
enabling the Test agency to evaluate the emission control strategies
and the systems on-board the vehicle and engine to ensure the correct
operation of NOx control measures, as well as the documentation
packages required in Chapter 9 (off-cycle emissions), Chapters 8A
and 8B (OBD) and Chapter 14 to this Standard (dual-fuel engines),
shall be made available in the two following parts:
(a) The "formal documentation package"
(b) The "extended documentation package" that shall remain strictly
confidential.
5.1.4.2 The formal documentation package may be brief, provided that it
exhibits evidence that all outputs permitted by a matrix obtained from
the range of control of the individual unit inputs have been identified.
The documentation shall describe the functional operation of the
inducement system required by chapter 10, including the parameters
necessary for retrieving the information associated with that system.
This material shall be retained by the Test agency.
5.1.4.3 The extended documentation package shall include:

(a) Information on the operation of all AES and BES, including a
description of the parameters that are modified by any AES and
the boundary conditions under which the AES operate, and
indication of which AES and BES are likely to be active under the
conditions of the test procedures set out in chapter 9 to this
standard.
(b) The extended documentation package shall include a description
of the fuel system control logic, timing strategies and switch
points during all modes of operation.
22/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
(c) It shall also include a full description of the inducement system

required in chapter10 to this standard including the associated
monitoring strategies.
(d) the description of the anti- tampering measures considered in
clause 3.1.4 (b)and 3.2.4 (a) of this chapter.
5.1.4.4 The extended documentation package shall remain strictly

confidential. It may be kept by the Test agency, or, at the discretion
of the Test agency, may be retained by the manufacturer. In the case
the manufacturer retains the documentation package, that package
shall be identified and dated by the Test agency once reviewed and
approved. It shall be made open for inspection by the Test agency at
the time of approval or at any time during the validity of the approval.
5.1.5 Provisions for electronic system security
5.1.5.1 The general requirements, including the specific requirements for

electronic system security, shall be those set out in clause 4of chapter
8B. of this standard and those described in clause 2 of chapter 8A.
5.2 Specifications Concerning the Emission of Gaseous and

Particulate Pollutants
5.2.1 In undertaking the tests set out in chapter 3 the gaseous and
particulate matter emissions shall not exceed the limits shown in
clause 5.3 of this chapter
5.2.2 For positive ignition engines subject to the test set out in chapter 5
the maximum permissible carbon monoxide content in the exhaust
gases at normal engine idling speed shall be that stated by the vehicle
manufacturer. However, the maximum carbon monoxide content
shall not exceed 0.3 percent vol. At high idle speed, the carbon
monoxide content by volume of the exhaust gases shall not exceed
0.2 per cent vol., with the engine speed being at least 2,000 min-1 and
Lambda being 1 ± 0.03 or in accordance with the specifications of the
manufacturer.
5.2.3 In the case of a closed crankcase, manufacturers shall ensure that for
the tests set out in clauses 6.10.and 6.11. of chapter 3, the engine’s
ventilation system does not permit the emission of any crankcase
gases into the atmosphere. If the crankcase is of an open type, the
emissions shall be measured and added to the tailpipe emissions,
following the provisions set out in clause 6.10 of chapter3.
5.2.4 For the dilute testing of positive ignition engines by using an exhaust
dilution system, it is permitted to use analyser systems that meet the
general requirements and calibration procedures of AIS-137 (Part 3).
In this case, the provisions of clause9 and Appendix 2 to chapter 3 to
this standard shall not apply.
However, the test Procedures in clause 7. of chapter 3 to this standard
and the emission calculations provided in clause 8. of chapter 3 shall
apply.
23/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
5.3 EMISSION LIMITS

Table 3 provides the mass emission limits for BS-VI as specified in the
Gazette Notification GSR-889(E) dated 16th Sep 2016 published by
MoRTH
Table 3
Mass Emission Limits
Limit values
NOX PM
CO THC NMHC CH4 PM
* NH3 mass
(mg/ (mg/ (mg/ (mg/ number
(mg/ (ppm (mg/
kW) kWh) kWh) kWh) (#/kWh)
kWh) kWh)
WHSC 8.0 x
1500 130 400 10 10
(CI) 1011
WHTC 6.0 x
4000 160 460 10 10
(CI) 1011
WHTC 6.0 x
4000 160 500 460 10 10
(PI) 1011
Notes:
PI Positive Ignition
CI Compression Ignition
* The admissible level of NO2 component in the NOX
limit value may be defined at a later stage.
5.4 Durability and Deterioration Factors

The manufacturer shall determine deterioration factors that will be
used to demonstrate that the gaseous and particulate emissions of an
engine family or engine- after-treatment system family remain in
conformity with the emission limits set out in clause 5.3 above. Over
the normal useful life periods set out below.
The procedures for demonstrating the compliance of an engine system
or engine-after-treatment system family over the normal useful life are
set out in chapter 6.
The mileage and period of time by reference to which the tests for
durability of pollution control devices undertaken for type approval
and testing of conformity of in-service vehicles or engines are to be
carried out shall be the following:
(a) 160,000 km or five years, whichever is the sooner, in the case of
engines fitted to vehicles of category M1, N1 and M2;
(b) 300,000 km or six years, whichever is the sooner, in the case of
engines fitted to vehicles of category N2, N3 with a maximum
technically permissible mass not exceeding 16 t and M3 vehicles
of Type-I and Type-II (as defined in AIS-052) with a maximum
technically permissible mass not exceeding 7.5 t;
(c) 700,000 km or seven years, whichever is the sooner, in the case of
engines fitted to vehicles of category N3 with a maximum
technically permissible mass exceeding 16 t and M3vehicles of
Type-II and Type-III (as defined in AIS-052) with a maximum
24/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
technically permissible mass exceeding 7.5 t.

Alternate to the mileage and period mentioned above, the durability
tests can be performed for the Minimum service accumulation periods
mentioned in the Gazette Notification 889(E) dated 16th Sep 2016 and
the results to be extrapolated to the mileage mentioned above using the
procedure given in Chapter-6. Alternate to this procedure,
manufacturer may opt for fixed deterioration factors specified in
MoRTH.
5.5 Requirements to Ensure Correct Operation of Nox Control
Measures
5.5.1 When applying for type approval, manufacturers shall present to test
agency information showing that the NOx system retains its emission
control function during all conditions regularly pertaining in India.
In addition, manufacturers shall provide the Test agency with
information on the operating strategy of any exhaust gas recirculation
system (EGR), including it’s functioning at low ambient temperatures.
Information on the tests and procedures for fulfilling these
requirements is provided in chapter 10.
6.0 Installation on The Vehicle
6.1. The engine installation on the vehicle shall be performed in such a way
as to ensure that the type-approval requirements are met. The following
characteristics in respect to the type-approval of the engine shall be
taken into consideration:
6.1.1. Intake depression shall not exceed that declared for the engine type-
approval in Chapter 2 of this part
6.1.2. Exhaust back pressure shall not exceed that declared for the engine
type-approval in Chapter 2
6.1.3. Power absorbed by the auxiliaries needed for operating the engine shall
not exceed that declared for the engine type-approval in Chapter 2 of
this part;
6.1.4. The characteristics of the exhaust after-treatment system shall be in
accordance with those declared for the engine type-approval in Chapter
2 of this part.
6.2 Installation of A Type-Approved Engine On A Vehicle
6.2.1 The installation of an engine type-approved as a separate technical unit
on a vehicle shall, in addition, comply with the following
requirements:
(a) As regard to the compliance of the OBD system, the installation
shall, according to Appendix 1 of chapter 8B, meet the
manufacturer's installation requirements as specified in Chapter-2
of this part;
(b) As regard to the compliance of the system ensuring the correct
operation of NOx control measures, the installation shall, according
to Appendix 4 of chapter 10, meet the manufacturer's installation
25/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
requirements as specified in Part 1 of chapter 2 of this part.

(c)The installation of a dual-fuel engine type-approved as a separate
technical unit on a vehicle shall, in addition, meet the specific
installation requirements and the manufacturer's installation
requirements set out in Chapter 14 to this part.
6.3 Inlet to Fuel Tanks in The Case of a Petrol or E85 Fuelled Engine
6.3.1. The inlet orifice of the petrol or E85 tank shall be designed so it
prevents the tank from being filled from a fuel pump delivery nozzle
that has an external diameter of 23.6 mm or greater.
6.3.2. Clause 6.3.1 shall not apply to a vehicle for which both of the following
conditions are satisfied:
(a) The vehicle is designed and constructed so that no device designed
to control the emission of gaseous pollutants is adversely affected by
leaded petrol;
(b) The vehicle is conspicuously, legibly and indelibly marked with the
symbol for unleaded petrol specified in AIS-071 (Part 1) in a position
immediately visible to a person filling the fuel tank. Additional
markings are permitted.
6.3.3. Provision shall be made to prevent excess evaporative emissions and
fuel spillage caused by a missing fuel filler cap. This may be achieved
by using one of the following:
a) An automatically opening and closing, non-removable fuel filler
cap;
(b) Design features which avoid excess evaporative emissions in the
case of a missing fuel filler cap;
(c) Or in case of M1 or N1 vehicles, any other provision which has the
same affect. Examples may include, but are not limited to, a tethered
filler cap, a chained filler cap or one utilizing the same locking key for
the filler cap as for the vehicle’s ignition. In this case the key shall be
removable from the filler cap only in the locked condition.
7 ENGINE FAMILY
7.1. Parameters defining the engine family:
The engine family, as determined by the engine manufacturer, shall
comply with Clause 5.2 Chapter 3 of this part
In case of a dual-fuel engine, the engine family shall also comply with
the additional requirements of clause 3.1.1 of Chapter 14 of this part.
7.2 Choice of the parent engine
The parent engine of the family shall be selected in accordance with
the requirements set out in clause 5.2.4 of Chapter 3 of this part .
In case of a dual-fuel engine, the parent engine family shall also
comply with the additional requirements of clause 3.1.2. of chapter14
of this part.
26/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
7.3 Extension to Include a New Engine System into an Engine-family

7.3.1 At the request of the manufacturer and upon approval of the test
agency, a new engine system may be included as a member of a
certified engine family if the criteria specified in clause 7.1 of this
chapter are met.
7.3.2 If the elements of design of the parent engine system are representative
of those of the new engine system according to clause 7.2. of this
chapter or, in the case of dual-fuel engines, to clause 3.1.2 of Chapter
14 of this part, then the parent engine system shall remain unchanged
and the manufacturer shall modify the application document specified
in Chapter-2.
7.3.2 If the new engine system contains elements of design that are not
represented by the parent engine system according to clause 7.2. or, in
the case of dual-fuel engines, to clause 3.1.2of Chapter 14, but itself
would represent the whole family according to these clauses, then the
new engine system shall become the new parent engine. In this case
the new elements of design shall be demonstrated to comply with the
provisions of this standard and the information document specified in
Chapter-2 shall be modified.
7.4 Parameters for defining an OBD -Engine family
The OBD-engine family shall be determined by basic design
parameters that shall be common to engine systems within the family,
in accordance with clause 6.1. of Chapter 8B of this part.
8.0 CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION
8.1 Measures to ensure production conformity must be taken in
accordance with the provisions as per Part 6 of AIS 137. However,
when the period between commencement of production of a new
model and beginning of next rationalized COP period is less than two
months, the same would be merged with the rationalized COP period.
8.1.1. Conformity of production shall be checked on the basis of the
description in the type approval certificate. For verifying the
conformity of production the following procedure as per Option 1 as
given in clause 8.3 of this chapter shall be adopted.
To verify the conformity of production for low volume vehicle model
and its variants with production volume less than 250 no. in any
consecutive period of six months in a year, manufacture can choose
from option 1 (clause 8.3 of this chapter) or option 2 (clause 8.4 of
this chapter) as listed below.
8.2. General Requirements
8.2.1 In applying Option 1, of this chapter the measured emission of the
gaseous and particulate pollutants from engines subject to checking for
conformity of production shall be adjusted by application of the
appropriate deterioration factors (DF’s) for that engine as recorded in
27/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
the type approval certificate or test report granted in accordance with

this standard.
8.2.2 Reserved
8.2.3 Three engine samples subject to tests shall be randomly taken from the
series production.
8.3 Option 1
8.3.1 Emission of Pollutants
If emissions of pollutants are to be measured and an engine type
approval has had one or more extensions, the tests shall be carried out
on the engines described in the application document relating to the
relevant extension.
8.3.2 Conformity of the engine subjected to a pollutant test:
After submission of the engine to the test agencies, the manufacturer
may not carry out any adjustment to the engines selected.
8.3.2.1 Three engines shall be taken from the series production of the engines
under consideration. Engines shall be subjected to testing on the
WHTC and on the WHSC, if applicable, for the checking of the
production conformity. The limit values shall be those set out in clause
5.3. of this chapter.
8.3.2.2 The tests shall be carried out according to Appendix 1 of this chapter
8.3.2.3 On the basis of test of the engine by sampling as set out in clause
8.3.2.1. of this chapter, the series production of the engines under
consideration is regarded as conforming where a pass decision is
reached for all the pollutants and as non-conforming where a fail
decision is reached for one pollutant, in accordance with the test
criteria applied in the Appendix 1.
When the pass decision has been reached for one pollutant, this
decision may not be changed as a consequence of a result from any
additional testes made in order to reach a decision for the other
pollutants.
If a pass decision is not reached for all the pollutants and if no fail
decision is reached for any pollutant, a test is carried out on another
engine (see Figure 1).
If no decision is reached, the manufacturer may at any time decide to
stop testing. In that case a fail decision is recorded
28/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Figure 1:
Option 1 COP Test Procedure
8.4 Option 2
8.4.1 Conformity of the engine subjected to a pollutant test
After submission of the engine to the test agencies, the manufacturer
shall not carry out any adjustment to the engines selected
Three engines shall be taken from the series production. With

agreement of test agency, only one engine is subject to testing on the
WHTC and on the WHSC, if applicable, for the checking of the
production conformity. The limit values shall be those set out in clause
The tests shall be carried out according to Appendix 1 of this chapter
29/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
On the basis of a test of the engine, the production of a series is regarded

as conforming where a pass decision is reached for all the pollutants and
nonconforming where a no pass decision is reached for one pollutant,
in accordance with the limit values are given in Table 5.3 of this chapter.
When no pass decision has been reached for one pollutant sample 2 &
3 are subjected to test mentioned in 8.4.1 of this chapter
If no pass decision is reached for all the pollutants and if no fail decision
is reached for one pollutant, a test is carried out on another engine (see
Figure 2).
If no decision is reached, the manufacturer may at any time decide to
stop testing. In that case a fail decision is recorded.
Figure 2 (Option 2)
Schematic of production conformity testing
8.5 Common Requirements for Option 1 & Option 2

8.5.1 The tests shall be carried out on newly manufactured engines.
8.5.1.1 At the request of the manufacturer, the tests may be carried out on
engines which have been run-in, up to a maximum of 125 hours. In this
case, the running-in procedure shall be conducted by the manufacturer
who shall undertake not to make any adjustments to those engines.
30/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
8.5.1.2 When the manufacturer requests to conduct a running-in procedure in

accordance with clause 8.5.1.1. of this chapter, it may be carried out on
either of the following:
(a) All the engines that are tested; or

(b) The first engine tested, with the determination of an evolution
coefficient as follows:
(i) The pollutant emissions shall be measured both on the newly
manufactured engine and before the maximum of 125 hours set
in p clause 8.3.3.1. on the first engine tested;
(ii) The evolution coefficient of the emissions between the two

tests shall be calculated for each pollutant:
𝐸𝑚𝑖𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑠 𝑎𝑡 𝑠𝑒𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑑 𝑡𝑒𝑠𝑡
𝐸𝑚𝑖𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑠 𝑎𝑡 𝑓𝑖𝑟𝑠𝑡 𝑡𝑒𝑠𝑡
The evolution coefficient may have a value less than one.
The subsequent test engines shall not be subjected to the running-in
procedure, but their emissions when newly manufactured shall be
modified by the evolution coefficient.
In this case, the values to be taken shall be the following:
(a) For the first engine, the values from the second test;
(b) For the other engines, the values when newly manufactured
multiplied by the evolution coefficient.
8.5.1.3 For diesel, ethanol (ED95), petrol, E85, LNG20, LNG and LPG fuelled
including dual-fuel engines, all these tests may be conducted with the
applicable market fuels. However, at the manufacturer’s request, the
reference fuels described in chapter4 may be used.
8.5.1.4 For natural gas fuelled engines including dual fuel engines, all these
tests may be conducted with market fuel in the following way:
(a) For H marked engines with a market fuel within the H-range
(0.89 ≤ Sλ ≤ 1.08);
(b) For L marked engines with a market fuel within the L-range
(1.08 ≤ Sλ ≤ 1.19);
(c) For HL marked engines with a market fuel within the extreme range
of the λ-shift factor (0.89 ≤ Sλ ≤ 1.19).
However, at the manufacturer’s request, the reference fuels described
in chapter4 may be used.
8.5.1.5 Non-compliance of Gas and Dual-fuel engines:
In the case of dispute caused by the non-compliance of gas fuelled
engines including dual fuel engines, when using a market fuel, the tests
shall be performed with a reference fuel on which the parent engine has
been tested, and at the request of the manufacturer, with the possible
additional third fuel, as referred to in clauses 4.6.4.1 and 4.7.1.2 of this
Chapter, on which the parent engine may have been tested. When
31/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
applicable, the result shall be converted by a calculation, applying the

relevant factors “r”, “ra” or “rb” as described in clauses 4.6.5., 4.6.6.1.
and 4.7.1.3 of this Chapter. If r, ra or rb are less than 1, no correction
shall take place. The measured results and when applicable, the
calculated results shall demonstrate that the engine meets the limit
values with all relevant fuels (for example fuels 1, 2 and, if applicable,
third fuel in the case of natural gas engines, and fuels A and B in the
case of LPG engines).
8.5.1.6 Tests for conformity of production of a gas fuelled engine laid out for
operation on one specific fuel composition shall be performed on the
fuel for which the engine has been calibrated.
8.6 On-Board Diagnostics (OBD)
8.6.1 When the Test agency determines that the quality of production seems
unsatisfactory, it may request a verification of the conformity of
production of the OBD system. Such verification shall be carried out in
accordance with the following:
An engine shall be randomly taken from series production and subjected
to the tests described in chapter 8B. The tests may be carried out on an
engine that has been run-in up to a maximum of 125 hours.
8.6.2 The production is deemed to conform if this engine meets the
requirements of the tests described in chapter 8B.
8.6.3 If the engine taken from the series production does not satisfy the
requirements of clause 8.6.1., a further random sample of four engines
shall be taken from the series production and subjected to the tests
described in chapter 8B.and in the case of dual fuel engines to the
additional tests required by clause 7 of chapter 14. The tests may be
carried out on engines that have been run-in, up to a maximum of 125
hours
8.6.4 The production is deemed to conform if at least three engines out of the
further random sample of four engines meet the requirements of the
tests described in chapter 8B.
8.7 Electronic control unit (ECU) information required for in-service
testing
8.7.1. The availability of the data stream information requested in clause
9.4.2.1. of this chapter according to the requirements of clause 9.4.2.2
of this chapter. shall be demonstrated by using an external OBD scan-
tool as described in chapter 8B
8.7.2 In the case where this information cannot be retrieved in a proper
manner while the scan-tool is working properly according to chapter
8B, the engine shall be considered as non-compliant.
8.7.3 The conformity of the ECU torque signal with the requirements of
clauses 9.4.2.2. and 9.4.2.3 of this chapter. Shall be demonstrated by
performing the WHSC test according to chapter 3.
8.7.4 In the case where the test equipment does not match the requirements
specified in standard AIS-137 (Part 5) concerning auxiliaries, the
measured torque shall be corrected in accordance to the correction
method set out in chapter3.
8.7.5 The conformity of the ECU torque signal shall be considered sufficient
if the calculated torque remains within the tolerances specified in clause
9.4.2.5 of this chapter.
32/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
8.7.6 The availability and conformity checks of the ECU information

required for In-service testing shall be performed by the manufacturer
on a regular basis on each produced engine-type within each produced
engine-family.
8.7.7 The results of the manufacturer’s survey shall be made available to the
Test agency at its request.
8.7.8 At the request of the Test agency, the manufacturer shall demonstrate
the availability or the conformity of the ECU information in serial
production by performing the appropriate testing referred to in clauses
8.7.1 to 8.7.4 on a sample of engines selected from the same engine
type. The sampling rules including sampling size and statistical pass fail
criteria shall be those specified in clauses 8.1. to 8.3.for checking the
conformity of emissions.
9.0 CONFORMITY OF IN-SERVICE VEHICLES/ENGINES
9.1 This clause sets out the in-service conformity requirements for
vehicles/engines type-approved to this standard
9.2. In-service conformity
9.2.1. Measures to ensure in-service conformity of vehicles or engine systems
type approved under this standard as per the applicable CMVR gazette
notification for which the vehicle is subjected to test. and complying
with the requirements of chapter 7 of this Standard as applicable.
9.2.2. The technical measures taken by the manufacturer shall be such as to
ensure that the tailpipe emissions are effectively limited, throughout the
normal life of the vehicles under normal conditions of use. The
conformity with the provisions of this standard shall be checked over
the normal useful life of an engine system installed in a vehicle under
normal conditions of use as specified in chapter 7 of this standard as
applicable.
9.2.3. The manufacturer shall carry out in-service testing in consultation with
Test agency which granted the original type approval in accordance
with the initial plan submitted at type approval. Any deviation from the
initial plan shall be justified to the satisfaction of the Test agency.
9.2.4. If the Test agency which granted the original type approval is not
satisfied with the test result in accordance with clause 10. of chapter 7,
or has reported evidence of unsatisfactory in service conformity, test
agency may order the manufacturer to run a test for confirmatory
purposes. The Test agency shall examine the confirmatory test report
supplied by the manufacturer.
9.2.5. Where the Test agency which granted the original type approval is not
satisfied with the results of in-service tests or confirmatory tests in
accordance with the criteria set out in chapter 7, it shall require the
manufacturer to submit a plan of remedial measures to remedy the non-
conformity in accordance with clause 9.3. of this chapter and clause 9.
of chapter7 of this part.
9.3. Remedial Measures
33/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
9.3.1. On request of the Test agency and following in-service testing in

accordance with clause 9.2. of this chapter, the manufacturer shall
submit the plan of remedial measures to the test agency no later than 60
working days after receipt of the notification from the Test agency.
Where the manufacturer can demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Test
agency that further time is required to investigate the reason for the non-
compliance in order to submit a plan of remedial measures, an
extension may be granted.
9.3.2. The remedial measures shall apply to all engines in service belonging
to the same engine families or OBD engine families and be extended
also to engine families or OBD engine families which are likely to be
affected with the same defects. The need to amend the type approval
documents shall be assessed by the manufacturer and the result reported
to the Test agency.
9.3.3. The Test agency shall consult the manufacturer in order to secure
agreement on a plan of remedial measures and on executing the plan. If
the Test agency which granted the original type approval establishes
that no agreement can be reached, it shall take the necessary measures,
including, where necessary, the withdrawal of type approval, to ensure
that production vehicles, systems, components or separate technical
units, as the case may be, are brought into conformity with the approved
type. If the type approval is withdrawn, the Test agency shall inform
the Ministry within 20 working days of the withdrawal and of the
reasons therefor.
9.3.4. The Test agency shall within 30 working days from the date on which
it has received the plan of remedial measures from the manufacturer,
approve or reject the plan of remedial measures. The Test agency shall
within the same time also notify the manufacturer of its decision to
approve or reject the plan of remedial measures.
9.3.5. The manufacturer shall be responsible for the execution of the approved
plan of remedial measures.
9.3.6. The manufacturer shall keep a record of every engine system or vehicle
recalled and repaired or modified and of the workshop which performed
the repair. The Test agency shall have access to that record on request
during the execution and for a period of 5 years after the completion of
the execution of the plan.
9.3.7. Any repair or modification referred to in clause 9.3.6. shall be recorded

in a certificate supplied by the manufacturer to the owner of the engine
or vehicle.
9.4 Requirements and Tests for In-Service Testing
9.4.1. Introduction
This clause (clause 9.4.) sets out the specifications and tests of the ECU
data at type approval for the purpose of in-service testing.
34/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
9.4.2. General Requirements

9.4.2.1. For the purpose of in-service testing, the calculated load (engine torque
as a percentage of maximum torque and the maximum torque available
at the current engine speed), the engine speed, the engine coolant
temperature, the instantaneous fuel consumption, and the reference
maximum engine torque as a function of engine speed shall be made
available by the OBD system in real time and at a frequency of at least
1 Hz, as mandatory data stream information.
9.4.2.2. The output torque may be estimated by the ECU using built-in
algorithms to calculate the produced internal torque and the friction
torque.
9.4.2.3. The engine torque in Nm resulting from the above data stream
information shall permit a direct comparison with the values measured
when determining the engine power. In particular, any eventual
corrections as regards auxiliaries shall be included in the above data
stream information.
9.4.2.4. Access to the information required in clause 9.4.2.1. of this chapter shall
be provided in accordance with the requirements set out in chapter 8 and
with the standards referred to in Appendix 6 to chapter 8B.
9.4.2.5. The average load at each operating condition in Nm calculated from the
information requested in clause 9.4.2.1. of this chapter shall not differ
from the average measured load at that operating condition by more
than:
(a) 7 per cent (i.e., ±7%) when determining the engine power according
to AIS-137 (Part 5);
(b) 10 per cent (i.e., ±10%) when performing the World Harmonized
Steady State Cycle (here in after "WHSC") test according to chapter 3,
clause 7.7.
9.4.2.6. External access to the information required in clause 9.4.2.1. Shall not
influence the vehicle emissions or performance.
9.4.3. Verification of the availability and conformity of the ECU

information required for in- service testing
9.4.3.1. The availability of the data stream information required in clause

9.4.2.1., according to the requirements set out in clause 9.4.2.2. of this
chapter, shall be demonstrated by using an external OBD scan-tool as
described in chapter 8B.
9.4.3.2. In the case where this information cannot be retrieved in a proper

manner, using a scan-tool that is working properly, the engine is
considered as noncompliant.
35/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
9.4.3.3. The conformity of the ECU torque signal to the requirements of clauses
9.4.2.2. and 9.4.2.3. of this chapter shall be demonstrated with the parent
engine of an engine family when determining the engine power
according to the procedure laid down in the standard AIS-137 (Part 5)
and when performing the WHSC test according to chapter 3 clause 7.7.
and off-cycle laboratory testing at type approval according to 7. Of
chapter 9 of this part.
9.4.3.3.1 The conformity of the ECU torque signal to the requirements of clause
9.4.2.2 and 9.4.2.3 of this chapter shall be demonstrated for each engine
family member when determining the engine power according to the
procedure laid down in the standard AIS-137 (Part 5) For this purpose
additional measurements shall be performed at several part load and
engine speed operating points (for example at the modes of the WHSC
and some additional random points).
9.4.3.4. In the case where the engine under test does not match the requirements
set out in the standard AIS-137 (Part 5), concerning auxiliaries, the
measured torque shall be corrected in accordance to the correction
method for power as set out in chapter 3, clause 6.3.5.
9.4.3.5. The conformity of the ECU torque signal is considered to be
demonstrated if the torque signal remains within the tolerances set out
in clause 9.4.2.5. of this chapter.
10 Penalties for Non Conformity of Production
10.1 The approval granted in respect of an engine or vehicle type pursuant to
this standard may be withdrawn if the requirements laid down in clause
8.1 are not complied with or if the engine(s)or vehicle (s) taken fail to
the pass test prescribed in clause 8.3.
10.2 If the vehicle/engine fails to meet the requirements of COP, the testing
agency shall send the copies of the test report to the nodal agency and
the manufacturer.
11. Modification and extension of approval of the approved type
11.1. Every modification of the approved type shall be notified to the Test
Agency which approved the type. The Test Agency may then either:
11.1.1. Consider that the modifications made are unlikely to have an
appreciable adverse effect and that in any case the modified type still
complies with the requirement; or
11.1.2. Require a further test report.
11.2. Confirmation or refusal of approval, specifying the alterations, shall be
communicated to the manufacturer by the procedure specified in clause
12. Production definitively discontinued
If the holder of the approval completely ceases to manufacture the type
approved engines or vehicles in accordance with this standard, he shall
so inform the Test Agency which granted the approval. Upon receiving
the relevant communication that Test Agency shall inform thereof
Ministry.
36/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
13. Transitional provisions

13.1. General provisions
13.1.1. As from the official date of entry into force of this standard, no test
agency shall refuse to grant approval under this standard as amended.
13.1.2. As from the date of implementation of BS-VI emission norms, test
agencies shall grant approvals only if the engine meets the requirements
of this standard as amended.
13.2. New type Approvals
13.2.1. Test agencies shall, from the date of entry into force of BS-VI OBD-I
norms specified in MoRTH Gazette notification GSR 889(E) dated
16.09.2016, grant an approval to an engine system or vehicle only if it
complies with:
(a) The requirements of clause 4.1. of this Chapter;
(b) The performance monitoring requirements of clause 2.3.2.2. Of
chapter 8A of this part in case of compression ignition and dual fuel
engines and vehicles.
(c) The NOx OTL monitoring requirements as set out in the Table 1 of
chapter 8A of this part;
(d) The Reagent quality and consumption requirements as set out in
clause 7.1.1.1 of chapter 10 of this part.
13.2.1.1 In accordance with the requirements of clause 6.4.4. of chapter 8A
manufacturers are exempted from providing a statement of OBD in-use
Performance compliance.
13.2.2 Reserved
13.2.3 Test agencies shall, from the date of implementation of BS-VI OBD-II
norms, grant an approval to an engine system or vehicle only if it
complies with:
(a) The requirements of clause 4.1 of this Chapter;
(b) The PM Mass OTL monitoring requirements as set out in the row
"general requirements" of Table 2 of chapter 8A of this part;
(c) The NOx OTL monitoring requirements as set out in Table 2of
(d) The Reagent quality and consumption "general" requirements as set
out in clauses 7.1.1. and 8.4.1. of chapter 10 of this part;
(e) The requirements regarding the plan and implementation of the
monitoring techniques according to clauses 2.3.1.2. and 2.3.1.2.1 of
(f) The requirements of clause 6.4.1. of chapter 8A for providing a
statement of OBD in-use Performance compliance.
37/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
CHAPTER 1 - APPENDIX 1
PROCEDURE FOR PRODUCTION CONFORMITY TESTING
1. This Appendix describes the procedure to be used to verify production

conformity for the emissions of pollutants.
2. With a minimum sample size of three engines the sampling procedure is set
so that the probability of a lot passing a test with 40 % of the engines
defective is 0,95 (producer's risk = 5 %) while the probability of a lot being
accepted with 65 % of the engines defective is 0,10 (consumer's risk = 10
%).
3. The values of the pollutants given in clause 5.3 of this chapter, after having
applied the relevant DF, are considered to be log normally distributed and
should be transformed by taking their natural logarithms. Let m0 and m
denote the minimum and maximum sample size respectively (m0 = 3 and m
= 32) and let n denote the current sample number.
4. If the natural logarithms of the measured values (after having applied the
relevant DF) in the series are x1, x2, … xi and L is the natural logarithm of
the limit value for the pollutant, then,
define:
di = xi – L and,
5. Table 3 shows values of the pass (An) and fail (Bn) decision numbers
against current sample number. The test statistic result is the ratio: dn / Vn
and shall be used to determine whether the series has passed or failed as
follows:
6. Remarks:
The following recursive formulae are useful for calculating successive values of
the test statistic:
38/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Table 1
39/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
CHAPTER 1-APPENDIX 2
SUMMARY OF APPROVAL PROCESS FOR ENGINES FUELLED WITH
NATURAL GAS, ENGINES FUELLED WITH LPG AND DUAL FUEL
ENGINES FUELLED WITH NATURAL GAS /BIOMETHANE OR LPG
Approval for LPG fulled engines
Approval for Natural Gas Fuelled Engines
40/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
APPROVAL FOR DUEL FUELLED WITH NATURAL GAS

/BIOMEHNE OR LPG
Duel fuel Diesel Dual fuel mode
type (1) mode
CNG LNG LNG20 LPG
1A Universal or Universal Fuel specific Universal or
Restricted (2 tests) (1test) Restricted
(2 test) (2 test)
1B Universal Universal or Universal Fuel specific Universal or
(1 test) Restricted (2 tests) (1test) Restricted
(2 test) (2 test)
2A Universal or Universal Fuel specific Universal or
Restricted (2 tests) (1test) Restricted
(2 test) (2 test)
(1 test)l Restricted (2 tests) (1test) Restricted
(2 test) (2 test)
(1 test) Restricted (2 tests) (1test) Restricted
(2 test) (2 test)
(1) According to the definitions of Chapter 14 of this part
41/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
CHAPTER 2
ESSENTIAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE VEHICLE AND ENGINE AND

INFORMATION CONCERNING THE CONDUCT OF TESTS
1. Information to be provided as per AIS 007 as amended time to time.
42/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
CHAPTER 3
TYPE I TEST
TEST PROCEDURE
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 This Chapter describes the methods of determining gaseous emissions,
particulate emissions from the engines to be tested. Two test cycles are
described that shall be applied:
World-wide Harmonized Steady State Cycle (WHSC)
World-wide Harmonized Transient Cycle (WHTC) (Cold and Hot)
1.2 The test shall be carried out with the engine mounted on a test bench and
connected to a dynamometer.
1.3 This chapter is based on the world-wide harmonized heavy duty
certification (WHDC) procedure given in Global Technical Regulation
(4)
2 RESERVED
3 Definitions, Symbols &Abbreviations
3.1 Definitions
3.1.1 "Declared maximum power (𝑷𝒎𝒂𝒙 )" means the maximum power in
kW (net power) as declared by the manufacturer in his application for
approval.
3.1.2 "Delay time" means the difference in time between the change of the
component to be measured at the reference point and a system response
of 10 per cent of the final reading (𝑡 ) with the sampling probe being
defined as the reference point. For the gaseous components, this is the
transport time of the measured component from the sampling probe to
the detector.
3.1.3 "Drift" means the difference between the zero or span responses of the
measurement instrument after and before an emissions test.
3.1.4 "Full flow dilution method" means the process of mixing the total
exhaust flow with diluent prior to separating a fraction of the diluted
exhaust stream for analysis.
3.1.5 "High speed (𝒏𝒉𝒊 )" means the highest engine speed where 70 per cent
of the declared maximum power occurs.
3.1.6 "Low speed (𝒏𝒍𝒐 )" means the lowest engine speed where 55 per cent of
the declared maximum power occurs.
3.1.7 "Maximum power (𝑷𝒎𝒂𝒙 )" means the maximum power in kW as
specified by the manufacturer.
3.1.8 "Maximum torque speed" means the engine speed at which the
maximum torque is obtained from the engine, as specified by the
manufacturer.
43/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
3.1.9 "Normalized torque" means engine torque in per cent normalized to

the maximum available torque at an engine speed.
3.1.10 "Operator demand" means an engine operator's input to control engine
output. The operator may be a person (i.e., manual), or a governor
(i.e., automatic) that mechanically or electronically signals an input that
demands engine output. Input may be from an accelerator pedal or
signal, a throttle-control lever or signal, a fuel lever or signal, a speed
lever or signal, or a governor set point or signal.
3.1.11 "Partial flow dilution method" means the process of separating a part
from the total exhaust flow, then mixing it with an appropriate amount
of diluent prior to the particulate sampling filter.
3.1.12 "Ramped steady state test cycle" means a test cycle with a sequence
of steady state engine test modes with defined speed and torque criteria
at each mode and defined ramps between these modes (WHSC).
3.1.13 "Rated speed" means the maximum full load speed allowed by the
governor as specified by the manufacturer in his sales and service
literature, or, if such a governor is not present, the speed at which the
maximum power is obtained from the engine, as specified by the
manufacturer in his sales and service literature.
3.1.14 "Response time" means the difference in time between the change of
the component to be measured at the reference point and a system
response of 90 per cent of the final reading (𝑡 ) with the sampling probe
being defined as the reference point, whereby the change of the
measured component is at least 60 per cent full scale (FS) and takes
place in less than 0.1 second. The system response time consists of the
delay time to the system and of the rise time of the system.
3.1.15 "Rise time" means the difference in time between the 10 per cent and
90 per cent response of the final reading (𝑡 − 𝑡 ).
3.1.16 "Span response" means the mean response to a span gas during a 30 s
time interval.
3.1.17 "Specific emissions" means the mass emissions expressed in g/kWh.
3.1.18 "Test cycle" means a sequence of test points each with a defined speed
and torque to be followed by the engine under steady state (WHSC) or
transient operating conditions (WHTC).
3.1.19 "Transformation time" means the difference in time between the
change of the component to be measured at the reference point and a
system response of 50 per cent of the final reading (𝑡 ) with the
sampling probe being defined as the reference point. The transformation
time is used for the signal alignment of different measurement
instruments.
3.1.20 "Transient test cycle" means a test cycle with a sequence of normalized
speed and torque values that vary relatively quickly with time (WHTC).
3.1.21 "Zero response" means the mean response to a zero gas during a 30 s
time interval.
44/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Figure 1
Definition of System Response
3.2 General Symbols

Symbol Unit Term
𝑎 - Slope of the regression
𝑎 - y intercept of the regression
𝐴 ⁄𝐹 - Stoichiometric air to fuel ratio
𝑐 ppm/Vol per cent Concentration
𝑐 ppm/Vol per cent Concentration on dry basis
𝑐 ppm/Vol per cent Concentration on wet basis
𝑐 ppm/Vol per cent Background concentration
𝐶 - Discharge coefficient of SSV
𝑐 ppm/Vol per cent Concentration on the gaseous
components
𝑐̅ ppm/Vol per cent Average concentration of particles
from the diluted exhaust gas
corrected to standard conditions
(273.2 K and 101.33 kPa) particles
per cubic centimeter
𝑐 , Particles per A discrete measurement of particle
cubic centimeter concentration in the diluted gas
exhaust from the particle counter,
corrected for coincidence and to
standard conditions (273.2 K and
101.33 kPa)
𝑑 M Diameter
𝑑 Particle electrical mobility diameter
(30, 50 or 100 nm)
𝑑 M Throat diameter of venturi
𝐷 m3/s PDP calibration intercept
𝐷 - Dilution factor
45/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
∆𝑡 S Time interval
𝑒 The number of particles emitted per
kWh
𝑒 g/kWh Specific emission of gaseous
components
𝑒 g/kWh Specific emission of particulates
𝑒 g/kWh Specific emission during
regeneration
𝑒 g/kWh Weighted specific emission
𝐸 Per cent 𝐶𝑂 quench of NO x analyzer
𝐸 Per cent Ethane efficiency
𝐸 Per cent Water quench of 𝑁𝑂 analyzer
𝐸 percent Methane efficiency
𝐸 Per cent Efficiency of NO x converter
𝑓 Hz Data sampling rate
𝑓 - Laboratory atmospheric factor
𝐹 - Stoichiometric factor
𝑓̅ - Mean particle concentration
reduction factor of the volatile
particle remover specific to the
dilution settings used for the test
𝐻 g/kg Absolute humidity of the intake air
𝐻 g/kg Absolute humidity of the diluent
𝑖 - Subscript denoting an instantaneous
measurement (e.g. 1 Hz)
𝑘 - Calibration factor to correct the
particle number counter
measurements to the level of the
reference instrument where this is
not applied internally within the
particle number counter. Where the
calibration factor is applied
internally within the particle number
counter, a value of 1 shall be used
for k in the above equation
𝑘 - Carbon specific factor
𝑘, m3/kg fuel Combustion additional volume of
dry exhaust
𝑘 , m3/kg fuel Combustion additional volume of
wet exhaust
𝑘 , -
Humidity correction factor for NO x

for CI engines
46/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
𝑘 , - Humidity correction factor for NO x

for PI engines
𝑘 The regeneration adjustment,
according to clause 6.6.2 of this
chapter, or in the case of engines
without periodically regenerating
after- treatment k r = 1
𝑘 , - Downward regeneration adjustment
factor
𝑘 , - Upward regeneration adjustment
factor
𝑘 , - Dry to wet correction factor for the
intake air
diluent
diluted exhaust gas
raw exhaust gas
𝐾 - CFV calibration function
𝜆 - Excess air ratio
𝑚 mg Particulate sample mass of the
diluent collected
𝑚 kg Mass of the diluent sample passed
through the particulate sampling
filters
𝑚 kg Total diluted exhaust mass over the
cycle
𝑚 kg Mass of equivalent diluted exhaust
gas over the test cycle
𝑚 kg Total exhaust mass over the cycle
𝑚 kg Total mass of diluted exhaust gas
extracted from the dilution tunnel for
particle number sampling
𝑚 mg Particulate sampling filter mass
𝑚 G Mass of gaseous emissions over the
test cycle
𝑚 mg Particulate sample mass collected
𝑚 G Mass of particulate emissions over
the test cycle
𝑚 , g/test Mass of particulates corrected for
extraction of particle number sample
flow
𝑚 kg Exhaust sample mass over the test
cycle
47/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
𝑚 kg Mass of diluted exhaust gas passing

the dilution tunnel
𝑚 kg Mass of diluted exhaust gas passing
the particulate collection filters
𝑚 kg Mass of secondary diluent
𝑀 Nm Torque
𝑀 g/mol Molar mass of the intake air
𝑀 g/mol Molar mass of the diluent
𝑀 g/mol Molar mass of the exhaust
𝑀 Nm Torque absorbed by
auxiliaries/equipment to be fitted
𝑀 g/mol Molar mass of gaseous components
𝑀 Nm Torque absorbed by
auxiliaries/equipment to be removed
𝑁 - Number of particles emitted over the
test cycle
𝑛 - Number of measurements
𝑛 - Number of measurements with
regeneration
𝑛 min-1 Engine rotational speed
𝑛 min-1 High engine speed
𝑛 min-1 Low engine speed
𝑛 min-1 Preferred engine speed
𝑛 r/s PDP pump speed
𝑁 - The total number of particles emitted
over the WHTC cold test cycle
𝑁 - The total number of particles emitted
over the WHTC hot test cycle
𝑁 - Upstream particle number
concentration
𝑁 - Downstream particle number
concentration
𝑝 kPa Saturation vapour pressure of engine
intake air
𝑝 kPa Total atmospheric pressure
𝑝 kPa Saturation vapour pressure of the
diluent
𝑝 kPa Absolute pressure
𝑝 kPa Water vapour pressure after cooling
bath
𝑝 kPa Dry atmospheric pressure
𝑃 kW Power
𝑃 kW Power absorbed by
48/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
𝑃 kW Power absorbed by
𝑞 kg/s Particle number sample mass flow
rate
𝑞 Intake air mass flow rate on dry
basis
𝑞 kg/s Intake air mass flow rate on wet
basis
𝑞 kg/s Carbon mass flow rate in the raw
exhaust gas
𝑞 kg/s Carbon mass flow rate into the
engine
𝑞 kg/s Carbon mass flow rate in the partial
flow dilution system
𝑞 kg/s Diluted exhaust gas mass flow rate
on wet basis
𝑞 kg/s Diluent mass flow rate on wet basis
𝑞 kg/s Equivalent diluted exhaust gas mass
flow rate on wet basis
𝑞 kg/s Exhaust gas mass flow rate on wet
basis
𝑞 kg/s Sample mass flow rate extracted
from dilution tunnel
𝑞 kg/s Fuel mass flow rate
𝑞 kg/s Sample flow of exhaust gas into
partial flow dilution system
𝑞 kg/s Mass flow rate fed back into dilution
tunnel to compensate for particle
number sample extraction
𝑞 m3/s CVS volume rate
𝑞 dm3/min System flow rate of exhaust analyzer
system
𝑞 cm3/min Tracer gas flow rate
𝑟 - Coefficient of determination
𝑟 - Dilution ratio
𝑟 - Diameter ratio of SSV
𝑟 - Hydrocarbon response factor of the
FID
𝑟 - Methanol response factor of the FID
𝑟 - Pressure ratio of SSV
𝑟 - Average sample ratio
𝑠 Standard deviation
𝜌 kg/m3 Density
49/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
𝜌 kg/m3 Exhaust gas density

𝜎 - Standard deviation
𝑇 K Absolute temperature
𝑇 K Absolute temperature of the intake
air
𝑡 S Time
𝑡 S Time between step input and 10 per
cent of final reading
𝑢 - Ratio between the densities (or
molar masses) of the gas
components and the exhaust gas
divided by 1,000
𝑉 m3/r PDP gas volume pumped per
revolution
𝑉 dm3 System volume of exhaust analyzer
bench
𝑊 kWh Actual cycle work of the test cycle
𝑊 , kWh The actual cycle work over the
WHTC cold test cycle according to
clause 7.8.6. of this chapter.
𝑊 , kWh The actual cycle work over the
WHTC hot test cycle according to
clause 7.8.6. of this chapter
𝑊 kWh Reference cycle work of the test
cycle
𝑋 m3/r PDP calibration function
3.3 Symbols and Abbreviations for The Fuel Composition
𝒘𝑨𝑳𝑭 Hydrogen content of fuel, per cent mass
𝒘𝑩𝑬𝑻 Carbon content of fuel, per cent mass
𝒘𝑮𝑨𝑴 Sulphur content of fuel, per cent mass
𝒘𝑫𝑬𝑳 Nitrogen content of fuel, per cent mass
𝒘𝑬𝑷𝑺 Oxygen content of fuel, per cent mass
α Molar hydrogen ratio (H/C)
γ Molar Sulphur ratio (S/C)
50/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
δ Molar nitrogen ratio (N/C)
ε Molar oxygen ratio (O/C)
referring to a fuel 𝐶𝐻 𝑂 𝑁 𝑆
3.4 Symbols and abbreviations for the chemical components
C1 Carbon 1 equivalent hydrocarbon

CH4 Methane
C 2 H6 Ethane
C 3 H8 Propane
CO Carbon monoxide
CO2 Carbon dioxide
DOP Di-octylphtalate
HC Hydrocarbons
H2 O Water
NMHC Non-methane hydrocarbons
NOx Oxides of nitrogen
NO Nitric oxide
NO2 Nitrogen dioxide
PM Particulate matter
Abbreviations
CFV Critical flow venturi
CLD Chemiluminescent detector
CVS Constant volume sampling
deNOx NO x after-treatment system
EGR Exhaust gas recirculation
ET Evaporation tube
FID Flame ionization detector
FTIR Fourier transform infrared analyser
GC Gas chromatograph
HCLD Heated chemiluminescent detector
HFID Heated flame ionization detector
51/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
LDS Laser diode spectrometer

LPG Liquefied petroleum gas
NDIR Non-dispersive infrared (analyzer)
NG Natural gas
NMC Non-methane cutter
OT Outlet tube
PDP Positive displacement pump
Per cent FS Per cent of full scale
PCF Particle pre-classifier
PFS Partial flow system
PNC Particle number counter
PND Particle number diluter
PTS Particle transfer system
PTT Particle transfer tube
SSV Subsonic venturi
VGT Variable geometry turbine
VPR Volatile particle remover
WHSC World Harmonised Steady State Cycle
WHTC World Harmonised Transient Cycle
4.0 GENREAL REQUIRMENTS
4.1
The engine system shall be so designed, constructed and assembled as
to enable the engine in normal use to comply with the provisions of this
chapter during its useful life, as defined in this Standard, including when
installed in the vehicle.
5.0 PERFORMANCE REQUIRMENT
5.1 The emissions of gaseous and particulate pollutants by the engine shall
be determined on the WHTC and WHSC test cycles, as described in
clause 7. Of this chapter. The measurement systems shall meet the
linearity requirements in clause 9.2 and the specifications in clause 9.3
(gaseous emissions measurement), clause 9.4 (particulate measurement)
and in Appendix 2 to this chapter.
Other systems or analyzers may be approved by the test agency, if it is
found that they yield equivalent results in accordance with clause 5.1.1.
of this chapter.
52/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
5.1.1 Equivalency
The determination of system equivalency shall be based on a seven-

sample pair (or larger) correlation study between the system under
consideration and one of the systems of this chapter. "Results" refer to
the specific cycle weighted emissions value. The correlation testing is
to be performed at the same laboratory, test cell, and on the same engine,
and is preferred to be run concurrently. The equivalency of the sample
pair averages shall be determined by F-test and t-test statistics as
described in Appendix 3, clause A.3.3, obtained under the laboratory
test cell and the engine conditions described above. Outliers shall be
determined in accordance with ISO 5725 and excluded from the
database. The systems to be used for correlation testing shall be subject
to the approval by the test agency.
5.2 Engine Family
5.2.1 General:
An engine family is characterized by design parameters. These shall be
common to all engines within the family. The engine manufacturer may
decide which engines belong to an engine family, as long as the
membership criteria listed in clause 5.2.3 are respected. The engine
family shall be approved by the test agency. The manufacturer shall
provide to the test agency the appropriate information relating to the
emission levels of the members of the engine family.
5.2.2 SPECIAL CASES
In some cases, there may be interaction between parameters. This shall
be taken into consideration to ensure that only engines with similar
exhaust emission characteristics are included within the same engine
family. These cases shall be identified by the manufacturer and notified
to the test agency. It shall then be taken into account as a criterion for
creating a new engine family.
In case of devices or features, which are not listed in clause 5.2.3 and
which have a strong influence on the level of emissions, this equipment
shall be identified by the manufacturer on the basis of good engineering
practice, and shall be notified to the test agency. It shall then be taken
into account as a criterion for creating a new engine family.
In addition to the parameters listed in clause 5.2.3 of this chapter, the
manufacturer may introduce additional criteria allowing the definition
of families of more restricted size. These parameters are not necessarily
parameters that have an influence on the level of emissions
53/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
5.2.3 Parameters Defining the Engine Family
5.2.3.1 Combustion cycle
a) 2-stroke cycle;
b) 4-stroke cycle;
c) Rotary engine;
d) Others.
Configuration of the cylinders
5.2.3.2
5.2.3.2.1 Position of the cylinders in the block
a) V;
b) In line;
c) Radial;
d) Others (F, W, etc.).
5.2.3.2.2 Relative position of the cylinders
Engines with the same block may belong to the same family as long as
their bore center-to-center dimensions are the same
5.2.3.3 Main cooling medium:
a) Air;
b) Water;
c) Oil.
5.2.3.4
Individual cylinder displacement
5.2.3.4.1 Engine with a unit cylinder displacement ≥ 0.75 dm3
In order for engines with a unit cylinder displacement of ≥ 0.75 dm 3 to

be considered to belong to the same engine family, the spread of their
individual cylinder displacements shall not exceed 15 per cent of the
largest individual cylinder displacement within the family.
5.2.3.4.2 Engine with a unit cylinder displacement < 0.75 dm3
In order for engines with a unit cylinder displacement of < 0.75 dm3 to
be considered to belong to the same engine family, the spread of their
individual cylinder displacements shall not exceed 30 per cent of the
largest individual cylinder displacement within the family.
54/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
5.2.3.4.3 Engine with other unit cylinder displacement limits
Engines with an individual cylinder displacement that exceeds the limits

defined in clauses 5.2.3.4.1 and 5.2.3.4.2 may be considered to belong
to the same family with the approval of the test agency. The approval
shall be based on technical elements (calculations, simulations,
experimental results etc.) showing that exceeding the limits does not
have a significant influence on the exhaust emissions.
5.2.3.5 Method of air aspiration
a) Naturally aspirated;
b) Pressure charged;
c) Pressure charged with charge cooler.
5.2.3.6 Fuel type
a) Diesel;
b) Natural gas (NG);
c) Liquefied petroleum gas (LPG);
d) Ethanol.
5.2.3.7
Combustion chamber type
a) Open chamber;
b) Divided chamber;
c)Other types
5.2.3.8 Ignition Type
a) Positive ignition;
b) Compression ignition.
5.2.3.9 Valves and porting
Configuration;
Number of valves per cylinder.
5.2.3.10 Fuel supply type
a) Liquid fuel supply type:
i)Pump and (high pressure) line and injector;
ii)In-line or distributor pump;
iii)Unit pump or unit injector;
iv)Common rail;
55/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
v)Carburetor(s);
vi)others
b) Gas fuel supply type

i)Gaseous;
ii)Liquid;
iii)Mixing units;
iv)Others
c)other types
5.2.3.11
Miscellaneous devices
a) Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR);
b) Water injection;
c) Air injection;
d) Others.
5.2.3.12 Electronic control strategy
The presence or absence of an electronic control unit (ECU) on the

engine is regarded as a basic parameter of the family.
In the case of electronically controlled engines, the manufacturer shall
present the technical elements explaining the grouping of these engines
in the same family, i.e. the reasons why these engines can be expected
to satisfy the same emission requirements.
These elements can be calculations, simulations, estimations,
description of injection parameters, experimental results, etc.
Examples of controlled features are
a) Timing;
b) Injection pressure;
c) Multiple injections;
d) Boost pressure;
e) VGT
f) EGR
5.2.3.13 Exhaust After-Treatment Systems
The function and combination of the following devices are regarded as
membership criteria for an engine family:
a) Oxidation catalyst;
56/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
b) Three-way catalyst;
c) de NOx system with selective reduction of NOx (addition of reducing
agent);
d) Other de NOx systems;
e) Particulate trap with passive regeneration;
f) Particulate trap with active regeneration;
g) Other particulate traps;
h) Other devices.
When an engine has been certified without an after-treatment system,
whether as parent engine or as member of the family, then this engine,
when equipped with an oxidation catalyst, may be included in the same
engine family, if it does not require different fuel characteristics.
If it requires specific fuel characteristics (e.g. particulate traps
requiring special additives in the fuel to ensure the regeneration
process), the decision to include it in the same family shall be based on
technical elements provided by the manufacturer. These elements shall
indicate that the expected emission level of the equipped engine
complies with the same limit value as the non-equipped engine.
When an engine has been certified with an after-treatment system,
whether as parent engine or as member of a family, whose parent engine
is equipped with the same after-treatment system, then this engine, when
equipped without after-treatment system, shall not be added to the same
engine family
5.2.4 Choice of the Parent Engine
5.2.4.1 Compression ignition engines
Once the engine family has been agreed by the test agency, the parent
engine of the family shall be selected using the primary criterion of the
highest fuel delivery per stroke at the declared maximum torque speed.
In the event that two or more engines share this primary criterion, the
parent engine shall be selected using the secondary criterion of highest
fuel delivery per stroke at rated speed.
5.2.4.2 Positive ignition engines
Once the engine family has been agreed by the test agency, the parent
engine of the family shall be selected using the primary criterion of the
largest displacement. In the event that two or more engines share this
primary criterion, the parent engine shall be selected using the
secondary criterion in the following order of priority:
a) The highest fuel delivery per stroke at the speed of declared rated
power;
b) The most advanced spark timing;
c) The lowest EGR rate.
57/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
5.2.4.3 Remarks on the choice of the Parent Engine

The test agency may conclude that the worst-case emission of the family
can best be characterized by testing additional engines. In this case, the
engine manufacturer shall submit the appropriate information to
determine the engines within the family likely to have the highest
emissions level.
If engines within the family incorporate other features which may be
considered to affect exhaust emissions, these features shall also be
identified and taken into account in the selection of the parent engine.
If engines within the family meet the same emission values over
different useful life periods, this shall be taken into account in the
selection of the parent engine
6.0 TEST CONDITIONS
6.1 Laboratory Test Conditions
The absolute temperature (𝑇 ) of the engine intake air expressed in

Kelvin, and the dry atmospheric pressure (𝑝 ), expressed in kPa shall
be measured and the parameter 𝑓 shall be determined according to the
following provisions. In multi-cylinder engines having distinct groups
of intake manifolds, such as in a "Vee" engine configuration, the
average temperature of the distinct groups shall be taken. The parameter
𝑓 shall be reported with the test results. For better repeatability and
reproducibility of the test results, it is recommended that the parameter
𝑓 be such that: 0.93 ≤ 𝑓 ≤ 1.07.
a) Compression-ignition engines:
Naturally aspirated and mechanically supercharged engines:
.
99 𝑇
𝑓 = × (1)
𝑝 298
Turbocharged engines with or without cooling of the intake
air:
. .
𝑓 = × (2)
b) Positive ignition engines

. .
𝑓 = × (3)
6.2 Engines with charge air-cooling

The charge air temperature shall be recorded and shall be, at the rated
speed and full load, within ± 5 K of the maximum charge air temperature
specified by the manufacturer. The temperature of the cooling medium
shall be at least 293 K (20 °C).
If a test laboratory system or external blower is used, the coolant flow
rate shall be set to achieve a charge air temperature within ± 5 K of the
maximum charge air temperature specified by the manufacturer at the
58/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
rated speed and full load. Coolant temperature and coolant flow rate of
the charge air cooler at the above set point shall not be changed for the
whole test cycle, unless this results in unrepresentative overcooling of
the charge air. The charge air cooler volume shall be based upon good
engineering practice and shall be representative of the production
engine's in-use installation. The laboratory system shall be designed to
minimize accumulation of condensate. Any accumulated condensate
shall be drained and all drains shall be completely closed before
emission testing.
If the engine manufacturer specifies pressure-drop limits across the
charge-air cooling system, it shall be ensured that the pressure drop
across the charge-air cooling system at engine conditions specified by
the manufacturer is within the manufacturer's specified limit(s). The
pressure drop shall be measured at the manufacturer's specified
locations.
6.3 Engine Power
The basis of specific emissions measurement is engine power and cycle
work as determined in accordance with clauses 6.3.1 to 6.3.5. of this
chapter.
6.3.1 General engine installation
The engine shall be tested with the auxiliaries/equipment listed in
Appendix 6 to this chapter.
If auxiliaries/equipment are not installed as required, their power shall
be taken into account in accordance with clauses6.3.2 to 6.3.5. of this
chapter.
6.3.2 Auxiliaries/Equipment to Be Fitted for the Emissions Test
If it is inappropriate to install the auxiliaries/equipment required
according to Appendix 6 to this chapter on the test bench, the power
absorbed by them shall be determined and subtracted from the measured
engine power (reference and actual) over the whole engine speed range
of the WHTC and over the test speeds of the WHSC.
6.3.3 Auxiliaries/Equipment to Be Removed for the Test
Where the auxiliaries/equipment not required according to Appendix 6
to this chapter cannot be removed, the power absorbed by them may be
determined and added to the measured engine power (reference and
actual) over the whole engine speed range of the WHTC and over the
test speeds of the WHSC. If this value is greater than 3 per cent of the
maximum power at the test speed it shall be demonstrated to the test
agency.
6.3.4 Determination of Auxiliary Power
The power absorbed by the auxiliaries/equipment needs only be

determined, if:
59/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
a) Auxiliaries/equipment required according to Appendix 6 to this

chapter, are not fitted to the engine; and/or
b) Auxiliaries/equipment not required according to Appendix 6 to
this chapter, are fitted to the engine.
The values of auxiliary power and the measurement/calculation method
for determining auxiliary power shall be submitted by the engine
manufacturer for the whole operating area of the test cycles, and
approved by the test agency.
6.3.5
Engine Cycle Work
The calculation of reference and actual cycle work (see clauses 7.4.8
and 7.8.6) shall be based upon engine power according to clause 6.3.1
In this case, P_fand P_r of equation 4 are zero, and P equals P_m .
If auxiliaries/equipment are installed according to clauses 6.3.2 and/or
6.3.3
P_i=P_(m,i)-P_(f,i)+P_(r,i) 4)
Where:
P_(m,i)is the measured engine power, kW
P_(f,i)is the power absorbed by auxiliaries/equipment to be fitted, kW
P_(r,i)is the power absorbed by auxiliaries/equipment to be removed,
kW.
6.4 Engine air Intake System
An engine air intake system or a test laboratory system shall be used

presenting an air intake restriction within ± 300 Pa of the maximum
value specified by the manufacturer for a clean air cleaner at the rated
speed and full load. The static differential pressure of the restriction
shall be measured at the location specified by the manufacturer.
6.5 Engine Exhaust System
An engine exhaust system or a test laboratory system shall be used

presenting an exhaust backpressure within 80 to 100 per cent of the
maximum value specified by the manufacturer at the rated speed and
full load. If the maximum restriction is 5 kPa or less, the set point shall
be no less than 1.0 kPa from the maximum. The exhaust system shall
conform to the requirements for exhaust gas sampling, as set out in
clauses 9.3.10 and 9.3.11.
6.6 Engine with exhaust after-treatment system
If the engine is equipped with an exhaust after-treatment system, the
exhaust pipe shall have the same diameter as found in-use, or as
specified by the manufacturer, for at least four pipe diameters upstream
of the expansion section containing the after-treatment device. The
distance from the exhaust manifold flange or turbocharger outlet to the
exhaust after-treatment system shall be the same as in the vehicle
configuration or within the distance specifications of the manufacturer.
The exhaust backpressure or restriction shall follow the same criteria as
above, and may be set with a valve. For variable-restriction after-
treatment devices, the maximum exhaust restriction is defined at the
60/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
after-treatment condition (degreening/ageing and regeneration/loading

level) specified by the manufacturer. If the maximum restriction is 5 kPa
or less, the set point shall be no less than 1.0 kPa from the maximum.
The after-treatment container may be removed during dummy tests and
during engine mapping, and replaced with an equivalent container
having an inactive catalyst support.
The emissions measured on the test cycle shall be representative of the
emissions in the field. In the case of an engine equipped with an exhaust
after-treatment system that requires the consumption of a reagent, the
reagent used for all tests shall be declared by the manufacturer.
Engines equipped with exhaust after-treatment systems with continuous
regeneration do not require a special test procedure, but the regeneration
process needs to be demonstrated according to clause 6.6.1. of this
chapter.
For engines equipped with exhaust after-treatment systems that are
regenerated on a periodic basis, as described in clauses 6.6.2 of this
chapter, emission results shall be adjusted to account for regeneration
events. In this case, the average emission depends on the frequency of
the regeneration event in terms of fraction of tests during which the
regeneration occurs.
6.6.1 Continuous Regeneration

The emissions shall be measured on an after-treatment system that has
been stabilized so as to result in repeatable emissions behavior. The
regeneration process shall occur at least once during the WHTC hot start
test and the manufacturer shall declare the normal conditions under
which regeneration occurs (soot load, temperature, exhaust back-
pressure, etc.).
In order to demonstrate that the regeneration process is continuous, at
least three WHTC hot start tests shall be conducted. For the purpose of
this demonstration, the engine shall be warmed up in accordance with
clause 7.4.1, the engine be soaked according to clause 7.6.3 and the first
WHTC hot start test be run. The subsequent hot start tests shall be started
after soaking according to clause 7.6.3. During the tests, exhaust
temperatures and pressures shall be recorded (temperature before and
after the after-treatment system, exhaust back pressure, etc.).
If the conditions declared by the manufacturer occur during the tests and
the results of the three (or more) WHTC hot start tests do not scatter by
more than ± 25 per cent or 0.005 g/kWh, whichever is greater, the after-
treatment system is considered to be of the continuous regeneration type,
and the general test provisions of clause 7.6 (WHTC) and clause 7.7
(WHSC) apply.
If the exhaust after-treatment system has a security mode that shifts to a
periodic regeneration mode, it shall be checked according to clause
6.6.2. For that specific case, the applicable emission limits may be
exceeded and would not be weighted.
61/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
6.6.2 Periodic Regeneration

For an exhaust after-treatment based on a periodic regeneration process,
the emissions shall be measured on at least three WHTC hot start tests,
one with and two without a regeneration event on a stabilized after-
treatment system, and the results be weighted in accordance with
equation 5.
The regeneration process shall occur at least once during the WHTC hot
start test. The engine may be equipped with a switch capable of
preventing or permitting the regeneration process provided this
operation has no effect on the original engine calibration.
The manufacturer shall declare the normal parameter conditions under
which the regeneration process occurs (soot load, temperature, exhaust
back-pressure, etc.) and its duration. The manufacturer shall also
provide the frequency of the regeneration event in terms of number of
tests during which the regeneration occurs compared to number of tests
without regeneration. The exact procedure to determine this frequency
shall be based upon in-use data using good engineering judgment, and
shall be agreed by the test agency. The manufacturer shall provide an
after-treatment system that has been loaded in order to achieve
regeneration during a WHTC test. For the purpose of this testing, the
engine shall be warmed up in accordance with clause 7.4.1, the engine
be soaked according to clause 7.6.3 and the WHTC hot start test be
started. Regeneration shall not occur during the engine warm-up.
Average specific emissions between regeneration phases shall be
determined from the arithmetic mean of several approximately
equidistant WHTC hot start test results (g/kWh). As a minimum, at least
one WHTC hot start test as close as possible prior to a regeneration test
and one WHTC hot start test immediately after a regeneration test shall
be conducted. As an alternative, the manufacturer may provide data to
show that the emissions remain constant (± 25 per cent or 0.005 g/kWh,
whichever is greater) between regeneration phases. In this case, the
emissions of only one WHTC hot start test may be used.
During the regeneration test, all the data needed to detect regeneration
shall be recorded (CO or NOx emissions, temperature before and after
the after-treatment system, exhaust back pressure, etc.).
During the regeneration test, the applicable emission limits may be
exceeded.
The test procedure is schematically shown in Figure 2.
62/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Figure 2
Scheme of periodic regeneration
The WHTC hot start emissions shall be weighted as follows:
𝑛 × 𝑒̅ + 𝑛 × 𝑒
𝑒 = (5)
𝑛+𝑛
Where:
𝑛 The number of WHTC hot start tests without
regeneration
𝑛 The number of WHTC hot start tests with regeneration
(minimum one test)
𝑒̅ is the average specific emission without regeneration,
g/kWh
𝑒̅ is the average specific emission with regeneration, g/kWh
For the determination of 𝑒̅ , the following provisions apply:

a) If regeneration takes more than one hot start WHTC, consecutive full
hot start WHTC tests shall be conducted and emissions continued to
be measured without soaking and without shutting the engine off,
until regeneration is completed, and the average of the hot start
WHTC tests be calculated;
b) If regeneration is completed during any hot start WHTC, the test
shall be continued over its entire length.
In agreement with the test agency, the regeneration adjustment factors
may be applied either multiplicative (c) or additive (d) based upon good
engineering analysis.
c) The multiplicative adjustment factors shall be calculated as follows:
𝑒
𝑘 , = (𝑢𝑝𝑤𝑎𝑟𝑑) (6)
𝑒
63/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
𝑒
𝑘 , = (𝑑𝑜𝑤𝑛𝑤𝑎𝑟𝑑) (6𝑎)
𝑒
d) The additive adjustment factors shall be calculated as follows:
𝑘 , = 𝑒 − 𝑒 (𝑢𝑝𝑤𝑎𝑟𝑑) (7)
𝑘 , = 𝑒 − 𝑒 (𝑑𝑜𝑤𝑛𝑤𝑎𝑟𝑑) (8)
With reference to the specific emission calculations in clause 8.6.3, the
regeneration adjustment factors shall be applied, as follows:
e) For a test without regeneration, 𝑘 , shall be multiplied with or be
added to, respectively, the specific emission e in equations 69 or 70
clause 8.6.3;
f) For a test with regeneration, 𝑘 , shall be multiplied with or be added
to, respectively, the specific emission e in equations 69 or 70 of
clause 8.6.3.
At the request of the manufacturer, the regeneration adjustment
factors
g) May be extended to other members of the same engine family;
h) May be extended to other engine families using the same after-
treatment system with the prior approval of the test agency based on
technical evidence to be supplied by the manufacturer, that the
emissions are similar.
6.7 Cooling System
An engine cooling system with sufficient capacity to maintain the
engine at normal operating temperatures prescribed by the manufacturer
shall be used.
6.8 Lubricating System
The lubricating oil shall be specified by the manufacturer and be
representative of lubricating oil available on the market; the
specifications of the lubricating oil used for the test shall be recorded
and presented with the results of the test.
6.9 Specification of the reference fuel

The reference fuels are specified in Chapter-4 of this standard.
The fuel temperature shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
6.10 Crankcase Emissions
No crankcase emissions shall be discharged directly into the ambient
atmosphere, with the following exception: engines equipped with
turbochargers, pumps, blowers, or superchargers for air induction may
discharge crankcase emissions to the ambient atmosphere if the
emissions are added to the exhaust emissions (either physically or
mathematically) during all emission testing. Manufacturers taking
64/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
advantage of this exception shall install the engines so that all crankcase
emission can be routed into the emissions sampling system.
For the purpose of this paragraph, crankcase emissions that are routed
into the exhaust upstream of exhaust after-treatment during all operation
are not considered to be discharged directly into the ambient
atmosphere.
Open crankcase emissions shall be routed into the exhaust system for
emission measurement, as follows:
a) The tubing materials shall be smooth-walled, electrically conductive,
and not reactive with crankcase emissions. Tube lengths shall be
minimized as far as possible;
b) The number of bends in the laboratory crankcase tubing shall be
minimized, and the radius of any unavoidable bend shall be
maximized;
c) The laboratory crankcase exhaust tubing shall be heated, thin-walled
or insulated and shall meet the engine manufacturer's specifications
for crankcase back pressure;
d) The crankcase exhaust tubing shall connect into the raw exhaust
downstream of any after-treatment system, downstream of any
installed exhaust restriction, and sufficiently upstream of any sample
probes to ensure complete mixing with the engine's exhaust before
sampling. The crankcase exhaust tube shall extend into the free
stream of exhaust to avoid boundary-layer effects and to promote
mixing. The crankcase exhaust tube's outlet may orient in any
direction relative to the raw exhaust flow.
6.11 Clause 6.11.1 and 6.11.2 shall apply to positive-ignition engines fuelled
with petrol or E85.
6.11.1 The pressure in the crankcase shall be measured over the emissions test
cycles at an appropriate location. It shall be measured at the dip-stick
hole with an inclined-tube manometer. The pressure in the intake
manifold shall be measured to within ± 1 kPa. The pressure measured in
the crankcase shall be measured to within ± 0.01 kPa.
6.11.1.1 The pressure in the intake manifold shall be measured to within ± 1 kPa.
6.11.1.2 The pressure measured in the crankcase shall be measured to within ±
0.01 kPa.
6.11.2 Compliance with clause 6.10 shall be deemed satisfactory if, in every
condition of measurement set out in clause 6.11.1, the pressure
measured in the crankcase does not exceed the atmospheric pressure
prevailing at the time of measurement.
7.0 TEST PROCEDURES
7.1 Principles of Emissions Measurement
To measure the specific emissions, the engine shall be operated
over the test cycles defined in clauses 7.2.1 and 7.2.2. The
measurement of specific emissions requires the determination of
the mass of components in the exhaust and the corresponding
65/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
engine cycle work. The components are determined by the sampling

methods described in clauses 7.1.1 and 7.1.2.
7.1.1 Continuous Sampling
In continuous sampling, the component's concentration is measured
continuously from raw or dilute exhaust. This concentration is
multiplied by the continuous (raw or dilute) exhaust flow rate at the
emission sampling location to determine the component's mass
flow rate. The component's emission is continuously summed over
the test cycle. This sum is the total mass of the emitted component.
7.1.2 Batch Sampling
In batch sampling, a sample of raw or dilute exhaust is continuously
extracted and stored for later measurement. The extracted sample shall
be proportional to the raw or dilute exhaust flow rate. Examples of batch
sampling are collecting diluted gaseous components in a bag and
collecting particulate matter (PM) on a filter. The batch sampled
concentrations are multiplied by the total exhaust mass or mass flow
(raw or dilute) from which it was extracted during the test cycle. This
product is the total mass or mass flow of the emitted component. To
calculate the PM concentration, the PM deposited onto a filter from
proportionally extracted exhaust shall be divided by the amount of
filtered exhaust.
7.1.3 Measurement Procedures
This chapter applies two measurement procedures that are functionally
equivalent. Both procedures may be used for both the WHTC and the
WHSC test cycle:
a) The gaseous components are sampled continuously in the raw
exhaust gas, and the particulates are determined using a partial
flow dilution system;
b) The gaseous components and the particulates are determined
using a full flow dilution system (CVS system).
Any combination of the two principles (e.g. raw gaseous measurement
and full flow particulate measurement) is permitted.
7.2 Test Cycles

The transient test cycle WHTC is listed in Appendix 1 to this chapter as
a second-by-second sequence of normalized speed and torque values. In
order to perform the test on an engine test cell, the normalized values
shall be converted to the actual values for the individual engine under
test based on the engine-mapping curve. The conversion is referred to
as denormalization, and the test cycle so developed as the reference
cycle of the engine to be tested. With those references speed and torque
values, the cycle shall be run on the test cell, and the actual speed, torque
and power values shall be recorded. In order to validate the test, run, a
regression analysis between reference and actual speed, torque and
power values shall be conducted upon completion of the test.
For calculation of the brake specific emissions, the actual cycle work
66/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
shall be calculated by integrating actual engine power over the cycle.

For cycle validation, the actual cycle work shall be within prescribed
limits of the reference cycle work.
For the gaseous pollutants, continuous sampling (raw or dilute exhaust
gas) or batch sampling (dilute exhaust gas) may be used. The particulate
sample shall be diluted with a conditioned diluent (such as ambient air),
and collected on a single suitable filter. The WHTC is shown
schematically in Figure 3.
Figure 3
WHTC Test Cycle
7.2.2 Ramped steady state test cycle WHSC

The ramped steady state test cycle WHSC consists of a number of
normalized speed and load modes which shall be converted to the
reference values for the individual engine under test based on the
engine-mapping curve. The engine shall be operated for the prescribed
time in each mode, whereby engine speed and load shall be changed
linearly within 20 ± 1 seconds. In order to validate the test run, a
regression analysis between reference and actual speed, torque and
power values shall be conducted upon completion of the test.
The concentration of each gaseous pollutant, exhaust flow and power
output shall be determined over the test cycle. The gaseous pollutants
may be recorded continuously or sampled into a sampling bag. The
particulate sample shall be diluted with a conditioned diluent (such as
ambient air). One sample over the complete test procedure shall be
taken, and collected on a single suitable filter.
For calculation of the brake specific emissions, the actual cycle work
shall be calculated by integrating actual engine power over the cycle.
The WHSC is shown in Table 1. Except for mode 1, the start of each
mode is defined as the beginning of the ramp from the previous mode.
Table 1
67/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
WHSC Test Cycle

Mode Normalized Normalized Mode length
speed torque (s) incl. 20s
(per cent) (per cent) ramp
1 0 0 210
2 55 100 50
3 55 25 250
4 55 70 75
5 35 100 50
6 25 25 200
7 45 70 75
8 45 25 150
9 55 50 125
10 75 100 50
11 35 50 200
12 35 25 250
13 0 0 210
sum 1895
7.3 General Test Sequence

The following flow chart outlines the general guidance that should
be followed during testing. The details of each step are described
in the relevant clauses. Deviations from the guidance are permitted
where appropriate, but the specific requirements of the relevant
clauses are mandatory.
For the WHTC, the test procedure consists of a cold start test
following either natural or forced cool-down of the engine, a hot
soak period and a hot start test.
For the WHSC, the test procedure consists of a hot start test
following engine preconditioning at WHSC mode 9
68/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
69/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
7.4 Engine mapping and Reference Cycle

Pre-test engine measurements, pre-test engine performance checks and
pre-test system calibrations shall be made prior to the engine mapping
procedure in line with the general test sequence shown in
clause 7.3. of this chapter.
As basis for WHTC and WHSC reference cycle generation, the engine
shall be mapped under full load operation for determining the speed vs.
maximum torque and speed vs. maximum power curves. The mapping
curve shall be used for denormalizing engine speed (clause 7.4.6) and
engine torque (clause 7.4.7).
7.4.1 Engine warm-up
The engine shall be warmed up between 75 per cent and 100 per cent of its
maximum power or according to the recommendation of the manufacturer and
good engineering judgment. Towards the end of the warm up it shall be
operated in order to stabilize the engine coolant and lube oil temperatures to
within ± 2 per cent of its mean values for at least 2 minutes or until the engine
thermostat controls engine temperature.
7.4.2 Determination of the mapping speed range
The minimum and maximum mapping speeds are defined as follows:
Minimum mapping speed = idle speed
Maximum mapping speed = 𝑛 × 1.02 or speed where full load torque
drops off to zero, whichever is smaller.
7.4.3 Engine mapping curve
When the engine is stabilized according to clause 7.4.1, the engine
mapping shall be performed according to the following procedure.
a) The engine shall be unloaded and operated at idle speed;
b) The engine shall be operated with maximum operator demand at
minimum mapping speed;
c) The engine speed shall be increased at an average rate of 8 ± 1 min –
1/sfrom minimum to maximum mapping speed, or at a constant rate
such that it takes 4 to 6 minutes to sweep from minimum to maximum
mapping speed. Engine speed and torque points shall be recorded at a
sample rate of at least one point per second.
When selecting option (b) in clause 7.4.7 for determining negative
reference torque, the mapping curve may directly continue with
minimum operator demand from maximum to minimum mapping speed.
7.4.4 Alternate Mapping
If a manufacturer believes that the above mapping techniques are unsafe
or unrepresentative for any given engine, alternate mapping techniques
may be used. These alternate techniques shall satisfy the intent of the
specified mapping procedures to determine the maximum available
torque at all engine speeds achieved during the test cycles. Deviations
from the mapping techniques specified in this clause for reasons of safety
70/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
or representativeness shall be approved by the test agency along with the

justification for their use. In no case, however, the torque curve shall be
run by descending engine speeds for governed or turbocharged engines.
7.4.5 Replicate Tests
An engine need not be mapped before each and every test cycle. An
engine shall be remapped prior to a test cycle if:
a) An unreasonable amount of time has transpired since the last map, as
determined by engineering judgment; or
b) Physical changes or recalibrations have been made to the engine which
potentially affect engine performance.
7.4.6 Denormalization of Engine Speed
For generating the reference cycles, the normalized speeds of Appendix
1 (WHTC) and Table 1 (WHSC) shall be denormalized using the
following equation:
n_ref=nnorm×(0.45×n_lo+0.45×n_pref+0.1×n_hi-n_idle ) ×
2.0327+n_idle (9)
For determination of 𝑛 , the integral of the maximum torque shall be
calculated from 𝑛 to 𝑛 from the engine mapping curve, as
determined in accordance with clause 7.4.3.
The engine speeds in Figures 4 and 5 are defined, as follows:
𝑛 The normalized speed in Appendix 1 and Table 1 divided
by 100
𝑛 The lowest speed where the power is 55 per cent of
maximum power
𝑛 The engine speed where the integral of max. Mapped
torque is 51 per cent of the whole integral between
𝑛 and 𝑛
𝑛 The highest speed where the power is 70 per cent of
maximum power
𝑛 the idle speed
For engines (mainly positive ignition engines) with a steep governor
droop curve, where fuel cut off does not permit to operate the engine up
to 𝑛 or 𝑛 , the following provisions apply:
𝑛 in equation 9 is replaced with 𝑛 × 1.02
n_95his replaced with n_Pmax × 1.02
71/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Figure 4
Definition of test speeds
Figure 5
Definition of 𝒏𝑷𝒓𝒆𝒇
72/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
7.4.7
Denormalization of Engine Torque
The torque values in the engine dynamometer schedule of Appendix
1 to this chapter (WHTC) and in Table 1 (WHSC) are normalized to
the maximum torque at the respective speed. For generating the
reference cycles, the torque values for each individual reference
speed value as determined in clause 7.4.6 shall be denormalized,
using the mapping curve determined according to clause 7.4.3, as
follows:
𝑀 ,
𝑀 , = ×𝑀 , +𝑀 , −𝑀 , (10)
100
𝑀 , i the normalized torque, per cent
s
𝑀 , is the maximum torque from the mapping curve, Nm
𝑀 , is the torque absorbed by auxiliaries/equipment to be
fitted, Nm
𝑀 , is the torque absorbed by auxiliaries/equipment to be
removed, Nm
If auxiliaries/equipment are fitted in accordance with clause 6.3.1.and

Appendix 6 to this chapter, 𝑀 and 𝑀 are zero.
The negative torque values of the motoring points (m in Appendix 1
to this chapter) shall take on, for purposes of reference cycle
generation, reference values determined in either of the following
ways:
a) Negative 40 per cent of the positive torque available at the
associated speed point;
b) Mapping of the negative torque required to motor the engine from
maximum to minimum mapping speed;
c) Determination of the negative torque required to motor the engine
at idle and at nhi and linear interpolation between these two points.
7.4.8 Calculation of Reference Cycle Work

Reference cycle work shall be determined over the test cycle by
synchronously calculating instantaneous values for engine power
from reference speed and reference torque, as determined in clause
7.4.6 and 7.4.7. Instantaneous engine power values shall be integrated
over the test cycle to calculate the reference cycle work 𝑊 (kWh).
If auxiliaries are not fitted in accordance with clause 6.3.1, the
instantaneous power values shall be corrected using equation 4 in
clause 6.3.5.
The same methodology shall be used for integrating both reference
and actual engine power. If values are to be determined between
adjacent reference or adjacent measured values, linear interpolation
shall be used. In integrating the actual cycle work, any negative
73/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
torque values shall be set equal to zero and included. If integration is

performed at a frequency of less than 5 Hz, and if, during a given time
segment, the torque value changes from positive to negative or
negative to positive, the negative portion shall be computed and set
equal to zero. The positive portion shall be included in the integrated
value.
7.5 Pre-test procedures
7.5.1 Installation of the measurement equipment
The instrumentation and sample probes shall be installed as required.
The tailpipe shall be connected to the full flow dilution system, if
used.
7.5.2 Preparation of measurement equipment for sampling
The following steps shall be taken before emission sampling begins:
a) Leak checks shall be performed within 8 hours prior to emission
sampling according to clause 9.3.4;
b) For batch sampling, clean storage media shall be connected, such
as evacuated bags;
c) All measurement instruments shall be started according to the
instrument manufacturer's instructions and good engineering
judgment;
d) Dilution systems, sample pumps, cooling fans, and the data-
collection system shall be started;
e) The sample flow rates shall be adjusted to desired levels, using
bypass flow, if desired;
f) Heat exchangers in the sampling system shall be pre-heated or
pre-cooled to within their operating temperature ranges for a test;
g) Heated or cooled components such as sample lines, filters,
coolers, and pumps shall be allowed to stabilize at their operating
temperatures;
h) Exhaust dilution system flow shall be switched on at least 10
minutes before a test sequence;
i) Any electronic integrating devices shall be zeroed or re-zeroed,
before the start of any test interval.
7.5.3 Checking the gas analyzers
Gas analyzer ranges shall be selected. Emission analyzers with
automatic or manual range switching are permitted. During the test
cycle, the range of the emission analyzers shall not be switched. At
the same time the gains of an analyzer's analogue operational
amplifier(s) may not be switched during the test cycle.
Zero and span response shall be determined for all analyzers using
internationally-traceable gases that meet the specifications of clause
9.3.3 FID analyzers shall be spanned on a carbon number basis of one
(C1).
74/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
7.5.4 Preparation of the particulate sampling filter

At least one hour before the test, the filter shall be placed in a petri
dish, which is protected against dust contamination and allows air
exchange, and placed in a weighing chamber for stabilization. At the
end of the stabilization period, the filter shall be weighed and the tare
weight shall be recorded. The filter shall then be stored in a closed
petri dish or sealed filter holder until needed for testing. The filter
shall be used within eight hours of its removal from the weighing
chamber.
7.5.5 Adjustment of the dilution system
The total diluted exhaust gas flow of a full flow dilution system or
the diluted exhaust gas flow through a partial flow dilution system
shall be set to eliminate water condensation in the system, and to
obtain a filter face temperature between 315 K (42 °C) and 325 K (52
°C).
7.5.6 Starting the particulate sampling system
The particulate sampling system shall be started and operated on by-
pass. The particulate background level of the diluent may be
determined by sampling the diluent prior to the entrance of the
exhaust gas into the dilution tunnel. The measurement may be done
prior to or after the test. If the measurement is done both at the
beginning and at the end of the cycle, the values may be averaged. If
a different sampling system is used for background measurement, the
measurement shall be done in parallel to the test run
7.6 WHTC Cycle Run
7.6.1 Engine cool-down
A natural or forced cool-down procedure may be applied. For forced
cool-down, good engineering judgment shall be used to set up
systems to send cooling air across the engine, to send cool oil through
the engine lubrication system, to remove heat from the coolant
through the engine cooling system, and to remove heat from an
exhaust after-treatment system. In the case of a forced after-treatment
system cool down, cooling air shall not be applied until the after-
treatment system has cooled below its catalytic activation
temperature. Any cooling procedure that results in unrepresentative
emissions is not permitted
7.6.2 Cold Start Test
The cold-start test shall be started when the temperatures of the
engine's lubricant, coolant, and after-treatment systems are all
between 293 and 303 K (20 and 30 °C). The engine shall be started
using one of the following methods:
a) The engine shall be started as recommended in the owner’s
manual using a production starter motor and adequately charged
battery or a suitable power supply; or
b) The engine shall be started by using the dynamometer. The
engine shall be motored within ± 25 per cent of its typical in-use
75/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
cranking speed. Cranking shall be stopped within 1 second after

the engine is running. If the engine does not start after 15
seconds of cranking, cranking shall be stopped and the reason
for the failure to start determined, unless the owner’s manual or
the service-repair manual describes the longer cranking time as
normal.
7.6.3 Hot soak period
Immediately upon completion of the cold start test, the engine shall
be conditioned for the hot start test using a 10 ± 1minute hot soak
period.
7.6.4 Hot start test
The engine shall be started at the end of the hot soak period as defined
in clause 7.6
7.6.5 Test sequence
The test sequence of both cold start and hot start test shall commence
at the start of the engine. After the engine is running, cycle control
shall be initiated so that engine operation matches the first set point
of the cycle.
The WHTC shall be performed according to the reference cycle as
set out in clause 7.4. Engine speed and torque command set points
shall be issued at 5 Hz (10 Hz recommended) or greater. The set
points shall be calculated by linear interpolation between the 1 Hz
set points of the reference cycle. Actual engine speed and torque
shall be recorded at least once every second during the test cycle (1
Hz), and the signals may be electronically filtered.
7.6.6 Collection of emission relevant data
At the start of the test sequence, the measuring equipment shall be
started, simultaneously:
a) Start collecting or analyzing diluent, if a full flow dilution system
is used;
b) Start collecting or analyzing raw or diluted exhaust gas,
depending on the method used;
c) Start measuring the amount of diluted exhaust gas and the
required temperatures and pressures;
d) Start recording the exhaust gas mass flow rate, if raw exhaust gas
analysis is used
e) Start recording the feedback data of speed and torque of the
dynamometer.
If raw exhaust measurement is used, the emission concentrations
((NM)HC, CO and NOx) and the exhaust gas mass flow rate shall be
measured continuously and stored with at least 2 Hz on a computer
system. All other data may be recorded with a sample rate of at least
1 Hz. For analogue analyzers the response shall be recorded, and the
76/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
calibration data may be applied online or offline during the data

evaluation.
If a full flow dilution system is used, HC and NOx shall be measured
continuously in the dilution tunnel with a frequency of at least 2 Hz.
The average concentrations shall be determined by integrating the
analyzer signals over the test cycle. The system response time shall
be no greater than 20 seconds, and shall be coordinated with CVS
flow fluctuations and sampling time/test cycle offsets, if necessary.
CO, CO2, and NMHC may be determined by integration of
continuous measurement signals or by analyzing the concentrations
in the sample bag, collected over the cycle. The concentrations of the
gaseous pollutants in the diluent shall be determined prior to the point
where the exhaust enters into the dilution tunnel by integration or by
collecting into the background bag. All other parameters that need to
be measured shall be recorded with a minimum of one measurement
per second (1 Hz).
7.6.7 Particulate Sampling
At the start of the test sequence, the particulate sampling system shall
be switched from by-pass to collecting particulates.
If a partial flow dilution system is used, the sample pump(s) shall be
controlled, so that the flow rate through the particulate sample probe
or transfer tube is maintained proportional to the exhaust mass flow
rate as determined in accordance with clause 9.4.6.1.
If a full flow dilution system is used, the sample pump(s) shall be
adjusted so that the flow rate through the particulate sample probe or
transfer tube is maintained at a value within ± 2.5 per cent of the set
flow rate. If flow compensation (i.e., proportional control of sample
flow) is used, it shall be demonstrated that the ratio of main tunnel
flow to particulate sample flow does not change by more than ± 2.5
per cent of its set value (except for the first 10 seconds of sampling).
The average temperature and pressure at the gas meter(s) or flow
instrumentation inlet shall be recorded. If the set flow rate cannot be
maintained over the complete cycle within ± 2.5 per cent because of
high particulate loading on the filter, the test shall be voided. The test
shall be rerun using a lower sample flow rate
Engine Stalling and Equipment Malfunction
If the engine stalls anywhere during the cold start test, the test shall
be voided. The engine shall be preconditioned and restarted
according to the requirements of clause 7.6.2 of this chapter, and the
test repeated.
If the engine stalls anywhere during the hot start test, the hot start test
shall be voided. The engine shall be soaked according to clause 7.6.3
of this chapter, and the hot start test repeated. In this case, the cold
start test need not be repeated.
If a malfunction occurs in any of the required test equipment during
the test cycle, the test shall be voided and repeated in line with the
above provisions
77/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
7.7 WHSC cycle run

7.7.1 Preconditioning the dilution system and the engine
The dilution system and the engine shall be started and warmed up in
accordance with clause 7.4.1. After warm-up, the engine and
sampling system shall be preconditioned by operating the engine at
mode 9 (see clause 7.2.2, Table 1) for a minimum of 10 minutes while
simultaneously operating the dilution system. Dummy particulate
emissions samples may be collected. Those sample filters need not
be stabilized or weighed, and may be discarded. Flow rates shall be
set at the approximate flow rates selected for testing. The engine shall
be shut off after preconditioning.
7.7.2 Engine starting

5 ± 1 minutes after completion of preconditioning at mode 9 as
described in clause 7.7.1, the engine shall be started according to the
manufacturer's recommended starting procedure in the owner's
manual, using either a production starter motor or the dynamometer
in accordance with clause 7.6.2.
7.7.3 Test Sequence
The test sequence shall commence after the engine is running and within
one minute after engine operation is controlled to match the first mode of
the cycle (idle).
The WHSC shall be performed according to the order of test modes listed
in Table 1 of clause 7.2.2 of this chapter.
7.7.4 Collection of emission relevant data
At the start of the test sequence, the measuring equipment shall be
started, simultaneously:
a) Start collecting or analyzing diluent, if a full flow dilution system
is used;
b) Start collecting or analyzing raw or diluted exhaust gas,
depending on the method used;
c) Start measuring the amount of diluted exhaust gas and the
required temperatures and pressures;
d) Start recording the exhaust gas mass flow rate, if raw exhaust gas
analysis is used;
e) Start recording the feedback data of speed and torque of the
dynamometer.
If raw exhaust measurement is used, the emission concentrations
((NM)HC, CO and NOx) and the exhaust gas mass flow rate shall be
measured continuously and stored with at least 2 Hz on a computer
system. All other data may be recorded with a sample rate of at least
1 Hz. For analogue analyzers the response shall be recorded, and the
calibration data may be applied online or offline during the data
evaluation.
78/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
If a full flow dilution system is used, HC and NOx shall be measured

continuously in the dilution tunnel with a frequency of at least 2 Hz.
The average concentrations shall be determined by integrating the
analyzer signals over the test cycle. The system response time shall
be no greater than 20 seconds, and shall be coordinated with CVS
flow fluctuations and sampling time/test cycle offsets, if necessary.
CO, CO2, and NMHC may be determined by integration of
continuous measurement signals or by analyzing the concentrations
in the sample bag, collected over the cycle. The concentrations of the
gaseous pollutants in the diluent shall be determined prior to the point
where the exhaust enters into the dilution tunnel by integration or by
collecting into the background bag. All other parameters that need to
be measured shall be recorded with a minimum of one measurement
per second (1 Hz).
At the start of the test sequence, the particulate sampling system shall
be switched from by-pass to collecting particulates. If a partial flow
dilution system is used, the sample pump(s) shall be controlled, so
that the flow rate through the particulate sample probe or transfer tube
is maintained proportional to the exhaust mass flow rate as
determined in accordance with clause 9.4.6.1.
If a full flow dilution system is used, the sample pump(s) shall be
adjusted so that the flow rate through the particulate sample probe or
transfer tube is maintained at a value within ± 2.,5 per cent of the set
flow rate. If flow compensation (i.e., proportional control of sample
flow) is used, it shall be demonstrated that the ratio of main tunnel
flow to particulate sample flow does not change by more than ± 2.5
per cent of its set value (except for the first 10 seconds of sampling).
The average temperature and pressure at the gas meter(s) or flow
instrumentation inlet shall be recorded. If the set flow rate cannot be
maintained over the complete cycle within ± 2.5 per cent because of
high particulate loading on the filter, the test shall be voided. The test
shall be rerun using a lower sample flow rate.
7.7.6 Engine stalling and Equipment Malfunction
If the engine stalls anywhere during the cycle, the test shall be voided.
The engine shall be preconditioned according to clause 7.7.1 and
restarted according to clause 7.7.2, and the test repeated.
If a malfunction occurs in any of the required test equipment during
the test cycle, the test shall be voided and repeated in line with the
above provisions.
7.8 Post Test Procedures
7.8.1 Operations after test
At the completion of the test, the measurement of the exhaust gas
mass flow rate, the diluted exhaust gas volume, the gas flow into the
collecting bags and the particulate sample pump shall be stopped. For
an integrating analyzer system, sampling shall continue until system
response times have elapsed.
79/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
7.8.2 Verification of proportional Sampling

For any proportional batch sample, such as a bag sample or PM
sample, it shall be verified that proportional sampling was maintained
according to clauses 7.6.7 and 7.7.5. Any sample that does not fulfil
the requirements shall be voided.
7.8.3 PM Conditioning and Weighing
The particulate filter shall be placed into covered or sealed containers
or the filter holders shall be closed, in order to protect the sample
filters against ambient contamination. Thus protected, the filter shall
be returned to the weighing chamber. The filter shall be conditioned
for at least one hour, and then weighed according to clause 9.4.5. The
gross weight of the filter shall be recorded.
7.8.4 Drift Verification
As soon as practical but no later than 30 minutes after the test cycle
is complete or during the soak period, the zero and span responses of
the gaseous analyzer ranges used shall be determined. For the purpose
of this clause, test cycle is defined as follows:
a) For the WHTC: the complete sequence cold – soak – hot;
b) For the WHTC hot start test (clause 6.6): the sequence soak –hot;
c) For the multiple regeneration WHTC hot start test ( clause 6.6):
the total number of hot start tests;
d) For the WHSC: the test cycle
The following provisions apply for analyzer drift:
a) The pre-test zero and span and post-test zero and span responses
may be directly inserted into equation 66 of clause 8.6.1 without
determining the drift;
b) If the drift between the pre-test and post-test results is less than 1
per cent of full scale, the measured concentrations may be used
uncorrected or may be corrected for drift according to clause 8.6.1;
c) If the drift difference between the pre-test and post-test results is
equal to or greater than 1 per cent of full scale, the test shall be
voided or the measured concentrations shall be corrected for drift
according to clause 8.6.1.
7.8.5 Analysis of gaseous bag sampling
As soon as practical, the following shall be performed:
Gaseous bag samples shall be analyzed no later than 30 minutes after
the hot start test is complete or during the soak period for the cold
start test;
Background samples shall be analyzed no later than 60 minutes after
the hot start test is complete.
80/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
7.8.6 Validation of Cycle Work

Before calculating actual cycle work, any points recorded during
engine starting shall be omitted. Actual cycle work shall be
determined over the test cycle by synchronously using actual speed
and actual torque values to calculate instantaneous values for engine
power. Instantaneous engine power values shall be integrated over
the test cycle to calculate the actual cycle work 𝑊 (kWh). If
auxiliaries/equipment are not fitted in accordance with clause 6.3.1,
the instantaneous power values shall be corrected using equation 4 in
clause 6.3.5.
The same methodology as described in clause 7.4.8 shall be used for
integrating actual engine power.
The actual cycle work 𝑊 is used for comparison to the reference
cycle work 𝑊 and for calculating the brake specific emissions (see
clause 8.6.3).
𝑊 shall be between 85 per cent and 105 per cent of 𝑊
7.8.7 Validation statistics of the test cycle
Linear regressions of the actual values (𝑛 , 𝑀 , 𝑃 ) on the
reference values (𝑛 , 𝑀 , 𝑃 ) shall be performed for both the
WHTC and the WHSC.
To minimize the biasing effect of the time lag between the actual and
reference cycle values, the entire engine speed and torque actual
signal sequence may be advanced or delayed in time with respect to
the reference speed and torque sequence. If the actual signals are
shifted, both speed and torque shall be shifted by the same amount in
the same direction.
The method of least squares shall be used, with the best-fit equation
having the form:
𝑦 =𝑎 𝑥+𝑎 (11)
Y y is the actual value of speed (min –1), torque (Nm), or

power (kW)
𝑎 𝑎 is the slope of the regression line
X x is the reference value of speed (min –1), torque (Nm), or
power (kW)
𝑎 𝑎 is the y intercept of the regression line
The standard error of estimate (SEE) of y on x and the coefficient of

determination (r2) shall be calculated for each regression line.
It is recommended that this analysis be performed at 1 Hz. For a test
to be considered valid, the criteria of Table 2 (WHTC) or Table 3
(WHSC) shall be met.
81/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
TABLE 2
Regression line tolerances for the WHTC
Speed Torque Power
Standard error of maximum 5 per maximum 10 maximum 10

estimate (SEE) of y cent of maximum per cent of per cent of
on x test speed maximum maximum
engine torque engine power
Slope of the 0.95 to 1.03 0.83-1.03 0.89-1.03

regression line, 𝑎
Coefficient of minimum 0.97 minimum minimum 0.91
determination, r2 0.85
y intercept of the maximum 10 per ± 20 Nm or ± ± 4 kW or ± 2

regression line, 𝑎 cent of idle speed 2 per cent of per cent of
maximum maximum
torque power
whichever is whichever is
greater greater
-
TABLE 3
Regression line tolerances for the WHSC
Speed Torque Power
Standard error of maximum 1 per maximum 2 per maximum 2 per

estimate (SEE) of y cent of cent of maximum cent of
on x maximum test engine torque maximum
speed engine power
Slope of the 0.99 to 1.01 0.98-1.02 0.98-1.02
regression line, 𝑎
Coefficient of minimum 0.990 minimum 0.950 minimum 0.950
determination, r2
y intercept of the maximum 1 per ± 20 Nm or ± 2 per ± 4 kW or ± 2
regression line, 𝑎 cent of cent of maximum per cent of
maximum test torque whichever maximum power
speed is greater whichever is
greater
For regression purposes only, point omissions are permitted where noted in Table
4 before doing the regression calculation. However, those points shall not be
omitted for the calculation of cycle work and emissions. Point omission may be
applied to the whole or to any part of the cycle.
82/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
TABLE 4
Permitted point omissions from regression analysis
Event Conditions Permitted
point
omissions
Minimum operator 𝑛 = 0 per cent speed and
demand (idle power
and
point)
𝑀 = 0 per cent
and
𝑀 > (𝑀 – 0.02
𝑀 )
and
𝑀 < (𝑀 + 0.02
𝑀 )
Minimum operator 𝑀 < 0 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 power and
demand (motoring torque
point)
Minimum operator 𝑛 ≤ 1.02 𝑛 and 𝑀 >𝑀 power and
demand either torque or
or
speed
𝑛 >𝑛 and 𝑀 ≤𝑀
or
𝑛 > 1.02 𝑛 and 𝑀 <𝑀 ≤
(𝑀 + 0.02 𝑀 )
Maximum operator 𝑛 <𝑛 and 𝑀 ≥𝑀 power and
de and either orque
or
or speed
𝑛 ≥ 0.98 𝑛 and 𝑀 <𝑀 OR
𝑛 ≥ 0.98 𝑛 and
𝑀 >𝑀 ≥𝑀 - 0.02
𝑀 )
8.0 EMISSION CALCULATION

The final test result shall be rounded in one step to the number of
places to the right of the decimal point indicated by the applicable
emission standard plus one additional significant figure, in
accordance with ASTM E 29-06B. No rounding of intermediate
values leading to the final break-specific emission result is permitted.
83/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Calculation of hydrocarbons and/or non-methane hydrocarbons is

based on the following molar carbon/hydrogen/oxygen ratios
(C/H/O) of the fuel:
Examples of the calculation procedures are given in Appendix 5 to

this chapter.
Emissions calculation on a molar basis, in accordance with Chapter 7
of UN GTR No 11 concerning the exhaust emission test protocol for
Non-Road Mobile Machinery (NRMM), is permitted with the prior
agreement of the test agency.
8.1 Dry/Wet Correction
If the emissions are measured on a dry basis, the measured
concentration shall be converted to a wet basis according to the
following equation:
𝑐 =𝑘 × 𝑐
Where
𝑐 the dry concentration in ppm or per cent volume
𝑘 𝑘 is the dry/wet correction factor (𝑘 , , 𝑘 , , or 𝑘 ,
depending on respective equation used)
8.1.1 Raw Exhaust Gas
𝑞 ,
1.2442 × 𝐻 + 111.19 × 𝑤 ×
𝑞 ,
𝑘 , = 1− 𝑞 × 1.008 (13)
, ,
773.4 + 1.2442 × 𝐻 + 𝑞 ×𝑘 , × 1000
,
Or
𝑘 ,
𝑞 ,
1.2442 × 𝐻 + 111.19 × 𝑤 ×
𝑞 , 𝑝
= 1− 𝑞 × 1.008 1− 𝑝 (14)
,
773.4 + 1.2442 × 𝐻 + ×𝑘 , × 1000
𝑞 ,
84/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
1
𝑘 , = −𝑘 × 1.008 (15)
1 + 𝑎 × 0.005 × (𝑐 +𝑐
𝑘 , = 0.055594 × 𝑤 + 0.0080021 × 𝑤 + 0.0070046 × 𝑤 (16)
1.608 × 𝐻
𝑘 = (17)
1000 + (1.608 × 𝐻 )
Where
𝐻 Is the intake air humidity, g water per kg dry air
𝑤 Is the hydrogen content of the fuel, per cent mass
𝑞 , Is the instantaneous fuel mass flow rate, kg/s
𝑞 , is the instantaneous dry intake air mass flow rate, kg/s
𝑝 is the water vapour pressure after cooling bath, kPa
𝑝 is the total atmospheric pressure, kPa
𝑤 is the nitrogen content of the fuel, per cent mass
𝑤 is the oxygen content of the fuel, per cent mass
α is the molar hydrogen ratio of the fuel
𝑐 is the dry CO 2 concentration, per cent
𝑐 is the dry CO concentration, per cent
8.1.2 Diluted Exhaust Gas
∝×
𝐾 , = −𝐾 × 1.008 (18)
OR
1−𝐾
𝐾 , = ∝×𝑐 × 1.008 (19)
1+
200
1 1
𝐻 × 1− +𝐻 ×
𝐾 = 1.608 × 𝐷 𝐷 (20)
1 1
1000 + 1.608 × 𝐻 × 1 − +𝐻 ×
𝐷 𝐷
α is the molar hydrogen ratio of the fuel
𝑐 is the wet CO2 concentration, per cent
𝑐 is the dry CO2 concentration, per cent
𝐻 is the diluent humidity, g water per kg dry air
𝐻 is the intake air humidity, g water per kg dry air
D is the dilution factor (see clause 8.5.2.3.2)
8.1.3 Diluent Exhaust Gas
𝐾 = (1 − 𝐾 ) × 1.008 (21)
. ×
With 𝐾 = ( . )
(22)
×
85/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
𝐻 is the diluent humidity, g water per kg dry air

8.2 NOx correction for humidity
As the NOx emission depends on ambient air conditions, the NOx
concentration shall be corrected for humidity with the factors given
in clause 8.2.1 or 8.2.2. The intake air humidity 𝐻 may be derived
from relative humidity measurement, dew point measurement,
vapour pressure measurement or dry/wet bulb measurement using
generally accepted equations.
8.2.1 Compression-ignition engines
15.698 × 𝐻
𝑘 , = + 0.832 (23)
1000
Where:
8.2.2 Positive ignition engines
𝑘 , = 0.6272 + 44.030 × 10 × 𝐻 − 0.862 × 10
×𝐻 (24)
Where: 𝐻 is the intake air humidity, g water per kg dry air
8.3 Particulate Filter Buoyancy Correction
The sampling filter mass shall be corrected for its buoyancy in air.
The buoyancy correction depends on sampling filter density, air
density and the density of the balance calibration weight, and does
not account for the buoyancy of the PM itself. The buoyancy
correction shall be applied to both tare filter mass and gross filter
mass.
If the density of the filter material is not known, the following
densities shall be used:
Teflon coated glass fiber filter: 2 300 kg/m3 ;
Teflon membrane filter: 2 144 kg/m 3 ;
Teflon membrane filter with polymethylpentene support ring: 920
kg/m 3
For stainless steel calibration weights, a density of 8 000 kg/m 3 shall
be used
The following equation shall be used:
𝜌
1−
𝜌
𝑚 =𝑚 × 𝜌 (25)
1−
𝜌
With
𝑝𝑏 × 28.836
𝑝𝑎 = (26)
8.3144 × 𝑇𝑎
86/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
𝑚 is the uncorrected particulate filter mass, mg

𝜌 is the density of the air, kg/m 3
𝜌 is the density of balance calibration weight, kg/m 3
𝜌 is the density of the particulate sampling filter, kg/m 3
𝜌 is the total atmospheric pressure, kPa
𝑇 is the air temperature in the balance environment, K
28.836 is the molar mass of the air at reference humidity (282.5 K),
g/mol
8.3144 is the molar gas constant
The particulate sample mass m p used in clauses 8.4.3 and 8.5.3 shall
be calculated as follows:
𝑚 =𝑚 , −𝑚 ,
𝑚 , is the buoyancy corrected gross particulate filter mass, mg

𝑚 , is the buoyancy corrected tare particulate filter mass, mg
8.4 Partial flow dilution (PFS) and raw gaseous measurement
The instantaneous concentration signals of the gaseous components
are used for the calculation of the mass emissions by multiplication
with the instantaneous exhaust mass flow rate. The exhaust mass flow
rate may be measured directly, or calculated using the methods of
intake air and fuel flow measurement, tracer method or intake air and
air/fuel ratio measurement. Special attention shall be paid to the
response times of the different instruments. These differences shall
be accounted for by time aligning the signals. For particulates, the
exhaust mass flow rate signals are used for controlling the partial flow
dilution system to take a sample proportional to the exhaust mass
flow rate. The quality of proportionality shall be checked by applying
a regression analysis between sample and exhaust flow in accordance
with clause 9.4.6.1. The complete test set up is schematically shown
in Figure 6.
87/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Figure 6
scheme of raw /partial flow measurement system
8.4.1 Determination of exhaust gas mass flow
8.4.1.1 Introduction
For calculation of the emissions in the raw exhaust gas and for
controlling of a partial flow dilution system, it is necessary to know
the exhaust gas mass flow rate. For the determination of the exhaust
mass flow rate, one of the methods described in clauses 8.4.1.3 to
8.4.1.7 may be used.
8.4.1.2 Response Time
For the purpose of emissions calculation, the response time of any of
the methods described in clauses 8.4.1.3 to 8.4.1.7 shall be equal to
or less than the analyzer response time of ≤ 10 seconds, as required
in clause 9.3.5.
For the purpose of controlling of a partial flow dilution system, a
faster response is required. For partial flow dilution systems with
online control, the response time shall be ≤ 0.3 second. For partial
flow dilution systems with look ahead control based on a pre-
recorded test run, the response time of the exhaust flow measurement
system shall be ≤ 5 seconds with a rise time of ≤ 1 second. The system
88/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
response time shall be specified by the instrument manufacturer. The

combined response time requirements for the exhaust gas flow and
partial flow dilution system are indicated in clause 9.4.6.1.
8.4.1.3 Direct Measurement Method
Direct measurement of the instantaneous exhaust flow shall be done
by systems, such as:
a) Pressure differential devices, like flow nozzle, (details see ISO
5167);
b) Ultrasonic flowmeter;
c) Vortex flowmeter.
Precautions shall be taken to avoid measurement errors which will
impact emission value errors. Such precautions include the careful
installation of the device in the engine exhaust system according to
the instrument manufacturers' recommendations and to good
engineering practice. Especially, engine performance and emissions
shall not be affected by the installation of the device.
The flowmeters shall meet the linearity requirements of
clause 9.2.
8.4.1.4 Air and fuel measurement method
This involves measurement of the airflow and the fuel flow with
suitable flowmeters. The calculation of the instantaneous exhaust gas
flow shall be as follows:
𝑞 , =𝑞 , +𝑞 , (28)
Where
𝑞 , the instantaneous exhaust mass flow rate, kg/s
𝑞 , the instantaneous intake air mass flow rate, kg/s
𝑞 , the instantaneous fuel mass flow rate, kg/s
The flowmeters shall meet the linearity requirements of clause 9.2,
but shall be accurate enough to also meet the linearity requirements
for the exhaust gas flow.
8.4.1.5 Tracer measurement method
This involves measurement of the concentration of a tracer gas in the
exhaust.
A known amount of an inert gas (e.g. pure helium) shall be injected
into the exhaust gas flow as a tracer. The gas is mixed and diluted by
the exhaust gas, but shall not react in the exhaust pipe. The
concentration of the gas shall then be measured in the exhaust gas
sample.
In order to ensure complete mixing of the tracer gas, the exhaust gas
sampling probe shall be located at least 1 m or 30 times the diameter
of the exhaust pipe, whichever is larger, downstream of the tracer gas
injection point. The sampling probe may be located closer to the
89/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
injection point if complete mixing is verified by comparing the tracer

gas concentration with the reference concentration when the tracer
gas is injected upstream of the engine
The tracer gas flow rate shall be set so that the tracer gas
concentration at engine idle speed after mixing becomes lower than
the full scale of the trace gas analyzer.
The calculation of the exhaust gas flow shall be as follows:
𝑞 ×𝜌
𝑞 , =
60 × 𝑐 , −𝑐
Where,
𝑞 , the instantaneous exhaust mass flow rate, kg/s
𝑞 tracer gas flow rate, cm 3 /min
𝑐 , the instantaneous concentration of the tracer gas after
mixing, ppm
𝜌 the density of the exhaust gas, kg/m 3 (see Table 5)
𝑐 the background concentration of the tracer gas in the
intake air, ppm
The background concentration of the tracer gas (𝑐 ) may be
determined by averaging the background concentration measured
immediately before the test run and after the test run.
When the background concentration is less than 1 per cent of the
concentration of the tracer gas after mixing (𝑐 , ) at maximum
exhaust flow, the background concentration may be neglected.
The total system shall meet the linearity requirements for the exhaust
gas flow of clause 9.2.
8.4.1.6 Airflow and air to fuel ratio measurement method
This involves exhaust mass calculation from the air flow and the air
to fuel ratio. The calculation of the instantaneous exhaust gas mass
flow is as follows.
1
𝑞 , =𝑞 , × 1+ (30)
𝐴
𝐹 ×𝜆
𝐴
𝐹
𝛼 𝜖
138.0 × 1 +
− +𝛾
= 4 2 (31)
12.011 × 𝛽 + 1.00794 × 𝛼 + 15.9994 × 𝜖 + 14.0067 × 𝛿 + 32.065 × 𝛾
2×𝑐 × 10
1−
𝑐 × 10 𝛼 3.5 × 𝑐 𝜖 𝛿
𝛽 × 100 − −𝑐 × 10 + × − − 𝑐 +𝑐 × 10
2 4 𝑐 × 10 2 2
1+
3.5 × 𝑐
𝜆 = 𝛼 𝜖 (32)
4.764 × 1 + − +𝛾 × 𝑐 +𝑐 × 10 +𝑐 ×
4 2
Where
90/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
𝑞 , the instantaneous intake air mass flow rate, kg/s

𝐴 the stoichiometric air to fuel ratio, kg/kg
𝐹
𝜆 the instantaneous excess air ratio
𝑐 the dry CO2 concentration, per cent
𝑐 the dry CO concentration, ppm
𝑐 is the wet HC concentration, ppm
Air flow meter and analyzers shall meet the linearity requirements of
clause 9.2, and the total system shall meet the linearity requirements
for the exhaust gas flow of clause 9.2.
If an air to fuel ratio measurement equipment such as a zirconia type
sensor is used for the measurement of the excess air ratio, it shall meet
the specifications of clause 9.3.2.7.
8.4.1.7 Carbon Balance Method
This involves exhaust mass calculation from the fuel flow and the
gaseous exhaust components that include carbon. The calculation of
the instantaneous exhaust gas mass flow is as follows:
𝑤 × 1.4 𝐻
𝑞 , =𝑞 , × 1+ +1 (33)
1.0828 × 𝑤 +𝑘 ×𝑘 ×𝑘 1000
With
𝑐
𝑘 = 𝑐 −𝑐 , × 0.5441 +
18.552
𝑐
+ (34)
17.355
And
𝑘 = −0.055594 × 𝑤 + 0.0080021 × 𝑤 + 0.0070046 × 𝑤 (35)
𝑞 , the instantaneous fuel mass flow rate, kg/s

𝐻 the intake air humidity, g water per kg dry air
𝑤 the carbon content of the fuel, per cent mass
𝑤 the hydrogen content of the fuel, per cent mass
𝑤 the nitrogen content of the fuel, per cent mass
𝑤 the oxygen content of the fuel, per cent mass
𝑐 the dry CO 2 concentration, per cent
𝑐 , the dry CO 2 concentration of the intake air, per cent
𝑐 the dry CO concentration, ppm
𝑐 the wet HC concentration, ppm
8.4.2 Determination of the gaseous components
91/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
The gaseous components in the raw exhaust gas emitted by the engine
submitted for testing shall be measured with the measurement and
sampling systems described in clause 9.3. and Appendix 2 to this
Chapter. The data evaluation is described in clause 8.4.2.2.
Two calculation procedures are described in clause 8.4.2.3 and
8.4.2.4, which are equivalent for the reference fuel specified in
chapter-4 of this standard. The procedure in clause 8.4.2.3 is more
straightforward, since it uses tabulated u values for the ratio between
component and exhaust gas density. The procedure in clause 8.4.2.4
is more accurate for fuel qualities that deviate from the specifications
in specified in chapter-4 of this standard, but requires elementary
analysis of the fuel composition.
8.4.2.2 Data Evaluation
The emission relevant data shall be recorded and stored in accordance
with clause 7.6.6.
For calculation of the mass emission of the gaseous components, the
traces of the recorded concentrations and the trace of the exhaust gas
mass flow rate shall be time aligned by the transformation time as
defined in clause 3.1. Therefore, the response time of the exhaust gas
mass flow system and each gaseous emissions analyzer shall be
determined according to clauses 8.4.1.2 and 9.3.5, respectively, and
recorded.
8.4.2.3 Calculation of Mass Emission based on tabulated values

The mass of the pollutants (g/test) shall be determined by calculating
the instantaneous mass emissions from the raw concentrations of the
pollutants and the exhaust gas mass flow, aligned for the
transformation time as determined in accordance with clause 8.4.2.2,
integrating the instantaneous values over the cycle, and multiplying
the integrated values with the u values from Table 5. If measured on
a dry basis, the dry/wet correction according to clause 8.1 shall be
applied to the instantaneous concentration values before any further
calculation is done.
For the calculation of NOx, the mass emission shall be multiplied,
where applicable, with the humidity correction factor 𝑘 , , or,𝑘 ,
as determined according to clause 8.2.
The following equation shall be applied:
1
𝑚 =𝑢 × 𝑐 , ×𝑞 , × (𝑖𝑛 𝑔⁄𝑡𝑒𝑠𝑡 ) (36)
𝑓
Where
𝑢 the respective value of the exhaust component from Table 5
𝑐 , the instantaneous concentration of the component in the
exhaust gas, ppm
92/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
𝑞 , the instantaneous exhaust mass flow, kg/s

f is the data sampling rate, Hz
n is the number of measurements
Table 5
Raw exhaust gas u values and component densities
Gas
NOX CO HC CO2 O2 CH4
Fuel 𝜌 𝜌 [kg/m 3]
2.053 1.250 (a) 1.9636 1.4277 0.716
b
𝑢 ()
Diesel
(B7) 1.2943 0.001586 0.000966 0.000482 0.001517 0.001103 0.000553
Ethanol
(ED95) 1.2768 0.001609 0.00098 0.00078 0.001539 0.001119 0.000561
0.000528
CNG(c) 1.2661 0.001621 0.000987 (d ) 0.001551 0.001128 0.000565
Propane 1.2805 0.001603 0.000976 0.000512 0.001533 0.001115 0.000559
Butane 1.2832 0.001600 0.000974 0.000505 0.001530 0.001113 0.000558
e
LPG ( ) 1.2811 0.001602 0.000976 0.00051 0.001533 0.001115 0.000559
Petrol
(E10) 1.2931 0.001587 0.000966 0.000499 0.001518 0.001104 0.000553
Ethanol
(E85) 1.2797 0.001604 0.000977 0.000730 0.001534 0.001116 0.000559
(a) depending on fuel

(b) at λ = 2, dry air, 273 K, 101.3 kPa
(c) u accurate within 0.2 % for mass composition of: C = 66 - 76 %; H = 22 - 25
%; N = 0 - 12 %
(d) NMHC on the basis of CH 2.93 (for total HC the u gas coefficient of CH 4
shall be used)
(e) u accurate within 0.2 % for mass composition of: C3 = 70 - 90 %; C4 = 10 -
30 %
8.4.2.4 Calculation of Mass Emission Based on Exact Equations

The mass of the pollutants (g/test) shall be determined by calculating
the instantaneous mass emissions from the raw concentrations of the
pollutants, the u values and the exhaust gas mass flow, aligned for the
transformation time as determined in accordance with clause 8.4.2.2
and integrating the instantaneous values over the cycle. If measured
on a dry basis, the dry/wet correction according to clause 8.1 shall be
93/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
applied to the instantaneous concentration values before any further

calculation is done.
For the calculation of NO x , the mass emission shall be multiplied
with the humidity correction factor 𝑘 , , or, 𝑘 , as determined
according to clause 8.2.
1
𝑚 = 𝑢 , ×𝑐 , ×𝑞 , × (𝑖𝑛 𝑔⁄𝑡𝑒𝑠𝑡 ) (37)
𝑓
𝑢 is calculated from equation 38 or 39

𝑐 , is the instantaneous concentration of the component in the
exhaust gas, ppm
𝑞 , is the instantaneous exhaust mass flow, kg/s
n is the number of measurement
The instantaneous u values shall be calculated as follows:
𝑢 , =𝑀 (38)
𝑀 , × 1000
𝑢 , =𝜌 (39)
𝜌 , × 1000
𝜌 =𝑀 ⁄22.414 (40)
Where
M gas is the molar mass of the gas component, g/mol (see Appendix
5 to this chapter)
𝑀 , is the instantaneous molar mass of the exhaust gas, g/mol
𝜌 is the density of the gas component, kg/m 3
𝜌 , is the instantaneous density of the exhaust gas, kg/m 3
The molar mass of the exhaust, 𝑀 , shall be derived for a general fuel
composition 𝐶𝐻 𝑂 𝑁 𝑆 under the assumption of complete
combustion, as follows
𝑞 ,
1+
𝑞 ,
𝑀 , =
𝛼 𝜀 𝛿 𝐻 × 10 1
𝑞 + + +
, 4 2 2 2 × 1.00794 + 15.9994 𝑀
× +
𝑞 , 𝑖 12.011 + 1.00794 × 𝛼 + 15.9994 × 𝜖 + 14.0067 × 𝛿 + 32.065 × 𝛾 1 + 𝐻 × 10
…(41)
𝑞 , is the instantaneous intake air mass flow rate on wet basis,
kg/s
𝑞 , is the instantaneous fuel mass flow rate, kg/s
𝑀 is the molar mass of the dry intake air = 28.965 g/mol
94/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
The exhaust density ρ e shall be derived, as follows:

𝜌 ,
1000 + 𝐻 + 1000 × 𝑞 , ⁄𝑞 ,
= (42)
773.4 + 1.2434 × 𝐻 + 𝑘 × 1000 × 𝑞 , ⁄𝑞 ,
𝑞 , is the instantaneous intake air mass flow rate on dry basis, kg/s
𝑞 , is the instantaneous fuel mass flow rate, kg/s
𝑘 is the fuel specific factor of wet exhaust (equation 16) in clause
8.1.1
8.4.3 Particulate Determination
8.4.3.1 Data Evaluation
The particulate mass shall be calculated according to equation 27 of
clause 8.3. For the evaluation of the particulate concentration, the
total sample mass (𝑚 ) through the filter over the test cycle shall
be recorded.
With the prior approval of the test agency, the particulate mass may
be corrected for the particulate level of the diluent, as determined in
clause 7.5.6, in line with good engineering practice and the specific
design features of the particulate measurement system used.
8.4.3.2 Calculation of mass emission
Depending on system design, the mass of particulates (g/test) shall be
calculated by either of the methods in clause 8.4.3.2.1 or 8.4.3.2.2
after buoyancy correction of the particulate sample filter according to
clause 8.3.
8.4.3.2.1 Calculation based on sample ratio
𝑚 = 𝑚 ⁄𝑟 × 1000 (43)
Where:
𝑚 is the particulate mass sampled over the cycle, mg
𝑟 is the average sample ratio over the test cycle
With
𝑚 𝑚
𝑟 = × (44)
𝑚 𝑚
95/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
𝑚 is the sample mass over the cycle, kg

𝑚 is the total exhaust mass flow over the cycle, kg
𝑚 is the mass of diluted exhaust gas passing the particulate
collection filters, kg
𝑚 is the mass of diluted exhaust gas passing the dilution tunnel, kg
In case of the total sampling type system, 𝑚 and 𝑚 are identical.
8.4.3.2.2 Calculation based on Dilution Ratio

𝑚 𝑚
𝑚 = × (45)
𝑚 1000
𝑚 is the mass of equivalent diluted exhaust gas over the cycle, kg
The total mass of equivalent diluted exhaust gas mass over the cycle
shall be determined as follows:
1
𝑚 = 𝑞 , × (46)
𝑓
𝑞 = 𝑞
, , ×𝑟 , (47)
𝑞 ,
𝑟 , = (48)
𝑞 , − 𝑞 ,
𝑞 , is the instantaneous equivalent diluted exhaust mass flow

rate, kg/s
𝑞 , is the instantaneous exhaust mass flow rate, kg/s

𝑟 , is the instantaneous dilution ratio
𝑞 , is the instantaneous diluted exhaust mass flow rate, kg/s
𝑞 , is the instantaneous diluent mass flow rate, kg/s
8.5 Full flow dilution measurement (CVS)
The concentration signals, either by integration over the cycle or by
bag sampling, of the gaseous components shall be used for the
calculation of the mass emissions by multiplication with the diluted
exhaust mass flow rate. The exhaust mass flow rate shall be measured
with a constant volume sampling (CVS) system, which may use a
96/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
positive displacement pump (PDP), a critical flow venturi (CFV) or

a subsonic venturi (SSV) with or without flow compensation.
For bag sampling and particulate sampling, a proportional sample
shall be taken from the diluted exhaust gas of the CVS system. For a
system without flow compensation, the ratio of sample flow to CVS
flow shall not vary by more than ± 2.5 per cent from the set point of
the test. For a system with flow compensation, each individual flow
rate shall be constant within ± 2.5 per cent of its respective target flow
rate.
The complete test set up is schematically shown in Figure 7.
Figure 7
Scheme of full flow measurement system
8.5.1 Determination of the diluted exhaust gas flow
For calculation of the emissions in the diluted exhaust gas, it is
necessary to know the diluted exhaust gas mass flow rate. The total
diluted exhaust gas flow over the cycle (kg/test) shall be calculated
from the measurement values over the cycle and the corresponding
calibration data of the flow measurement device (𝑉 for PDP, 𝐾 for
CFV, 𝐶 for SSV) by one of the methods described in clauses 8.5.1.2
to 8.5.1.4. If the total sample flow of particulates (𝑚 ) exceeds 0.5
per cent of the total CVS flow (𝑚 ), the CVS flow shall be corrected
97/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
for 𝑚 or the particulate sample flow shall be returned to the CVS

prior to the flow measuring device.
8.5.1.2 PDP-CVS system
The calculation of the mass flow over the cycle is as follows, if the
temperature of the diluted exhaust is kept within ± 6 K over the cycle
by using a heat exchanger:
𝑚
= 1.293 × 𝑉 × 𝑛 × 𝑝 × 273⁄(101.3 × 𝑇) (49)
Where:
𝑉 is the volume of gas pumped per revolution under test conditions,
m 3 /rev
𝑛 is the total revolutions of pump per test
𝑝 is the absolute pressure at pump inlet, kPa
T is the average temperature of the diluted exhaust gas at pump inlet,
K
If a system with flow compensation is used (i.e. without heat
exchanger), the instantaneous mass emissions shall be calculated and
integrated over the cycle. In this case, the instantaneous mass of the
diluted exhaust gas shall be calculated as follows:
𝑚
= 1.293 × 𝑉 × 𝑛 , × 𝑝 × 273⁄(101.3 × 𝑇) (50)
Where:
𝑛 , is the total revolutions of pump per time interval
8.5.1.3 CFV-CVS system
The calculation of the mass flow over the cycle is as follows, if the
temperature of the diluted exhaust is kept within ± 11 K over the cycle
by using a heat exchanger:
.
𝑚 = 1.293 × 𝑡 × 𝐾 × 𝑝 ⁄𝑇 (51)
Where:
t is the cycle time, s
𝐾 is the calibration coefficient of the critical flow venturi for
standard conditions
𝑝 is the absolute pressure at venturi inlet, kPa
T is the absolute temperature at venturi inlet, K
diluted exhaust gas shall be calculated as follows:
.
𝑚 , = 1.293 × ∆𝑡 × 𝐾 × 𝑝 ⁄𝑇 (52)
98/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Where:
∆𝑡 is the time interval
8.5.1.4 SSV-CVS system
The calculation of the mass flow over the cycle shall be as follows, if
the temperature of the diluted exhaust is kept within ±11 K over the
cycle by using a heat exchanger
𝑚 = 1.293 × 𝑄 (53)
With
𝑄
1 . .
1
=𝐴 𝑑 𝐶 𝑝 (𝑟 −𝑟 )× . (54)
𝑇 1−𝑟 𝑟
𝐴
0.006111 in SI units of
dv the diameter of the SSV throat, m

𝐶 the discharge coefficient of the SSV
𝑝 the absolute pressure at venturi inlet, kPa
T is the temperature at the venturi inlet, K
𝑟 the ratio of the SSV throat to inlet absolute, static pressure
∆
=1−
𝑟 the ratio of the SSV throat diameter, d, to the inlet pipe

diameter
diluted exhaust gas shall be calculated as follows
𝑚 = 1.293 × 𝑄 × ∆𝑡 (55)
Where:
∆𝑡 is the time interval, s
The real time calculation shall be initialized with either a reasonable
value for 𝐶 , such as 0.98, or a reasonable value of 𝑄 . If the
calculation is initialized with 𝑄 , the initial value of 𝑄 shall be
used to evaluate the Reynolds number.
During all emissions tests, the Reynolds number at the SSV throat
shall be in the range of Reynolds numbers used to derive the
calibration curve developed in clause 9.5.4
8.5.2 Determination of the Gaseous Components
99/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
The gaseous components in the diluted exhaust gas emitted by the
engine submitted for testing shall be measured by the methods
described in Appendix 2 to this chapter. Dilution of the exhaust shall
be done with filtered ambient air, synthetic air or nitrogen. The flow
capacity of the full flow system shall be large enough to completely
eliminate water condensation in the dilution and sampling systems.
Data evaluation and calculation procedures are described in clauses
8.5.2.2 and 8.5.2.3.
8.5.2.2 Data evaluation
The emission relevant data shall be recorded and stored in accordance
with clause 7.6.6.
8.5.2.3.1 Systems with constant mass flow
For systems with heat exchanger, the mass of the pollutants shall be
determined from the following equation:
𝑚 =𝑢 ×𝑐 × 𝑚 (𝑖𝑛 𝑔⁄𝑡𝑒𝑠𝑡) (56)
Where:
𝑢 is the respective value of the exhaust component from Table 6
𝑐 is the average background corrected concentration of the
component, ppm
𝑚 is the total diluted exhaust mass over the cycle, kg
If measured on a dry basis, the dry/wet correction according to clause
8.1. shall be applied.
For the calculation of NOx, the mass emission shall be multiplied, if
applicable, with the humidity correction factor 𝑘 , , or 𝑘 , , as
determined according to clause 8.2.
The u values are given in Table 6. For calculating the𝑢 values, the
density of the diluted exhaust gas has been assumed to be equal to air
density. Therefore, the 𝑢 values are identical for single gas
components, but different for HC
100/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Table 6
Diluted exhaust gas u values and component densities
Alternatively, the u values may be calculated using the exact

calculation method generally described in clause 8.4.2.4, as follows:
𝑀
𝑢 = (57)
1 1
𝑀 × 1−𝐷 +𝑀 × 𝐷
Where:
𝑀 is the molar mass of the gas component, g/mol (see Appendix 5
to this chapter)
𝑀 is the molar mass of the exhaust gas, g/mol
𝑀 is the molar mass of the diluent = 28.965 g/mol
D is the dilution factor (see clause 8.5.2.3.2)
8.5.2.3.2 Determination of the Background Corrected Concentrations
The average background concentration of the gaseous pollutants in
the diluent shall be subtracted from the measured concentrations to
get the net concentrations of the pollutants. The average values of the
background concentrations can be determined by the sample bag
method or by continuous measurement with integration. The
following equation shall be used:
𝑐 =𝑐 , − 𝑐 × 1 − (1⁄𝐷 ) (58)
Where:
𝑐 , is the concentration of the component measured in the diluted
exhaust gas, ppm
101/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
𝑐 is the concentration of the component measured in the diluent, ppm

D is the dilution factor
The dilution factor shall be calculated as follows:
a) For diesel fuelled engines and LPG fuelled gas engines
𝐹
𝐷= (59)
𝑐 , + (𝑐 , +𝑐 , ) × 10
b) For natural gas fuelled gas engines
𝐹
𝐷= (60)
𝑐 , + (𝑐 , +𝑐 , ) × 10
𝑐 , is the wet concentration of CO 2 in the diluted exhaust gas, per
cent vol
𝑐 , is the wet concentration of HC in the diluted exhaust gas, ppm
C1
𝑐 , is the wet concentration of NMHC in the diluted exhaust gas,
ppm C1
𝑐 , is the wet concentration of CO in the diluted exhaust gas, ppm
𝐹 is the stoichiometric factor
The stoichiometric factor shall be calculated as follows:
1
𝐹 = 100 × 𝛼 𝛼 (61)
1 + + 3.76 × 1 +
2 4
Where:
α is the molar hydrogen ratio of the fuel (H/C)
Alternatively, if the fuel composition is not known, the following
stoichiometric factors may be used:
𝐹 (diesel) = 13.4
𝐹 (LPG) = 11.6
𝐹 (NG) = 9.5
𝐹 (E10) = 13.3
𝐹 (E85) = 11.5
8.5.2.3.3 System with Flow Compensation
For systems without heat exchanger, the mass of the pollutants
(g/test) shall be determined by calculating the instantaneous mass
emissions and integrating the instantaneous values over the cycle.
Also, the background correction shall be applied directly to the
instantaneous concentration value. The following equation shall be
applied:
102/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
𝑚 = 𝑚 , ×𝑐 , ×𝑢 ,
− 𝑚 × 𝑐 × (1 − 1⁄𝐷 )
×𝑢 (62)
Where:
𝑐 , is the concentration of the component measured in the diluted
exhaust gas, ppm
𝑐 is the concentration of the component measured in the diluent, ppm
𝑚 , is the instantaneous mass of the diluted exhaust gas, kg
𝑚 is the total mass of diluted exhaust gas over the cycle, kg
𝑢 is the tabulated value from Table 6
8.5.3 Particulate Determination

The particulate mass (g/test) shall be calculated after buoyancy
correction of the particulate sample filter according to clause 8.3, as
follows:
𝑚 𝑚
𝑚 = × (63)
𝑚 1000
Where:
𝑚 is the mass of diluted exhaust gas over the cycle, kg
𝑚 =𝑚 −𝑚 (64)
Where:
𝑚 isthe mass of double diluted exhaust gas through
particulate filter, kg
𝑚 isis the mass of secondary diluent, kg
If the particulate background level of the diluent is determined in
accordance with clause 7.5.6, the particulate mass may be
background corrected. In this case, the particulate mass (g/test) shall
be calculated as follows:
103/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
𝑚 𝑚 1 𝑚
𝑚 = − × 1− × (65)
𝑚 𝑚 𝐷 1000
Where:

𝑚 is the mass of diluted exhaust gas over the cycle, kg
𝑚 is the mass of diluent sampled by background particulate
sampler, kg
𝑚 is the mass of the collected background particulates of the diluent,
mg
D is the dilution factor as determined in clause 8.5.2.3.2.
8.6 General Calculation

8.6.1 Drift Correction
With respect to drift verification in clause 7.8.4, the corrected
concentration value shall be calculated as follows
𝑐 =𝑐 , + 𝑐 ,
2×𝑐 − 𝑐 , +𝑐 ,
−𝑐 , (66)
𝑐 , +𝑐 , − 𝑐 , +𝑐 ,
𝑐 , the reference concentration of the zero gas (usually zero),

ppm
𝑐 , the reference concentration of the span gas, ppm
𝑐 , the pre-test analyzer concentration of the zero gas, ppm
𝑐 , the pre-test analyzer concentration of the span gas, ppm
𝑐 , the post-test analyzer concentration of the zero gas, ppm
𝑐 , the post-test analyzer concentration of the span gas, ppm
𝑐 the sample gas concentration, ppm
Two sets of specific emission results shall be calculated for each
component in accordance with clause 8.6.3, after any other
corrections have been applied. One set shall be calculated using
uncorrected concentrations and another set shall be calculated using
the concentrations corrected for drift according to equation 66.
Depending on the measurement system and calculation method used,
the uncorrected emissions results shall be calculated with equations
36, 37, 56, 57 or 62, respectively. For calculation of the corrected
emissions, c gas in equations 36, 37, 56, 57 or 62, respectively, shall
be replaced with 𝑐 of equation 66. If instantaneous concentration
values 𝑐 , are used in the respective equation, the corrected value
104/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
shall also be applied as instantaneous value 𝑐 , . In equation 57, the

correction shall be applied to both the measured and the background
concentration.
The comparison shall be made as a percentage of the uncorrected
results. The difference between the uncorrected and the corrected
brake-specific emission values shall be within ± 4 per cent of the
uncorrected brake- specific emission values or within ± 4 per cent of
the respective limit value, whichever is greater. If the drift is greater
than 4 per cent, the test shall be voided.
If drift correction is applied, only the drift-corrected emission results
shall be used when reporting emissions.
8.6.2 Calculation of NMHC and CH4
The calculation of NMHC and CH4 depends on the calibration
method used. The FID for the measurement without NMC (lower
path of Appendix 2 to this chapter, Figure 11), shall be calibrated with
propane. For the calibration of the FID in series with NMC (upper
path of Appendix 2 to this chapter, Figure 11), the following methods
are permitted.
a) Calibration gas – propane; propane bypasses NMC;
b) Calibration gas – methane; methane passes through NMC.
The concentration of NMHC and CH 4 shall be calculated as follows
for (a):
𝑐 ( / ) −𝑐 ( ⁄ ) × (1 − 𝐸 )
𝑐 = (67)
𝑟 × (𝐸 − 𝐸 )
𝑐 ( ⁄ ) × (1 − 𝐸 ) − 𝑐 ( / )
𝑐 = (68)
(𝐸 − 𝐸 )
The concentration of NMHC and CH4 shall be calculated as follows
for (b):
𝑐
𝑐 ( ⁄ ) × (1 − 𝐸 ) − 𝑐 ( / ) × 𝑟 × (1 − 𝐸 )
= (67𝑎)
(𝐸 − 𝐸 )
𝑐
𝑐 ( / ) × 𝑟 × (1 − 𝐸 ) − 𝑐 ( ⁄ ) × (1 − 𝐸 )
= (68𝑎)
𝑟 × (𝐸 − 𝐸 )
Where:
𝑐 ( / ) is the HC concentration with sample gas flowing through
the NMC, ppm
𝑐 ( ⁄ ) ) is the HC concentration with sample gas bypassing the
NMC, ppm
𝑟 is the methane response factor as determined per clause 9.3.7.2
𝐸 is the methane efficiency as determined per clause 9.3.8.1
𝐸 is the ethane efficiency as determined per clause 9.3.8.2.
105/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
If 𝑟 < 1.05, it may be omitted in equations 67, 67a and 68a.

8.6.3 Calculation of the specific emissions
The specific emissions 𝑒 or 𝑒 (g/kWh) shall be calculated for
each individual component in the following ways depending on the
type of test cycle.
For the WHSC, hot WHTC, or cold WHTC, the following equation
shall be applied:
𝑚
𝑒= (69)
𝑊
Where:
m is the mass emission of the component, g/test
𝑊 is the actual cycle work as determined according to
clause 7.8.6, kWh
For the WHTC, the final test result shall be a weighted average from
cold start test and hot start test according to the following equation:
(0.14 × 𝑚 ) + (0.86 × 𝑚 )
𝑒= (70)
0.14 × 𝑊 , + 0.86 × 𝑊 ,
Where:
𝑚 is the mass emission of the component on the cold
start test, g/test
𝑚 is the mass emission of the component on the hot start
test, g/test
𝑊 , is the actual cycle work on the cold start test, kWh
𝑊 , is the actual cycle work on the hot start test, kWh
If periodic regeneration in accordance with clause 6.6.2 applies, the
regeneration adjustment factors 𝑘 , or 𝑘 , shall be multiplied with
or be added to, respectively, the specific emissions result e as
determined in equations 69 and 70.
9.0 EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION AND VERIFICATION
This chapter does not contain details of flow, pressure, and
temperature measuring equipment or systems. Instead, only the
linearity requirements of such equipment or systems necessary for
conducting an emissions test are given in clause 9.2.
106/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
9.1 Dynamometer Specification

An engine dynamometer with adequate characteristics to perform the
appropriate test cycle described in clause 7.2.1 and 7.2.2 shall be
used.
The instrumentation for torque and speed measurement shall allow
the measurement accuracy of the shaft power as needed to comply
with the cycle validation criteria. Additional calculations may be
necessary. The accuracy of the measuring equipment shall be such
that the linearity requirements given in clause 9.2, Table 7 are not
exceeded.
9.2 Linearity requirements
The calibration of all measuring instruments and systems shall be
traceable to national (international) standards. The measuring
instruments and systems shall comply with the linearity requirements
given in Table 7. The linearity verification according to clause 9.2.1
shall be performed for the gas analyzers at least every three months
or whenever a system repair or change is made that could influence
calibration. For the other instruments and systems, the linearity
verification shall be done as required by internal audit procedures, by
the instrument manufacturer or in accordance with ISO 9000
requirements.
Table 7
Linearity requirements of instruments and measurement systems
Coefficient of
Measurement 𝜒 × (𝑎 − 1) Standard determination
Slope𝑎
system +𝑎 error SEE
𝑟
Engine speed ≤ 0.05 % max 0.98 – 1.02 ≤ 2 % max ≥ 0.990
Engine torque ≤ 1 % max 0.98 – 1.02 ≤ 2 % max ≥ 0.990
Fuel flow ≤ 1 % max 0.98 – 1.02 ≤ 2 % max ≥ 0.990
Airflow ≤ 1 % max 0.98 – 1.02 ≤ 2 % max ≥ 0.990
Exhaust gas
flow ≤ 1 % max 0.98 – 1.02 ≤ 2 % max ≥ 0.990
Diluent flow ≤ 1 % max 0.98 – 1.02 ≤ 2 % max ≥ 0.990
Diluted exhaust
gas flow ≤ 1 % max 0.98 – 1.02 ≤ 2 % max ≥ 0.990
Sample flow ≤ 1 % max 0.98 – 1.02 ≤ 2 % max ≥ 0,990
Gas analyzers ≤ 0.5 % max 0.99 – 1.01 ≤ 1 % max ≥ 0.998
Gas dividers ≤ .5 % max 0.98 – 1.02 ≤ 2 % max ≥ 0.990
Temperatures ≤ 1 % max 0.99 – 1.01 ≤ 1 % max ≥ 0.998
Pressures ≤ 1 % max 0.99 – 1.01 ≤ 1 % max ≥ 0.998
PM balance ≤ 1 % max 0.99 – 1.01 ≤ 1 % max ≥ 0.998
107/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
9.2.1 Linearity verification

A linearity verification shall be performed for each measurement
system listed in Table 7. At least 10 reference values, or as specified
otherwise, shall be introduced to the measurement system, and the
measured values shall be compared to the reference values by using
a least squares linear regression in accordance with equation 11 in
clause 7.8.7. The maximum limits in Table 7 refer to the maximum
values expected during testing.
9.2.1.2 General Requirements
The measurement systems shall be warmed up according to the
recommendations of the instrument manufacturer. The measurement
systems shall be operated at their specified temperatures, pressures
and flows.
9.2.1.3 Procedure
The linearity verification shall be run for each normally used
operating range with the following steps:
a) The instrument shall be set at zero by introducing a zero signal.
For gas analyzers, purified synthetic air (or nitrogen) shall be
introduced directly to the analyzer port;
b) The instrument shall be spanned by introducing a span signal. For
gas analyzers, an appropriate span gas shall be introduced directly
to the analyzer port;
c) The zero procedure of (a) shall be repeated;
d) The verification shall be established by introducing at least 10
reference values (including zero) that are within the range from
zero to the highest values expected during emission testing. For
gas analyzers, known gas concentrations in accordance with
clause 9.3.3.2 shall be introduced directly to the analyzer port;
e) At a recording frequency of at least 1 Hz, the reference values
shall be measured and the measured values recorded for 30
seconds;
f) The arithmetic mean values over the 30 seconds period shall be
used to calculate the least squares linear regression parameters
according to equation 11 in clause 7.8.7;
g) The linear regression parameters shall meet the requirements of
clause 9.2, Table 7;
h) The zero setting shall be rechecked and the verification procedure
repeated, if necessary.
108/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
9.3 Gaseous Emissions Measurement and Sampling System

9.3.1 Analyzer specifications
9.3.1.1 General
The analyzers shall have a measuring range and response time
appropriate for the accuracy required to measure the concentrations
of the exhaust gas components under transient and steady state
conditions.
The electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) of the equipment shall be
on a level is to minimize additional errors.
9.3.1.2 Accuracy
The accuracy, defined as the deviation of the analyzer reading from
the reference value, shall not exceed ± 2 per cent of the reading or ±
0.3 per cent of full scale whichever is larger.
9.3.1.3 Precision
The precision, defined as 2,5 times the standard deviation of 10
repetitive responses to a given calibration or span gas, shall be no
greater than 1 per cent of full scale concentration for each range used
above 155 ppm (or ppm C) or 2 per cent of each range used below
155 ppm (or ppm C).
9.3.1.4 Noise
The analyzer peak-to-peak response to zero and calibration or span
gases over any 10 seconds period shall not exceed 2 per cent of full
scale on all ranges used.
9.3.1.5 Zero Drift
The drift of the zero response shall be specified by the instrument
manufacturer.
9.3.1.6 Span Drift
The drift of the span response shall be specified by the instrument
manufacturer.
9.3.1.7 Rise Time
The rise time of the analyzer installed in the measurement system
shall not exceed 2,5 seconds.
9.3.1.8 Gas Drying
Exhaust gases may be measured wet or dry. A gas-drying device, if
used, shall have a minimal effect on the composition of the measured
gases. Chemical dryers are not an acceptable method of removing
water from the sample
9.3.2 Gas Analyzers
Clauses 9.3.2.2 to 9.2.3.7 describe the measurement principles to be
used. A detailed description of the measurement systems is given in
Appendix 2 to this chapter. The gases to be measured shall be
109/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
analyzed with the following instruments. For non-linear analyzers,

the use of linearizing circuits is permitted.
9.3.2.2 Carbon monoxide (CO) analysis
The carbon monoxide analyzer shall be of the non-dispersive infrared
(NDIR) absorption type.
9.3.2.3 Carbon dioxide (CO2) analysis
The carbon dioxide analyzer shall be of the non-dispersive infrared
(NDIR) absorption type.
9.3.2.4 Hydrocarbon (HC) analysis
The hydrocarbon analyzer shall be of the heated flame ionization
detector (HFID) type with detector, valves, pipework, etc. heated so
as to maintain a gas temperature of 463 K ± 10 K (190 ± 10 °C).
Optionally, for natural gas fuelled and PI engines, the hydrocarbon
analyzer may be of the non-heated flame ionization detector (FID)
type depending upon the method used (see Appendix 2 to this chapter,
clause A.2.1.3).
9.3.2.5 Methane (CH4) and non-methane hydrocarbon (NMHC) analysis
The determination of the methane and non-methane hydrocarbon
fraction shall be performed with a heated non-methane cutter (NMC)
and two FIDs as per Appendix 2 to this chapter, clause A.2.1.4 and
clause A.2.1.5. The concentration of the components shall be
determined as per clause 8.6.2.
9.3.2.6 Oxides of nitrogen (NOx) analysis
Two measurement instruments are specified for NO x measurement
and either instrument may be used provided it meets the criteria
specified in clauses 9.3.2.6.1 or 9.3.2.6.2, respectively. For the
determination of system equivalency of an alternate measurement
procedure in accordance with clause 5.1.1, only the CLD is permitted.
9.3.2.6.1 Chemiluminescent detector (CLD)
If measured on a dry basis, the oxides of nitrogen analyzer shall be of
the chemiluminescent detector (CLD) or heated chemiluminescent
detector (HCLD) type with a NO 2 /NO converter. If measured on a
wet basis, a HCLD with converter maintained above 328 K (55 °C)
shall be used, provided the water quench check (see clause 9.3.9.2.2)
is satisfied. For both CLD and HCLD, the sampling path shall be
maintained at a wall temperature of 328 K to 473 K (55 °C to 200 °C)
up to the converter for dry measurement and up to the analyzer for
wet measurement.
9.3.2.6.2 Non-dispersive ultraviolet detector (NDUV)
A non-dispersive ultraviolet (NDUV) analyzer shall be used to
measure NO x concentration. If the NDUV analyzer measures only
NO, a NO2 /NO converter shall be placed upstream of the NDUV
analyzer. The NDUV temperature shall be maintained to prevent
110/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
aqueous condensation, unless a sample dryer is installed upstream of

the NO2 /NO converter, if used, or upstream of the analyzer.
9.3.2.7 Air to fuel measurement
The air to fuel measurement equipment used to determine the exhaust
gas flow as specified in clause 8.4.1.6 shall be a wide range air to fuel
ratio sensor or lambda sensor of Zirconia type. The sensor shall be
mounted directly on the exhaust pipe where the exhaust gas
temperature is high enough to eliminate water condensation.
The accuracy of the sensor with incorporated electronics shall be
within:
± 3 per cent of reading for λ < 2
± 5 per cent of reading for 2 ≤ λ < 5
± 10 per cent of reading for 5 ≤ λ
To fulfil the accuracy specified above, the sensor shall be calibrated
as specified by the instrument manufacturer.
9.3.3 Gases
The shelf life of all gases shall be respected
9.3.3.1 Pure Gases
The required purity of the gases is defined by the contamination limits
given below. The following gases shall be available for operation:
a) For raw exhaust gas
Purified nitrogen
(Contamination ≤ 1 ppm C1, ≤ 1 ppm CO, ≤ 400 ppm CO2, ≤ 0.1
ppm NO)
Purified oxygen
(Purity > 99.5 per cent volO2)
Hydrogen-helium mixture (FID burner fuel)
(40 ± 1 per cent hydrogen, balance helium)
(Contamination ≤ 1 ppm C1, ≤ 400 ppm CO2)
Purified synthetic air
(Contamination ≤ 1 ppm C1, ≤ 1 ppm CO, ≤ 400 ppm CO2, ≤ 0.1
ppm NO)
(Oxygen content between 18-21 per cent vol.)
b) For dilute exhaust gas (optionally for raw exhaust gas)
Purified nitrogen
(Contamination ≤ 0.05 ppm C1, ≤ 1 ppm CO, ≤ 10 ppm CO2, ≤ 0.02
ppm NO)
Purified oxygen
(Purity > 99.5 per cent volO2)
111/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Hydrogen-helium mixture (FID burner fuel)

(40 ± 1 per cent hydrogen, balance helium)
(Contamination ≤ 0.05 ppm C1, ≤ 10 ppm CO2)
Purified synthetic air
(Contamination ≤ 0,05 ppm C1, ≤ 1 ppm CO, ≤ 10 ppm CO2, ≤ 0.02
ppm NO)
(Oxygen content between 20.5 – 21.5 per cent vol.)
If gas bottles are not available, a gas purifier may be used, if
contamination levels can be demonstrated.
9.3.3.2 Calibration and Span Gases
Mixtures of gases having the following chemical compositions shall
be available, if applicable. Other gas combinations are allowed
provided the gases do not react with one another. The expiration date
of the calibration gases stated by the manufacturer shall be recorded.
C3H8 and purified synthetic air (see clause 9.3.3.1);
CO and purified nitrogen;
NO and purified nitrogen;
NO2 and purified synthetic air;
CO2 and purified nitrogen;
CH4 and purified synthetic air;
C2H6 and purified synthetic air.
The true concentration of a calibration and span gas shall be within ±
1 per cent of the nominal value, and shall be traceable to national or
international standards. All concentrations of calibration gas shall be
given on a volume basis (volume per cent or volume ppm).
9.3.3.3 Gas Dividers
The gases used for calibration and span may also be obtained by
means of gas dividers (precision blending devices), diluting with
purified N2 or with purified synthetic air. The accuracy of the gas
divider shall be such that the concentration of the blended calibration
gases is accurate to within ± 2 per cent. This accuracy implies that
primary gases used for blending shall be known to an accuracy of at
least ± 1 per cent, traceable to national or international gas standards.
The verification shall be performed at between 15 and 50 per cent of
full scale for each calibration incorporating a gas divider. An
additional verification may be performed using another calibration
gas, if the first verification has failed.
Optionally, the blending device may be checked with an instrument
which by nature is linear, e.g. using NO gas with a CLD. The span
value of the instrument shall be adjusted with the span gas directly
connected to the instrument. The gas divider shall be checked at the
settings used and the nominal value shall be compared to the
112/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
measured concentration of the instrument. This difference shall in

each point be within ± 1 per cent of the nominal value.
For conducting the linearity verification according to clause 9.2.1, the
gas divider shall be accurate to within ± 1 per cent
9.3.3.4 Oxygen interference check gases
Oxygen interference check gases are a blend of propane, oxygen and
nitrogen. They shall contain propane with 350 ppm C ± 75 ppm C
hydrocarbon. The concentration value shall be determined to
calibration gas tolerances by chromatographic analysis of total
hydrocarbons plus impurities or by dynamic blending. The oxygen
concentrations required for positive ignition and compression
ignition engine testing are listed in Table 8 with the remainder being
purified nitrogen.
Table 8
Oxygen interference check gases
Type of Engine O2 concentration (per cent)
Compression ignition 21 (20 to 22)
Compression and positive ignition 10 (9 to 11)
Compression and positive ignition 5 (4 to 6)
Positive ignition 0 (0 to 1)
9.3.4 Leak check

A system leak check shall be performed. The probe shall be
disconnected from the exhaust system and the end plugged. The
analyzer pump shall be switched on. After an initial stabilization
period all flowmeters will read approximately zero in the absence of
a leak. If not, the sampling lines shall be checked and the fault
corrected
The maximum allowable leakage rate on the vacuum side shall be 0.5
per cent of the in-use flow rate for the portion of the system being
checked. The analyzer flows and bypass flows may be used to
estimate the in-use flow rates.
Alternatively, the system may be evacuated to a pressure of at least
20 kPavacuum (80 kPa absolute). After an initial stabilization period
the pressure increase Δp (kPa/min) in the system shall not exceed:
∆𝑝 = 𝑝⁄𝑉 × 0.005 × 𝑞 (71)
Where:
𝑉is the system volume, l
𝑞 is the system flow rate, l/min
Another method is the introduction of a concentration step change at
the beginning of the sampling line by switching from zero to span
gas. If for a correctly calibrated analyzer after an adequate period of
113/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
time the reading is ≤ 99 per cent compared to the introduced

concentration, this points to a leakage problem that shall be corrected
9.3.5 Response Time Check of the Analytical System
The system settings for the response time evaluation shall be exactly
the same as during measurement of the test run (i.e. pressure, flow
rates, filter settings on the analyzers and all other response time
influences). The response time determination shall be done with gas
switching directly at the inlet of the sample probe. The gas switching
shall be done in less than 0.1 second. The gases used for the test shall
cause a concentration change of at least 60 per cent full scale (FS).
The concentration trace of each single gas component shall be
recorded. The response time is defined to be the difference in time
between the gas switching and the appropriate change of the recorded
concentration. The system response time (𝑡 ) consists of the delay
time to the measuring detector and the rise time of the detector. The
delay time is defined as the time from the change (𝑡 ) until the
response is 10 per cent of the final reading (𝑡 ). The rise time is
defined as the time between 10 per cent and 90 per cent response of
the final reading (𝑡 − 𝑡 ).
For time alignment of the analyzer and exhaust flow signals, the
transformation time is defined as the time from the change (𝑡 ) until
the response is 50 per cent of the final reading (𝑡 ).
The system response time shall be ≤ 10 s with a rise time of ≤ 2.5
seconds in accordance with clause 9.3.1.7 for all limited components
(CO, NOx HC or NMHC) and all ranges used. When using a NMC
for the measurement of NMHC, the system response time may exceed
10 seconds
9.3.6 Efficiency Test of NOx converter
The efficiency of the converter used for the conversion of NO2 into
NO is tested as given in clauses 9.3.6.1 to 9.3.6.8 (see Figure 8).
114/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Figure 8
Scheme of NO2 converter efficiency device
9.3.6.1 Test Setup
Using the test setup as schematically shown in Figure 8 and the
procedure below, the efficiency of the converter shall be tested by
means of an ozonator.
9.3.6.2 Calibration
The CLD and the HCLD shall be calibrated in the most common
operating range following the manufacturer's specifications using
zero and span gas (the NO content of which shall amount to about 80
per cent of the operating range and the NO 2 concentration of the gas
mixture to less than 5 per cent of the NO concentration). The NO x
analyzer shall be in the NO mode so that the span gas does not pass
through the converter. The indicated concentration has to be
recorded.
9.3.6.3 Calculation
The per cent efficiency of the converter shall be calculated as follows:
Where:
𝑎−𝑏
𝐸 = 1+ × 100 (72)
𝑐−𝑑
a is the NO x concentration according to clause 9.3.6.6.
b is the NO x concentration according to clause 9.3.6.7.
c is the NO concentration according to clause 9.3.6.4.
d is the NO concentration according to clause 9.3.6.5.
115/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
9.3.6.4 Adding of oxygen
Via a T-fitting, oxygen or zero air shall be added continuously to the

gas flow until the concentration indicated is about 20 per cent less
than the indicated calibration concentration given in clause 9.3.6.2
(the analyzer is in the NO mode).
The indicated concentration (c) shall be recorded. The ozonator is
kept deactivated throughout the process.
9.3.6.5 Activation of the ozonator
The ozonator shall be activated to generate enough ozone to bring the
NO concentration down to about 20 per cent (minimum 10 per cent)
of the calibration concentration given in clause 9.3.6.2. The indicated
concentration (d) shall be recorded (the analyzer is in the NO mode).
9.3.6.6 NOx mode
The NO analyzer shall be switched to the NO x mode so that the gas
mixture (consisting of NO, NO2 , O2 and N2 ) now passes through the
converter. The indicated concentration (a) shall be recorded (the
analyzer is in the NOx mode).
9.3.6.7 Deactivation of the ozonator
The ozonator is now deactivated. The mixture of gases described in
clause 9.3.6.6 passes through the converter into the detector. The
indicated concentration (b) shall be recorded (the analyzer is in the
NOx mode).
9.3.6.8 NO mode
Switched to NO mode with the ozonator deactivated, the flow of
oxygen or synthetic air shall be shut off. The NO x reading of the
analyzer shall not deviate by more than ± 5 per cent from the value
measured according to clause 9.3.6.2 (the analyzer is in the NO
mode).
9.3.6.9 Test interval
The efficiency of the converter shall be tested at least once per month.
9.3.6.10 Efficiency requirement
The efficiency of the converter E NOx shall not be less than 95 %.
If, with the analyzer in the most common range, the ozonator cannot
give a reduction from 80 per cent to 20 per cent according to clause
9.3.6.5, the highest range which will give the reduction shall be used.
9.3.7 Adjustment of the FID
9.3.7.1 Optimization of the detector response
The FID shall be adjusted as specified by the instrument
manufacturer. A propane in air span gas shall be used to optimize the
response on the most common operating range.
With the fuel and airflow rates set at the manufacturer's
recommendations, a 350 ± 75 ppm C span gas shall be introduced to
116/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
the analyzer. The response at a given fuel flow shall be determined

from the difference between the span gas response and the zero gas
response. The fuel flow shall be incrementally adjusted above and
below the manufacturer's specification. The span and zero response
at these fuel flows shall be recorded. The difference between the span
and zero response shall be plotted and the fuel flow adjusted to the
rich side of the curve. This is the initial flow rate setting which may
need further optimization depending on the results of the hydrocarbon
response factors and the oxygen interference check according to
clauses 9.3.7.2 and 9.3.7.3. If the oxygen interference or the
hydrocarbon response factors do not meet the following
specifications, the airflow shall be incrementally adjusted above and
below the manufacturer's specifications, repeating clauses 9.3.7.2 and
9.3.7.3 for each flow.
The optimization may optionally be conducted using the procedures
outlined in SAE paper No 770141.
9.3.7.2 Hydrocarbon Response Factors
A linearity verification of the analyzer shall be performed using
propane in air and purified synthetic air according to clause 9.2.1.3.
Response factors shall be determined when introducing an analyzer
into service and after major service intervals. The response factor (𝑟
) for a particular hydrocarbon species is the ratio of the FID C1
reading to the gas concentration in the cylinder expressed by ppm C1.
The concentration of the test gas shall be at a level to give a response
of approximately 80 per cent of full scale. The concentration shall be
known to an accuracy of ± 2 per cent in reference to a gravimetric
standard expressed in volume. In addition, the gas cylinder shall be
preconditioned for 24 hours at a temperature of 298 K ± 5 K (25 °C
± 5 °C).
The test gases to be used and the relative response factor ranges are
as follows:
a) Methane and purified synthetic air 1.00 ≤𝑟 ≤ 1.15;
b) Propylene and purified synthetic air 0.90 ≤ 𝑟 ≤ 1.1;
c) Toluene and purified synthetic air 0.90 ≤ 𝑟 ≤ 1.1.
These values are relative to a 𝑟 of 1 for propane and purified
synthetic air.
9.3.7.3 Oxygen Interference Check
For raw exhaust gas analyzers only, the oxygen interference check
shall be performed when introducing an analyzer into service and
after major service intervals.
A measuring range shall be chosen where the oxygen interference
check gases will fall in the upper 50 per cent. The test shall be
conducted with the oven temperature set as required. Oxygen
interference check gas specifications are found in clause 9.3.3.4.
a) The analyzer shall be set at zero;
117/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
b) The analyzer shall be spanned with the 0 per cent oxygen blend
for positive ignition engines. Compression ignition engine
instruments shall be spanned with the 21 per cent oxygen blend.
c) The zero response shall be rechecked. If it has changed by more
than 0.5 per cent of full scale, steps (a) and (b) of this clause
shall be repeated.
d) The 5 per cent and 10 per cent oxygen interference check gases
shall be introduced.
e) The zero response shall be rechecked. If it has changed by more
than ± 1 per cent of full scale, the test shall be repeated.
f) The oxygen interference 𝐸 shall be calculated for each mixture
in step (d) as follows:
𝐸 = 𝑐 , − 𝑐 × 100⁄𝑐 , (73)
With the analyzer response being
𝑐 , ×𝑐 , 𝑐 ,
𝑐= × (74)
𝑐 , 𝐶 ,
Where:
𝑐 , is the reference HC concentration in step (b), ppm C
𝑐 , is the reference HC concentration in step (d), ppm C
𝐶 , is the full scale HC concentration in step (b), ppm C
𝐶 , is the full scale HC concentration in step (d), ppm C
𝑐 , is the measured HC concentration in step (b), ppm C
𝑐 , is the measured HC concentration in step (d), ppm C
g) The oxygen interference 𝐸 shall be less than ± 1.5 per cent for
all required oxygen interference check gases prior to testing;
h) If the oxygen interference 𝐸 is greater than ± 1.5 per cent,
corrective action may be taken by incrementally adjusting the
airflow above and below the manufacturer's specifications, the
fuel flow and the sample flow;
The oxygen interference shall be repeated for each new setting
9.3.8 Efficiency of The Non-Methane Cutter (NMC)
The NMC is used for the removal of the non-methane hydrocarbons
from the sample gas by oxidizing all hydrocarbons except methane.
Ideally, the conversion for methane is 0 per cent, and for the other
hydrocarbons represented by ethane is 100 per cent. For the accurate
measurement of NMHC, the two efficiencies shall be determined and
used for the calculation of the NMHC emission mass flow rate (see
clause 8.6.2).
118/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
9.3.8.1 Methane Efficiency

Methane calibration gas shall be flown through the FID with and
without bypassing the NMC and the two concentrations recorded.
The efficiency shall be determined as follows:
𝑐 ( ⁄ )
𝐸 =1− (75)
𝑐 ( ⁄ )
Where:
𝑐 ( ⁄ ) is the HC concentration with CH4 flowing through the
NMC, ppm C
𝑐 ( ⁄ ) is the HC concentration with CH4 bypassing the NMC,
ppm C
9.3.8.2 Ethane Efficiency
Methane calibration gas shall be flown through the FID with and
without bypassing the NMC and the two concentrations recorded.
The efficiency shall be determined as follows:
𝑐 ( ⁄ )
𝐸 =1− (76)
𝑐 ( ⁄ )
Where:
𝑐 ( ⁄ ) is the HC concentration with C2H6 flowing through the
NMC, ppm C
𝑐 ( ⁄ ) is the HC concentration with C2H6 bypassing the NMC,
ppm C
9.3.9 Interference effects
Other gases than the one being analyzed can interfere with the reading
in several ways. Positive interference occurs in NDIR instruments
where the interfering gas gives the same effect as the gas being
measured, but to a lesser degree. Negative interference occurs in
NDIR instruments by the interfering gas broadening the absorption
band of the measured gas, and in CLD instruments by the interfering
gas quenching the reaction. The interference checks in clauses 9.3.9.1
and 9.3.9.3 shall be performed prior to an analyzer's initial use and
after major service intervals.
9.3.9.1 CO analyzer interference check
Water and CO2 can interfere with the CO analyzer performance.
Therefore, a CO2 span gas having a concentration of 80 to 100 per
cent of full scale of the maximum operating range used during testing
shall be bubbled through water at room temperature and the analyzer
response recorded. The analyzer response shall not be more than 2
per cent of the mean CO concentration expected during testing.
Interference procedures for CO2 and H2O may also be run separately.
If the CO2 and H2O levels used are higher than the maximum levels
expected during testing, each observed interference value shall be
scaled down by multiplying the observed interference by the ratio of
the maximum expected concentration value to the actual value used
119/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
during this procedure. Separate interference procedures

concentrations of H2O that are lower than the maximum levels
expected during testing may be run, but the observed H2O
interference shall be scaled up by multiplying the observed
interference by the ratio of the maximum expected H2O concentration
value to the actual value used during this procedure. The sum of the
two scaled interference values shall meet the tolerance specified in
this clause.
9.3.9.2 NOx analyzer quench checks for CLD analyzer
The two gases of concern for CLD (and HCLD) analyzers are CO2
and water vapour. Quench responses to these gases are proportional
to their concentrations, and therefore require test techniques to
determine the quench at the highest expected concentrations
experienced during testing. If the CLD analyzer uses quench
compensation algorithms that utilize H2O and/or CO2 measurement
instruments, quench shall be evaluated with these instruments active
and with the compensation algorithms applied
9.3.9.2.1 CO2 quench check
A CO2 span gas having a concentration of 80 to 100 per cent of full
scale of the maximum operating range shall be passed through the
NDIR analyzer and the CO2 value recorded as A. It shall then be
diluted approximately 50 per cent with NO span gas and passed
through the NDIR and CLD, with the CO2 and NO values recorded
as B and C, respectively. The CO2 shall then be shut off and only the
NO span gas be passed through the (H)CLD and the NO value
recorded as D.
(𝐶 × 𝐴)
𝐸 = 1− × 100 (77)
(𝐷 × 𝐴) − (𝐷 × 𝐵)
A the undiluted CO2 concentration measured with NDIR, per cent
B the diluted CO2 concentration measured with NDIR, per cent
C the diluted NO concentration measured with (H)CLD, ppm
D the undiluted NO concentration measured with (H)CLD, ppm
Alternative methods of diluting and quantifying of CO2 and NO span
gas values such as dynamic mixing/ blending are permitted with the
approval of the test agency.
9.3.9.2.2 Water Quench Check
This check applies to wet gas concentration measurements only.
Calculation of water quench shall consider dilution of the NO span
gas with water vapour and scaling of water vapour concentration of
the mixture to that expected during testing.
A NO span gas having a concentration of 80 per cent to 100 per cent
of full scale of the normal operating range shall be passed through the
(H)CLD and the NO value recorded as D. The NO span gas shall then
be bubbled through water at room temperature and passed through
the (H)CLD and the NO value recorded as C. The water temperature
120/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
shall be determined and recorded as F. The mixture's saturation

vapour pressure that corresponds to the bubbler water temperature (F)
shall be determined and recorded as G.
The water vapour concentration (in per cent) of the mixture shall be
calculated as follows:
𝐻 = 100 × (𝐺 ⁄𝑝 ) (78)
and recorded as H. The expected diluted NO span gas (in water
vapour) concentration shall be calculated as follows:
𝐷 = 𝐷 × (1 − 𝐻 ⁄100) (79)
and recorded as 𝐷 . The maximum exhaust water vapour
concentration (in per cent) expected during testing shall be estimated
from the maximum CO2 concentration in the exhaust gas A as
follows:
𝐻 = 𝛼 ⁄2 × 𝐴 (80)
and recorded as 𝐻
The per cent water quench shall be calculated as follows:
𝐸 = 100 × ((𝐷 − 𝐶)⁄𝐷 ) × (𝐻 ⁄𝐻) (81
𝐷 is the expected diluted NO concentration, ppm

C is the measured diluted NO concentration, ppm
𝐻 is the maximum water vapour concentration, per cent
H is the actual water vapour concentration, per cent
9.3.9.2.3 Maximum allowable quench
The combined CO2 and water quench shall not exceed 2 per cent of
full scale.
9.3.9.3 NOx analyzer quench check for NDUV analyzer
Hydrocarbons and H2O can positively interfere with a NDUV
analyzer by causing a response similar to NOx. If the NDUV analyzer
uses compensation algorithms that utilize measurements of other
gases to meet this interference verification, simultaneously such
measurements shall be conducted to test the algorithms during the
analyzer interference verification.
9.3.9.3.1 Procedure
The NDUV analyzer shall be started, operated, zeroed, and spanned
according to the instrument manufacturer's instructions. It is
recommended to extract engine exhaust to perform this verification.
A CLD shall be used to quantify NOx in the exhaust. The CLD
response shall be used as the reference value. Also HC shall be
measured in the exhaust with a FID analyzer. The FID response shall
be used as the reference hydrocarbon value.
Upstream of any sample dryer, if used during testing, the engine
exhaust shall be introduced into the NDUV analyzer. Time shall be
allowed for the analyzer response to stabilize. Stabilization time may
121/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
include time to purge the transfer line and to account for analyzer
response. While all analyzers measure the sample's concentration, 30
seconds of sampled data shall be recorded, and the arithmetic means
for the three analyzers calculated.
The CLD mean value shall be subtracted from the NDUV mean
value. This difference shall be multiplied by the ratio of the expected
mean HC concentration to the HC concentration measured during the
verification, as follows:
𝐸 ⁄ = 𝑐 , −𝑐 , ×
,
(82)
,
𝑐 , the measured NO x concentration with CLD, ppm

𝑐 , the measured NO x concentration with NDUV, ppm
𝑐 , the expected max. HC concentration, ppm
𝑐 , the measured HC concentration, ppm
9.3.9.3.2 Maximum allowable quench
The combined HC and water quench shall not exceed 2 per cent of
the NOx concentration expected during testing.
9.3.9.4 Sample dryer
A sample dryer removes water, which can otherwise interfere with a
NOx measurement
9.3.9.4.1 Sample Dryer Efficiency
For dry CLD analyzers, it shall be demonstrated that for the highest
expected water vapour concentration H m (see clause 9.3.9.2.2), the
sample dryer maintains CLD humidity at ≤ 5 g water/kg dry air (or
about 0.008 per cent H2O), which is 100 per cent relative humidity at
3.9 °C and 101.3 kPa. This humidity specification is also equivalent
to about 25 per cent relative humidity at 25 °C and 101.3 kPa. This
may be demonstrated by measuring the temperature at the outlet of a
thermal dehumidifier, or by measuring humidity at a point just
upstream of the CLD. Humidity of the CLD exhaust might also be
measured as long as the only flow into the CLD is the flow from the
dehumidifier.
9.3.9.4.2 Sample Dryer NO2 Penetration
Liquid water remaining in an improperly designed sample dryer can
remove NO2 from the sample. If a sample dryer is used in
combination with an NDUV analyzer without an NO2 /NO converter
upstream, it could therefore remove NO2 from the sample prior NO x
measurement.
The sample dryer shall allow for measuring at least 95 per cent of
the total NO2 at the maximum expected concentration of NO2.
122/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
9.3.10 Sampling for raw gaseous emissions, if applicable

The gaseous emissions sampling probes shall be fitted at least 0.5 m
or three times the diameter of the exhaust pipe - whichever is the
larger - upstream of the exit of the exhaust gas system but sufficiently
close to the engine as to ensure an exhaust gas temperature of at least
343 K (70 °C) at the probe.
In the case of a multi-cylinder engine with a branched exhaust
manifold, the inlet of the probe shall be located sufficiently far
downstream so as to ensure that the sample is representative of the
average exhaust emissions from all cylinders. In multi-cylinder
engines having distinct groups of manifolds, such as in a "Vee"
engine configuration, it is recommended to combine the manifolds
upstream of the sampling probe. If this is not practical, it is
permissible to acquire a sample from the group with the highest CO2
emission. For exhaust emission calculation the total exhaust mass
flow shall be used.
If the engine is equipped with an exhaust after-treatment system, the
exhaust sample shall be taken downstream of the exhaust after-
treatment system.
9.3.11 Sampling for dilute gaseous emissions, if applicable
The exhaust pipe between the engine and the full flow dilution system
shall conform to the requirements laid down in Appendix 2 to this
chapter. The gaseous emissions sample probe(s) shall be installed in
the dilution tunnel at a point where the diluent and exhaust gas are
well mixed, and in close proximity to the particulates sampling probe.
Sampling can generally be done in two ways:
a) The emissions are sampled into a sampling bag over the cycle and
measured after completion of the test; for HC, the sample bag
shall be heated to 464 ± 11 K (191 ± 11 °C), for NOx, the sample
bag temperature shall be above the dew point temperature;
b) The emissions are sampled continuously and integrated over the
cycle.
The background concentration shall be determined upstream of the
dilution tunnel according to (a) or (b), and shall be subtracted from
the emissions concentration according to clause 8.5.2.3.2.
9.4 Particulate Measurement and Sampling System
9.4.1 General specifications
To determine the mass of the particulates, a particulate dilution and
sampling system, a particulate sampling filter, a microgram balance,
and a temperature and humidity controlled weighing chamber, are
required. The particulate sampling system shall be designed to ensure
a representative sample of the particulates proportional to the exhaust
flow.
123/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
9.4.2 General requirements of the dilution system

The determination of the particulates requires dilution of the sample
with filtered ambient air, synthetic air or nitrogen (the diluent). The
dilution system shall be set as follows:
a) Completely eliminate water condensation in the dilution and
sampling systems;
b) Maintain the temperature of the diluted exhaust gas between 315
K (42 °C) and 325 K (52 °C) within 20 cm upstream or
downstream of the filter holder(s);
c) The diluent temperature shall be between 293 K and 315 K (20
°C to 42 °C) in close proximity to the entrance into the dilution
tunnel;
d) The minimum dilution ratio shall be within the range of 5:1 to 7:1
and at least 2:1 for the primary dilution stage based on the
maximum engine exhaust flow rate;
e) For a partial flow dilution system, the residence time in the
system from the point of diluent introduction to the filter
holder(s) shall be between 0.5 and 5 seconds;
f) For a full flow dilution system, the overall residence time in the
system from the point of diluent introduction to the filter
holder(s) shall be between 1 and 5 seconds, and the residence
time in the secondary dilution system, if used, from the point of
secondary diluent introduction to the filter holder(s) shall be at
least 0.5 seconds.
Dehumidifying the diluent before entering the dilution system is
permitted, and especially useful if diluent humidity is high.
9.4.3.1 Partial flow dilution system
The particulate sampling probe shall be installed in close proximity
to the gaseous emissions sampling probe, but sufficiently distant as
to not cause interference. Therefore, the installation provisions of
clause 9.3.10 also apply to particulate sampling. The sampling line
shall conform to the requirements laid down in Appendix 2 to this
chapter.
In the case of a multi-cylinder engine with a branched exhaust
manifold, the inlet of the probe shall be located sufficiently far
downstream so as to ensure that the sample is representative of the
average exhaust emissions from all cylinders. In multi-cylinder
engines having distinct groups of manifolds, such as in a "Vee"
engine configuration, it is recommended to combine the manifolds
upstream of the sampling probe. If this is not practical, it is
permissible to acquire a sample from the group with the highest
particulate emission. For exhaust emission calculation the total
exhaust mass flow of the manifold shall be used.
124/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
9.4.3.2 Full flow dilution system

The particulate sampling probe shall be installed in close proximity
to the gaseous emissions sampling probe, but sufficiently distant as
to not cause interference, in the dilution tunnel. Therefore, the
installation provisions of clause 9.3.11 also apply to particulate
sampling. The sampling line shall conform to the requirements laid
down in Appendix 2 to this chapter.
9.4.4 Particulate sampling filters
The diluted exhaust shall be sampled by a filter that meets the
requirements of clause 9.4.4.1 to 9.4.4.3 during the test sequence.
9.4.4.1 Filter specification
All filter types shall have a 0.3 μm DOP (di-octylphthalate) or PAO
(poly-alpha-olefin) collection efficiency of at least 99 per cent. The
sample filter manufacturer’s measurements reflected in their product
ratings may be used to show this requirement. The filter material shall
be either:
a) Fluorocarbon (PTFE) coated glass fibre, or
b) Fluorocarbon (PTFE) membrane.
9.4.4.2 Filter size
The filter shall be circular with a nominal diameter of 47 mm
(tolerance of 46.50 ± 0.6 mm) and an exposed diameter (filter stain
diameter) of at least 38 mm.
9.4.4.3 Filter face velocity
The face velocity through the filter shall be between 0.90 and 1.00
m/s with less than 5 per cent of the recorded flow values exceeding
this range. If the total PM mass on the filter exceeds 400 μg, the filter
face velocity may be reduced to 0.50 m/s. The face velocity shall be
calculated as the volumetric flow rate of the sample at the pressure
upstream of the filter and temperature of the filter face, divided by
the filter's exposed area.
9.4.5 Weighing chamber and analytical balance specifications
The chamber (or room) environment shall be free of any ambient
contaminants (such as dust, aerosol, or semi- volatile material) that
could contaminate the particulate filters. The weighing room shall
meet the required specifications for at least 60 min before weighing
filters.
9.4.5.1 Weighing Chamber Conditions
The temperature of the chamber (or room) in which the particulate
filters are conditioned and weighed shall be maintained to within 295
K ± 1 K (22 °C ± 1 °C) during all filter conditioning and weighing.
The humidity shall be maintained to a dew point of 282.5 K ± 1 K
(9.5 °C ± 1 °C).
If the stabilization and weighing environments are separate, the
temperature of the stabilization environment shall be maintained at a
125/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
tolerance of 295 K ± 3 K (22 °C ± 3 °C), but the dew point

requirement remains at 282.5 K ± 1 K (9.5 °C ± 1 °C).
Humidity and ambient temperature shall be recorded.
9.4.5.2 Reference filter weighing
At least two unused reference filters shall be weighed within 12 hours
of, but preferably at the same time as the sample filter weighing. They
shall be the same material as the sample filters. Buoyancy correction
shall be applied to the weighings.
If the weight of any of the reference filters changes between sample
filter weighing by more than 10 μg, all sample filters shall be
discarded and the emissions test repeated.
The reference filters shall be periodically replaced based on good
engineering judgement, but at least once per year.
9.4.5.3 Analytical Balance
The analytical balance used to determine the filter weight shall meet
the linearity verification criterion of clause 9.2, Table 7. This implies
a precision (standard deviation) of at least 2 μg and a resolution of at
least 1 μg (1 digit = 1 μg).
In order to ensure accurate filter weighing, it is recommended that the
balance be installed as follows:
a) Installed on a vibration-isolation platform to isolate it from
external noise and vibration;
b) Shielded from convective airflow with a static-dissipating draft
shield that is electrically grounded.
9.4.5.4 Elimination of Static Electricity Effects
The filter shall be neutralized prior to weighing, e.g. by a Polonium
neutralizer or a device of similar effect. If a PTFE membrane filter is
used, the static electricity shall be measured and is recommended to
be within ± 2.0 V of neutral.
Static electric charge shall be minimized in the balance environment.
Possible methods are as follows:
a) The balance shall be electrically grounded;
b) Stainless steel tweezers shall be used if PM samples are handled
manually;
c) Tweezers shall be grounded with a grounding strap, or a grounding
strap shall be provided for the operator such that the grounding
strap shares a common ground with the balance. Grounding straps
shall have an appropriate resistor to protect operators from
accidental shock.
9.4.5.5 Additional specifications
All parts of the dilution system and the sampling system from the
exhaust pipe up to the filter holder, which are in contact with raw and
diluted exhaust gas, shall be designed to minimize deposition or
126/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
alteration of the particulates. All parts shall be made of electrically

conductive materials that do not react with exhaust gas components,
and shall be electrically grounded to prevent electrostatic effects.
9.4.5.6 Calibration of The Flow Measurement Instrumentation
Each flowmeter used in a particulate sampling and partial flow
dilution system shall be subjected to the linearity verification, as
described in clause 9.2.1, as often as necessary to fulfil the accuracy
requirements of this Standard. For the flow reference values, an
accurate flowmeter traceable to international and/or national
standards shall be used. For differential flow measurement calibration
see clause 9.4.6.2.
9.4.6 Special requirements for the partial flow dilution system
The partial flow dilution system has to be designed to extract a
proportional raw exhaust sample from the engine exhaust stream,
thus responding to excursions in the exhaust stream flow rate. For this
it is essential that the dilution ratio or the sampling ratio 𝑟 or 𝑟 be
determined such that the accuracy requirements of clause 9.4.6.2 are
fulfilled.
9.4.6.1 System Response Time
For the control of a partial flow dilution system, a fast system
response is required. The transformation time for the system shall be
determined by the procedure in clause 9.4.6.6. If the combined
transformation time of the exhaust flow measurement (see clause
8.4.1.2) and the partial flow system is ≤ 0.3 second, online control
shall be used. If the transformation time exceeds 0.3 second, look
ahead control based on a pre- recorded test run shall be used. In this
case, the combined rise time shall be ≤ 1 second and the combined
delay time ≤ 10 seconds.
The total system response shall be designed as to ensure a
representative sample of the particulates, 𝑞 , , proportional to the
exhaust mass flow. To determine the proportionality, a regression
analysis of 𝑞 , versus 𝑞 , shall be conducted on a minimum 5
Hz data acquisition rate, and the following criteria shall be met:
a) The coefficient of determination 𝑟 of the linear regression
between 𝑞 , and 𝑞 , shall not be less than 0.95;
b) The standard error of estimate of 𝑞 , on 𝑞 , shall not exceed
5 per cent of 𝑞 maximum;
c) 𝑞 intercept of the regression line shall not exceed ± 2 per cent

of 𝑞 maximum.
Look-ahead control is required if the combined transformation times
of the particulate system,𝑡 , and of the exhaust mass flow signal,
𝑡 , are > 0.3 second. In this case, a pre-test shall be run, and the
exhaust mass flow signal of the pre-test be used for controlling the
sample flow into the particulate system. A correct control of the
127/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
partial dilution system is obtained, if the time trace of 𝑞 , of the

pre-test, which controls 𝑞 , is shifted by a "look-ahead" time of
𝑡 , +𝑡 , .
For establishing the correlation between 𝑞 , and 𝑞 , the data
taken during the actual test shall be used, with𝑞 , time aligned by
𝑡 , relative to 𝑞 , (no contribution from 𝑡 , to the time
alignment). That is, the time shift between 𝑞 and 𝑞 is the
difference in their transformation times that were determined in
clause 9.4.6.6.
9.4.6.2 Specifications for differential flow measurement
For partial flow dilution systems, the accuracy of the sample flow
𝑞 is of special concern, if not measured directly, but determined by
differential flow measurement:
𝑞 =𝑞 −𝑞 (83)
In this case, the maximum error of the difference shall be such that
the accuracy of 𝑞 is within ± 5 per cent when the dilution ratio is
less than 15. It can be calculated by taking root-mean-square of the
errors of each instrument.
Acceptable accuracies of 𝑞 can be obtained by either of the
following methods:
a) The absolute accuracies of 𝑞 and 𝑞 are ± 0.2 per cent
which guarantees an accuracy of 𝑞 of ≤ 5 per cent at a dilution
ratio of 15. However, greater errors will occur at higher dilution
ratios;
b) Calibration of 𝑞 relative to 𝑞 is carried out such that the
same accuracies for 𝑞 as in (a) are obtained. For details see
clause 9.4.6.3;
c) The accuracy of 𝑞 is determined indirectly from the accuracy
of the dilution ratio as determined by a tracer gas, e.g. CO2.
Accuracies equivalent to method (a) for 𝑞 are required;
d) The absolute accuracy of 𝑞 and 𝑞 is within ± 2 per cent
of full scale, the maximum error of the difference between
𝑞 and 𝑞 is within 0.2 per cent, and the linearity error is
within ± 0.2 per cent of the highest 𝑞 observed during the
test.
9.4.6.3 Calibration of Differential Flow Measurement
The flowmeter or the flow measurement instrumentation shall be
calibrated in one of the following procedures, such that the probe flow
𝑞 into the tunnel shall fulfil the accuracy requirements of clause
9.4.6.2:
a) The flowmeter for 𝑞 shall be connected in series to the
flowmeter for 𝑞 , the difference between the two flowmeters
shall be calibrated for at least five set points with flow values
equally spaced between the lowest 𝑞 value used during the test
128/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
and the value of 𝑞 used during the test. The dilution tunnel
may be bypassed;
b) A calibrated flow device shall be connected in series to the
flowmeter for 𝑞 and the accuracy shall be checked for the
value used for the test. The calibrated flow device shall be
connected in series to the flowmeter for 𝑞 , and the accuracy
shall be checked for at least five settings corresponding to dilution
ratio between 3 and 50, relative to 𝑞 used during the test;
c) The transfer tube (TT) shall be disconnected from the exhaust, and
a calibrated flow-measuring device with a suitable range to
measure 𝑞 shall be connected to the transfer tube. 𝑞 shall be
set to the value used during the test, and 𝑞 shall be sequentially
set to at least five values corresponding to dilution ratios between
3 and 50. Alternatively, a special calibration flow path may be
provided, in which the tunnel is bypassed, but the total and diluent
flow through the corresponding meters as in the actual test;
d) A tracer gas shall be fed into the exhaust transfer tube TT. This
tracer gas may be a component of the exhaust gas, like CO2 or NOx.
After dilution in the tunnel the tracer gas component shall be
measured. This shall be carried out for five dilution ratios between
3 and 50. The accuracy of the sample flow shall be determined from
the dilution ratio 𝑟 :
𝑞 =𝑞 ⁄𝑟 (84)
The accuracies of the gas analyzers shall be taken into
account to guarantee the accuracy of 𝑞 .
9.4.6.4 Carbon flow check
A carbon flow check using actual exhaust is strongly recommended
for detecting measurement and control problems and verifying the
proper operation of the partial flow system. The carbon flow check
should be run at least each time a new engine is installed, or
something significant is changed in the test cell configuration.
The engine shall be operated at peak torque load and speed or any
other steady state mode that produces 5 per cent or more of CO 2. The
partial flow sampling system shall be operated with a dilution factor
of about 15 to 1.
If a carbon flow check is conducted, the procedure given in Appendix

4 shall be applied. The carbon flow rates shall be calculated according
to equations 112 to 114 in Appendix 4 to this chapter. All carbon flow
rates should agree to within 3 per cent.
9.4.6.5 Pre-test check
A pre-test check shall be performed within 2 hours before the test run
in the following way.
The accuracy of the flowmeters shall be checked by the same method
as used for calibration (see clause 9.4.6.2) for at least two points,
129/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
including flow values of 𝑞 that correspond to dilution ratios

between 5 and 15 for the 𝑞 value used during the test.
If it can be demonstrated by records of the calibration procedure
under clause 9.4.6.2 that the flowmeter calibration is stable over a
longer period of time, the pre-test check may be omitted.
9.4.6.6 Determination of the Transformation Time
The system settings for the transformation time evaluation shall be
exactly the same as during measurement of the test run. The
transformation time shall be determined by the following method.
An independent reference flowmeter with a measurement range
appropriate for the probe flow shall be put in series with and closely
coupled to the probe. This flowmeter shall have a transformation time
of less than 100 ms for the flow step size used in the response time
measurement, with flow restriction sufficiently low as to not affect
the dynamic performance of the partial flow dilution system, and
consistent with good engineering practice.
A step change shall be introduced to the exhaust flow (or airflow if
exhaust flow is calculated) input of the partial flow dilution system,
from a low flow to at least 90 per cent of maximum exhaust flow. The
trigger for the step change shall be the same one used to start the look-
ahead control in actual testing. The exhaust flow step stimulus and
the flowmeter response shall be recorded at a sample rate of at least
10 Hz.
From this data, the transformation time shall be determined for the
partial flow dilution system, which is the time from the initiation of
the step stimulus to the 50 per cent point of the flowmeter response.
In a similar manner, the transformation times of the 𝑞 signal of the
partial flow dilution system and of the 𝑞 , signal of the exhaust
flowmeter shall be determined. These signals are used in the
regression checks performed after each test (see clause 9.4.6.1).
The calculation shall be repeated for at least 5 rise and fall stimuli,
and the results shall be averaged. The internal transformation time (<
100 ms) of the reference flowmeter shall be subtracted from this
value. This is the "look-ahead" value of the partial flow dilution
system, which shall be applied in accordance with clause 9.4.6.1.
9.5 Calibration of The CVS System
9.5.1 General
The CVS system shall be calibrated by using an accurate flowmeter
and a restricting device. The flow through the system shall be
measured at different restriction settings, and the control parameters
of the system shall be measured and related to the flow.
Various types of flowmeters may be used, e.g. calibrated venturi,
calibrated laminar flowmeter, calibrated turbine meter.
130/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
9.5.2 Calibration of the positive displacement pump (PDP)

All the parameters related to the pump shall be simultaneously
measured along with the parameters related to a calibration venturi
which is connected in series with the pump. The calculated flow rate
(in m3/s at pump inlet, absolute pressure and temperature) shall be
plotted versus a correlation function which is the value of a specific
combination of pump parameters. The linear equation which relates
the pump flow and the correlation function shall be determined. If a
CVS has a multiple speed drive, the calibration shall be performed
for each range used.
Temperature stability shall be maintained during calibration.
Leaks in all the connections and ducting between the calibration
venturi and the CVS pump shall be maintained lower than 0.3 per
cent of the lowest flow point (highest restriction and lowest PDP
speed point).
9.5.2.1 Data Analysis
The airflow rate (𝑞 ) at each restriction setting (minimum six
settings) shall be calculated in standard m3/s from the flowmeter data
using the manufacturer's prescribed method. The airflow rate shall
then be converted to pump flow (𝑉 ) in m3/rev at absolute pump inlet
temperature and pressure as follows:
𝑞 𝑇 101.3
𝑉 = × × (85)
𝑛 273 𝑝
Where:
𝑞 is the airflow rate at standard conditions (101.3 kPa, 273 K),
3
m /s
T is the temperature at pump inlet, K
𝑝 is the absolute pressure at pump inlet, kPa
n is the pump speed,
To account for the interaction of pressure variations at the pump and
the pump slip rate, the correlation function (𝑋 ) between pump
speed, pressure differential from pump inlet to pump outlet and
absolute pump outlet pressure shall be calculated as follows:
1 ∆𝑝
𝑋 = × (86)
𝑛 𝑝
Where:
∆𝑝 is the pressure differential from pump inlet to pump outlet, kPa
𝑝 is the absolute outlet pressure at pump outlet, kPa
A linear least-square fit shall be performed to generate the calibration
equation as follows:
𝑉 =𝐷 −𝑚×𝑋 (87)
131/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
𝐷 and m are the intercept and slope, respectively, describing the

regression lines.
For a CVS system with multiple speeds, the calibration curves
generated for the different pump flow ranges shall be approximately
parallel, and the intercept values (𝐷 ) shall increase as the pump flow
range decreases.
The calculated values from the equation shall be within ± 0.5 per cent
of the measured value of 𝑉 . Values of m will vary from one pump
to another. Particulate influx over time will cause the pump slip to
decrease, as reflected by lower values for m. Therefore, calibration
shall be performed at pump start-up, after major maintenance, and if
the total system verification indicates a change of the slip rate.
9.5.3 Calibration of the critical flow venturi (CFV)
Calibration of the CFV is based upon the flow equation for a critical
venturi. Gas flow is a function of venturi inlet pressure and
temperature.
To determine the range of critical flow,𝐾 shall be plotted as a
function of venturi inlet pressure. For critical (choked) flow, 𝐾 will
have a relatively constant value. As pressure decreases (vacuum
increases), the venturi becomes unchoked and 𝐾 decreases, which
indicates that the CFV is operated outside the permissible range.
9.5.3.1 Data Analysis
The airflow rate (𝑞 ) at each restriction setting (minimum 8
using the manufacturer's prescribed method. The calibration
coefficient shall be calculated from the calibration data for each
setting as follows:
𝑞 × √𝑇
𝐾 = (88)
𝑝
Where:
𝑞 is the airflow rate at standard conditions (101.3 kPa, 273 K),
m3/s
𝑝 is the absolute pressure at venturi inlet, kPa
The average 𝐾 and the standard deviation shall be calculated. The
standard deviation shall not exceed ± 0.3 per cent of the average 𝐾 .
9.5.4 Calibration of the subsonic venturi (SSV)
Calibration of the SSV is based upon the flow equation for a subsonic
venturi. Gas flow is a function of inlet pressure and temperature,
pressure drop between the SSV inlet and throat, as shown in equation
53 (see clause 8.5.1.4).
132/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
9.5.4.1 Data analysis

The airflow rate (𝑄 ) at each restriction setting (minimum 16
using the manufacturer's prescribed method. The discharge
coefficient shall be calculated from the calibration data for each
setting as follows:
𝑄
𝐶 = (89)
1 . . 1
𝑑 ×𝑝 × (𝑟 −𝑟 )× .
𝑇 1−𝑟 𝑟
Where:
𝑄 is the airflow rate at standard conditions (101.3 kPa, 273 K)
m 3 /s
𝑑 is the diameter of the SSV throat, m
𝑟 is the ratio of the SSV throat to inlet absolute static pressure = 1 −
∆
𝑟 is the ratio of the SSV throat diameter, 𝑑 , to the inlet pipe inner
diameter D
To determine the range of subsonic flow,𝐶 shall be plotted as a
function of Reynolds number Re, at the SSV throat. The Re at the
SSV throat shall be calculated with the following equation:
𝑄
𝑅𝑒 = 𝐴 × (90)
𝑑𝑣 × 𝜇
With
𝑏×𝑇 .
𝜇=
𝑆+𝑇
Where:
𝐴 is 25.55152 in SI units of
𝑄 is the airflow rate at standard conditions (101,3 kPa, 273 K),
m 3 /s
𝑑 is the diameter of the SSV throat, m
μ is the absolute or dynamic viscosity of the gas, kg/ms
b is 1.458 × 106 (empirical constant), kg/ms K0.5
S is 110.4 (empirical constant), K
Because 𝑄 is an input to the Re equation, the calculations shall be
started with an initial guess for 𝑄 or 𝐶 of the calibration venturi,
and repeated until 𝑄 converges. The convergence method shall be
accurate to 0.1 per cent of point or better.
For a minimum of sixteen points in the region of subsonic flow, the
calculated values of 𝐶 from the resulting calibration curve fit
133/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
equation shall be within ± 0.5 per cent of the measured 𝐶 for each
calibration point.
9.5.5 Total System Verification
The total accuracy of the CVS sampling system and analytical system
shall be determined by introducing a known mass of a pollutant gas
into the system while it is being operated in the normal manner. The
pollutant is analyzed, and the mass calculated according to
clause8.5.2.3 except in the case of propane where a u factor of
0.000472 is used in place of 0.000480 for HC. Either of the following
two techniques shall be used.
9.5.5.1 Metering with A Critical Flow Orifice
A known quantity of pure gas (carbon monoxide or propane) shall be
fed into the CVS system through a calibrated critical orifice. If the
inlet pressure is high enough, the flow rate, which is adjusted by
means of the critical flow orifice, is independent of the orifice outlet
pressure (critical flow). The CVS system shall be operated as in a
normal exhaust emission test for about 5 to 10 minutes. A gas sample
shall be analyzed with the usual equipment (sampling bag or
integrating method), and the mass of the gas calculated.
The mass so determined shall be within ± 3 per cent of the known
mass of the gas injected.
9.5.5.2 Metering by means of a gravimetric technique
The mass of a small cylinder filled with carbon monoxide or propane
shall be determined with a precision of ± 0.01 g. For about 5 to 10
minutes, the CVS system shall be operated as in a normal exhaust
emission test, while carbon monoxide or propane is injected into the
system. The quantity of pure gas discharged shall be determined by
means of differential weighing. A gas sample shall be analyzed with
the usual equipment (sampling bag or integrating method), and the
mass of the gas calculated.
The mass so determined shall be within ± 3 per cent of the known
mass of the gas injected.
10.0 PARTICLE NUMBER MEASUREMENT TEST PROCEDURE
10.1 Sampling
Particle number emissions shall be measured by continuous sampling
from either a partial flow dilution system, as described in Appendix
2 to this chapter, clause A.2.2.1 and A.2.2.2 or a full flow dilution
system as described in Appendix 2 to this chapter, clause A.2.2.3 and
A.2.2.4.
10.1.1 Diluent Filtration
Diluent used for both the primary and, where applicable, secondary
dilution of the exhaust in the dilution system shall be passed through
filters meeting the High-Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) filter
requirements defined in Appendix 2 to this chapter, clause A.2.2.2 or
A.2.2.4. The diluent may optionally be charcoal scrubbed before
134/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
being passed to the HEPA filter to reduce and stabilize the

hydrocarbon concentrations in the diluent. It is recommended that an
additional coarse particle filter is situated before the HEPA filter and
after the charcoal scrubber, if used.
10.2 Compensating for particle number sample flow – full flow dilution
systems
To compensate for the mass flow extracted from the dilution system
for particle number sampling the extracted mass flow (filtered) shall
be returned to the dilution system. Alternatively, the total mass flow
in the dilution system may be mathematically corrected for the
particle number sample flow extracted. Where the total mass flow
extracted from the dilution system for the sum of particle number
sampling and particulate mass sampling is less than 0.5 per cent of
the total dilute exhaust gas flow in the dilution tunnel (m_ed ) this
correction, or flow return, may be neglected.
10.3 Compensating for particle number sample flow – partial flow dilution
systems
10.3.1 For partial flow dilution systems, the mass flow extracted from the
dilution system for particle number sampling shall be accounted for
in controlling the proportionality of sampling. This shall be achieved
either by feeding the particle number sample flow back into the
dilution system upstream of the flow measuring device or by
mathematical correction as outlined in clause 10.3.2. In the case of
total sampling type partial flow dilution systems, the mass flow
extracted for particle number sampling shall also be corrected for in
the particulate mass calculation as outlined in clause 10.3.3.
10.3.2 The instantaneous exhaust gas flow rate into the dilution system (q
mp), used for controlling the proportionality of sampling, shall be
corrected according to one of the following methods:
In the case where the extracted particle number sample flow is
discarded, equation 83 in clause 9.4.6.2.shall be replaced by the
following:
𝑞 =𝑞 −𝑞 +𝑞 (92)
Where:
𝑞 = sample flow of exhaust gas into partial flow dilution system,
kg/s,
𝑞 = diluted exhaust mass flow rate, kg/s,
𝑞 = dilution air mass flow rate, kg/s,
𝑞 = particle number sample mass flow rate, kg/s.
The 𝑞 signal sent to the partial flow system controller shall be
accurate to within 0.1 per cent of 𝑞 at all times and should be
sent with frequency of at least 1 Hz.
135/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
In the case where the extracted particle number sample flow is fully
or partially discarded, but an equivalent flow is fed back to the
dilution system upstream of the flow measurement device, equation
83 in clause 9.4.6.2. shall be replaced by the following:
𝑞 =𝑞 −𝑞 +𝑞 −𝑞 (93)
Where:
𝑞 = sample flow of exhaust gas into partial flow dilution system,
kg/s,
𝑞 = diluted exhaust mass flow rate, kg/s,
𝑞 = dilution air mass flow rate, kg/s,
𝑞 = particle number sample mass flow rate, kg/s,
𝑞 = mass flow rate fed back into dilution tunnel to compensate for
particle number sample extraction, kg/s.
The difference between 𝑞 and 𝑞 sent to the partial flow system
controller shall be accurate to within 0.1 per cent of 𝑞 at all times.
The signal (or signals) should be sent with frequency of at least 1 Hz.
10.3.3 Correction of PM measurement
When a particle number sample flow is extracted from a total
sampling partial flow dilution system, the mass of particulates (𝑚
) calculated in clause 8.4.3.2.1 or 8.4.3.2.2 shall be corrected as
follows to account for the flow extracted. This correction is required
even where filtered extracted flow is fed back into the partial flow
dilution systems.
𝑚
𝑚 , =𝑚 × (94)
(𝑚 − 𝑚 )
Where:
𝑚 , = mass of particulates corrected for extraction of particle
number sample flow, g/test,
𝑚 = mass of particulates determined according to clause 8.4.3.2.1
or 8.4.3.2.2, g/test,
𝑚 = total mass of diluted exhaust gas passing through the dilution
tunnel, kg,
𝑚 = total mass of diluted exhaust gas extracted from the dilution
tunnel for particle number sampling, kg.
10.3.4 Proportionality of Partial Flow Dilution Sampling
For particle number measurement, exhaust mass flow rate,
determined according to any of the methods described in clauses
8.4.1.3 to 8.4.1.7, is used for controlling the partial flow dilution
system to take a sample proportional to the exhaust mass flow rate.
The quality of proportionality shall be checked by applying a
136/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
regression analysis between sample and exhaust flow in accordance

with clause 9.4.6.1.
10.4 Determination of particle numbers
10.4.1 Time alignment
For partial flow dilution systems residence time in the particle
number sampling and measurement system shall be accounted for by
time aligning the particle number signal with the test cycle and the
exhaust gas mass flow rate according to the procedure in clause
8.4.2.2. The transformation time of the particle number sampling and
measurement system shall be determined according to clause
A.8.1.3.7 of Appendix 8 to this chapter
10.4.2 Determination of particle numbers with a partial flow dilution system
Where particle numbers are sampled using a partial flow dilution
system according to the procedures set out in clause 8.4., the number
of particles emitted over the test cycle shall be calculated by means
of the following equation:
𝑚
𝑁= × 𝑘 × 𝑐 × 𝑓 × 10 (95)
1.293
Where:
N = number of particles emitted over the test cycle,
𝑚 = mass of equivalent diluted exhaust gas over the cycle,
determined according to clause 8.4.3.2.2, kg/test,
k = calibration factor to correct the particle number counter
measurements to the level of the reference instrument where this is
not applied internally within the particle number counter. Where the
calibration factor is applied internally within the particle number
counter, a value of 1 shall be used for k in the above equation,
𝑐 = average concentration of particles from the diluted exhaust gas
corrected to standard conditions (273.2 K and 101.33 kPa), particles
per cubic centimetre,
𝑓 = mean particle concentration reduction factor of the volatile
particle remover specific to the dilution settings used for the test.
𝑐 = shall be calculated from the following equation:
∑ 𝑐 ,
𝑐 = (96)
𝑛
Where:
𝑐 , = a discrete measurement of particle concentration in the diluted
gas exhaust from the particle counter, corrected for coincidence and
to standard conditions (273.2 K and 101.33 kPa), particles per cubic
centimetre,
n = number of particle concentration measurements taken over the
duration of the test.
137/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
10.4.3 Determination of particle numbers with a full flow dilution system

Where particle numbers are sampled using a full flow dilution system
according to the procedures set out in clause 8.5., the number of
particles emitted over the test cycle shall be calculated by means of
the following equation:
𝑚
𝑁= × 𝑘 × 𝑐 × 𝑓 × 10 (97)
1.293
Where:
N = number of particles emitted over the test cycle,
𝑚 = total diluted exhaust gas flow over the cycle calculated
according to any one of the methods described in clauses 8.5.1.2 to
8.5.1.4, kg/test,
k = calibration factor to correct the particle number counter
measurements to the level of the reference instrument where this is
not applied internally within the particle number counter. Where the
calibration factor is applied internally within the particle number
counter, a value of 1 shall be used for k in the above equation,
𝑐 = average corrected concentration of particles from the diluted
exhaust gas corrected to standard conditions (273.2 K and 101.33
kPa), particles per cubic centimetre,
𝑓 = mean particle concentration reduction factor of the volatile
particle remover specific to the dilution settings used for the test.
𝑐 = shall be calculated from the following equation:
∑ 𝑐,
𝑐 = (98)
𝑛
Where:
𝑐 , = a discrete measurement of particle concentration in the diluted
gas exhaust from the particle counter, corrected for coincidence and
to standard conditions (273.2 K and 101.33 kPa), particles per cubic
centimetre,
n = number of particle concentration measurements taken over the
duration of the test.
10.4.4 Test result
10.4.4.1 Calculation of the specific emissions
For each individual WHSC, hot WHTC and cold WHTC the specific
emissions in number of particles/kWh shall be calculated as follows
𝑁
𝑒= (99)
𝑊
Where:
e = is the number of particles emitted per kWh,
𝑊 = is the actual cycle work according to clause 7.8.6, in kWh.
138/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
10.4.4.2 Exhaust after-treatment systems with periodic regeneration

For engines equipped with periodically regenerating after-treatment
systems, the general provisions of clause 6.6.2 apply. The WHTC hot
start emissions shall be weighted according to equation 5 where 𝑒̅ is
the average number of particles/kWh without regeneration, and𝑒 is
the average number of particles/kWh with regeneration. The
calculation of the regeneration adjustment factors shall be done
according to equations 6, 6a, 7 or 8, as appropriate.
10.4.4.3 Weighted average WHTC test result
For the WHTC, the final test result shall be a weighted average from
cold start and hot start (including periodic regeneration where
relevant) tests calculated using one of the following equations:
(a) In the case of multiplicative regeneration adjustment, or engines
without periodically regenerating after- treatment
(0.14 × 𝑁 ) + (0.86 × 𝑁 )
𝑒=𝑘 (100)
(0.14 × 𝑊 ) + (0.86 × 𝑊 )
(b) In the case of additive regeneration adjustment hot

(0.14 × 𝑁 ) + (0.86 × 𝑁 )
𝑒=𝑘 + (101)
0.14 × 𝑊 , + 0.86 × 𝑊 ,
Where:
𝑁 = is the total number of particles emitted over the WHTC cold
test cycle,
𝑁 = is the total number of particles emitted over the WHTC hot test
cycle,
𝑊 , = is the actual cycle work over the WHTC cold test cycle
according to clause 7.8.6, in kWh,
𝑊 , = is the actual cycle work over the WHTC hot test cycle
according to clause 7.8.6, in kWh,
𝑘 = is the regeneration adjustment, according to clause 6.6.2, or in
the case of engines without periodically regenerating after-treatment
𝑘 =1
10.4.4.4 Rounding of final results
The final WHSC and weighted average WHTC test results shall be
rounded in one step to three significant figures in accordance with
ASTM E 29–06B. No rounding of intermediate values leading to the
final brake specific emission result is permissible.
10.5 Determination of particle number background
10.5.1 At the engine manufacturer’s request, dilution tunnel background
particle number concentrations may be sampled, prior to or after the
test, from a point downstream of the particle and hydrocarbon filters
into the particle number measurement system, to determine the tunnel
background particle concentrations.
139/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
10.5.2 Subtraction of particle number tunnel background concentrations

shall not be allowed for type approval, but may be used at the
manufacturer’s request, with the prior approval of the test agency, for
conformity of production testing, if it can be demonstrated that tunnel
background contribution is significant, which can then be subtracted
from the values measured in the diluted exhaust
140/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
CHAPTER 3-APPENDIX 1
WHTC ENGINE DYNAMOMETER SCHEDULE
Time Normal Normal Time Normal Normal Time Normal Normal
speed % torque% speed % torque% speed% torque%
(s) (s) (s)
1 0.0 0.0 39 21 0.0 77 57 14.1

2 0.0 0.0 40 19.1 0.0 78 58.1 7.0
3 0.0 0.0 41 13.7 0.0 79 43.3 0.0
4 0.0 0.0 42 2.2 0.0 80 28.5 25.0
5 0.0 0.0 43 0.0 0.0 81 30.4 47.8
6 0.0 0.0 44 0.0 0.0 82 32.1 39.2
7 1.5 8.9 45 0.0 0.0 83 32.7 39.3
8 15.8 30.9 46 0.0 0.0 84 32.4 17.3
9 27.4 1.3 47 0.0 0.0 85 31.6 11.4
10 32.6 0.7 48 0.0 0.0 86 31.1 10.2
11 34.8 1.2 49 0.0 0.0 87 31.1 19.5
12 36.2 7.4 50 0.0 13.1 88 31.4 22.5
13 37.1 6.2 51 13.1 30.1 89 31.6 22.9
14 37.9 10.2 52 26.3 25.5 90 31.6 24.3
15 39.6 12.3 53 35 32.2 91 31.9 26.9
16 42.3 12.5 54 41.7 14.3 92 32.4 30.6
17 45.3 12.6 55 42.2 0.00 93 32.8 32.7
18 48.6 6.0 56 42.8 11.6 94 33.7 32.5
19 40.8 0.00 57 51.00 20.9 95 34.4 29.5
20 33 16.3 58 60.00 9.6 96 34.3 26.5
21 42.5 27.4 59 49.4 0.00 97 34.4 24.7
22 49.3 26.7 60 38.9 16.6 98 35.00 24.9
23 54 18 61 43.4 30.8 99 35.6 25.2
24 57.1 12.9 62 49.4 14.2 100 36.1 24.8
25 58.9 8.6 63 40.5 0 101 36.3 24
26 59.3 6 64 31.5 43.5 102 36.2 23.6
27 59 4.9 65 36.6 78.2 103 36.2 23.5
28 57.9 m 66 40.8 67.6 104 36.8 22.7
29 55.7 m 67 44.7 59.1 105 37.2 20.9
30 52.1 m 68 48.3 52 106 37 19.2
31 46.4 m 69 51.9 63.8 107 36.3 18.4
32 38.6 m 70 54.7 27.9 108 35.4 17.6
33 29 m 71 55.3 18.3 109 35.2 14.9
34 20.8 m 72 55.1 16.3 110 35.4 9.9
35 16.9 m 73 54.8 11.1 111 35.5 4.3
36 16.9 42.5 74 54.7 11.5 112 35.2 6.6
37 18.8 38.4 75 54.8 17.5 113 34.9 10
141/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
38 20.7 32.9 76 55.6 18.0 114 34.7 25.1

(s) (s) (s)
115 34.4 29.3 154 4.3 5.6 193 0 0

116 34.5 20.7 155 5.8 24.4 194 0 0
117 35.2 16.6 156 9.7 20.7 195 0 0
118 35.8 16.2 157 13.6 21.1 196 0 0
119 35.6 20.3 158 15.6 21.5 197 0 0
120 35.3 22.5 159 16.5 21.9 198 0 0
121 35.3 23.4 160 18 22.3 199 0 0
122 34.7 11.9 161 21.1 46.9 200 0 0
123 45.5 0 162 25.2 33.6 201 0 0
124 56.3 m 163 28.1 16.6 202 0 0
125 46.2 m 164 28.8 7 203 0 0
126 50.1 0 165 27.5 5 204 0 0
127 54 m 166 23.1 3 205 0 0
128 40.5 m 167 16.9 1.9 206 0 0
129 27 m 168 12.2 2.6 207 0 0
130 13.5 m 169 9.9 3.2 208 0 0
131 0 0 170 9.1 4 209 0 0
132 0 0 171 8.8 3.8 210 0 0
133 0 0 172 8.5 12.2 211 0 0
134 0 0 173 8.2 29.4 212 0 0
135 0 0 174 9.6 20.1 213 0 0
136 0 0 175 14.7 16.3 214 0 0
137 0 0 176 24.5 8.7 215 0 0
138 0 0 177 39.4 3.3 216 0 0
139 0 0 178 39 2.9 217 0 0
140 0 0 179 38.5 5.9 218 0 0
141 0 0 180 42.4 8 219 0 0
142 0 4.9 181 38.2 6 220 0 0
143 0 7.3 182 41.4 3.8 221 0 0
144 4.4 28.7 183 44.6 5.4 222 0 0
145 11.1 26.4 184 38.8 8.2 223 0 0
146 15 9.4 185 37.5 8.9 224 0 0
147 15.9 0 186 35.4 7.3 225 0 0
148 15.3 0 187 28.4 7 226 0 0
149 14.2 0 188 14.8 7 227 0 0
150 13.2 0 189 0 5.9 228 0 0
151 11.6 0 190 0 0 229 0 0
152 8.4 0 191 0 0 230 0 0
153 5.4 0 192 0 0 231 0 0
142/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)

(s) (s) (s)
232 0 0 271 46.8 m 310 0 0

233 0 0 272 41.7 m 311 0 0
234 0 0 273 35.9 m 312 0 0
235 0 0 274 29.2 m 313 0 0
236 0 0 275 20.7 m 314 0 0
237 0 0 276 10.1 m 315 0 0
238 0 0 277 0 m 316 0 0
239 0 0 278 0 0 317 0 0
240 0 0 279 0 0 318 0 0
241 0 0 280 0 0 319 0 0
242 0 0 281 0 0 320 0 0
243 0 0 282 0 0 321 0 0
244 0 0 283 0 0 322 0 0
245 0 0 284 0 0 323 0 0
246 0 0 285 0 0 324 4.5 41
247 0 0 286 0 0 325 17.2 38.9
248 0 0 287 0 0 326 30.1 36.8
249 0 0 288 0 0 327 41 34.7
250 0 0 289 0 0 328 50 32.6
251 0 0 290 0 0 329 51.4 0.1
252 0 0 291 0 0 330 47.8 m
253 0 31.6 292 0 0 331 40.2 m
254 9.4 13.6 293 0 0 332 32 m
255 22.2 16.9 294 0 0 333 24.4 m
256 33 53.5 295 0 0 334 16.8 m
257 43.7 22.1 296 0 0 335 8.1 m
258 39.8 0 297 0 0 336 0 m
259 36 45.7 298 0 0 337 0 0
260 47.6 75.9 299 0 0 338 0 0
261 61.2 70.4 300 0 0 339 0 0
262 72.3 70.4 301 0 0 340 0 0
263 76 m 302 0 0 341 0 0
264 74.3 m 303 0 0 342 0 0
265 68.5 m 304 0 0 343 0 0
266 61 m 305 0 0 344 0 0
267 56 m 306 0 0 345 0 0
268 54 m 307 0 0 346 0 0
269 53 m 308 0 0 347 0 0
270 50.8 m 309 0 0 348 0 0
143/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)

speed torque% speed % torque% speed% torque%
(s) (s) (s)
%
349 0 0 388 24.6 11 427 47.9 0
350 0 0 389 25.2 14.7 428 54.2 m
351 0 0 390 28.6 28.4 429 48.1 m
352 0 0 391 35.5 65 430 47 31.3
353 0 0 392 43.8 75.3 431 49 38.3
354 0 0.5 393 51.2 34.2 432 52 40.1
355 0 4.9 394 40.7 0 433 53.3 14.5
356 9.2 61.3 395 30.3 45.4 434 52.6 0.8
357 22.4 40.4 396 34.2 83.1 435 49.8 m
358 36.5 50.1 397 37.6 85.3 436 51 18.6
359 47.7 21 398 40.8 87.5 437 56.9 38.9
360 38.8 0 399 44.8 89.7 438 67.2 45
361 30 37 400 50.6 91.9 439 78.6 21.5
362 37 63.6 401 57.6 94.1 440 65.5 0
363 45.5 90.8 402 64.6 44.6 441 52.4 31.3
364 54.5 40.9 403 51.6 0 442 56.4 60.1
365 45.9 0 404 38.7 37.4 443 59.7 29.2
366 37.2 47.5 405 42.4 70.3 444 45.1 0
367 44.5 84.4 406 46.5 89.1 445 30.6 4.2
368 51.7 32.4 407 50.6 93.9 446 30.9 8.4
369 58.1 15.2 408 53.8 33 447 30.5 4.3
370 45.9 0 409 55.5 20.3 448 44.6 0
371 33.6 35.8 410 55.8 5.2 449 58.8 m
372 36.9 67 411 55.4 m 450 55.1 m
373 40.2 84.7 412 54.4 m 451 50.6 m
374 43.4 84.3 413 53.1 m 452 45.3 m
375 45.7 84.3 414 51.8 m 453 39.3 m
376 46.5 m 415 50.3 m 454 49.1 0
377 46.1 m 416 48.4 m 455 58.8 m
378 43.9 m 417 45.9 m 456 50.7 m
379 39.3 m 418 43.1 m 457 42.4 m
380 47 m 419 40.1 m 458 44.1 0
381 54.6 m 420 37.4 m 459 45.7 m
382 62 m 421 35.1 m 460 32.5 m
383 52 m 422 32.8 m 461 20.7 m
384 43 m 423 45.3 0 462 10 m
385 33.9 m 424 57.8 m 463 0 0
386 28.4 m 425 50.6 m 464 0 1.5
387 25.5 m 426 41.6 m 465 0.9 41.1
144/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)

(s) (s) (s)
%
466 7 46.3 505 40.3 50.9 544 30.8 60.3
467 12.8 48.5 506 43 39.7 545 41.2 62.3
468 17 50.7 507 45.5 20.6 546 36 0
469 20.9 52.9 508 47.3 20.6 547 30.8 32.3
470 26.7 55 509 48.8 22.1 548 33.9 60.3
471 35.5 57.2 510 50.1 22.1 549 34.6 38.4
472 46.9 23.8 511 51.4 42.4 550 37 16.6
473 44.5 0 512 52.5 31.9 551 42.7 62.3
474 42.1 45.7 513 53.7 21.6 552 50.4 28.1
475 55.6 77.4 514 55.1 11.6 553 40.1 0
476 68.8 100 515 56.8 5.7 554 29.9 8
477 81.7 47.9 516 42.4 0 555 32.5 15
478 71.2 0 517 27.9 8.2 556 34.6 63.1
479 60.7 38.3 518 29 15.9 557 36.7 58
480 68.8 72.7 519 30.4 25.1 558 39.4 52.9
481 75 m 520 32.6 60.5 559 42.8 47.8
482 61.3 m 521 35.4 72.7 560 46.8 42.7
483 53.5 m 522 38.4 88.2 561 50.7 27.5
484 45.9 58 523 41 65.1 562 53.4 20.7
485 48.1 80 524 42.9 25.6 563 54.2 13.1
486 49.4 97.9 525 44.2 15.8 564 54.2 0.4
487 49.7 m 526 44.9 2.9 565 53.4 0
488 48.7 m 527 45.1 m 566 51.4 m
489 45.5 m 528 44.8 m 567 48.7 m
490 40.4 m 529 43.9 m 568 45.6 m
491 49.7 0 530 42.4 m 569 42.4 m
492 59 m 531 40.2 m 570 40.4 m
493 48.9 m 532 37.1 m 571 39.8 5.8
494 40 m 533 47 0 572 40.7 39.7
495 33.5 m 534 57 m 573 43.8 37.1
496 30 m 535 45.1 m 574 48.1 39.1
497 29.1 12 536 32.6 m 575 52 22
498 29.3 40.4 537 46.8 0 576 54.7 13.2
499 30.4 29.3 538 61.5 m 577 56.4 13.2
500 32.2 15.4 539 56.7 m 578 57.5 6.6
501 33.9 15.8 540 46.9 m 579 42.6 0
502 35.3 14.9 541 37.5 m 580 27.7 10.9
503 36.4 15.1 542 30.3 m 581 28.5 21.3
504 38 15.3 543 27.3 32.3 582 29.2 23.9
145/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)

(s) (s) (s)
%
583 29.5 15.2 622 33.8 38.4 661 42.3 46
584 29.7 8.8 623 42.1 m 662 57.1 74.1
585 30.4 20.8 624 34.1 m 663 72.1 34.2
586 31.9 22.9 625 33 37.1 664 66.9 0
587 34.3 61.4 626 36.4 38.4 665 60.4 41.8
588 37.2 76.6 627 43.3 17.1 666 69.1 79
589 40.1 27.5 628 35.7 0 667 77.1 38.3
590 42.3 25.4 629 28.1 11.6 668 63.1 0
591 43.5 32 630 36.5 19.2 669 49.1 47.9
592 43.8 6 631 45.2 8.3 670 53.4 91.3
593 43.5 m 632 36.5 0 671 57.5 85.7
594 42.8 m 633 27.9 32.6 672 61.5 89.2
595 41.7 m 634 31.5 59.6 673 65.5 85.9
596 40.4 m 635 34.4 65.2 674 69.5 89.5
597 39.3 m 636 37 59.6 675 73.1 75.5
598 38.9 12.9 637 39 49 676 76.2 73.6
599 39 18.4 638 40.2 m 677 79.1 75.6
600 39.7 39.2 639 39.8 m 678 81.8 78.2
601 41.4 60 640 36 m 679 84.1 39
602 43.7 54.5 641 29.7 m 680 69.6 0
603 46.2 64.2 642 21.5 m 681 55 25.2
604 48.8 73.3 643 14.1 m 682 55.8 49.9
605 51 82.3 644 0 0 683 56.7 46.4
606 52.1 0 645 0 0 684 57.6 76.3
607 52 m 646 0 0 685 58.4 92.7
608 50.9 m 647 0 0 686 59.3 99.9
609 49.4 m 648 0 0 687 60.1 95
610 47.8 m 649 0 0 688 61 46.7
611 46.6 m 650 0 0 689 46.6 0
612 47.3 35.3 651 0 0 690 32.3 34.6
613 49.2 74.1 652 0 0 691 32.7 68.6
614 51.1 95.2 653 0 0 692 32.6 67
615 51.7 m 654 0 0 693 31.3 m
616 50.8 m 655 0 0 694 28.1 m
617 47.3 m 656 0 3.4 695 43 0
618 41.8 m 657 1.4 22 696 58 m
619 36.4 m 658 10.1 45.3 697 58.9 m
620 30.9 m 659 21.5 10 698 49.4 m
621 25.5 37.1 660 32.2 0 699 41.5 m
146/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)

(s) (s) (s)
%
700 48.4 0 739 0 0 778 29.7 15.1
701 55.3 m 740 0 0 779 34.8 26.9
702 41.8 m 741 0 0 780 40 13.6
703 31.6 m 742 0 0 781 42.2 m
704 24.6 m 743 0 0 782 42.1 m
705 15.2 m 744 0 0 783 40.8 m
706 7 m 745 0 0 784 37.7 37.6
707 0 0 746 0 0 785 47 35
708 0 0 747 0 0 786 48.8 33.4
709 0 0 748 0 0 787 41.7 m
710 0 0 749 0 0 788 27.7 m
711 0 0 750 0 0 789 17.2 m
712 0 0 751 0 0 790 14 37.6
713 0 0 752 0 0 791 18.4 25
714 0 0 753 0 0 792 27.6 17.7
715 0 0 754 0 0 793 39.8 6.8
716 0 0 755 0 0 794 34.3 0
717 0 0 756 0 0 795 28.7 26.5
718 0 0 757 0 0 796 41.5 40.9
719 0 0 758 0 0 797 53.7 17.5
720 0 0 759 0 0 798 42.4 0
721 0 0 760 0 0 799 31.2 27.3
722 0 0 761 0 0 800 32.3 53.2
723 0 0 762 0 0 801 34.5 60.6
724 0 0 763 0 0 802 37.6 68
725 0 0 764 0 0 803 41.2 75.4
726 0 0 765 0 0 804 45.8 82.8
727 0 0 766 0 0 805 52.3 38.2
728 0 0 767 0 0 806 42.5 0
729 0 0 768 0 0 807 32.6 30.5
730 0 0 769 0 0 808 35 57.9
731 0 0 770 0 0 809 36 77.3
732 0 0 771 0 22 810 37.1 96.8
733 0 0 772 4.5 25.8 811 39.6 80.8
734 0 0 773 15.5 42.8 812 43.4 78.3
735 0 0 774 30.5 46.8 813 47.2 73.4
736 0 0 775 45.5 29.3 814 49.6 66.9
737 0 0 776 49.2 13.6 815 50.2 62
738 0 0 777 39.5 0 816 50.2 57.7
147/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)

(s) (s) (s)
%
817 50.6 62.1 856 42.5 74.8 895 0 0
818 52.3 62.9 857 46.6 74.2 896 0 0
819 54.8 37.5 858 50.7 76.2 897 0 0
820 57 18.3 859 54.8 75.1 898 0 0
821 42.3 0 860 58.7 36.3 899 0 0
822 27.6 29.1 861 45.2 0 900 0 0
823 28.4 57 862 31.8 37.2 901 0 5.8
824 29.1 51.8 863 33.8 71.2 902 2.5 27.9
825 29.6 35.3 864 35.5 46.4 903 12.4 29
826 29.7 33.3 865 36.6 33.6 904 19.4 30.1
827 29.8 17.7 866 37.2 20 905 29.3 31.2
828 29.5 m 867 37.2 m 906 37.1 10.4
829 28.9 m 868 37 m 907 40.6 4.9
830 43 0 869 36.6 m 908 35.8 0
831 57.1 m 870 36 m 909 30.9 7.6
832 57.7 m 871 35.4 m 910 35.4 13.8
833 56 m 872 34.7 m 911 36.5 11.1
834 53.8 m 873 34.1 m 912 40.8 48.5
835 51.2 m 874 33.6 m 913 49.8 3.7
836 48.1 m 875 33.3 m 914 41.2 0
837 44.5 m 876 33.1 m 915 32.7 29.7
838 40.9 m 877 32.7 m 916 39.4 52.1
839 38.1 m 878 31.4 m 917 48.8 22.7
840 37.2 42.7 879 45 0 918 41.6 0
841 37.5 70.8 880 58.5 m 919 34.5 46.6
842 39.1 48.6 881 53.7 m 920 39.7 84.4
843 41.3 0.1 882 47.5 m 921 44.7 83.2
844 42.3 m 883 40.6 m 922 49.5 78.9
845 42 m 884 34.1 m 923 52.3 83.8
846 40.8 m 885 45.3 0 924 53.4 77.7
847 38.6 m 886 56.4 m 925 52.1 69.6
848 35.5 m 887 51 m 926 47.9 63.6
849 32.1 m 888 44.5 m 927 46.4 55.2
850 29.6 m 889 36.4 m 928 46.5 53.6
851 28.8 39.9 890 26.6 m 929 46.4 62.3
852 29.2 52.9 891 20 m 930 46.1 58.2
853 30.9 76.1 892 13.3 m 931 46.2 61.8
854 34.3 76.5 893 6.7 m 932 47.3 62.3
855 38.3 75.5 894 0 0 933 49.3 57.1
148/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)

(s) (s) (s)
%
934 52.6 58.1 973 39.9 41.8 1012 17.9 m
935 56.3 56 974 40.3 38.2 1013 16.2 1.9
936 59.9 27.2 975 40.8 35 1014 17.8 7.5
937 45.8 0 976 41.9 32.4 1015 25.2 18
938 31.8 28.8 977 43.2 26.4 1016 39.7 6.5
939 32.7 56.5 978 43.5 m 1017 38.6 0
940 33.4 62.8 979 42.9 m 1018 37.4 5.4
941 34.6 68.2 980 41.5 m 1019 43.4 9.7
942 35.8 68.6 981 40.9 m 1020 46.9 15.7
943 38.6 65 982 40.5 m 1021 52.5 13.1
944 42.3 61.9 983 39.5 m 1022 56.2 6.3
945 44.1 65.3 984 38.3 m 1023 44 0
946 45.3 63.2 985 36.9 m 1024 31.8 20.9
947 46.5 30.6 986 35.4 m 1025 38.7 36.3
948 46.7 11.1 987 34.5 m 1026 47.7 47.5
949 45.9 16.1 988 33.9 m 1027 54.5 22
950 45.6 21.8 989 32.6 m 1028 41.3 0
951 45.9 24.2 990 30.9 m 1029 28.1 26.8
952 46.5 24.7 991 29.9 m 1030 31.6 49.2
953 46.7 24.7 992 29.2 m 1031 34.5 39.5
954 46.8 28.2 993 44.1 0 1032 36.4 24
955 47.2 31.2 994 59.1 m 1033 36.7 m
956 47.6 29.6 995 56.8 m 1034 35.5 m
957 48.2 31.2 996 53.5 m 1035 33.8 m
958 48.6 33.5 997 47.8 m 1036 33.7 19.8
959 48.8 m 998 41.9 m 1037 35.3 35.1
960 47.6 m 999 35.9 m 1038 38 33.9
961 46.3 m 1000 44.3 0 1039 40.1 34.5
962 45.2 m 1001 52.6 m 1040 42.2 40.4
963 43.5 m 1002 43.4 m 1041 45.2 44
964 41.4 m 1003 50.6 0 1042 48.3 35.9
965 40.3 m 1004 57.8 m 1043 50.1 29.6
966 39.4 m 1005 51.6 m 1044 52.3 38.5
967 38 m 1006 44.8 m 1045 55.3 57.7
968 36.3 m 1007 48.6 0 1046 57 50.7
969 35.3 5.8 1008 52.4 m 1047 57.7 25.2
970 35.4 30.2 1009 45.4 m 1048 42.9 0
971 36.6 55.6 1010 37.2 m 1049 28.2 15.7
972 38.6 48.5 1011 26.3 m 1050 29.2 30.5
149/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)

(s) (s) (s)
%
1051 31.1 52.6 1090 47.8 20.6 1129 31.7 33.9
1052 33.4 60.7 1091 47.2 3.8 1130 32 29.9
1053 35 61.4 1092 45.6 4.4 1131 32.1 m
1054 35.3 18.2 1093 44.6 4.1 1132 31.4 m
1055 35.2 14.9 1094 44.1 m 1133 30.3 m
1056 34.9 11.7 1095 42.9 m 1134 29.8 m
1057 34.5 12.9 1096 40.9 m 1135 44.3 0
1058 34.1 15.5 1097 39.2 m 1136 58.9 m
1059 33.5 m 1098 37 m 1137 52.1 m
1060 31.8 m 1099 35.1 2 1138 44.1 m
1061 30.1 m 1100 35.6 43.3 1139 51.7 0
1062 29.6 10.3 1101 38.7 47.6 1140 59.2 m
1063 30 26.5 1102 41.3 40.4 1141 47.2 m
1064 31 18.8 1103 42.6 45.7 1142 35.1 0
1065 31.5 26.5 1104 43.9 43.3 1143 23.1 m
1066 31.7 m 1105 46.9 41.2 1144 13.1 m
1067 31.5 m 1106 52.4 40.1 1145 5 m
1068 30.6 m 1107 56.3 39.3 1146 0 0
1069 30 m 1108 57.4 25.5 1147 0 0
1070 30 m 1109 57.2 25.4 1148 0 0
1071 29.4 m 1110 57 25.4 1149 0 0
1072 44.3 0 1111 56.8 25.3 1150 0 0
1073 59.2 m 1112 56.3 25.3 1151 0 0
1074 58.3 m 1113 55.6 25.2 1152 0 0
1075 57.1 m 1114 56.2 25.2 1153 0 0
1076 55.4 m 1115 58 12.4 1154 0 0
1077 53.5 m 1116 43.4 0 1155 0 0
1078 51.5 m 1117 28.8 26.2 1156 0 0
1079 49.7 m 1118 30.9 49.9 1157 0 0
1080 47.9 m 1119 32.3 40.5 1158 0 0
1081 46.4 m 1120 32.5 12.4 1159 0 0
1082 45.5 m 1121 32.4 12.2 1160 0 0
1083 45.2 m 1122 32.1 6.4 1161 0 0
1084 44.3 m 1123 31 12.4 1162 0 0
1085 43.6 m 1124 30.1 18.5 1163 0 0
1086 43.1 m 1125 30.4 35.6 1164 0 0
1087 42.5 25.6 1126 31.2 30.1 1165 0 0
1088 43.3 25.7 1127 31.5 30.8 1166 0 0
1089 46.3 24 1128 31.5 26.9 1167 0 0
150/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)

(s) (s) (s)
%
1168 0 0 1207 54.9 9.9 1246 68.1 43.5
1169 0 0 1208 44.9 0 1247 55.2 0
1170 0 0 1209 34.9 47.4 1248 42.3 37.2
1171 0 0 1210 42.7 82.7 1249 43 73.6
1172 0 0 1211 52 81.2 1250 43.5 65.1
1173 0 0 1212 61.8 82.7 1251 43.8 53.1
1174 0 0 1213 71.3 39.1 1252 43.9 54.6
1175 0 0 1214 58.1 0 1253 43.9 41.2
1176 0 0 1215 44.9 42.5 1254 43.8 34.8
1177 0 0 1216 46.3 83.3 1255 43.6 30.3
1178 0 0 1217 46.8 74.1 1256 43.3 21.9
1179 0 0 1218 48.1 75.7 1257 42.8 19.9
1180 0 0 1219 50.5 75.8 1258 42.3 m
1181 0 0 1220 53.6 76.7 1259 41.4 m
1182 0 0 1221 56.9 77.1 1260 40.2 m
1183 0 0 1222 60.2 78.7 1261 38.7 m
1184 0 0 1223 63.7 78 1262 37.1 m
1185 0 0 1224 67.2 79.6 1263 35.6 m
1186 0 0 1225 70.7 80.9 1264 34.2 m
1187 0 0 1226 74.1 81.1 1265 32.9 m
1188 0 0 1227 77.5 83.6 1266 31.8 m
1189 0 0 1228 80.8 85.6 1267 30.7 m
1190 0 0 1229 84.1 81.6 1268 29.6 m
1191 0 0 1230 87.4 88.3 1269 40.4 0
1192 0 0 1231 90.5 91.9 1270 51.2 m
1193 0 0 1232 93.5 94.1 1271 49.6 m
1194 0 0 1233 96.8 96.6 1272 48 m
1195 0 0 1234 100 m 1273 46.4 m
1196 0 20.4 1235 96 m 1274 45 m
1197 12.6 41.2 1236 81.9 m 1275 43.6 m
1198 27.3 20.4 1237 68.1 m 1276 42.3 m
1199 40.4 7.6 1238 58.1 84.7 1277 41 m
1200 46.1 m 1239 58.5 85.4 1278 39.6 m
1201 44.6 m 1240 59.5 85.6 1279 38.3 m
1202 42.7 14.7 1241 61 86.6 1280 37.1 m
1203 42.9 7.3 1242 62.6 86.8 1281 35.9 m
1204 36.1 0 1243 64.1 87.6 1282 34.6 m
1205 29.3 15 1244 65.4 87.5 1283 33 m
1206 43.8 22.6 1245 66.7 87.8 1284 31.1 m
151/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)

(s) (s) (s)
%
1285 29.2 m 1324 40.3 0 1363 35.1 m
1286 43.3 0 1325 39.3 1 1364 33.7 m
1287 57.4 32.8 1326 38.3 15.2 1365 32.4 m
1288 59.9 65.4 1327 37.6 57.8 1366 31.1 m
1289 61.9 76.1 1328 37.3 73.2 1367 29.9 m
1290 65.6 73.7 1329 37.3 59.8 1368 28.7 m
1291 69.9 79.3 1330 37.4 52.2 1369 29 58.6
1292 74.1 81.3 1331 37.4 16.9 1370 29.7 88.5
1293 78.3 83.2 1332 37.1 34.3 1371 31 86.3
1294 82.6 86 1333 36.7 51.9 1372 31.8 43.4
1295 87 89.5 1334 36.2 25.3 1373 31.7 m
1296 91.2 90.8 1335 35.6 m 1374 29.9 m
1297 95.3 45.9 1336 34.6 m 1375 40.2 0
1298 81 0 1337 33.2 m 1376 50.4 m
1299 66.6 38.2 1338 31.6 m 1377 47.9 m
1300 67.9 75.5 1339 30.1 m 1378 45 m
1301 68.4 80.5 1340 28.8 m 1379 43 m
1302 69 85.5 1341 28 29.5 1380 40.6 m
1303 70 85.2 1342 28.6 100 1381 55.5 0
1304 71.6 85.9 1343 28.8 97.3 1382 70.4 41.7
1305 73.3 86.2 1344 28.8 73.4 1383 73.4 83.2
1306 74.8 86.5 1345 29.6 56.9 1384 74 83.7
1307 76.3 42.9 1346 30.3 91.7 1385 74.9 41.7
1308 63.3 0 1347 31 90.5 1386 60 0
1309 50.4 21.2 1348 31.8 81.7 1387 45.1 41.6
1310 50.6 42.3 1349 32.6 79.5 1388 47.7 84.2
1311 50.6 53.7 1350 33.5 86.9 1389 50.4 50.2
1312 50.4 90.1 1351 34.6 100 1390 53 26.1
1313 50.5 97.1 1352 35.6 78.7 1391 59.5 0
1314 51 100 1353 36.4 50.5 1392 66.2 38.4
1315 51.9 100 1354 37 57 1393 66.4 76.7
1316 52.6 100 1355 37.3 69.1 1394 67.6 100
1317 52.8 32.4 1356 37.6 49.5 1395 68.4 76.6
1318 47.7 0 1357 37.8 44.4 1396 68.2 47.2
1319 42.6 27.4 1358 37.8 43.4 1397 69 81.4
1320 42.1 53.5 1359 37.8 34.8 1398 69.7 40.6
1321 41.8 44.5 1360 37.6 24 1399 54.7 0
1322 41.4 41.1 1361 37.2 m 1400 39.8 19.9
1323 41 21 1362 36.3 m 1401 36.3 40
152/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)

(s) (s) (s)
%
1402 36.7 59.4 1441 39.2 100 1480 56.1 94.9
1403 36.6 77.5 1442 40.9 100 1481 56.3 86.2
1404 36.8 94.3 1443 42.4 99.5 1482 56.2 64.1
1405 36.8 100 1444 43.8 98.7 1483 56 46.1
1406 36.4 100 1445 45.4 97.3 1484 56.2 33.4
1407 36.3 79.7 1446 47 96.6 1485 56.5 23.6
1408 36.7 49.5 1447 47.8 96.2 1486 56.3 18.6
1409 36.6 39.3 1448 48.8 96.3 1487 55.7 16.2
1410 37.3 62.8 1449 50.5 95.1 1488 56 15.9
1411 38.1 73.4 1450 51 95.9 1489 55.9 21.8
1412 39 72.9 1451 52 94.3 1490 55.8 20.9
1413 40.2 72 1452 52.6 94.6 1491 55.4 18.4
1414 41.5 71.2 1453 53 65.5 1492 55.7 25.1
1415 42.9 77.3 1454 53.2 0 1493 56 27.7
1416 44.4 76.6 1455 53.2 m 1494 55.8 22.4
1417 45.4 43.1 1456 52.6 m 1495 56.1 20
1418 45.3 53.9 1457 52.1 m 1496 55.7 17.4
1419 45.1 64.8 1458 51.8 m 1497 55.9 20.9
1420 46.5 74.2 1459 51.3 m 1498 56 22.9
1421 47.7 75.2 1460 50.7 m 1499 56 21.1
1422 48.1 75.5 1461 50.7 m 1500 55.1 19.2
1423 48.6 75.8 1462 49.8 m 1501 55.6 24.2
1424 48.9 76.3 1463 49.4 m 1502 55.4 25.6
1425 49.9 75.5 1464 49.3 m 1503 55.7 24.7
1426 50.4 75.2 1465 49.1 m 1504 55.9 24
1427 51.1 74.6 1466 49.1 m 1505 55.4 23.5
1428 51.9 75 1467 49.1 8.3 1506 55.7 30.9
1429 52.7 37.2 1468 48.9 16.8 1507 55.4 42.5
1430 41.6 0 1469 48.8 21.3 1508 55.3 25.8
1431 30.4 36.6 1470 49.1 22.1 1509 55.4 1.3
1432 30.5 73.2 1471 49.4 26.3 1510 55 m
1433 30.3 81.6 1472 49.8 39.2 1511 54.4 m
1434 30.4 89.3 1473 50.4 83.4 1512 54.2 m
1435 31.5 90.4 1474 51.4 90.6 1513 53.5 m
1436 32.7 88.5 1475 52.3 93.8 1514 52.4 m
1437 33.7 97.2 1476 53.3 94 1515 51.8 m
1438 35.2 99.7 1477 54.2 94.1 1516 50.7 m
1439 36.3 98.8 1478 54.9 94.3 1517 49.9 m
1440 37.7 100 1479 55.7 94.6 1518 49.1 m
153/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)

(s) (s) (s)
%
1519 47.7 m 1559 56.6 38.2 1598 56.9 41.8
1520 47.3 m 1560 56.2 37.9 1599 56.6 41.9
1521 46.9 m 1561 56.6 37.5 1600 56.7 42.6
1522 46.9 m 1562 56.4 36.7 1601 56.7 42.6
1523 47.2 m 1563 56.5 34.8 1602 56.7 41.5
1524 47.8 m 1564 56.5 35.8 1603 56.7 42.2
1525 48.2 0 1565 56.5 36.2 1604 56.5 42.2
1526 48.8 23 1566 56.5 36.7 1605 56.8 41.9
1527 49.1 67.9 1567 56.7 37.8 1606 56.5 42
1528 49.4 73.7 1568 56.7 37.8 1607 56.7 42.1
1529 49.8 75 1569 56.6 36.6 1608 56.4 41.9
1530 50.4 75.8 1570 56.8 36.1 1609 56.7 42.9
1531 51.4 73.9 1571 56.5 36.8 1610 56.7 41.8
1532 52.3 72.2 1572 56.9 35.9 1611 56.7 41.9
1533 53.3 71.2 1573 56.7 35 1612 56.8 42
1534 54.6 71.2 1574 56.5 36 1613 56.7 41.5
1535 55.4 68.7 1575 56.4 36.5 1614 56.6 41.9
1536 56.7 67 1576 56.5 38 1615 56.8 41.6
1537 57.2 64.6 1577 56.5 39.9 1616 56.6 41.6
1538 57.3 61.9 1578 56.4 42.1 1617 56.9 42
1539 57 59.5 1579 56.5 47 1618 56.7 40.7
1540 56.7 57 1580 56.4 48 1619 56.7 39.3
1541 56.7 69.8 1581 56.1 49.1 1620 56.5 41.4
1542 56.8 58.5 1582 56.4 48.9 1621 56.4 44.9
1543 56.8 47.2 1583 56.4 48.2 1622 56.8 45.2
1544 57 38.5 1584 56.5 48.3 1623 56.6 43.6
1545 57 32.8 1585 56.5 47.9 1624 56.8 42.2
1546 56.8 30.2 1586 56.6 46.8 1625 56.5 42.3
1547 57 27 1587 56.6 46.2 1626 56.5 44.4
1548 56.9 26.2 1588 56.5 44.4 1627 56.9 45.1
1549 56.7 26.2 1589 56.8 42.9 1628 56.4 45
1550 57 26.6 1590 56.5 42.8 1629 56.7 46.3
1551 56.7 27.8 1591 56.7 43.2 1630 56.7 45.5
1552 56.7 29.7 1592 56.5 42.8 1631 56.8 45
1553 56.8 32.1 1593 56.9 42.2 1632 56.7 44.9
1554 56.5 34.9 1594 56.5 43.1 1633 56.6 45.2
1555 56.6 34.9 1595 56.5 42.9 1634 56.8 46
1556 56.3 35.8 1596 56.7 42.7 1635 56.5 46.6
1557 56.6 36.6 1597 56.6 41.5 1636 56.6 48.3
154/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
1558 56.2 37.6

(s) (s) (s)
%
1637 56.4 48.6 1676 56.9 60.9 1715 56.6 6.5
1638 56.6 50.3 1677 57.1 57.4 1716 56.5 10
1639 56.3 51.9 1678 57.1 54.3 1717 56.6 12.4
1640 56.5 54.1 1679 57 48.6 1718 56.5 14.5
1641 56.3 54.9 1680 57.4 44.1 1719 56.6 16.3
1642 56.4 55 1681 57.4 40.2 1720 56.3 18.1
1643 56.4 56.2 1682 57.6 36.9 1721 56.6 20.7
1644 56.2 58.6 1683 57.5 34.2 1722 56.1 22.6
1645 56.2 59.1 1684 57.4 31.1 1723 56.3 25.8
1646 56.2 62.5 1685 57.5 25.9 1724 56.4 27.7
1647 56.4 62.8 1686 57.5 20.7 1725 56 29.7
1648 56 64.7 1687 57.6 16.4 1726 56.1 32.6
1649 56.4 65.6 1688 57.6 12.4 1727 55.9 34.9
1650 56.2 67.7 1689 57.6 8.9 1728 55.9 36.4
1651 55.9 68.9 1690 57.5 8 1729 56 39.2
1652 56.1 68.9 1691 57.5 5.8 1730 55.9 41.4
1653 55.8 69.5 1692 57.3 5.8 1731 55.5 44.2
1654 56 69.8 1693 57.6 5.5 1732 55.9 46.4
1655 56.2 69.3 1694 57.3 4.5 1733 55.8 48.3
1656 56.2 69.8 1695 57.2 3.2 1734 55.6 49.1
1657 56.4 69.2 1696 57.2 3.1 1735 55.8 49.3
1658 56.3 68.7 1697 57.3 4.9 1736 55.9 47.7
1659 56.2 69.4 1698 57.3 4.2 1737 55.9 47.4
1660 56.2 69.5 1699 56.9 5.5 1738 55.8 46.9
1661 56.2 70 1700 57.1 5.1 1739 56.1 46.8
1662 56.4 69.7 1701 57 5.2 1740 56.1 45.8
1663 56.2 70.2 1702 56.9 5.5 1741 56.2 46
1664 56.4 70.5 1703 56.6 5.4 1742 56.3 45.9
1665 56.1 70.5 1704 57.1 6.1 1743 56.3 45.9
1666 56.5 69.7 1705 56.7 5.7 1744 56.2 44.6
1667 56.2 69.3 1706 56.8 5.8 1745 56.2 46
1668 56.5 70.9 1707 57 6.1 1746 56.4 46.2
1669 56.4 70.8 1708 56.7 5.9 1747 55.8 m
1670 56.3 71.1 1709 57 6.6 1748 55.5 m
1671 56.4 71 1710 56.9 6.4 1749 55 m
1672 56.7 68.6 1711 56.7 6.7 1750 54.1 m
1673 56.8 68.6 1712 56.9 6.9 1751 54 m
1674 56.6 68 1713 56.8 5.6 1752 53.3 m
155/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
1675 56.8 65.1 1714 56.6 5.1 1753 52.6 m

(s) (s) (s)
%
1754 51.8 m 1770 49.1 m 1786 31.6 m
1755 50.7 m 1771 46.2 m 1787 25.8 m
1756 49.9 m 1772 43.1 m 1788 19.9 m
1757 49.1 m 1773 39.9 m 1789 14 m
1758 47.7 m 1774 36.6 m 1790 8.1 m
1759 46.8 m 1775 33.6 m 1791 2.2 m
1760 45.7 m 1776 30.5 m 1792 0 0
1761 44.8 m 1777 42.8 0 1793 0 0
1762 43.9 m 1778 55.2 m 1794 0 0
1763 42.9 m 1779 49.9 m 1795 0 0
1764 41.5 m 1780 44 m 1796 0 0
1765 39.5 m 1781 37.6 m 1797 0 0
1766 36.7 m 1782 47.2 0 1798 0 0
1767 33.8 m 1783 56.8 m 1799 0 0
1768 31 m 1784 47.5 m 1800 0 0
1769 40 0 1785 42.9 m M= motoring
156/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT
A2.1 This appendix contains the basic requirements and the general
descriptions of the sampling and analyzing systems for gaseous and
particulate emissions measurement. Since various configurations can
produce equivalent results, exact conformance with the figures of this
appendix is not required. Components such as instruments, valves,
solenoids, pumps, flow devices and switches may be used to provide
additional information and coordinate the functions of the component
systems. Other components which are not needed to maintain the
accuracy on some systems may be excluded if their exclusion is based
upon good engineering judgment.
A 2.1.1 Analytical System
A2.1.2 Description of the analytical system

Analytical system for the determination of the gaseous emissions in the
raw exhaust gas (Figure 1) or in the diluted exhaust gas (Figure 2) are
described based on the use of:
(a) HFID or FID analyzer for the measurement of hydrocarbons;
(b) NDIR analyzers for the measurement of carbon monoxide and
carbon dioxide;
(c) HCLD or CLD analyzer for the measurement of the oxides of
nitrogen.
The sample for all components should be taken with one sampling probe
and internally split to the different analyzers. Optionally, two sampling
probes located in close proximity may be used. Care shall be taken that
no unintended condensation of exhaust components (including water
and sulphuric acid) occurs at any point of the analytical system.
A2.1.3
Figure 1
Schematic flow diagram of raw exhaust gas analysis system for
CO, CO 2 , NO x , HC
a = vent b = zero, span gas c = exhaust pipe d = optional
157/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
a = vent b = zero, span gas c = dilution tunnel d = optional

Figure 2
Schematic flow diagram of diluted exhaust gas analysis system for
CO, CO 2 , NO x , HC
A2.1.3 Components of Figures 1 and 2
EP Exhaust pipe
SP Raw exhaust gas sampling probe (Figure 9 only)
A stainless steel straight closed end multi-hole probe is recommended.
The inside diameter shall not be greater than the inside diameter of the
sampling line. The wall thickness of the probe shall not be greater than
1 mm. There shall be a minimum of three holes in three different radial
planes sized to sample approximately the same flow. The probe shall
extend across at least 80 per cent of the diameter of the exhaust pipe.
One or two sampling probes may be used.
SP2 Dilute Exhaust Gas HC Sampling Probe (Figure 10 only)
The probe shall:
(a) Be defined as the first 254 mm to 762 mm of the heated sampling line
HSL1;
(b) Have a 5 mm minimum inside diameter;
(c) Be installed in the dilution tunnel DT (Figure 15) at a point where the
diluent and exhaust gas are well mixed (i.e. approximately 10 tunnel
diameters downstream of the point where the exhaust enters the
dilution tunnel);
(d) Be sufficiently distant (radially) from other probes and the tunnel wall
so as to be free from the influence of any wakes or eddies;
(e) Be heated so as to increase the gas stream temperature to 463 K ± 10
K (190 °C ± 10 °C) at the exit of the probe, or to 385 K ± 10 K (112
°C ± 10 °C) for positive ignition engines;
(f) Non-heated in case of FID measurement (cold).
158/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
SP3 Dilute exhaust gas CO, CO 2 , NO x sampling probe (Figure 10

only)
The probe shall:
(a) Be in the same plane as SP2;
(b) Be sufficiently distant (radially) from other probes and the tunnel
wall so as to be free from the influence of any wakes or eddies;
(c) Be heated and insulated over its entire length to a minimum
temperature of 328 K (55 °C) to prevent water condensation.
HF1 Heated pre filter (optional)
The temperature shall be the same as HSL1.
HF2 Heated Filter
The filter shall extract any solid particles from the gas sample prior to
the analyzer. The temperature shall be the same as HSL1. The filter shall
be changed as needed.
HSL1 Heated Sampling Line
The sampling line provides a gas sample from a single probe to the split
point(s) and the HC analyzer.
The sampling line shall:
(a) Have a 4 mm minimum and a 13.5 mm maximum inside diameter;
(b) Be made of stainless steel or PTFE;
(c) Maintain a wall temperature of 463 K ± 10 K (190 °C ± 10 °C) as
measured at every separately controlled heated section, if the
temperature of the exhaust gas at the sampling probe equal to or below
463 K (190 °C);
(d) Maintain a wall temperature greater than 453 K (180 °C), if the
temperature of the exhaust gas at the sampling probe is above 463 K
(190 °C);
(e) Maintain a gas temperature of 463 K ± 10 K (190 °C ± 10 °C)
immediately before the heated filter HF2 and the HFID.
HSL2 Heated NO x Sampling Line
The sampling line shall:
(a) Maintain a wall temperature of 328 K to 473 K (55 °C to 200 °C), up
to the converter for dry measurement, and up to the analyzer for wet
measurement;
(b) Be made of stainless steel or PTFE.
HP
The pump shall be heated to the temperature of HSL.
SL
The line shall be made of PTFE or stainless steel. It may be heated or
unheated.
159/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
HC
Heated flame ionization detector (HFID) or flame ionization detector
(FID) for the determination of the hydrocarbons. The temperature of the
HFID shall be kept at 453 K to 473 K (180 °C to 200 °C).
CO, CO 2 NDIR analyzer
NDIR analyzers for the determination of carbon monoxide and carbon
dioxide (optional for the determination of the dilution ratio for PT
measurement).
NO x CLD analyzer or NDUV analyzer
CLD, HCLD or NDUV analyzer for the determination of the oxides of
nitrogen. If a HCLD is used it shall be kept at a temperature of 328 K to
473 K (55 °C to 200 °C).
B Sample dryer (optional for NO measurement)
To cool and condense water from the exhaust sample. It is optional if the
analyzer is free from water vapour interference as determined in clause
9.3.9.2.2 of this chapter. If water is removed by condensation, the sample
gas temperature or dew point shall be monitored either within the water
trap or downstream. The sample gas temperature or dew point shall not
exceed 280 K (7 °C). Chemical dryers are not allowed for removing
water from the sample.
BK
For the measurement of the background concentrations.
BG
For the measurement of the sample concentrations.
A2.1.4 Non-Methane Cutter Method (NMC)
The cutter oxidizes all hydrocarbons except CH 4 to CO 2 and H 2 O, so
that by passing the sample through the NMC only CH 4 is detected by
the HFID. In addition to the usual HC sampling train (see Figures 9 and
10), a second HC sampling train shall be installed equipped with a cutter
as laid out in Figure 11. This allows simultaneous measurement of total
HC, CH 4 and NMHC.
The cutter shall be characterized at or above 600 K (327 °C) prior to test
work with respect to its catalytic effect on CH 4 and C 2 H 6 at H 2 O
values representative of exhaust stream conditions. The dew point and
O 2 level of the sampled exhaust stream shall be known. The relative
response of the FID to CH 4 and C 2 H 6 shall be determined in
accordance with clause 9.3.8 of this chapter.
160/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Figure 3
Schematic flow diagram of methane analysis with the NMC
A2.1.5 Components of figure
NMC Non methane Cutter
To oxidize all hydrocarbons except methane.
HC
Heated flame ionization detector or flame ionization detector
(FID)to measure the HC and CH4concentrations. The temperature of
the HFID shall be kept at 453 K to 473 K (180 °C to 200 °C).
V1 selector valve
To select zero and spam gas

R Pressure Regulator
To control the pressure in the sampling line and the flow to the HFID
A2.2 Dilution and particulate sampling system
A2.2.1 Description of partial flow system
A dilution system is described based upon the dilution of a part of the
exhaust stream. Splitting of the exhaust stream and the following
dilution process may be done by different dilution system types. For
subsequent collection of the particulates, the entire dilute exhaust gas or
only a portion of the dilute exhaust gas is passed to the particulate
sampling system. The first method is referred to as total sampling type,
the second method as fractional sampling type. The calculation of the
dilution ratio depends upon the type of system used.
With the total sampling system as shown in Figure 4, raw exhaust gas
is transferred from the exhaust pipe (EP) to the dilution tunnel (DT)
through the sampling probe (SP) and the transfer tube (TT). The total
161/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
flow through the tunnel is adjusted with the flow controller FC2 and the
sampling pump (P) of the particulate sampling system (see Figure 8).
The diluent flow is controlled by the flow controller FC1, which may
use q mew or q maw and q mf as command signals, for the desired
exhaust split. The sample flow into DT is the difference of the total flow
and the diluent flow. The diluent flow rate is measured with the flow
measurement device FM1, the total flow rate with the flow
measurement device FM3 of the particulate sampling system (see
Figure 8). The dilution ratio is calculated from these two flow rates.
a = exhaust b = optional c = details see Figure 16

Figure 4
Scheme of partial flow dilution system (Total sampling type)
With the fractional sampling system as shown in Figure 5, raw exhaust
gas is transferred from the exhaust pipe EP to the dilution tunnel DT
through the sampling probe SP and the transfer tube TT. The total flow
through the tunnel is adjusted with the flow controller FC1 connected
either to the diluent flow or to the suction blower for the total tunnel
flow. The flow controller FC1 may use q mew or q maw and q mf as
command signals for the desired exhaust split. The sample flow into DT
is the difference of the total flow and the diluent flow. The diluent flow
rate is measured with the flow measurement device FM1, the total flow
rate with the flow measurement device FM2. The dilution ratio is
calculated from these two flow rates. From DT, a particulate sample is
taken with the particulate sampling system (see Figure 8).
162/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
a = exhaust b = to PB or SB c = details see Figure 16 d = to particulate

sampling system e = vent
Figure 5
Scheme of partial flow dilution system (fractional sampling type)
A2.2.2 Components of figures 4 and 5
EP Exhaust Pipe
The exhaust pipe may be insulated. To reduce the thermal inertia of the
exhaust, pipe a thickness to diameter ratio of 0.015 or less is
recommended. The use of flexible sections shall be limited to a length
to diameter ratio of 12 or less. Bends shall be minimized to reduce
inertial deposition. If the system includes a test bed silencer the silencer
may also be insulated. It is recommended to have a straight pipe of six
pipe diameters upstream and three pipe diameters downstream of the tip
of the probe.
SP Sampling probe
The type of probe shall be either of the following:
(a) Open tube facing upstream on the exhaust pipe centerline;
(b) Open tube facing downstream on the exhaust pipe centerline;
(c) Multiple hole probe as described under SP in clause A.2.1.3;
(d) Hatted probe facing upstream on the exhaust pipe centerline as
shown in Figure 6.
The minimum inside diameter of the probe tip shall be 4 mm. The
minimum diameter ratio between exhaust pipe and probe shall be four.
When using probe type (a), an inertial pre-classifier (cyclone or
impactor) with at 50 per cent cut point between 2.5 and 10 μm shall be
installed immediately upstream of the filter holder.
163/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Figure 6
Scheme of hatted probe
TT Exhaust Transfer Tube
The transfer tube shall be as short as possible, but:
(a) Not more than 0.26 m in length, if insulated for 80 per cent of the
total length, as measured between the end of the probe and the dilution
stage;
or
(b) Not more than 1 m in length, if heated above 150 °C for 90 per cent
of the total length, as measured between the end of the probe and the
dilution stage.
It shall be equal to or greater than the probe diameter, but not more than
25 mm in diameter, and exiting on the centerline of the dilution tunnel
and pointing downstream.
With respect to point (a) above, insulation shall be done with material
with a maximum thermal conductivity of 0.05 W/mK with a radial
insulation thickness corresponding to the diameter of the probe.
FC1 Flow Controller
A flow controller shall be used to control the diluent flow through the
pressure blower PB and/or the suction blower SB. It may be connected
to the exhaust flow sensor signals specified in clause 8.4.1 of this
chapter. The flow controller may be installed upstream or downstream
of the respective blower. When using a pressurized air supply, FC1
directly controls the airflow
FM1 Flow Measurement Device
Gas meter or other flow instrumentation to measure the diluent flow.
FM1 is optional if the pressure blower PB is calibrated to measure the
flow.
164/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
DAF Diluent Filter

The diluent (ambient air, synthetic air, or nitrogen) shall be filtered with
a high-efficiency (HEPA) filter that has an initial minimum collection
efficiency of 99.97 per cent according to EN 1822-1 (filter class H14 or
better), ASTM F 1471-93 or equivalent standard.
FM2 Flow Measurement Device (fractional sampling type, Figure
13 only)
Gas meter or other flow instrumentation to measure the diluted exhaust
gas flow. FM2 is optional if the suction blower SB is calibrated to
measure the flow.
PB Pressure blower (fractional sampling type figure 13 only)
To control the diluent flow rate, PB may be connected to the flow
controllers FC1 or FC2. PB is not required when using a butterfly valve.
PB may be used to measure the diluent flow, if calibrated.
SB suction Blower
SB may be used to measure the diluted exhaust gas flow, if calibrated.
DT Dilution Tunnel (Partial flow)
The dilution tunnel:
(a) Shall be of a sufficient length to cause complete mixing of the exhaust
and diluent under turbulent flow conditions (Reynolds number, Re,
greater than 4 000, where Re is based on the inside diameter of the
dilution tunnel) for a fractional sampling system, i.e. complete
mixing is not required for a total sampling system;
(b) Shall be constructed of stainless steel;
(c) May be heated to no greater than 325 K (52 °C) wall temperature;
(d) May be insulated
PSP Particulate Sampling Probe (fractional sampling type, Figure
13 only)
The particulate sampling probe is the leading section of the particulate
transfer tube PTT (see clause A.2.2.6) and:
(a) Shall be installed facing upstream at a point where the diluent and
exhaust gas are well mixed, i.e. on the dilution tunnel DT centreline
approximately 10 tunnel diameters downstream of the point where
the exhaust enters the dilution tunnel;
(b) Shall be 8 mm in minimum inside diameter;
(c) May be heated to no greater than 325 K (52 °C) wall temperature by
direct heating or by diluent pre-heating, provided the diluent
temperature does not exceed 325 K (52 °C) prior to the introduction
of the exhaust into the dilution tunnel;
(d) May be insulated.
165/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A 2.2.3 Description of full flow dilution system

A dilution system is described based upon the dilution of the total
amount of raw exhaust gas in the dilution tunnel DT using the CVS
(constant volume sampling) concept, and is shown in Figure 7.
The diluted exhaust gas flow rate shall be measured either with a
positive displacement pump (PDP), with a critical flow venturi (CFV)
or with a subsonic venturi (SSV). A heat exchanger (HE) or electronic
flow compensation (EFC) may be used for proportional particulate
sampling and for flow determination. Since particulate mass
determination is based on the total diluted exhaust gas flow, it is not
necessary to calculate the dilution ratio.
For subsequent collection of the particulates, a sample of the dilute
exhaust gas shall be passed to the double dilution particulate sampling
system (see Figure 9). Although partly a dilution system, the double
dilution system is described as a modification of a particulate sampling
system, since it shares most of the parts with a typical particulate
sampling system.
Figure 7
Scheme of full flow dilution system (CVS)
a = analyzer system b = background air c = exhaust d = details see Figure
17 e = to double dilution system f = if EFC is used i = vent g = optional
h = or
166/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A2.2.4 Components of figure 7

EP Exhaust Pipe
The exhaust pipe length from the exit of the engine exhaust manifold,
turbocharger outlet or after-treatment device to the dilution tunnel shall
be not more than 10 m. If the system exceeds 4 m in length, then all
tubing in excess of 4 m shall be insulated, except for an in-line smoke
meter, if used. The radial thickness of the insulation shall be at least 25
mm. The thermal conductivity of the insulating material shall have a
value no greater than 0.1 W/mK measured at 673 K. To reduce the
thermal inertia of the exhaust, pipe a thickness-to- diameter ratio of
0.015 or less is recommended. The use of flexible sections shall be
limited to a length-to- diameter ratio of 12 or less.
PDP (Positive Displacement Pump)
The PDP meters total diluted exhaust flow from the number of the pump
revolutions and the pump displacement. The exhaust system
backpressure shall not be artificially lowered by the PDP or diluent inlet
system. Static exhaust backpressure measured with the PDP system
operating shall remain within ± 1.5 kPa of the static pressure measured
without connection to the PDP at identical engine speed and load. The
gas mixture temperature immediately ahead of the PDP shall be within
± 6 K of the average operating temperature observed during the test,
when no flow compensation (EFC) is used. Flow compensation is only
permitted, if the temperature at the inlet to the PDP does not exceed 323
K (50 °C).
CFV
CFV measures total diluted exhaust flow by maintaining the flow at
chocked conditions (critical flow). Static exhaust backpressure
measured with the CFV system operating shall remain within ± 1.5 kPa
of the static pressure measured without connection to the CFV at
identical engine speed and load. The gas mixture temperature
immediately ahead of the CFV shall be within ± 11 K of the average
operating temperature observed during the test, when no flow
compensation (EFC) is used.
SSV Subsonic venturi
SSV measures total diluted exhaust flow by using the gas flow function
of a subsonic venturi in dependence of inlet pressure and temperature
and pressure drop between venturi inlet and throat. Static exhaust
backpressure measured with the SSV system operating shall remain
within ± 1.5 kPa of the static pressure measured without connection to
the SSV at identical engine speed and load. The gas mixture temperature
immediately ahead of the SSV shall be within ± 11 K of the average
operating temperature observed during the test, when no flow
compensation (EFC) is used.
167/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
HE HEAT EXCHANGER (Optional)

The heat exchanger shall be of sufficient capacity to maintain the
temperature within the limits required above. If EFC is used, the heat
exchanger is not required.
EFC (electronic flow compensation)
If the temperature at the inlet to the PDP, CFV or SSV is not kept within
the limits stated above, a flow compensation system is required for
continuous measurement of the flow rate and control of the proportional
sampling into the double dilution system. For that purpose, the
continuously measured flow rate signals are used to maintain the
proportionality of the sample flow rate through the particulate filters of
the double dilution system (see Figure 9) within ± 2.5 per cent.
DT Dilution tunnel (full flow)
The dilution tunnel:
(a) Shall be small enough in diameter to cause turbulent flow (Reynolds
number, Re, greater than 4000, where Re is based on the inside diameter
of the dilution tunnel) and of sufficient length to cause complete mixing
of the exhaust and diluent;
(b) May be insulated;
(c) May be heated up to a wall temperature sufficient to eliminate
aqueous condensation.
The engine exhaust shall be directed downstream at the point where it is
introduced into the dilution tunnel, and thoroughly mixed. A mixing
orifice may be used.
For the double dilution system, a sample from the dilution tunnel is
transferred to the secondary dilution tunnel where it is further diluted,
and then passed through the sampling filters (Figure 9). The secondary
dilution system shall provide sufficient secondary diluent to maintain
the doubly diluted exhaust stream at a temperature between 315 K (42
°C) and 325 K (52 °C) immediately before the particulate filter.
DAF Diluent Filter
The diluent (ambient air, synthetic air, or nitrogen) shall be filtered with
a high-efficiency (HEPA) filter that has an initial minimum collection
efficiency of 99.97 per cent according to EN 1822-1 (filter class H14 or
better), ASTM F 1471-93 or equivalent standard.
PSP Particulate Sampling Probe
The probe is the leading section of PTT and:
(a) Shall be installed facing upstream at a point where the diluent and
exhaust gases are well mixed, i.e. on the dilution tunnel DT centreline
of the dilution systems, approximately 10 tunnel diameters downstream
of the point where the exhaust enters the dilution tunnel;
(b) Shall be of 8 mm minimum inside diameter;
(c) May be heated to no greater than 325 K (52 °C) wall temperature by
direct heating or by diluent pre-heating, provided the air temperature
168/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
does not exceed 325 K (52 °C) prior to the introduction of the exhaust
in the dilution tunnel;
(d) May be insulated.
A2.2.5 Description of particulate sampling system
The particulate sampling system is required for collecting the
particulates on the particulate filter and is shown in Figures 8 and 9. In
the case of total sampling partial flow dilution, which consists of passing
the entire diluted exhaust sample through the filters, the dilution and
sampling systems usually form an integral unit (see Figure 4). In the case
of fractional sampling partial flow dilution or full flow dilution, which
consists of passing through the filters only a portion of the diluted
exhaust, the dilution and sampling systems usually form different units.
For a partial flow dilution system, a sample of the diluted exhaust gas is
taken from the dilution tunnel DT through the particulate sampling
probe PSP and the particulate transfer tube PTT by means of the
sampling pump P, as shown in Figure 16. The sample is passed through
the filter holder(s) FH that contain the particulate sampling filters. The
sample flow rate is controlled by the flow controller FC3.
For of full flow dilution system, a double dilution particulate sampling
system shall be used, as shown in Figure 9. A sample of the diluted
exhaust gas is transferred from the dilution tunnel DT through the
particulate sampling probe PSP and the particulate transfer tube PTT to
the secondary dilution tunnel SDT, where it is diluted once more. The
sample is then passed through the filter holder(s) FH that contain the
particulate sampling filters. The diluent flow rate is usually constant
whereas the sample flow rate is controlled by the flow controller FC3.
If electronic flow compensation EFC (see Figure7) is used, the total
diluted exhaust gas flow is used as command signal for FC3.
a= from dilution tunnel

CFV Calibration Configuration
Figure 8
Scheme of particulate sampling system
169/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
a =diluted exhaust from DT b = optional c = vent d = secondary diluent.

Figure 9
Scheme of double dilution particulate sampling system
A2.2.6 Components of Figure 8 (partial flow system only) and Figure 9 (full
flow system only)
PTT Particulate Transfer Tube
The transfer tube:
(a) Shall be inert with respect to PM;
(b) May be heated to no greater than 325 K (52 °C) wall temperature;
(c) May be insulated.
SDT Secondary dilution tunnel (Figure 17 only)
The secondary dilution tunnel:
(a) Shall be of sufficient length and diameter so as to comply with the
residence time requirements of clause 9.4.2(f) of this chapter;
FH Filter holder
The filter holder:
(a) Shall have a 12.5 °C (from center) divergent cone angle to transition
from the transfer line diameter to the exposed diameter of the filter face;
Multiple filter changers (auto changers) are acceptable, as long as there
is no interaction between sampling filters.
PTFE membrane filters shall be installed in a specific cassette
within the filter holder.
An inertial pre-classifier with a 50 per cent cut point between 2.5 μm
and 10 μm shall be installed immediately upstream of the filter holder,
if an open tube sampling probe facing upstream is used.
170/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
P Sampling Pump
FC2 Flow Controller
A flow controller shall be used for controlling the particulate sample
flow rate.
Gas meter or flow instrumentation to determine the particulate sample flow
through the particulate filter. It may be installed upstream or downstream of
the sampling pump P.
Gas meter or flow instrumentation to determine the secondary diluent
flow through the particulate filter.
Ball valve (optional)
The ball valve shall have an inside diameter not less than the inside
diameter of the particulate transfer tube PTT, and a switching time of
less than 0.5 second
171/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
STATISTICS
A3.1 MEAN VALUE AND STANDARD DEVIATION
The arithmetic mean value shall be calculated as follows:
∑ 𝑥
𝑥̅ = (102)
𝑛
The standard deviation can be calculated as follows:
∑ (𝑥 − 𝑥̅ )
𝑠= (103)
𝑛−1
A3.2 Regression Analysis
The slope of the regression shall be calculated as follows:
∑ (𝑦 − 𝑦) × (𝑥 − 𝑥̅ )
𝑎 = (104)
∑ (𝑥 − 𝑥̅ )
The y intercept of the regression shall be calculated as follows:
𝑎 = 𝑦 − (𝑎 × 𝑥̅ ) (105)
The standard error of estimate (SEE) shall be calculated as follows:

∑ [𝑦 − 𝑎 − (𝑎 × 𝑥 )]
𝑆𝐸𝐸 = (106)
𝑛−2
The coefficient of determination shall be calculated as follows:

∑ [𝑦 − 𝑎 − (𝑎 × 𝑥 )]
𝑟 =1− (107)
∑ (𝑦 − 𝑦 )
A3.3 Determination of system equivalency
The determination of system equivalency according to clause 5.1.1 of
this chapter shall be based on a seven sample pair (or larger) correlation
study between the candidate system and one of the accepted reference
systems of this chapter using the appropriate test cycle(s). The
equivalency criteria to be applied shall be the F-test and the two-sided
Student t-test.
This statistical method examines the hypothesis that the sample
standard deviation and sample mean value for an emission measured
with the candidate system do not differ from the sample standard
deviation and sample mean value for that emission measured with the
reference system. The hypothesis shall be tested on the basis of a 10
per cent significance level of the F and t values. The critical F and t
values for seven to ten sample pairs are given in Table 9. If the F and t
values calculated according to the equation below are greater than the
critical F and t values, the candidate system is not equivalent
The following procedure shall be followed. The subscripts R and C
refer to the reference and candidate system, respectively:
(a) Conduct at least seven tests with the candidate and reference
172/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
systems operated in parallel. The number of tests is referred to as 𝑛 and

𝑛 ;
(b) Calculate the mean values 𝑥 and 𝑥 and the standard deviations
𝑠 and 𝑠 ;
(c) Calculate the F value, as follows:
𝑠
𝐹= (108)
𝑠
(the greater of the two standard deviations 𝑠 or 𝑠 shall be in the
numerator);
(d) Calculate the t value, as follows:
|𝑥 − 𝑥 |
𝑡= (109)
𝑠 𝑠
+
𝑛 𝑛
(e) Compare the calculated F and t values with the critical F and t
values corresponding to the respective number of tests indicated in
Table 9. If larger sample sizes are selected, consult statistical tables for
10 per cent significance (90 per cent confidence) level;
(f) Determine the degrees of freedom (𝑑 ), as follows:
For the F-test 𝑑 = 𝑛 − 1, 𝑑 =𝑛 −
1 (110)
For the t-test: 𝑑 =

(𝑛 + 𝑛 − 2)⁄2 (111)
(g) Determine the equivalency, as follows:

(i) If 𝐹 < 𝐹 and 𝑡 < 𝑡 , then the candidate system is equivalent to
the reference system of this chapter;
(ii) If 𝐹 ≥ 𝐹 or 𝑡 ≥ 𝑡 , then the candidate system is different from
the reference system of this chapter.
t and F values for selected sample sizes
Sample
F-test t-test
Size
𝑑𝑓 𝐹 𝑑𝑓 𝑡
7 6, 6 3.055 6 1.943
8 7, 7 2.785 7 1.895
9 8, 8 2.589 8 1.860
10 9, 9 2.440 9 1.833
173/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
CARBON FLOW CHECK
A4.1 Introduction
All but a tiny part of the carbon in the exhaust comes from the fuel, and
all but a minimal part of this is manifest in the exhaust gas as CO2. This
is the basis for a system verification check based on CO2 measurements.
The flow of carbon into the exhaust measurement systems is determined
from the fuel flow rate. The flow of carbon at various sampling points
in the emissions and particulate sampling systems is determined from
the CO2 concentrations and gas flow rates at those points.
In this sense, the engine provides a known source of carbon flow, and
observing the same carbon flow in the exhaust pipe and at the outlet of
the partial flow PM sampling system verifies leak integrity and flow
measurement accuracy. This check has the advantage that the
components are operating under actual engine test conditions of
temperature and flow.
Figure 1 shows the sampling points at which the carbon flows shall be
checked. The specific equations for the carbon flows at each of the
sample points are given below.
Figure 1
Measuring points for carbon flow check
A 4.2 Carbon flow Rate into the Engine (location 1)
The carbon mass flow rate into the engine for a fuel CHaOeis given by:
.
𝑞 = . . ∝ .
∙𝑞
(112)
174/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Where:
𝑞 is the fuel mass flow rate, kg/s
A4.3 Carbon flow rate in the raw exhaust (location 2)
The carbon mass flow rate in the exhaust pipe of the engine shall be
determined from the raw CO 2 concentration and the exhaust gas mass
flow rate:
, , ) .
𝑞 = ×𝑞 × (113)
Where:
cCO2, is the wet CO2 concentration in the raw exhaust gas, per cent
cCO2, is the wet CO2 concentration in the ambient air, per cent
𝑞 is the exhaust gas mass flow rate on wet basis, kg/s
Me is the molar mass of exhaust gas, g/mol
If CO 2 is measured on a dry basis it shall be converted to a wet basis
according to clause 8.1 of this chapter
A4.4 Carbon flow rate in the dilution system (location 3)
For the partial flow dilution system, the splitting ratio also needs to be
taken into account. The carbon flow rate shall be determined from the
dilute CO 2 concentration, the exhaust gas mass flow rate and the sample
flow rate:
, , .
𝑞 = ×𝑞 × × (114)
𝐶 , is the wet CO2 concentration in the dilute exhaust gas at the outlet
of the dilution tunnel, per cent
𝐶 , is the wet CO2 concentration in the ambient air, per cent
𝑞 is the exhaust gas mass flow rate on wet basis, kg/s
𝑞 is the sample flow of exhaust gas into partial flow dilution system,
kg/s
𝑀 is the molar mass of exhaust gas, g/mol
If CO2 is measured on a dry basis, it shall be converted to wet basis
according to clause 8.1 of this chapter.
A4.5 Calculation of the molar mass of the exhaust gas
The molar mass of the exhaust gas shall be calculated according to
equation 41 (see clause 8.4.2.4 of this chapter).
Alternatively, the following exhaust gas molar masses may be used:
Me (diesel) = 28.9 g/mol
Me (LPG) = 28.6 g/mol
Me (NG) = 28.3 g/mol
175/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
EXAMPLE OF CALCULATON PROCEDURE
A5.1 Speed and torque denormalization procedure
As an example, the following test point shall be denormalized:

per cent speed = 43 per cent
per cent torque = 82 per cent
Given the following values:
nlo = 1 015 min –1
nhi = 2 200 min –1
npref = 1 300 min –1
nidle = 600 min –1
results in:
𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑢𝑎𝑙 𝑠𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑑
43 × (0.45 × 1015 + 0.45 × 1300 + 0.1 × 2200 − 600) × 2.0327
= + 600
100
= 1.178𝑚𝑖𝑛
With the maximum torque of 700 Nm observed from the mapping
curve at 1,178 min–1
actual torque = 82 X 700 = 574
Nm
100
A5.2 Basic Data for Stoichiometric Calculations
Atomic mass of hydrogen 1.00794 g/atom
Atomic mass of carbon 12.011 g/atom
Atomic mass of sulphur 32.065 g/atom
Atomic mass of nitrogen 14.0067 g/atom
Atomic mass of oxygen 15.9994 g/atom
Atomic mass of argon 39.9 g/atom
Molar mass of water 18.01534 g/mol
Molar mass of carbon dioxide 44.01 g/mol
Molar mass of carbon monoxide 28.011 g/mol
Molar mass of oxygen 31.9988 g/mol
Molar mass of nitrogen 28.011 g/mol
Molar mass of nitric oxide 30.008 g/mol
Molar mass of nitrogen dioxide 46.01 g/mol
Molar mass of sulphur dioxide 64.066 g/mol
Molar mass of dry air 28.965 g/mol
176/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Assuming no compressibility effects, all gases involved in the engine

intake/combustion/exhaust process can be considered to be ideal and
any volumetric calculations shall therefore be based on a molar
volume of 22.414 l/mol according to Avogadro's hypothesis.
A5.3 Gaseous emissions (diesel fuel)
The measurement data of an individual point of the test cycle (data
sampling rate of 1 Hz) for the calculation of the instantaneous mass
emission are shown below. In this example, CO and NOx are measured
on a dry basis, HC on a wet basis. The HC concentration is given in
propane equivalent (C3) and has to be multiplied by 3 to result in the
C1 equivalent. The calculation procedure is identical for the other
points of the cycle.
The calculation example shows the rounded intermediate results of the
different steps for better illustration. It should be noted that for actual
calculation, rounding of intermediate results is not permitted (see
clause 8. of this chapter).
cHC,
i
Ta,i Ha,I Wact qmew,i qmaw,i qmf,i pp cCO, I cNOx,i
(K) (g/kg) (kWh) (kg/s) (kg/s (kg/s) m ppm ppm
295 8.0 40 0.155 0.150 0.005 10 40 500
The following fuel composition is considered:
Component Molar ratio Per cent mass
H α = 1.8529 wALF = 13.45
C β = 1.0000 wBET = 86.50
S γ = 0.0002 wGAM = 0.050
N δ = 0.0000 wDEL = 0.000
O ε = 0.0000 wEPS = 0.000
Step 1: Dry/wet correction (clause 8.1 of this chapter):
Equation 16:
kf = 0.055584 × 13.45 – 0.0001083 × 86.5 – 0.0001562 × 0.05 =
0.7382
Equation 13:
Equation 12:
cCO,i (wet) = 40 × 0,9331 = 37,3 ppm
cNOx,i (wet) = 500 × 0,9331 = 466,6 ppm
177/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Step 2: NOx correction for temperature and humidity (clause

8.2.1 of this chapter):
Equation 23:
Step 3: Calculation of the instantaneous emission of each

individual point of the cycle (clause 8.4.2.3 of this chapter):
Equation 36:
mHC,i= 10 × 3 × 0.155 = 4.650
mCO,i= 37.3 × 0.155 = 5.782
mNOx,i= 466.6 × 0.9576 × 0.155 = 69.26
Step 4: Calculation of the mass emission over the cycle by

integration of the instantaneous emission values and the u values
from Table 5 (clause 8.4.2.3 of this chapter):
The following calculation is assumed for the WHTC cycle (1,800 s)
and the same emission in each point of the cycle.
Equation 36:
Step 5: Calculation of the specific emissions (clause 8.6.3 of this

chapter):
Equation 69:
eHC= 4.01/40 =0.10 g/kWh
eCO= 10.05/40 =0.25 g/kWh
eNOx=197.72/40 = 4.94 g/kWh
A5.4 Particulate Emission (diesel fuel)
pb,b pb,a qmew,i qmf,i muncor, muncor,
(kPa (kPa Wact (kg/s (kg/s qmdw,i qmdew,i b a msep
) ) (kWh) ) ) (kg/s) (kg/s) (mg) (mg) (kg)
0.002 90.00 91.70

99 100 40 0.155 0.005 0.0015 0 0 0 1.515
178/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Step 1: Calculation of medf (clause 8.4.3.2.2 of this chapter):

Equation 48:
rd.I = 0.002 / (0.002 – 0.0015) = 4
Equation 47:
q medf,I = 0,155 × 4 = 0,620 kg/s
Equation 46:
Step 2: Buoyancy correction of the particulate mass (clause 8.3 of

this chapter):
Before test:
Equation 26:
Equation 25:
After test:
Equation 26:
Equation 25:
Equation 27:
mP = 91.7334 mg – 90.0325 mg = 1.7009 mg
Step 3: Calculation of the particulate mass emission (clause

8.4.3.2.2 of this chapter):
Equation 45:
Step 4: Calculation of the specific emission (clause 8.6.3 of this

chapter):
Equation 69:
ePM = 1.253/40 = 0.031 g/kWh
179/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A5.5 λ-Shift factor (S λ)

A5.5.1 Calculation of the λ-shift factor (Sλ) (1)
Where:
Sλ = λ-shift factor;
inert % = per cent by volume of inert gases in the fuel (i.e. N 2 , CO
2 , He, etc.);
O 2 * = per cent by volume of original oxygen in the fuel;
n and m = refer to average CnHm representing the fuel hydrocarbons,
i.e.:
Where:
CH4 = per cent by volume of methane in the fuel;
C2= per cent by volume of all C2 hydrocarbons (e.g.: C2H6, C2H4,
etc.) in the fuel;
etc.) in the fuel;
etc.) in the fuel;
C5 = per cent by volume of all C5 hydrocarbons (e.g.: C5H1, C5H10,
etc.) in the fuel;
diluent = per cent by volume of dilution gases in the fuel (i.e.: O2 *,
N2, CO2, He, etc.).
180/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A5.5.2 Examples for the calculation of the λ-shift factor Sλ:
Example 1: G25: CH4 = 86 per cent, N2 = 14 per cent (by volume)
Example 2: GR : CH4 = 87 per cent, C2H6 = 13 per cent (by volume)
Example 3: USA: CH4 = 89 per cent, C2H6= 4.5 per cent, C3H8= 2.3
per cent, C6H14 = 0.2 per cent, O2 = 0.6 per cent, N2 = 4 per cent
181/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
INSTALLATION OF AUXILIARIES AND
EQUIPMENT FOR EMISSION TEST
Sr.Number Auxiliaries Fitted for emission test
1 Inlet system
Inlet manifold Yes
Crank case emission control system Yes
Control devices for dual induction Yes

inlet manifold system
Air flow meter Yes
Air inlet duct work Yes, or test cell

equipment
Air filter Yes, or test cell
equipment
Inlet silencer Yes, or test cell
equipment
Speed limiting device Yes
Induction-heating device for inlet Yes, if possible to be set

2 manifold in the most favorable
condition
Exhaust system
Exhaust manifold
Yes
Connecting pipes
Yes
3 Silencer Yes
Tail pipe Yes
No, or fully open
Exhaust brake
Yes
Pressure charging device
4 Fuel supply pump Yes
Equipment for gas engines

Yes
Electronic control system, air flow
5 meter, etc. Yes
Yes
Pressure reducer
Yes
182/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Evaporator
Mixer
Fuel injection equipment
Prefilter
Filter
Yes
Pump
Yes
High pressure pipe
Yes
Injector Yes
6
Air inlet valve Yes
Yes
Electronic control system, sensors
etc. Yes
Yes
Governor/control system
Yes
Automatic full load stops for the
control rack depending on
atmospheric conditions
Liquid cooling equipment
Radiator No
Fan No
7 No
Fan cowl
Yes
Water pump
Yes, may be fixed fully
Thermostat open
Air cooling
Cowl
No
8
Fan or Blower No
No
Temperature regulating device
Electrical equipment
Generator No
9 Yes
Coil or coils
Yes
Wiring Yes
183/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Electronic control system
Intake air charging equipment
Compressor driven either directly by

the engine and/or by the exhaust Yes
gases
10
Charge air cooler Yes, or test cell system
No
Coolant pump or fan (engine driven)
Yes
Coolant flow control device
Anti-pollution device (exhaust after-

11 treatment system) Yes
12 Starting equipment Yes, or test cell system
13 Lubricating oil pump Yes
184/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
PROCEDURE FOR THE MEASUREMENT OF AMMONIA

A7.1 This Appendix describes the procedure for measurement of
ammonia (NH3). For non-linear analysers, the use of linearising
circuits shall be permitted.
A.7.2. Two measurement principles are specified for NH3 measurement

and either principle may be used provided it meets the criteria
specified in clause A.7.2.1. or A.7.2.2., respectively. Gas dryers
shall not be permitted for NH3 measurement.
A.7.2.1. Laser Diode Spectrometer (LDS)
A.7.2.1.1. Measurement principle
The LDS employs the single line spectroscopy principle. The

NH3 absorption line is chosen in the near infrared spectral range
and scanned by a single-mode diode laser.
A.7.2.1.2 Installation
The analyser shall be installed either directly in the exhaust pipe

(in-situ) or within an analyser cabinet using extractive sampling
in accordance with the instrument manufacturer’s instructions. If
installed in an analyser cabinet, the sample path (sampling line,
pre-filter(s) and valves) shall be made of stainless steel or PTFE
and shall be heated to 463±10 K (190±10°C) in order to minimize
NH3 losses and sampling artefacts. In addition, the sampling line
shall be as short as practically possible.
Influence from exhaust temperature and pressure, installation

environment and vibrations on the measurement shall be
minimized, or compensation techniques be used.
If applicable, sheath air used in conjunction with in-situ

measurement for protection of the instrument, shall not affect the
concentration of any exhaust component measured downstream
of the device, or sampling of other exhaust components shall be
made upstream of the device.
A.7.2.1.3. Cross interference
The spectral resolution of the laser shall be within 0.5 cm-1 in

order to minimize cross interference from other gases present in
the exhaust gas.
A.7.2.2. Fourier Transform Infrared (hereinafter FTIR) analyser
185/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A.7.2.2.1 Measurement principle
The FTIR employs the broad waveband infrared spectroscopy

principle. It allows simultaneous measurement of exhaust
components whose standardized spectra are available in the
instrument. The absorption spectrum (intensity/wavelength) is
calculated from the measured interferogram (intensity/time) by
means of the Fourier transform method.
Installation and sampling

A.7.2.2.2.
The FTIR shall be installed in accordance with the instrument
manufacturer's instructions. The NH3 wavelength shall be
selected for evaluation. The sample path (sampling line, pre-
filter(s) and valves) shall be made of stainless steel or PTFE and
shall be heated to 463±10 K (190±10°C) in order to minimize
NH3 losses and sampling artefacts. In addition, the sampling line
shall be as short as practically possible
A.7.2.2.3. Cross interference
The spectral resolution of the NH3 wavelength shall be within 0.5

cm-1 in order to minimize cross interference from other gases
present in the exhaust gas.
A.7.3. Emissions Test Procedure and Evaluation
Checking the analysers

A.7.3.1
Prior to the emissions test, the analyser range shall be selected.
Emission analysers with automatic or manual range switching
shall be permitted. During the test cycle, the range of the
analysers shall not be switched.
Zero and span response shall be determined, if the provisions of
clause A.7.3.4.2. do not apply for the instrument. For the span
response, a NH3 gas that meets the specifications of clause
A.7.4.2.7. shall be used. The use of reference cells that contain
NH3 span gas is permitted.
A.7.3.2 Collection of emission relevant data
At the start of the test sequence, the NH3 data collection shall be
started, simultaneously. The NH3 concentration shall be
measured continuously and stored with at least 1 Hz on a
computer system.
.A7.3.3. Operations after test
At the completion of the test, sampling shall continue until
system response times have elapsed. Determination of analyser's
drift according to clause A.7.3.4.1. shall only be required if the
information in clause A.7.3.4.2. is not available
186/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A.7.3.4. Analyser drift
As soon as practical but no later than 30 minutes after the test

.A7.3.4.1
cycle is complete or during the soak period, the zero and span
responses of the analyser shall be determined. The difference
between the pre-test and post-test results shall be less than 2 per
cent of full scale.
Determination of analyser drift is not required in the following

A7.3.4.2
situations:
(a) if the zero and span drift specified by the instrument

manufacturer in clauses A.7.4.2.3. and A.7.4.2.4. meets the
requirements of clause A.7.3.4.1.,
(b)the time interval for zero and span drift specified by the
instrument manufacturer in clauses A.7.4.2.3. and A.7.4.2.4.
exceeds the duration of the test.
Data evaluation
A7.3.5
The average NH3 concentration (ppm/test) shall be determined
by integrating the instantaneous values over the cycle. The
following equation shall be applied:
i n
1
n c NH3,i
cNH3 = i 1 in ppm/test) (115)
where:
cNH3,i is the instantaneous NH3 concentration in the exhaust

gas, ppm
For the WHTC, the final test result shall be determined with the
following equation:
c NH3  0.14  c NH3, cold   0.86  c NH3, hot 

(116)
where:
cNH3, cold is the average NH3 concentration of the cold start

test, ppm
cNH3, hot is the average NH3 concentration of the hot start test,
ppm
187/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Analyser Specification and Verification

A 7.4
Linearity requirements
A.7.4.1.
The analyser shall comply with the linearity requirements
specified in Table 7 of this chapter. The linearity verification in
accordance with clause 9.2.1. of this chapter, shall be performed
at least every 12 months or whenever a system repair or change
is made that could influence calibration. With the prior approval
of the test agency, less than 10 reference points are permitted, if
an equivalent accuracy can be demonstrated.
For the linearity verification, a NH3 gas that meets the

specifications of clause A.7.4.2.7. shall be used. The use of
reference cells that contain NH3 span gas shall be permitted.
Instruments, whose signals are used for compensation algorithms,

shall meet the linearity requirements specified in Table 7 of this
chapter. Linearity verification shall be done as required by
internal audit procedures, by the instrument manufacturer or in
accordance with ISO 9000 requirements
Analyser specifications
A 7.4.2
The analyser shall have a measuring range and response time
appropriate for the accuracy required to measure the
concentration of NH3 under transient and steady state conditions
Minimum detection limit

A7.4.2.1
The analyser shall have a minimum detection limit of < 2 ppm
under all conditions of testing
Accuracy
A7.4.2.2
The accuracy, defined as the deviation of the analyser reading
from the reference value, shall not exceed ± 3 per cent of the
reading or ± 2 ppm, whichever is larger.
Zero drift
A7.4.2.3
The drift of the zero response and the related time interval shall
be specified by the instrument manufacturer.
Span drift
A7.4.2.4
The drift of the span response and the related time interval shall
be specified by the instrument manufacturer.
188/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
System response time

A7.4.2.5
The system response time shall be  20 s
Rise time
A7.4.2.6
The rise time of the analyser shall be  5 s
NH3 calibration gas

A7.4.2.7
A gas mixture with the following chemical composition shall be
available.
NH3 and purified nitrogen
The true concentration of the calibration gas shall be within ± 3

per cent of the nominal value. The concentration of NH3 shall be
given on a volume basis (volume percent or volume ppm).
The expiration date of the calibration gases stated by the

manufacturer shall be recorded.
A7.5 Alternative systems

Other systems or analysers may be approved by the test agency,
if it is found that they yield equivalent results in accordance with
clause 5.1.1 of this chapter.
"Results" shall refer to average cycle specific NH3

concentrations.
189/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
PARTICLE NUMBER EMISSIONS MEASUREMENT
EQUIPMENT
A8.1 SPECIFICATION
A8.1.1 System Overview
A8.1.1.1 The particle sampling system shall consist of a probe or

sampling point extracting a sample from a homogenously mixed
flow in a dilution system as described in Appendix 2 to this
chapter, clause A.2.2.1 and A.2.2.2 or A.2.2.3 and A.2.2.4, a
volatile particle remover (VPR) upstream of a particle number
counter (PNC) and suitable transfer tubing.
A8.1.1.2 It is recommended that a particle size pre-classifier (e.g.

cyclone, impactor, etc.) be located prior to the inlet of the VPR.
However, a sample probe acting as an appropriate size-
classification device, such as that shown in Appendix 2 to this
chapter, Figure 14, is an acceptable alternative to the use of a
particle size pre-classifier. In the case of partial flow dilution
systems, it is acceptable to use the same pre-classifier for
particulate mass and particle number sampling, extracting the
particle number sample from the dilution system downstream of
the pre-classifier. Alternatively, separate pre-classifiers may be
used, extracting the particle number sample from the dilution
system upstream of the particulate mass pre-classifier.
A8.1.2 General Requirements
8.1.2.1 The particle sampling point shall be located within a dilution

system
The sampling probe tip or particle sampling point and particle

transfer tube (PTT) together comprise the particle transfer
system (PTS). The PTS conducts the sample from the dilution
tunnel to the entrance of the VPR. The PTS shall meet the
following conditions:
In the case of full flow dilution systems and partial flow dilution
systems of the fractional sampling type (as described in
Appendix 2 to this chapter, clause A.2.2.1) the sampling probe
shall be installed near the tunnel centre line, 10 to 20 tunnel
diameters downstream of the gas inlet, facing upstream into the
tunnel gas flow with its axis at the tip parallel to that of the
dilution tunnel. The sampling probe shall be positioned within
the dilution tract so that the sample is taken from a homogeneous
diluent/exhaust mixture.
190/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
In the case of partial flow dilution systems of the total sampling

type (as described in Appendix 2 to this chapter, clause A.2.2.1)
the particle sampling point or sampling probe shall be located in
the particulate transfer tube, upstream of the particulate filter
holder, flow measurement device and any sample/bypass
bifurcation point. The sampling point or sampling probe shall be
positioned so that the sample is taken from a homogeneous
diluent/exhaust mixture. The dimensions of the particle sampling
probe should be sized not to interfere with the operation of the
partial flow dilution system.
Sample gas drawn through the PTS shall meet the following
conditions:
In the case of full flow dilution systems, it shall have a flow
Reynolds number (Re) of < 1 700;
In the case of partial flow dilution systems, it shall have a flow
Reynolds number (Re) of < 1 700 in the PTT i.e. downstream of
the sampling probe or point;
It shall have a residence time in the PTS of ≤ 3 seconds.
Any other sampling configuration for the PTS for which
equivalent particle penetration at 30 nm can be demonstrated will
be considered acceptable.
The outlet tube (OT) conducting the diluted sample from the
VPR to the inlet of the PNC shall have the following properties:
It shall have an internal diameter of ≥ 4 mm;
Sample Gas flow through the OT shall have a residence time of
≤ 0.8 second.
Any other sampling configuration for the OT for which
equivalent particle penetration at 30 nm can be demonstrated
will be considered acceptable.
A8.1.2.2 The VPR shall include devices for sample dilution and for volatile
particle removal.
A8.1.2.3 All parts of the dilution system and the sampling system from
the exhaust pipe up to the PNC, which are in contact with raw
and diluted exhaust gas, shall be designed to minimize
deposition of the particles. All parts shall be made of electrically
conductive materials that do not react with exhaust gas
components, and shall be electrically grounded to prevent
electrostatic effects.
A8.1.2.4 The particle sampling system shall incorporate good aerosol
sampling practice that includes the avoidance of sharp bends and
abrupt changes in cross-paragraph, the use of smooth internal
surfaces and the minimization of the length of the sampling line.
Gradual changes in the cross-section are permissible.
191/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A.81.3 Specific Requirements

8.1.3.1 The particle sample shall not pass through a pump before
passing through the PNC.
A.8.1.3.2. A sample pre-classifier is recommended.
A.8.1.3.3. The sample preconditioning unit shall:
A.8.1.3.3.1 Be capable of diluting the sample in one or more stages to
achieve a particle number concentration below the upper
threshold of the single particle count mode of the PNC and a gas
temperature below 35 °C at the inlet to the PNC;
A.8.1.3.3.2 Include an initial heated dilution stage which outputs a sample at
a temperature of ≥ 150 °C and ≤ 400 °C, and dilutes by a factor
of at least 10;
A.8.1.3.3.3 Control heated stages to constant nominal operating
temperatures, within the range specified in clause A.8.1.3.3.2, to
a tolerance of ±10 °C. Provide an indication of whether or not
heated stages are at their correct operating temperatures;
A.8.1.3.3.4 Achieve a particle concentration reduction factor (fr(di)), as
defined in clause A.8.2.2.2 below, for particles of 30 nm and 50
nm electrical mobility diameters, that is no more than 30 per cent
and 20 per cent respectively higher, and no more than 5 per cent
lower than that for particles of 100 nm electrical mobility
diameter for the VPR as a whole;
A.8.1.3.3.5 Also achieve > 99.0 per cent vaporization of 30 nm tetracontane
(CH3 (CH2) 38CH3) particles, with an inlet concentration of ≥
10000 cm –3, by means of heating and reduction of partial
pressures of the tetracontane.
A.8.1.3.4 The PNC shall:
A.8.1.3.4.1 Operate under full flow operating conditions;
A.8.1.3.4.2 Have a counting accuracy of ± 10 per cent across the range 1 cm

–3 to the upper threshold of the single particle count mode of the
PNC against a traceable standard. At concentrations below 100
cm –3 measurements averaged over extended sampling periods
may be required to demonstrate the accuracy of the PNC with a
high degree of statistical confidence;
A.8.1.3.4.3 Have a readability of at least 0.1 particle cm –3 at concentrations
below 100 cm –3;
A.8.1.3.4.4 Have a linear response to particle concentrations over the full
measurement range in single particle count mode;
A.8.1.3.4.5 Have a data reporting frequency equal to or greater than 0.5 Hz;
A.8.1.3.4.6 Have a t 90 response time over the measured concentration range

of less than 5 s;
192/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A.8.1.3.4.7 Incorporate a coincidence correction function up to a maximum

10 per cent correction, and may make use of an internal
calibration factor as determined in clause A.8.2.1.3, but shall not
make use of any other algorithm to correct for or define the
counting efficiency;
A.8.1.3.4.8 Have counting efficiencies at particle sizes of 23 nm (± 1 nm)

and 41 nm (± 1 nm) electrical mobility diameter of 50 per cent
(± 12 per cent) and > 90 per cent respectively. These counting
efficiencies may be achieved by internal (for example; control of
instrument design) or external (for example; size pre-
classification) means;
A.8.1.3.4.9 If the PNC makes use of a working liquid, it shall be replaced at

the frequency specified by the instrument manufacturer.
A.8.1.3.5. Where they are not held at a known constant level at the point at
which PNC flow rate is controlled, the pressure and/or
temperature at inlet to the PNC shall be measured and reported
for the purposes of correcting particle concentration
measurements to standard conditions.
A.8.1.3.6. The sum of the residence time of the PTS, VPR and OT plus the
t 90 response time of the PNC shall be no greater than 20 s.
A.8.1.3.7 The transformation time of the entire particle number sampling

system (PTS, VPR, OT and PNC) shall be determined by aerosol
switching directly at the inlet of the PTS. The aerosol switching
shall be done in less than 0.1 s. The aerosol used for the test shall
cause a concentration change of at least 60 per cent full scale
(FS).
The concentration trace shall be recorded. For time alignment of

the particle number concentration and exhaust flow signals, the
transformation time is defined as the time from the change (t0 )
until the response is 50 per cent of the final reading (t50 ).
A.8.1.4 Recommended system description
The following paragraph contains the recommended practice for

measurement of particle number. However, any system meeting the
performance specifications in clause A.8.1.2 and A.8.1.3 is
acceptable
Figures 1 and 2 are schematic drawings of the recommended particle

sampling system configures for partial and full flow dilution systems
respectively
193/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Figure 1
Schematic of recommended particle sampling system –
Partial flow sampling
Figure 2
Schematic of recommended particle sampling system –
Full flow sampling
194/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A.8.1.4.1 Sampling System Description

The particle sampling system shall consist of a sampling probe
tip o r p a r t i c l e s a m p l i n g p o i n t in the dilution system, a
particle transfers tube (PTT), a particle pre-classifier (PCF)
and a volatile particle remover (VPR) upstream of the particle
number concentration measurement (PNC) unit. The VPR shall
include devices for sample dilution (particle number diluters:
PND 1 and PND 2 ) and particle evaporation (Evaporation t u b e ,
E T ). The sampling probe for the test gas flow shall be so
arranged within the dilution tract that a representative sample
gas flow is taken from a homogeneous air/exhaust mixture. The
sum of the residence time of the system plus the T90 response
time of the PNC shall be no greater than 20 s.
A8.1.4.2 Particle Transfer System

The sampling probe tip (PSP) and particle transfer tube (PTT)
together comprise the particle transfer system (PTS). The PTS
conducts the sample from the dilution tunnel to the entrance
to the first particle number diluter. The PTS shall meet the
In the case of full flow dilution systems and partial flow dilution
systems of the fractional sampling type (as described in Appendix 2
to this chapter, clause A.2.2.1) the sampling probe shall be installed
near the tunnel centre line, 10 to 20 tunnel diameters downstream of
the gas inlet, facing upstream into the tunnel gas flow with its axis
at the tip parallel to that of the dilution tunnel. The sampling probe
shall be positioned within the dilution tract so that the sample is
taken from a homogeneous diluent/exhaust mixture.
In the case of partial flow dilution systems of the total sampling type
(as described in Appendix 2 to this chapter, clause A.2.2.1) the
particle sampling point shall be located in the particulate transfer
tube, upstream of the particulate filter holder, flow measurement
device and any sample/bypass bifurcation point. The sampling point
or sampling probe shall be positioned so that the sample is taken
from a homogeneous diluent/exhaust mixture.
It shall have an internal diameter of ≥ 8 mm.
Sample gas drawn through the PTS shall meet the following
conditions:
It shall have a flow Reynolds number (Re) of < 1700;
It shall have a residence time in the PTS of ≤ 3 seconds.
Any other sampling configuration for the PTS for which
equivalent particle penetration for particles of 30 nm electrical
mobility diameter can be demonstrated will be considered
acceptable.
195/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
The outlet tube (OT) conducting the diluted sample from the
VPR to the inlet of the PNC shall have the following
properties:
It shall have an internal diameter of ≥ 4 mm;
Sample Gas flow through the POT shall have a residence time
of ≤ 0.8 seconds.
Any other sampling configuration for the OT for which
equivalent particle penetration for particles of 30 nm electrical
mobility diameter can be demonstrated will be considered
acceptable.
A.8.1.4.3 Particle Pre-classifier
The recommended particle pre-classifier shall be located
upstream of the VPR. The pre-classifier 50% cut point particle
diameter shall be between 2.5 µm and 10µm at the volumetric
flow rate selected for sampling particle number emissions. The
pre-classifier shall allow at least 99 % of the mass
concentration of 1µm particles entering the pre-classifier to pass
through the exit of the pre-classifier at the volumetric flow rate
selected for sampling particle number emissions. In the case
of partial flow dilution systems, it is acceptable to use the same
pre-classifier for particulate mass and particle number sampling,
extracting the particle number sample from the dilution system
downstream of the pre-classifier. Alternatively, separate pre-
classifiers may be used, extracting the particle number sample
from the dilution system upstream of the particulate mass pre-
classifier
A.8.1.4.4 Volatile Particle Remover (VPR)
The VPR shall comprise one particle number diluter (PND 1 ),
an evaporation tube and a second diluter (PND 2 ) in series. This
dilution function is to reduce the number concentration of the
sample entering the particle concentration measurement
unit to less than the upper t hre s ho l d o f t h e si n gle p a r t ic l e
c o unts mode of the PNC and to suppress nucleation within the
sample. The VPR shall provide an indication of whether or not
PND 1 and the evaporation tube are at their correct operating
temperatures.
The VPR shall achieve > 99.0% vaporization of 30 nm
tetracontane (CH 3(CH 2 ) 38 CH 3 ) particles, with an inlet
concentration of ≥ 10,000 cm -3, by means of heating and
reduction of partial pressures of the tetracontane. It shall
also achieve a p a r t i c l e c o nc e n t r a t i o n re d u c t i o n f a ct o r (f r)
f o r particles of 30 nm and 50 nm electrical mobility
diameters, that is no more than 30% and 20% respectively
higher, and no more than 5% lower than that for particles of
100 nm electrical mobility diameter for the VPR as a whole.
196/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A.8.1.4.4.1 First Particle Number Dilution Device (PND 1)
The first particle number dilution device shall be specifically

designed to dilute particle n u m be r c o n c en t r a t i o n a nd
o p e ra te at a (wall) temperature of 150 °C – 400 °C. The wall
temperature set point should be held at a constant nominal
operating temperature, within this range, to a tolerance of
±10 °C and not exceed the wall temperature of the ET (clause
1.4.4.2). The diluter should be supplied with HEPA filtered
dilution air and be capable of a dilution factor of 10 to 200
times. times.
A.8.1.4.4.2 Evaporation Tube

The entire length of the ET shall be controlled to a wall
temperature greater than or equal to that of the first particle
number dilution device and the wall temperature held
at a fixed nominal operating temperature between 300 °C
and 400 °C, to a tolerance of ±10 °C.
A.8.1.4.4.3 Second Particle Number Dilution Device (PND 2 )
PND 2 shall be specifically designed to dilute particle

number concentration. The diluter shall be supplied with
HEPA filtered dilution air and be capable of maintaining a
single dilution factor within a range of 10 to 30 times. The
dilution factor of PND2 shall be selected in the range between
10 and 15 such that particle number concentration
downstream of the second diluter is less than the upper
threshold of the single particle counts mode of the PNC and
the gas temperature prior to entry to the PNC is < 35 °C.
A.8.1.4.5 Particle Number Counter (PNC)
The PNC shall meet the requirements of clause A.8.1.3.4.
A8.2 CALIBRATION/VALIDATION OF THE PARTICLE

SAMPLING SYSTEM
A8.2.1 Calibration of the Particle Number Counter
A.8.2.1.1 The Test Agency shall ensure the existence of a calibration

certificate for the PNC demonstrating compliance with a
traceable standard within a 12month period prior to the
emissions test.
A.8.2.1.2 The PNC shall also b e r e c a l i b r a t e d a n d a n e w

c a l i b r a t i o n c e r t i f i c a t e i s s u e d following any major
maintenance.
197/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A.8.2.1.3 1.1.1. Calibration shall be traceable to a standard calibration

method:
(a) By comparison of the response of the PNC under
calibration with that of a calibrated aerosol electrometer when
simultaneously sampling electrostatically classified
calibration particles; or
(b) By comparison of the response of the PNC under
calibration with that of a second PNC which has been directly
calibrated by the above method.
(c) In the electrometer case, calibration shall be undertaken
using at least six standard concentrations spaced as
uniformly as possible across the PNC’s measurement range.
These points will include a nominal zero concentration point
produced by attaching HEPA filters of at least class H13 of
EN 1822:2008, or equivalent performance, to the inlet of each
instrument. With no calibration factor applied to the PNC
under calibration, measured concentrations shall be within
±10% of the standard concentration for each concentration
used, with the exception of the zero point, otherwise the PNC
under calibration shall be rejected. The gradient from a linear
regression of the two data sets shall be calculated and
recorded. A calibration factor equal to the reciprocal of the
gradient shall be applied to the PNC under calibration.
Linearity of response is calculated as the square of the Pearson
product moment correlation coefficient (R2) of the two data
sets and shall be equal to or greater than 0.97. In calculating
both the gradient and R2 the linear regression shall be forced
through the origin (zero concentration on both instruments).
(d) In the reference PNC case, calibration shall be
undertaken using at least six standard concentrations across
the PNC’s measurement range. At least three points shall
be at concentrations below 1,000cm-3, the remaining
concentrations shall be linearly spaced between 1,000 cm-3
and the maximum of the PNC's range in single particle count
mode. These points will include a nominal zero concentration
point produced by attaching HEPA filters of at least class H13
of EN 1822:2008, or equivalent performance, to the inlet of
each instrument. With no calibration factor applied to the
PNC under calibration, measured concentrations shall be
within ±10% of the standard concentration for each
concentration, with the exception of the zero point, otherwise
the PNC under calibration shall be rejected. The gradient from
a linear regression of the two data sets shall be calculated and
recorded. A calibration factor equal to the reciprocal
of the gradient shall be applied to the PNC under calibration.
Linearity of response is calculated as the square of the Pearson
product moment correlation coefficient (R2) of the two data
sets and shall be equal to or greater than 0.97. In
calculating both the gradient and R2 the linear regression shall
be forced through the origin.
198/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A.8.2.1.4 Calibration shall also include a check, against the requirements

in clause 1.3.4.8., on the PNC's detection efficiency with
particles of 23 nm electrical mobility diameter. A check of the
counting efficiency with 41 nm particles is not required.
A.8.2.2 Calibration/Validation of the Volatile Particle Remover
A.8.2.2.1 Calibration of the VPR's particle concentration reduction

factors across its full range of dilution settings, at the
instrument’s fixed nominal operating temperatures, shall be
required when the unit is new and following any major
maintenance. The periodic validation requirement for the VPR's
particle concentration reduction factor is limited to a check at a
single setting, typical of that used for measurement on diesel
particulate filter equipped vehicles.
The Test Agency shall ensure t he e x i s t e n c e of a calibration or

validation certificate for the volatile particle remover within a
6 month period prior to the emissions test. If the volatile
particle remover incorporates temperature conformity alarms
a 12month validation interval shall be permissible. The VPR
shall be characterized for particle concentration reduction factor
with solid particles of 30 nm, 50 nm and 100 nm electrical
mobility diameter. Particle concentration reduction factors
(f r(d)) for particles of 30 nm and 50 nm electrical mobility
diameters shall be no more than 30% and 20% higher
respectively, and no more than 5% lower than that for particles
of 100 nm electrical mobility diameter. For T he purposes of
validation, the mean particle concentration reduction factor
shall be within ± 10% of the mean particle concentration
reduction factor ( fr¯) determined during the primary
calibration of the VPR.
A.8.2.2.2 The test aerosol for these measurements shall be solid

particles of 30, 50 and 100 nm electrical mobility diameter and
a Minimum concentration of 5,000 cm-3 particles at the VPR
inlet. Particle concentrations shall be measured upstream and
downstream of the components.
The particle concentration reduction factor at each particle

size (f r(d i )) shall be calculated as follows;
N in (d i )
f r (d i ) 
N out (d i )
Where:
N in (d i ) = upstream particulate number concentration for

particulates of diameter di;
N out (d i ) = downstream particulate number concentration for
particulates of diameter di; and
199/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
d i = particulate electrical mobility diameter (30, 50 or 100

nm).
N in (di) and Nout(di) shall be corrected to the same
conditions.
T he mean particle concentration reduction (fr) at a given
dilution setting shall be calculated as follows;
It is recommended that the VPR is calibrated and validated as a

complete unit
A.8.2.2.3 The Test Agency shall ensure the existence of a validation
certificate for the VPR demonstrating effective volatile
particle removal efficiency within a 6month period prior to the
emissions test. If the volatile particle remover incorporates
temperature conformity alarms a 12month validation interval
shall be permissible. The VPR shall demonstrate greater than
99.0% removal of tetracontane (CH 3 (CH 2 )38CH 3) particles of
at least 30 nm electrical mobility diameter with an inlet
concentration of ≥ 10,000 cm-3 when operated at its minimum
dilution setting and manufacturers recommended operating
temperature.
A.8.2.3 Particle Number System Check Procedures
A.8.2.3.1 Prior to each test, the particle counter shall report a measured
concentration of less than 0.5 particles cm -3 when a HEPA
filter of at least class H13 of EN 1822:2008, or equivalent
performance, is attached to the inlet of the entire particle
sampling system (VPR and PNC).
A.8.2.3.2 On a monthly basis, the flow into the particle counter shall
report a measured value within 5% of the particle counter
nominal flow rate when checked with a calibrated flow meter.
A.8.2.3.3 Each day, following the application of a HEPA filter of at
least class H13 of EN 1822:2008, or equivalent performance,
to the inlet of the particle counter, the particle counter shall
report a concentration of ≤ 0.2cm -3 . Upon removal of this
filter, the particle counter shall show an increase in measured
concentration to at least 100 particles cm -3 when challenged
with ambient air and a return to ≤ 0.2 cm -3 on replacement of
the HEPA filter.
200/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A.8.2.3.4 Prior to the start of each test, it shall be confirmed that the
measurement system indicates that the evaporation tube,
where featured in the system, has reached its correct operating
temperature.
2.3.5 Prior to the start of each test, it shall be confirmed that the
measurement system indicates that the diluter PND 1 has
reached its correct operating temperature.
201/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
CHAPTER 4
TECHNICAL SPECFICATION OF REFENENCE FUEL
As per Gazette Notification G.S.R. 889(E) dated 16th September 2016 published by
Ministry of Road Transport and Highways under CMVR)
4.1 Technical Specification of Reference Hydrogen Fuel.
Characteristics Units Limits Test Method

Minimum Maximum
Hydrogen % mole 98 100 ISO 14687-1
Purity
Total μmol/mol 0 100 ISO 14687-1
Hydrocarbon
Water (1) μmol/mol 0 (2) ISO 14687-1
μmol/mol (2) ISO 14687-1
Oxygen 0
A gon 0
Nitrogen 0
CO μmol/mol 0 1 ISO 14687-1
Sulphur μmol/mol 0 2 ISO 14687-1
Permanent ISO 14687-1
Particulates (3)
(1)
Not to be condensed
(2)
Combined water, oxygen, nitrogen, argon: 1.900 μmol/mol.
(3) The hydrogen shall not contain dust, sand, dirt, gums, oils or other substances in an amount
sufficient to damage the fuelling station equipment of the vehicle (engine) being fuelled.
4.2 Specification of Commercial Gasoline Fuel
Characteristics Unit Requirements

Regular Premium
Color, visual Orange Red
Density @ 150C Kg/m3 720-775 720-775
Distillation:
a) Recovery up to 70 0C (E 70) % volume
10-55 10-55
(summer) (summer)
10-58 (other 10-58 (other
months) months)
b) Recovery up to 100 0C (E 100) % volume 40-70 40-70
c) Recovery up to 150 0C (E 150) % volume 75 min 75 min
d) Final Boiling Point (FBP), max 0C 210 210
e) Residue, max % volume 2 2
Research Octane Number (RON) 91 95
min
Motor Octane Number (MON), min 85 85
202/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Gum content (solvent washed), max mg/100ml 4 4

Oxidation Stability, min minutes 360 360
Sulphur, total, max mg/kg 10 10
Lead content (as Pb), max g/l 0.005 0.005
Reid Vapour Pressure (RVP) @ kPa 67 67
380C, max
Vapour Lock Index (VLI)
a) Summer, max 1050 1050
b) Other months, max 1100 1100
Benzene Content, max % volume 1 1
Copper strip corrosion for 3 hrs @ rating Class 1 Class 1
500C, max
Olefin content, max % volume 21 18
Aromatics content, max % volume 35 35
Oxygen content, max % mass 3.7 4.5
Oxygenates Content
a) Methanol, max % volume 3 3
b) Ethanol, max % volume 10 10
c) Iso-propyl alcohol, max % volume 10 10
d) Iso-Butyl alcohol, max % volume 10 10
e) Tertiary-butyl alcohol, max % volume 7 7
f) Ethers containing 5 or more carbon % volume 15 15
atoms per molecule, max
g) Other oxygenates, max % volume 8 8
Note :
1. Test methods and other provisions and details along with the requirements as given above
shall be issued by Bureau of Indian Standards.
4.3 Specification of Commercial Diesel Fuel
Characteristics Unit Requirements

Ash, max % mass 0.01
Carbon Residue (Ramsbottom) on 10 % mass 0.3
% residue, max without additives
Cetane number (CN), min 51
Cetane Index (CI), min 46
Distillation :
95% vol. recovery at 0C, max 0C 360
Flash point :
a) Abel, min 0C 35
Kinematic Viscosity @ 40 0C cst 2.0-4.5
Density @15 0C,max kg/m3 845
Total Sulphur, max. mg/kg 10
Water content, max mg/kg 200
Cold filter Plugging point (CFPP)
0
a) Summer, max C 18
b) Winter, max 0C 6
Total contaminations, max mg/kg 24
Oxidation stability, max g/m3 25
Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbon % mass 8
(PAH), max
Lubricity, corrected wear scar µm
203/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
diameter @ 60 0C, max (microns) 460

Copper strip corrosion for 3 hrs @ Rating Class – 1
500C
FAME Content, max % v/v 7.0
Note:
1. Test methods and other provisions / details along with the requirements as given above
shall be issued by Bureau of Indian Standards.
4.4 4.4 Technical specifications of the Reference Fuel (E5)
Limits 1
Parameter Unit Test method
Minimum Maximum
Research octane number,
95.0 - EN25164 / prEN ISO 5164
RON 2
Motor octane number, MON 2 85.0 - EN25163 /prEN ISO 5163
Density at 15 °C kg/m3 743.0 756.0 ENISO3675/EN ISO 12185
Vapour pressure (DVPE) kPa 56.0 60.0 EN ISO13016-1(DVPE)
Water content % m/m 0.015 ASTME 1064
Distillation:
– evaporated at 70 °C % v/v 24.0 44.0 EN ISO 3405
– final boiling point °C 190 210 EN ISO 3405
Residue % v/v — 2.0 ENISO 3405
Hydrocarbon analysis:
– Olefins % v/v 3.0 13.0 ASTMD 1319
– Aromatics % v/v 29.0 35.0 ASTMD 1319
EN 12177
– Benzene % v/v - 1.00
– saturates % v/v Report ASTM1319
Carbon/hydrogen ratio Report
Carbon/oxygen ratio Report
Induction period 2 minutes 480 — EN ISO 7536
Oxygen content 4 % m/m 3.3 3.7 EN 1601
Solvent washed gum 0.04
mg/ml — EN ISO 6246
(Existent gum content)
EN ISO 20846 / EN ISO
Sulphur content 3 mg/kg — 10 20884
Copper corrosion 3hrs, 50 °C — Class 1 EN ISO 2160

Lead content mg/l — 5 EN 237
Phosphorus content 6 mg/l — 1.3 ASTM D 3231
Ethanol 4 % v/v 4.7 5.3 EN 10601/EN13132
Notes:
1 The values quoted in the specifications are 'true values'. In establishment of their limit values the terms of
ISO 4259:2006 Petroleum products - Determination and application of precision data in relation to
methods of test have been applied and in fixing a minimum value, a minimum difference of 2R above
zero has been taken into account; in fixing a maximum and minimum value, the minimum difference is
4R (R = reproducibility).
Notwithstanding this measure, which is necessary for technical reasons, the manufacturer of fuels shall
nevertheless aim at a zero value where the stipulated maximum value is 2R and at the mean value in the
case of quotations of maximum and minimum limits. Should it be necessary to clarify whether a fuel
meets the requirements of the specifications, the terms of ISO 4259 shall be applied.
2 The fuel may contain oxidation inhibitors and metal deactivators normally used to stabilize refinery petrol
streams, but detergent/dispersive additives and solvent oils shall not be added.
3 The actual sulphur content of the fuel used for the type I test shall be reported.
4 Ethanol meeting the specification of prEN15376 is the only oxygenate that shall be intentionally added to
the reference fuel.
5 There shall be no intentional addition to this reference fuel of compounds containing phosphorus, iron,
manganese or lead.
204/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
4.5 4.5 Technical specifications of the reference Diesel Fuel (B7)
Limits 1
Parameter Unit Test method
Minimum Maximum
Cetane Index 46.0 EN ISO 4264
Cetane number 2 52.0 56.0 EN ISO 5165
Density at 15 °C kg/m3 833.0 837.0 EN ISO 12185
Distillation:
- 50% point °C 245.0 — EN ISO 3405
- 95% point °C 345.0 360.0 EN ISO 3405
- final boiling point °C — 370.0 EN ISO 3405
Flash point °C 55 — EN ISO 2719
Cloud point °C - -10 EN 23015
Viscosity at 40 °C mm2/s 2.30 3.30 EN ISO 3104
Polycyclic aromatic
% m/m 2.0 4.0 EN 12916
hydrocarbons
EN ISO 20846
Sulphur content mg/kg — 10.0
EN ISO 20884
Copper corrosion 3hrs, 50 °C — Class 1 EN ISO 2160
Conradson carbon residue
% m/m — 0.20 EN ISO 10370
(10 % DR)
Ash content % m/m — 0.010 EN ISO 6245
Total contamination mg/kg - 24 EN 12662
Water content mg/kg — 200 EN ISO 12937
mg
Acid number — 0.10 EN ISO 6618
KOH/g
Lubricity (HFRR wear scan
μm — 400 EN ISO 12156
diameter at 60 °C)
Oxidation stability @ 110 °C
3 h 20.0 EN 15751
FAME 4 % v/v 6.0 7.0 EN 14 78
Notes:
1 The values quoted in the specifications are ‘true values’. In establishment of their limit values the terms
of ISO 4259 Petroleum products – Determination and application of precision data in relation to methods
of test have been applied and in fixing a minimum value, a minimum difference of 2R above zero has
been taken into account; in fixing a maximum and minimum value, the minimum difference is 4R (R =
reproducibility). Notwithstanding this measure, which is necessary for technical reasons, the
manufacturer of fuels shall nevertheless aim at a zero value where the stipulated maximum value is 2R
and at the mean value in the case of quotations of maximum and minimum limits. Should it be necessary
to clarify whether a fuel meets the requirements of the specifications, the terms of ISO 4259 shall be
applied.
2 The range for cetane number is not in accordance with the requirements of a minimum range of 4R.
However, in the case of a dispute between fuel supplier and fuel user, the terms of ISO 4259 may be used
to resolve such disputes provided replicate measurements, of sufficient number to archive the necessary
precision, are made in preference to single determinations.
3 Even though oxidation stability is controlled, it is likely that shelf life will be limited. Advice shall be
sought from the supplier as to storage conditions and life.
4 FAME content to meet the specification of EN 14214.
205/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
CHAPTER 5
EMISSIONS DATA REQUIRED AT TYPE-APPROVAL FOR
ROADWORTHINESS PURPOSES
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 This chapter sets out the procedure for measuring carbon monoxide
emissions at idling speeds (normal and high) for positive-ignition
engines installed in vehicles of category M1 with a maximum
permissible laden mass not exceeding 7.5 tonnes, as well as in
vehicles of categories M2 and N1
1.2 This chapter does not apply to dual fuel engines and vehicles.
2. GENERAL PROVISIONS
2.1
Emission data required for roadworthiness testing
2.1.1
This requirement applies to all vehicles powered by a positive ignition
engine for which type approval is sought in accordance with this
Standard.
2.1.2
When tested in accordance with Clause 3 of this Chapter at normal
idling speed:
(a) The carbon monoxide content by volume of the exhaust gases

emitted shall be recorded; and
(b) The engine speed during the test shall be recorded, including any
tolerances.
2.1.3 When tested at "high idle" speed (i. e. > 2,000 min-1)
(a) The carbon monoxide content by volume of the exhaust gases
emitted shall be recorded;
(b) The Lambda value shall be recorded; and the manufacturer shall
confirm the accuracy of the recorded Lamda value as representative of
typical production vehicles within 24 months of date of granting of
type approval. An assessment shall be made on the basis of surveys
and studies of production vehicles.
(c) The engine speed during the test shall be recorded, including any
tolerances.
The Lambda value shall be calculated using the simplified

Brettschneider equation as follows:
206/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Where:
[ ] = concentration in per cent volume,
K1 = conversion factor for Non-Dispersive Infrared (NDIR)

measurement to Flame Ionisation Detector (FID) measurement
(provided by manufacturer of measuring equipment),
Hcv = Atomic ratio of hydrogen to carbon:
(a) for petrol (E5) 1.89;
(b) for petrol (E10) 1.93;
(c) for LPG 2.525;
(d) for NG/biomethane 4.0;
(e) for ethanol (E85) 2.74;
(f) for ethanol (E75) 2.61.
Ocv = Atomic ratio of oxygen to carbon:
(a) for petrol (E5) 0.016;
(b) for petrol (E10) 0.032;
(c) for LPG 0.0;
(d) for NG/biomethane 0.0;
(e) for ethanol (E85) 0.39;
(f) for ethanol (E75) 0.329.
2.1.4 The engine oil temperature at the time of the test shall be
measured and recorded.
3.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
Conditions of measurement
3.1 The fuel shall be the reference fuel, specifications for which are given
in chapter 4 of this Standard.
207/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
3.2 The engine shall be warmed up until all temperatures of cooling and
lubrication means and the pressure of lubrication means have reached
equilibrium.
3.2.1 Vehicles that are fuelled either with petrol or with LPG or
NG/biomethane shall be tested with the reference fuel(s) used as
specified in chapter-4 of this standard.
3.3 In the case of vehicles with manually-operated or semi-automatic-

shift gearboxes, the test shall be carried out with the gear lever in the
"neutral" position and with the clutch engaged.
3.4 In the case of vehicles with automatic-shift gearboxes, the test shall
be carried out with the gear selector in either the "neutral" or the
"parking" position.
3.5
Components for adjusting the idling speed
3.5.1 Definition
For the purposes of this Standard, "components for adjusting the
idling speed" means controls for changing the idling conditions of the
engine which may be easily operated by a mechanic using only the
tools described in Clause 3.5.1.1. of this Chapter. In particular,
devices for calibrating fuel and air flows are not considered as
adjustment components if their setting requires the removal of the
set-stops, an operation which cannot normally be performed except
by a professional mechanic
3.5.1.1 Tools which may be used to control components for adjusting the
idling speed: screwdrivers (ordinary or cross-headed), spanners (ring,
open-end or adjustable), pliers, Allen keys.
3.5.2 Determination of measurement points
3.5.2.1 A measurement at the setting in accordance with the conditions fixed

by the manufacturer is performed first;
3.5.2.2 For each adjustment component with a continuous variation, a

sufficient number of characteristic positions shall be determined.
3.5.2.3 The measurement of the carbon-monoxide content of exhaust gases

shall be carried out for all the possible positions of the adjustment
components, but for components with a continuous variation only the
positions defined in clause 3.5.2.2. of this Chapter shall be adopted
3.5.2.4 This test shall be considered satisfactory if one or both of the two
following conditions is met:
None of the values measured in accordance with clause 3.5.2.3. of this
chapter exceed the limit values;
The maximum content obtained by continuously varying one of the
adjustment components while the other components are kept stable
208/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
does not exceed the limit value, this condition being met for the
various combinations of adjustment components other than the one
which was varied continuously
3.5.2.5 The possible positions of the adjustment components shall be limited:

On the one hand, by the larger of the following two values: the lowest
idling speed which the engine can reach; the speed recommended by
the manufacturer, minus 100 revolutions per minute;
On the other hand, by the smallest of the following three values:
The highest speed the engine can attain by activation of the idling
speed components;
The speed recommended by the manufacturer, plus 250 revolutions
per minute;
The cut-in speed of automatic clutches
3.5.2.6 In addition, settings incompatible with correct running of the

engine shall not be adopted as measurement settings. In particular,
when the engine is equipped with several carburettors all the
carburetors shall have the same setting
4.0
Sampling of gases
4.1 The sampling probe shall be inserted into the exhaust pipe to a depth
of at least 300 mm into the pipe connecting the exhaust with the
sampling bag and as close as possible to the exhaust.
4.2 The concentration in CO (CCO) and CO2 (CCO2) shall be determined

from the measuring instrument readings or recordings, by use of
appropriate calibration curves.
4.3 The corrected concentration for carbon monoxide regarding four-

stroke engines is:
𝐶 = 𝐶
4.4 The concentration in CCO (see Clause 4.2. of this Chapter) measured
according to the formulae contained in Clause 4.3. of this Chapter
need not be corrected if the total of the concentrations measured (C CO
+ CCO2) is for four-stroke engines at least:
209/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
CHAPTER 6
VERIFYING THE DURABILITY OF ENGINE SYSTEMS
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1
This Chapter sets out the procedures for selecting engines to be tested
over a service accumulation schedule for the purpose of determining
deterioration factors. The deterioration factors shall be applied in
accordance with the requirements of clause 3.6 of this Chapter to the
emissions measured according to Chapter 3.
1.2 This Chapter also sets out the emission and non-emission-related
maintenance carried out on engines undergoing a service
accumulation schedule. Such maintenance shall conform to the
maintenance performed on in-service engines and shall be
communicated to owners of new engines and vehicles.
2.0 Selection of Engines for Establishing Useful Life

Deterioration Factors
2.1 Engines shall be selected from the engine family defined in

accordance with Clause 5 of Chapter 1 for emission testing in order
to establish useful life deterioration factors.
2.2 Engines from different engine families may be further combined into
families based on the type of exhaust after-treatment system utilized.
In order to place engines with different numbers of cylinders and
different cylinder configuration but having the same technical
specifications and installation for the exhaust after- treatment systems
into the same engine-after treatment system family, the manufacturer
shall provide data to the test agency that demonstrates that the
emissions reduction performance of such engine systems is similar.
2.3 One engine representing the engine-after treatment system family as

determined in accordance with clause 2.2, shall be selected by the
engine manufacturer for testing over the service accumulation
schedule defined in Clause 3.2, and shall be reported to the test agency
before any testing commences.
2.3.1 If the test agency ty decides that the worst-case emissions of the
engine-after treatment system family can be characterized better by
another engine, then the test agency and the engine manufacturer shall
select the test engine jointly.
210/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
3.0 ESTABLISHING USEFUL LIFE DETERIORATION

FACTORS
3.1 General
Deterioration factors applicable to an engine-after treatment system

family are developed from the selected engines based on a service
accumulation schedule that includes periodic testing for gaseous and
particulate emissions over the WHTC and WHSC tests.
3.2 Service accumulation schedule
Service accumulation schedules may be carried out at the choice of the

manufacturer by running a vehicle equipped with the selected engine
over an in-service accumulation schedule or by running the selected
engine over a dynamometer service accumulation schedule.
3.2.1 In-service and dynamometer service accumulation
3.2.1.1. The manufacturer shall determine the form and extent of the distance,
the service accumulation and the ageing cycle for engines, consistent
with good engineering practice.
3.2.1.2. The manufacturer shall determine the test points where gaseous and
particulate emissions will be measured over the hot WHTC and
WHSC tests. The minimum number of test points shall be three, one
at the beginning, one approximately in the middle and one at the end
of the service accumulation schedule.
3.2.1.3. The emission values at the start point and at the useful life end point
calculated in accordance with Clause 3.5.2 shall meet the limit values
specified in the Clause 5.3 of Chapter 1 but individual emission results
from the test points may exceed those limit values.
3.2.1.4. At the request of the manufacturer and with the agreement of the test
agency, only one test cycle (either the hot WHTC or WHSC test)
needs to be run at each test point, with the other test cycle run only at
the beginning and at the end of the service accumulation schedule.
3.2.1.5. Service accumulation schedules may be different for different engine-

after treatment system families.
3.2.1.6. Service accumulation schedules may be shorter than the useful life
period, but shall not be shorter than shown in the table in Clause
3.2.1.8.
3.2.1.7. For engine dynamometer service accumulation, the manufacturer

shall provide the applicable correlation between the service
accumulation period (driving distance) and engine dynamometer
hours, for example, fuel consumption correlation, vehicle speed
versus engine revolutions correlation, etc.
211/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
3.2.1.8 Minimum service accumulation period
Table 1
Minimum Service Accumulation Period
Category of vehicle in which Minimum Useful lie
engine will be installed service
accumulatio
n period
Category N1 vehicles 160,000 km
Category N2 vehicles 188,000km
Category N3 vehicles with a 188,000 km

maximum technically permissible
mass not exceeding 16 tonnes
Category N3 vehicles with a 233,000 km

maximum technically permissible
mass exceeding 16 tonnes
Category M1 vehicles 160,000 km

Useful life
Category M2 vehicles 160,000 km (As
Category M3 vehicles of classes I, 188,000 km mentioned in
II, A and B as defined in Chapter-1 of
AIS053:2005, with a maximum this standard
technically permissible mass not
exceeding 7.5 tonnes
Category M3 vehicles of classes III 233,000 km

and B as per AIS 053:2005
3.2.1.9. Accelerated ageing is permitted by adjusting the service accumulation

schedule on a fuel consumption basis. The adjustment shall be based
on the ratio between the typical in-use fuel consumption and the fuel
consumption on the ageing cycle, but the fuel consumption on the
ageing cycle shall not exceed the typical in-use fuel consumption by
more than 30 %.
3.2.1.10 The service accumulation schedule shall be fully described in the

application for type-approval and reported to the test agency before
the start of any testing.
3.2.2. If the test agency decides that additional measurements need to be

carried out on the hot WHTC and WHSC tests between the points
selected by the manufacturer it shall notify the manufacturer. The
revised service accumulation schedule shall be prepared by the
manufacturer and agreed by the test agency
212/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
3.2.1.9. Accelerated ageing is permitted by adjusting the service accumulation

schedule on a fuel consumption basis. The adjustment shall be based
on the ratio between the typical in-use fuel consumption and the fuel
consumption on the ageing cycle, but the fuel consumption on the
ageing cycle shall not exceed the typical in-use fuel consumption by
more than 30 %.
3.3 Engine Testing
3.1 Engine system stabilization
3.3.1.1 For each engine-after treatment system family, the manufacturer

shall determine the number of hours of vehicle or engine running after
which the operation of the engine-after treatment system has
stabilised. If requested by the test agency the manufacturer shall make
available, the data and analysis used to make this determination. As
an alternative, the manufacturer may elect to run the engine between
60 and 125 hours or the equivalent mileage on the ageing cycle to
stabilise the engine-after treatment system.
3.3.1.2. The end of the stabilization period determined in Clause 3.3.1.1 will
be deemed the start of the service accumulation schedule.
3.3.2 Service accumulation period
3.3.2.1 After stabilization, the engine shall be run over the service
accumulation schedule selected by the manufacturer, as described in
Clause 3.2. At the periodic intervals in the service accumulation
schedule determined by the manufacturer, and, where appropriate
stipulated by the test agency according to Clause 3.2.2 the engine shall
be tested for gaseous and particulate emissions over the hot WHTC
and WHSC tests. In accordance with Clause 3.2.1.4, if it has been
agreed that only one test cycle (hot WHTC or WHSC) be run at each
test point, the other test cycle (hot WHTC or WHSC) shall be run at
the beginning and end of the service accumulation schedule.
3.3.2.2 During the service accumulation schedule, maintenance shall be

carried out on the engine according to the requirements of Clause
4.
3.3.2.3 During the service accumulation schedule, unscheduled

maintenance on the engine or vehicle may be performed, for
example if the OBD system has specifically detected a problem
that has resulted in the malfunction indicator (hereinafter ‘MI’)
being activated.
3.3.2.4 The use of market fuels is allowed for conducting the service
accumulation schedule. A reference fuel shall be used to carry out the
emission test.
213/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
3.4 Reporting
3.4.1 The results of all emission tests (hot WHTC and WHSC) conducted
during the service accumulation schedule shall be made available to
the test agency. If any emission test is declared to be void, the
manufacturer shall provide an explanation of why the test has been
declared void. In such a case, another series of emission tests over the
hot WHTC and WHSC tests shall be carried out within the following
100 hours of service accumulation.
3.4.2 The manufacturer shall retain records of all information concerning
all the emission tests and maintenance carried out on the engine
during the service accumulation schedule. This information shall be
submitted to the test agency along with the results of the emission
tests conducted over the service accumulation schedule.
3.5 Determination of Deterioration Factor
3.5.1. For each pollutant measured on the hot WHTC and WHSC tests at
each test point during the service accumulation schedule, a ‘best fit’
linear regression analysis shall be made on the basis of all test results.
The results of each test for each pollutant shall be expressed to the
same number of decimal places as the limit value for that pollutant,
as shown in the Clause5.3 of Chapter 1, plus one additional decimal
place. In accordance with Clause 3.2.1.4 of this Chapter, if it has
been agreed that only one test cycle (hot WHTC or WHSC) be run
at each test point and the other test cycle (hot WHTC or WHSC) run
only at the beginning and at the end of the service accumulation
schedule, the regression analysis shall be made only on the basis of
the test results from the test cycle run at each test point.
At the request of the manufacturer and with the prior approval of the
test agency a non-linear regression shall be permitted.
3.5.2. The emission values for each pollutant at the start of the service
accumulation schedule and at the useful life end point that is
applicable for the engine under test shall be calculated from the
regression equation. If the service accumulation schedule is shorter
than the useful life period, the emission values at the useful life end
shall be determined by extrapolation of the regression equation as
determined in Clause 3.5.1.
3.5.3 The deterioration factor for each pollutant is defined as the ratio
of the applied emission values at the useful life end point and at
the start of the service accumulation schedule (multiplicative
deterioration factor).
At the request of the manufacturer and with the prior approval
of the test agency, an additive deterioration factor for each
pollutant may be applied. The additive deterioration factor shall
be considered as the difference between the calculated emission
values at the useful life end point and at the start of the service
accumulation schedule.
214/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
If the calculation results in a value of less than 1.00 for a

multiplicative DF, or less than 0,00 for an additive DF, then the
deterioration factor shall be 1,0 or 0,00, respectively.
An example for determination of deterioration factors by using
linear regression is shown in Figure 1.
Mixing of multiplicative and additive deterioration factors
within one set of pollutants shall not be permitted.
In accordance with Clause 3.2.1.4, if it has been agreed that only
one test cycle (hot WHTC or WHSC) be run at each test point
and the other test cycle (hot WHTC or WHSC) run only at the
beginning and end of the service accumulation schedule, the
deterioration factor calculated for the test cycle that has been
run at each test point shall be applicable also for the other test
cycle
Figure 1
Example of deterioration factor determination
3.6 Assigned Deterioration Factor
3.6.1 As an alternative to using a service accumulation schedule to
determine deterioration factors, engine manufacturers may choose to
use the following assigned multiplicative deterioration factors:
215/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Table 2
Deterioration Factor
Test CO THC1 NMHC2 CH4 NOx NH3 PM PM
cycle Num
Mass ber
WHTC 1.3 1.3 1.4 1.4 1.15 1.0 1.05 1.0
WHSC 1.3 1.3 1.4 1.4 1.15 1.0 1.05 1.0
Notes:
(1) Applies in case of a compression-ignition engine.
(2) Applies in case of a positive-ignition engine.
Assigned additive deterioration factors are not given. It shall not be permitted to
transform the assigned multiplicative deterioration factors into additive
deterioration factors.
3.7 Application of Deterioration Factor
3.7.1. The engines shall meet the respective emission limits for each
pollutant, as given in the Clause 5.3 of Chapter 1 of this part, after
application of the deterioration factors to the test result as measured
in accordance with Chapter 3 (egas, ePM). Depending on the type of
deterioration factor (DF), the following provisions shall apply:
(a) Multiplicative: (egas or ePM) x DF ≤ emission limit
(b) Additive: (egas or ePM) + DF ≤ emission limit
3.7.2 The manufacturer may choose to carry across the DFs determined
for an engine after treatment system family to an engine system
that does not fall into the same engine-after treatment system
family. In such cases, the manufacturer shall demonstrate to the
test agency that the engine system for which the after treatment
system family was originally tested and the engine system for
which the DFs are being carried across have the same technical
specifications and installation requirements on the vehicle and
that the emissions of such engine or engine system are similar
3.7.3 The deterioration factors for each pollutant on the appropriate
test cycle shall be recorded.
3.8 Checking of conformity of production
3.8.1. Conformity of production for emissions compliance shall be checked
on the basis of the requirements of Clause 6 of Chapter1of this part.
3.8.2. The manufacturer may choose to measure the pollutant emissions
before any exhaust after-treatment system at the same time as the
type-approval test is being performed. In doing so, the manufacturer
may develop an informal deterioration factor separately for the engine
and the after treatment system that may be used by the manufacturer
as an aid to end of production line auditing.
3.8.3. For the purposes of type-approval, only the deterioration factors
according to Clauses 3.5 or 3.6 shall be recorded.
216/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
4.0 MAINTENANCE
For the purpose of the service accumulation schedule, maintenance
shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer’s manual for
service and maintenance.
4.1 Emission-related scheduled maintenance
4.1.1 Emission-related scheduled maintenance for purposes of conducting a
service accumulation schedule shall occur at the same distance or
equivalent intervals to those that will be specified in the
manufacturer’s maintenance instructions to the owner of the engine or
vehicle. This maintenance schedule may be updated as necessary
throughout the service accumulation schedule provided that no
maintenance operation is deleted from the maintenance schedule after
the operation has been performed on the test engine.
4.1.2 The engine manufacturer shall specify for the service accumulation
schedule the adjustment, cleaning and maintenance (where necessary)
and scheduled exchange of the following items:
(a) filters and coolers in the exhaust gas recirculation system;
(b) positive crankcase ventilation valve, if applicable;
(c) fuel injector tips (cleaning only);
(d) fuel injectors;
(e) turbocharger;
(f) electronic engine control unit and its associated sensors and
actuators;
(g) particulate after treatment system (including related components);
(h) deNO x system;
(i) exhaust gas recirculation system, including all related control
valves and tubing;
(j) any other exhaust after-treatment system.
4.1.3 Critical emission-related scheduled maintenance shall only be
performed if being performed in-use and being communicated to the
owner of the vehicle.
4.2 Changes to scheduled maintenance
4.2.1 The manufacturer shall submit a request to the test agency for
approval of any new scheduled maintenance that it wishes to
perform during the service accumulation schedule and
subsequently recommend to owners of engines or vehicles. The
request shall be accompanied by data supporting the need for the
new scheduled maintenance and the maintenance interval
217/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
4.3 Non emission related scheduled maintenance

4.3.1 Non-emission-related scheduled maintenance which is reasonable and
technically necessary such as oil change, oil filter change, fuel filter
change, air filter change, cooling system maintenance, idle speed
adjustment, governor, engine bolt torque, valve lash, injector lash,
timing, adjustment of the tension of any drive-belt, etc., may be
performed on engines or vehicles selected for the service accumulation
schedule at the least frequent intervals recommended by the
manufacturer to the owner.
4.4 Repair
4.4.1 Repairs to the components of an engine selected for testing over a
service accumulation schedule other than the engine emission control
system or fuel system shall be performed only as a result of component
failure or engine system malfunction.
4.4.2 If the engine itself, the emission control system or the fuel system fail
during the service accumulation schedule, the service accumulation
shall be considered void, and a new service accumulation shall be
started with a new engine system.
218/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
CHAPTER 7
CONFORMITY OF IN SERVICE ENGINES OR VEHICLES
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1. This chapter sets out requirements for checking and demonstrating
the conformity of in-service engines and vehicles
2.0 Procedure for in-service conformity
2.1. The conformity of in-service vehicles or engines of an engine family

shall be demonstrated by testing vehicles on the road operated over
their normal driving patterns, conditions and payloads. The in-
service conformity test shall be representative for vehicles operated
on their real driving routes, with their normal load and with the usual
professional driver of the vehicle. When the vehicle is operated by
a driver other than the usual professional driver of the particular
vehicle, this alternative driver shall be skilled and trained to operate
vehicles of the category subject to be tested.
2.2. If the normal in-service conditions of a particular vehicle are

considered to be incompatible with the proper execution of the tests,
the manufacturer or the test agency may request that alternative
driving routes and payloads are used.
2.3. The manufacturer shall demonstrate to the test agency that the
chosen vehicle, driving patterns, conditions and payloads are
representative for the engine family. The requirements as specified
in clauses 4.1 and 4.5 of this chapter shall be used to determine
whether the driving patterns and payloads are acceptable for in-
service conformity testing.
2.4. The manufacturer shall report the schedule and the sampling plan
for conformity testing at the time of the initial type-approval of a
new engine family.
2.5. Vehicles without a communication interface which permits the

collection of the necessary ECU data as specified in clauses 9.4.2.1
and 9.4.2.2 of chapter-I of this part, with missing data or with a non-
standard data protocol shall be considered as non-compliant.
2.6. Vehicles where the collection of ECU data influences the vehicle
emissions or performance shall be considered as non-compliant
3.0 Engine or vehicle selection
3.1. After the granting of type-approval for an engine family the

manufacturer shall perform in-service testing on this engine family
within 18 months from the date of first registration of a vehicle fitted
with an engine from that family or from 1st Apr 2023 whichever is
later. In case of multistage type-approval first registration means
first registration of a completed vehicle.
219/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
The testing shall be repeated at least every two years for each
engine family periodically on vehicles over their useful life period
as specified in clause 5.4. of Chapter-1 of this Standard.
At the request of the manufacturer the testing may stop five years
after the end of production
3.1.1. With a minimum sample size of three engines the sampling

procedure shall be set so that the probability of a lot passing a test
with 20 % of the vehicles or engines defective is 0.90 (producer's
risk = 10 %) while the probability of a lot being accepted with 60 %
of the vehicles or engines defective is 0.10 (consumer's risk = 10
%).
3.1.2. The test statistic quantifying the cumulative number of

nonconforming tests at the n th test shall be determined for the
sample.
3.1.3. The pass or fail decision of the lot shall be made according to the
following requirements.
3.1.3. The pass or fail decision of the lot shall be made according to the
following requirements.
(a) If the test statistic is less than or equal to the pass decision
number for the sample size given in Table 1, a pass decision is
reached for the lot;
(b)If the test statistic is greater than or equal to the fail decision
number for the sample size given in Table 1, a fail decision is
reached for the lot;
(c) Otherwise, an additional engine is tested according to this
chapter and the calculation procedure is applied to the sample
increased by one more unit.
In Table 1 the pass and fail decision numbers are calculated by
means of the International Standard ISO 8422/1991.
Table 1
Pass and fail decision numbers of the sampling plan
Minimum sample size:
Cumulative number of Pass decision Fail decision
engine tested (sample size) number number
3 - 3
4 0 4
5 0 4
6 1 4
7 1 4
8 2 4
9 2 4
220/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
10 3 4
The test agency shall approve the selected engines and vehicle
configurations before the launch of the testing procedures. The
selection shall be performed by presenting to the test agency
the criteria used for the selection of the particular vehicles
3.2 The engines and vehicles selected shall represent the category
and application. The engines and vehicles selected shall be
registered vehicles and in use. The vehicle shall have be in
service at least 25000 kms. For selection of in-service vehicles,
following guidelines may be used and mutually agreed between
test agency and manufacturer.
N3 (<16t), N2 (>3.5t <12t), M3 Class I, Class II and Class

A, and Class B (< 7.5t) Categories
Vehicle Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 4 Year 5 Year 6
Type
Mileage 25000 or 25000 or 75000 or 125000 or 175000 or 225000 or
(km) more more more more more more
N3 > 16t and M3 Class III and Class B > 7.5

Sr No Vehicle type Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 4 Year 5 Year 6 Year 7
1 City Buses,
School
Buses, 25000 50000 80000 110000 140000 170000 300000
Construction or or more or more or more or more or more or more
more
Tipper,
Mining
Tipper
(mileage km)
2 All other 25000 50000 150000 250000 350000 450000 550000

vehicles or or or or more or more or more or
(mileage km) more more more more
3.3 Each vehicle tested shall have a maintenance record to show that the
vehicle has been properly maintained and serviced in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.4. The OBD system shall be checked for proper functioning of the
engine. Any malfunction indications and the readiness code in the
OBD memory shall be recorded and any required repairs shall be
carried out.
Engines presenting a Class C malfunction shall not be forced to b
repaired before testing. The Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) shall
not be cleared.
Engines having one of the counters required by provisions of
chapter 11 not at “0” may not be tested. This shall be reported to
the test agency.
3.5. The engine or vehicle shall exhibit no indications of abuse (such as
221/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
overloading, misfuelling, or other misuse), or other factors (such as

tampering) that could affect emission performance. OBD system
fault code and engine running hours’ information stored in the
computer shall be taken into account.
3.6. All emission control system components on the vehicle shall be in

conformity with those stated in the applicable type-approval
documents.
3.7. In agreement with the test agency, the manufacturer may run in-
service conformity testing comprising fewer engines or vehicles
than the number given in clause 3.1., if the number of engines
manufactured with in an engine family is less than 250 units per
year.
4. Test Conditions
4.1. Vehicle Payload

For the purpose of in- service conformity testing the payload may
be reproduced and an artificial load may be used.
In the absence of statistics to demonstrate that the payload is
representative for the vehicle, the vehicle payload shall be 50 - 60
per cent of the maximum vehicle payload.
The maximum payload is the difference between technically
permissible maximum laden mass of the vehicle and the mass of the
vehicle in running order as specified in accordance to.
4.2 Ambient Conditions
The test shall be conducted under ambient conditions meeting the
Atmospheric pressure greater than or equal to 82.5 kPa,
Temperature greater than or equal to 273 K (0°C) and less than or
equal to the temperature determined by the following equation at the
specified atmospheric pressure:
T = -0.4514 * (101.3 – pb) + 311
where:
T is the ambient air temperature, K
pb is the atmospheric pressure, kPa
Note: Temperature limits 273 K (0 0C) needs to be revised as per
HDV in-service conformity technical committee recommendation.
4.3 Engine Coolant Temperature

The engine coolant temperature shall be in accordance with clause
A.1.2.6.1. of Appendix 1 to this chapter.
4.4 The lubricating oil, fuel and reagent shall be within the
specifications issued by the manufacturer
4.4.1 Lubricating oil

Oil samples shall be taken
222/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
4.4.2 Fuel
The test fuel shall be market fuel covered by the relevant standards
or reference fuel as specified in chapter4 to this document. Fuel
samples shall be taken
4.4.2.1 If the manufacturer in accordance with clause 4 of chapter-I has

declared the capability to meet the requirements of this Standard on
market fuels declared in chapter-2, tests shall be conducted on at
least one of the declared market fuels or blend between the declared
market fuels and the market fuels covered by the relevant standards.
4.4.3 Reagent
For exhaust after treatment systems that use a reagent to reduce
emissions, a sample of the reagent shall be taken. The reagent shall
not be frozen.
4.5 Trip Requirements
The shares of operation shall be expressed as a percentage of the
total trip duration.
The trip shall consist of urban driving followed by rural and
motorway driving according to the shares specified in clauses
4.5.1. to 4.5.4. In the case another testing order is justified for
practical reasons and after the agreement of the test agency another
order of urban, rural and motorway operation may be used.
For the purpose of this clause, “approximately” shall mean the
target value ± 5 per cent.
Urban operation is characterised by vehicle speeds between 0 and
40 km/h (will be reviewed based on data collection and to be
discussed),
Rural operation is characterised by vehicle speeds between 40 and
60 km/h (will be reviewed based on data collection),,
Motorway operation is characterised by vehicle speeds above 60
km/h (will be reviewed based on data collection).
4.5.1 For M1 and N1 vehicles the trip shall consist of approximately 34
per cent urban, 33 per cent rural and 33 per cent motorway
operation (will be reviewed based on data collection),
4.5.2. For M2 and M3 vehicles the trip shall consist of approximately 20

per cent urban, 35 per cent rural and 45 per cent motorway
operation. M2 and M3 vehicles of Type I as defined in AIS-052 shall
be tested in approximately 70 per cent urban and 30 per cent rural
4.5.3. For N2 vehicles the trip shall consist of approximately 25 per cent
urban, 35 per cent rural and followed by 40 per cent motorway
223/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
4.5.4. For N3 vehicles the trip shall consist of approximately 20 per cent
urban, 35 per cent rural and followed by 45 per cent motorway
4.5.5 The following distribution of the characteristic trip values from the
WHDC database may serve as additional guidance for the
evaluation of the trip:
(a)Accelerating: 26,9 per cent of the time;
(b)Decelerating: 22,6 per cent of the time;
(c)Cruising: 38,1 per cent of the time;
(d)Stop (vehicle speed=0): 12,4 per cent of the time.
(will be reviewed based on data collection),
4.6 Operational Requirements
4.6.1. The trip shall be selected in such a way that the testing is
uninterrupted and the data continuously sampled to reach the
minimum test duration defined in clause 4.6.5.
4.6.2. Emissions and other data sampling shall start prior to starting the
engine. Any cold start emissions may be removed from the
emissions evaluation, in accordance with clause A.1.2.6. of
4.6.3. It shall not be permitted to combine data of different trips or to
modify or remove data from a trip.
4.6.4. If the engine stalls, it may be restarted, but the sampling shall not be
interrupted
4.6.5. The minimum test duration shall be long enough to complete five
times the work performed during the WHTC or produce five times
the CO2 reference mass in kg/cycle from the WHTC as applicable.
4.6.6. The electrical power to the PEMS system shall be supplied by an
external power supply unit, and not from a source that draws its
energy either directly or indirectly from the engine under test.
4.6.6.1. As an alternative, the electrical power to the PEMS system may be
supplied by the internal electrical system of the vehicle as long as
the power demand for the test equipment does not increase the
output from the engine by more than 1% of its maximum power and
measures are taken to prevent excessive discharge of the battery
when the engine is not running or idling.
4.6.6.2. In case of a dispute the results of measurements performed with a
PEMS system powered by an external power supply shall prevail
over the results acquired according to the alternative method under
4.6.6.1.
224/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
4.6.7 The installation of the PEMS equipment shall not influence the
vehicle emissions and/or performance.
4.6.8. It is recommended to operate the vehicles under normal daytime
traffic conditions.
4.6.9. If the test agency is not satisfied with the data consistency check
results according to clause A.1.3.2. of Appendix 1 to this chapter,
the test agency may consider the test to be void.
4.6.10. The same route shall be used for the tests of vehicles within the
sample described in clauses 3.1.1. to 3.1.3.
5. ECU Data Stream
5.1. Verification of the availability and conformity of the ECU data-
stream information required for in-service testing.
5.1.1. The availability of the data stream information according to the
requirements of clause 9.4.2. of this chapter shall be demonstrated
prior to the in-service test.
5.1.1.1. If that information cannot be retrieved by the PEMS system in a
proper manner, the availability of the information shall be
demonstrated by using an external OBD scan-tool as described in
chapter 8B.
5.1.1.1.1. In the case where this information can be retrieved by the scan-tool
in a proper manner, the PEMS system is considered as failing and
the test is void.
5.1.1.1.2. In the case where that information cannot be retrieved in a proper
manner from two vehicles with engines from the same engine
family, while the scan-tool is working properly, the engine is
considered as non-compliant.
5.1.2 Torque Signal
5.1.2.1. The conformity of the torque signal calculated by the PEMS
equipment from the ECU data-stream information required in clause
9.4.2.1. of of chapter-I of this standard shall be verified at full load.
5.1.2.2.1. The method used to check this conformity is described in Appendix
4.
5.1.2.2. The conformity of the ECU torque signal is considered to be
sufficient if the calculated torque remains within the full load torque
tolerance specified in clause 9.4.2.5 of Chapter-I of this standard.
5.1.2.3. If the calculated torque does not remain within the full load torque
tolerance specified in clause 9.4.2.5 of Chapter-I of this standard,
the engine is considered to have failed the test.
225/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
5.1.2.4. Dual-fuel engines and vehicles shall, in addition, comply with the
requirements and exceptions related to the torque correction set out
in Chapter 14 to this standard.
6.0 EMISSION EVALUATION
6.1. The test shall be conducted and the test results shall be calculated in
accordance with the provisions of Appendix 1 to this chapter.
6.2. The conformity factors shall be calculated and presented for both
the CO2 mass based method and the Work based method. The
pass/fail decision shall be made on the basis of the results of the
Work based method.
6.3. The 90% cumulative percentile of the exhaust emission conformity
factors from each engine system tested, determined in accordance
with the measurement and calculation procedures specified in
Appendix 1, shall not exceed any of the values set out in Table 2.
Table 2
Maximum allowed conformity factors for
in-service conformity emission testing.
Pollutant Maximum allowed conformity factor (3)
CO XX
(1)
THC XX
(2)
NMHC XX
(2)
CH4 XX
NOx XX
PM mass ---
PM Number ---
Notes:
(1) For compression ignition engines
(2) For positive ignition engines
(3) applicable with effect from 1st Apr 2023 as notified in
notification G.S.R. 889(E) dated 16th September 2016 published
by MoRTH
Note: The conformity factors to be decided based on
recommendations of HDV in-service conformity
committee.
7.0 Evaluation of In-Service Conformity Results
7.1 On the basis of the in-service conformity report referred to in
clause 10, the test agency shall either:
(a) Decide that the in-service conformity testing of an engine
system family is satisfactory and not take any further action;
(b) Decide that the data provided is insufficient to reach a decision
and request additional information and test data from the
manufacturer;
226/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
(c) Decide that the in-service conformity of an engine system

family is unsatisfactory and proceed to the measures referred to in
clause 9.3 of Chapter-I of this standard and in clause 9 of this
chapter
8.0 Conformity of Vehicle Testing
8.1. Confirmatory testing is done for the purpose of confirmation of
the in-service emission functionality of an engine family.
8.2. Test agencies may conduct confirmatory testing.
8.3. The confirmatory test shall be performed as vehicle testing as
specified in clauses 2.1 and 2.2. Representative vehicles shall be
selected and used under normal conditions and be tested according
to the procedures defined in this chapter.
8.4. A test result may be regarded as non-satisfactory when, from tests
of two or more vehicles representing the same engine family, for
any regulated pollutant component, the limit value as determined
according to clause 6 is exceeded significantly.
9. Plan of Remedial Measures
9.1. The manufacturer shall submit a report to the test agency where
the engines or vehicles subject to remedial action are registered or
used when planning to conduct remedial action, and shall submit
this report when deciding to take action. The report shall specify
the details of the remedial action and describe the engine families
to be included in the action. The manufacturer shall report
regularly to the test agency after the start of the remedial action.
9.2. The manufacturer shall provide a copy of all communications
related to the plan of remedial measures, and shall maintain a
record of the recall campaign (if any), and supply regular status
reports to the test agency.
9.3. The manufacturer shall assign a unique identifying name or
number to the plan of remedial measures.
9.4. The manufacturer shall present a plan of remedial measures which
shall consist of the information specified in clauses 9.4.1 to 9.4.11.
9.4.1. A description of each engine system type included in the plan of
remedial measures.
9.4.2. A description of the specific modifications, alterations, repairs,
corrections, adjustments, or other changes to be made to bring the
engines into conformity including a brief summary of the data and
technical studies which support the manufacturer's decision as to
the particular measures to be taken to correct the non-conformity.
9.4.3. A description of the method by which the manufacturer informs
the engine or vehicle owners about the remedial measures.
227/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
9.4.4. A description of the proper maintenance or use, if any, which the

manufacturer stipulates as a condition of eligibility for repair
under the plan of remedial measures, and an explanation of the
manufacturer's reasons for imposing any such condition. No
maintenance or use conditions may be imposed unless it is
demonstrably related to the non-conformity and the remedial
measures.
9.4.5. A description of the procedure to be followed by engine or vehicle
owners to obtain correction of the non-conformity. This
description shall include a date after which the remedial measures
may be taken, the estimated time for the workshop to perform the
repairs and where they can be done. The repair shall be done
expediently, within a reasonable time after delivery of the vehicle.
9.4.6. A copy of the information transmitted to the engine or vehicle
owner.
9.4.7. A brief description of the system which the manufacturer uses to
assure an adequate supply of components or systems for fulfilling
the remedial action. It shall be indicated when there will be an
adequate supply of components or systems to initiate the
campaign.
9.4.8. A copy of all instructions to be sent to those persons who are to
perform the repair.
9.4.9. A description of the impact of the proposed remedial measures on
the emissions, fuel consumption, drivability, and safety of each
engine or vehicle type, covered by the plan of remedial measures
with data, technical studies, etc. which support these conclusions.
9.4.10. Any other information, reports or data the test agency may
reasonably determine is necessary to evaluate the plan of remedial
measures.
9.4.11. Where the plan of remedial measures includes a recall, a
description of the method for recording the repair shall be
submitted to the test agency. If a label is used, an example of it
shall be submitted.
9.5. The manufacturer may be required to conduct reasonably designed
and necessary tests on components and engines incorporating a
proposed change, repair, or modification to demonstrate the
effectiveness of the change, repair, or modification
10.0 REPORTING PROCEDURE
10.1. A technical report shall be submitted to the test agency for each
engine family tested. The report shall show the activities and
results of the in-service conformity testing. The report shall
include at least the following:
10.1.1. General
228/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
10.1.1.1. Name and address of the manufacturer:

10.1.1.2. Address (es) of assembly plant(s):
10.1.1.3. The name, address, telephone and fax numbers and e-mail address
of the manufacturer’s representative:
10.1.1.4. Type and commercial description (mention any variants):
10.1.1.5. Engine family:
10.1.1.6. Parent engine:
10.1.1.7. Engine family members:
10.1.1.8. The vehicle identification number (VIN) codes applicable to the
vehicles equipped with an engine that is part of the in-service
conformity check.
10.1.1.9. Means and location of identification of type, if marked on the
vehicle:
10.1.1.10. Category of vehicle:
10.1.1.11. Type of engine: petrol, ethanol (E85), diesel/NG /LPG /ethanol
(ED95) (Delete as appropriate):
10.1.1.12. The numbers of the type-approvals applicable to the engine types
within the in-service family, including, where applicable, the
numbers of all extensions and field fixes/recalls (re-works):
10.1.1.13. Details of extensions, field fixes/recalls to those type-approvals
for the engines covered within the manufacturer’s information.
10.1.1.14. The engine build period covered within the manufacturer’s
information (e.g. ‘vehicles or engines manufactured during the
2014 calendar year').
10.1.2. Engine / Vehicle selection
10.1.2.1. Vehicle or engine location method
10.1.2.2. Selection criteria for vehicles, engines, in-service families;
10.1.2.3. Geographical areas within which the manufacturer has collected
vehicles;
10.1.3. Equipment
10.1.3.1. PEMS Equipment, brand and type
10.1.3.2. PEMS calibration
10.1.3.3. PEMS power supply
10.1.3.4. Calculation software and version used (e.g. EMROAD 4.0)
10.1.4. Test data
229/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
10.1.4.1. Date and time of test;

10.1.4.2. Location of test including details information about the test route;
10.1.4.3. Weather / ambient conditions (e.g. temperature, humidity,
altitude);
10.1.4.4. Distances covered per vehicle on the test route;
10.1.4.5. Test fuel specifications characteristics
10.1.4.6. Reagent specification (if applicable)
10.1.4.7. Lubrication oil specification
10.1.4.8. Emission test results according to Appendix 1 to this chapter
10.1.5. Engine information
10.1.5.1. Engine fuel type (e.g. diesel, ethanol ED95, NG, LPG, petrol, E85)
10.1.5.2. Engine combustion system (e.g. compressed ignition or positive
ignition)
10.1.5.3. Type-approval number
10.1.5.4. Engine rebuilt
10.1.5.5. Engine manufacturer
10.1.5.6. Engine model
10.1.5.7. Engine production year and month
10.1.5.8. Engine identification number
10.1.5.9. Engine displacement [litres]
10.1.5.10. Number of cylinders
10.1.5.11. Engine rated power: [kW @ rpm]
10.1.5.12. Engine peak torque: [Nm @ rpm]
10.1.5.13. Idle speed [rpm]
10.1.5.14. Manufacturer supplied full-load torque curve available (yes/no)
10.1.5.15. Manufacturer supplied full-load torque curve reference number
10.1.5.16. DeNOx system (e.g. EGR, SCR)
10.1.5.17. Type of catalytic converter
10.1.5.18. Type of Particulate trap
10.1.5.19. After treatment modified with respect to type-approval? (yes/no)
10.1.5.20. Engine ECU information (Software calibration number)
230/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
10.1.6. Vehicle information

10.1.6.1. Vehicle owner
10.1.6.2. Vehicle type (e.g. M3, N3) and application (e.g. rigid or articulated
truck, city bus)
10.1.6.3. Vehicle manufacturer
10.1.6.4. Vehicle Identification Number
10.1.6.5. Vehicle registration number and country of registration
10.1.6.6. Vehicle model
10.1.6.7. Vehicle production year and month
10.1.6.8. Transmission type (e.g. manual, automatic or other)
10.1.6.9. Number of forward gears
10.1.6.10. Odometer reading at test start [km]
10.1.6.11. Gross vehicle combination weight rating (GVW) [kg]
10.1.6.12. Tire size [Not mandatory]
10.1.6.13. Tail pipe diameter [mm] [Not mandatory]
10.1.6.14. Number of axles
10.1.6.15. Fuel tank(s) capacity [liters] [Not mandatory]
10.1.6.16. Number of fuel tanks [Not mandatory]
10.1.6.17. Reagent tank(s) capacity [litres] [Not mandatory]
10.1.6.18. Number of reagent tanks [Not mandatory]
10.1.7. Test route characteristics
10.1.7.1. Odometer reading at test start [km]
10.1.7.2. Duration [s]
10.1.7.3. Average ambient conditions (as calculated from the instantaneous
measured data)
10.1.7.4. Ambient conditions sensor information (type and location of
sensors)
10.1.7.5. Vehicle speed information (for example cumulative speed
distribution)
10.1.7.6. Shares of the time of the trip characterised by urban, rural and
motorway operation as described in clause 4.5.
10.1.7.7. Shares of the time of the trip characterised by accelerating,
decelerating, cruising and stop as described in clause 4.5.5.
231/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
10.1.8. Instantaneous measured data

10.1.8.1. THC concentration [ppm]
10.1.8.2. CO concentration [ppm]
10.1.8.3. NOx concentration [ppm]
10.1.8.4. CO2 concentration [ppm]
10.1.8.5. CH4 concentration [ppm] for P.I. engines only
10.1.8.6. Exhaust gas flow [kg/h]
10.1.8.7. Exhaust temperature [°C]
10.1.8.8. Ambient air temperature [°C]
10.1.8.9. Ambient pressure [kPa]
10.1.8.10. Ambient humidity [g/kg] [Not mandatory]
10.1.8.11. Engine torque [Nm]
10.1.8.12. Engine speed [rpm]
10.1.8.13. Engine fuel flow [g/s]
10.1.8.14. Engine coolant temperature [°C]
10.1.8.15. Vehicle ground speed [km/h] from ECU and GPS
10.1.8.16. Vehicle latitude [degree](Accuracy needs to be sufficient to enable
the traceability of the test route)
10.1.8.17. Vehicle longitude [degree]
10.1.9. Instantaneous calculated data
10.1.9.1. THC mass [g/s]
10.1.9.2. CO mass [g/s]
10.1.9.3. NOx mass [g/s]
10.1.9.4. CO2 mass [g/s]
10.1.9.5. CH4 mass [g/s] for P.I. engines only
10.1.9.6. THC cumulated mass [g]
10.1.9.7. CO cumulated mass [g]
10.1.9.8. NOx cumulated mass [g]
10.1.9.9. CO2 cumulated mass [g]
10.1.9.10. CH4 cumulated mass [g] for P.I. engines only
10.1.9.11. Calculated fuel rate [g/s]
232/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
10.1.9.12. Engine power [kW]

10.1.9.13. Engine work [kWh]
10.1.9.14. Work window duration [s]
10.1.9.15. Work window average engine power [%]
10.1.9.16. Work window THC conformity factor [-]
10.1.9.17. Work window CO conformity factor [-]
10.1.9.18. Work window NOx conformity factor [-]
10.1.9.19. Work window CH4 conformity factor [-] for P.I. engines only
10.1.9.20. CO2 mass window duration [s]
10.1.9.21. CO2 mass window THC conformity factor [-]
10.1.9.22. CO2 mass window CO conformity factor [-]
10.1.9.23. CO2 mass window NOx conformity factor [-]
10.1.9.24. CO2 mass window CH4 conformity factor [-] for P.I. engines only
10.1.10. Averaged and integrated data
10.1.10.1. Average THC concentration [ppm] [Not mandatory]
10.1.10.2. Average CO concentration [ppm] [Not mandatory]
10.1.10.3. Average NOx concentration [ppm] [Not mandatory]
10.1.10.4. Average CO2 concentration [ppm] [Not mandatory]
10.1.10.5. Average CH4 concentration [ppm] for gas engines only [Not
mandatory]
10.1.10.6. Average Exhaust gas flow [kg/h] [Not mandatory]
10.1.10.7. Average Exhaust temperature [°C] [Not mandatory]
10.1.10.8. THC emissions [g]
10.1.10.9. CO emissions [g]
10.1.10.10. NOx emissions [g]
10.1.10.11 CO2 emissions [g]
10.1.10.12. CH4 emissions [g] for gas engines only
10.1.11. Pass-Fail results
10.1.11.1. Minimum, maximum, and 90% cumulative percentile for:
10.1.11.2. Work window THC conformity factor [-]
10.1.11.3. Work window CO conformity factor [-]
233/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
10.1.11.4. Work window NOx conformity factor [-]

10.1.11.5. Work window CH4 conformity factor [-] for P.I. engines only
10.1.11.6. CO2 mass window THC conformity factor [-]
10.1.11.7. CO2 mass window CO conformity factor [-]
10.1.11.8. CO2 mass window NOx conformity factor [-]
10.1.11.9. CO2 mass window CH4 conformity factor [-] for P.I. engines only
10.1.11.10. Work window: Minimum and maximum average window power
[%]
10.1.11.11. CO2 mass window: Minimum and maximum window duration [s]
10.1.11.12. Work window: Percentage of valid windows
10.1.11.13. CO2 mass window: Percentage of valid windows
10.1.12. Test verifications
10.1.12.1. THC analyser zero, span and audit results, pre and post test
10.1.12.2. CO analyser zero, span and audit results, pre and post test
10.1.12.3. NOx analyser zero-span and audit results, pre and post test
10.1.12.4. CO2 analyser zero, span and audit results, pre and post test
10.1.12.5. Data consistency check results, according to clause A.1.3.2. of
10.1.13. List of further attachments where these exist
234/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
TEST PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLE EMISSIONS TESTING WITH
PORTABLE EMISSIONS MEASURMENT SYSTEMS
A.1.1 INTRODUCTION
This Appendix describes the procedure to determine gaseous
emissions from on-vehicle on-road measurements using Portable
Emissions Measurement Systems (here in after PEMS). The
gaseous emissions to be measured from the exhaust of the engine
include the following components: carbon monoxide, total
hydrocarbons and nitrogen oxides for diesel engines with the
addition of methane for gas engines. Additionally, carbon dioxide
shall be measured to enable the calculation procedures described in
clause A.1.4 and A.1.5 of this chapter.
For engines fuelled with gases other than natural gas, the
manufacturer, test agencies may choose to measure the total
hydrocarbon (THC) emissions instead of measuring the non-
methane hydrocarbon emission. In this case the emission limit for
the total hydrocarbon emissions is the same as shown in clause 5.3
of Chapter-1 of this part for non-methane hydrocarbon emissions.
The applicable limit in the calculations of the conformity factors in
A 1.4.2.3 and A1.4.3.2 of this appendix shall in that case be the
non-methane emission limit.
Additionally, carbon dioxide shall be measured to enable the
calculation procedures described in clause A 1.3 and A1.4 of this
appendix.
A.1.2 TEST PROCEDURE
A.1.2.1 General Requirements
The test shall be carried out with a PEMS comprised of
Gas analyzers to measure the concentrations of regulated gaseous

pollutants in the exhaust gas;
A.1.2.1.1.
A.1.2.1.2 An exhaust mass flow meter based on the averaging Pitot or equivalent
principle
A.1.2.1.3 A Global Positioning System (hereinafter "GPS");
A.1.2.1.4 Sensors to measure the ambient temperature and pressure
A.1.2.1.5 A connection with the vehicle ECU);
A.1.2.2 TEST PARAMETERS
235/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
The parameters summarized in Table 1 shall be measured and recorded

Table 1
Test Parameters
Parameter Unit Source
THC concentration (1) ppm Analyser
CO concentration (1) ppm Analyser
NOx concentration (1) ppm Analyser
CO2 concentration (1) ppm Analyser
CH4 concentration (1) (2) ppm Analyser
Exhaust gas flow kg/h Exhaust Flow Meter
(hereinafter EFM)
Exhaust temperature °K EFM
Ambient temperature (3) °K Sensor
Ambient pressure kPa Sensor
Engine torque (4) Nm ECU or Sensor
Engine speed rpm ECU or Sensor
Engine fuel flow g/s ECU or Sensor
Engine coolant temperature °K ECU or Sensor
Engine intake air temperature (3) °K Sensor
Vehicle ground speed km/h ECU and GPS
Vehicle latitude degree GPS
Vehicle longitude degree GPS
Notes:
(1)
Measured or corrected to a wet basis
(2)
Gas engines only
(3)
Use the ambient temperature sensor or an intake air temperature sensor
(4)
The recorded value shall be either (a) the net brake engine torque according to
clause A1.2.4.4 of this Appendix or (b) the net brake engine torque calculated
from the torque values according to clause A.1.2.4.4 of this Appendix.
A.1.2.3 Preparation of the vehicle
The preparation of the vehicle shall include the following:
(a)The check of the OBD system: any identified problems once solved
shall be recorded and presented to the test agency.
(b)The replacement of oil, fuel and reagent, if any.
236/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A.1.2.4 Installation of the Measuring Equipment

A.1.2.4.1 Main Unit
Whenever possible, PEMS shall be installed in a location where it
will be subject to minimal impact from the followings
(a)Ambient temperature changes;
(b)Ambient pressure changes;
(c)Electromagnetic radiation;
(d)Mechanical shock and vibration;
(e)Ambient hydrocarbons – if using a FID analyser that uses ambient
air as FID burner air.
The installation shall follow the instructions issued by the PEMS
manufacturer
A.1.2.4.2 Exhaust Flow Meter
The exhaust flow meter shall be attached to the vehicle’s tailpipe. The
EFM sensors shall be placed between two pieces of straight tube whose
length should be at least 2 times the EFM diameter (upstream and
downstream). It is recommended to place the EFM after the vehicle
silencer, to limit the effect of exhaust gas pulsations upon the
measurement signals.
A.1.2.4.3 Global Positioning System.
The antenna shall be mounted at the highest possible location, without
risking interference with any obstructions encountered during on-road
operation.
A.1.2.4.4 Connection with the vehicle ECU
A data logger shall be used to record the engine parameters listed in
Table 1. This data logger can make use of the Control Area Network
(hereinafter CAN) bus of the vehicle to access the ECU data specified
in Table 1 of Appendix 5 to Chapter 8B and broadcasted on the CAN
according to standard protocols such as SAE J1939, J1708 or ISO
15765-4. It may calculate the net brake engine torque or perform unit
conversions
A.1.2.4.5 Sampling of gaseous emissions
The sample line shall be heated according to the specifications of
clause A.2.2.3. of Appendix 2 to this chapter and properly insulated
at the connection points (sample probe and back of the main unit),
to avoid the presence of cold spots that could lead to a
contamination of the sampling system by condensed hydrocarbons.
The sample probe shall be installed in the exhaust pipe in
accordance with the requirements of clause 9.3.10 of chapter3.
If the length of the sample line is changed, the system transport
times shall be verified and if necessary corrected.
237/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A.1.2.5 Pre-test procedures
A.1.2.5.1 Starting and stabilizing the PEMS instruments

The main units shall be warmed up and stabilized according to the
instrument manufacturer specifications until pressures, temperatures
and flows have reached their operating set points.
A.1.2.5.2 Cleaning the sampling system
To prevent system contamination, the sampling lines of the PEMS
instruments shall be purged until sampling begins, according to the
instrument manufacturer specifications.
A.1.2.5.3 Checking and calibrating the analysers
The zero and span calibration and the linearity checks of the analysers
shall be performed using calibration gases meeting the requirements of
clause 9.3.3 of chapter3 to this standard. A linearity check shall have
been performed within three months before the actual test.
A.1.2.5.4 Cleaning the EFM
The EFM shall be purged at the pressure transducer connections in
accordance with the instrument manufacturer specifications. This
procedure shall remove condensation and diesel particulate matter
from the pressure lines and the associated flow tube pressure
measurement ports.
A.1.2.6 Emission Test Run
A.1.2.6.1 Test Strat
Emissions sampling, measurement of the exhaust parameters and
recording of the engine and ambient data shall start prior to starting the
engine. The data evaluation shall start after the coolant temperature has
reached 343K (70°C) for the first time or after the coolant temperature
is stabilized within +/- 2K over a period of 5 minutes whichever comes
first but no later than 20 minutes after engine start.
A.1.2.6.2 Test Run
Emission sampling, measurement of the exhaust parameters and
recording of the engine and ambient data shall continue throughout the
normal in-use operation of the engine. The engine may be stopped and
started, but emissions sampling shall continue throughout the entire
test.
Periodic checks of the PEMS gas analysers shall be conducted at least
every two hours. The data recorded during the checks shall be flagged
and shall not be used for the emission calculations.
A.1.2.6.3 End of Test Sequence
At the end of the test, sufficient time shall be given to the sampling
systems to allow their response times to elapse. The engine may be shut
down before or after sampling is stopped.
238/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A.1.2.7 Verification of the Measurements

A.1.2.7.1 Checking of the analysers
The zero, span and linearity checks of the analysers as described in
clause A.1.2.5.3 of this appendix shall be performed using calibration
gases meeting the requirements of clause 9.3.3 of chapter 3.
A.1.2.7.2 Zero Drift
Zero response is defined as the mean response, including noise, to a
zero gas during a time interval of at least 30 seconds. The drift of the
zero response shall be less than 2 per cent of full scale on the lowest
range used.
A.1.2.7.3 Span Drift
Span response is defined as the mean response, including noise, to a
span gas during a time interval of at least 30 seconds. The drift of the
span response shall be less than 2 per cent of full scale on the lowest
range used.
A.1.2.7.4 Drift verification
This shall apply only if, during the test, no zero drift correction was
made.
As soon as practical but no later than 30 minutes after the test is
complete the gaseous analyser ranges used shall be zeroed and spanned
to check their drift compared to the pre-test results.
The following provisions shall apply for analyser drift:
(a)If the difference between the pre-test and post-test results is less than
2 per cent as specified in clauses A.1.2.7.2. and A.1.2.7.3 of this
appendix., the measured concentrations may be used uncorrected or
may be corrected for drift according to clause A.1.2.7.5 of this
appendix.;
(b)If the difference between the pre-test and post-test results is equal to
or greater than 2 per cent as specified in clauses A.1.2.7.2. and
A.1.2.7.3 of this appendix., the test shall be voided or the measured
concentrations shall be corrected for drift according to clause A.1.2.7.5
of this appendix
A.1.2.7.5 Drift Correction
If drift correction is applied in accordance with clause A.1.2.7.4 of this
appendix., the corrected concentration value shall be calculated
according to clause 8.6.1 of chapter 3 of this part.
The difference between the uncorrected and the corrected brake-
specific emission values shall be within ± 6 per cent of the uncorrected
brake-specific emission values. If the drift is greater than 6 per cent,
the test shall be voided. If drift correction is applied, only the drift-
corrected emission results shall be used when reporting emissions.
239/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A.1.3 CALCULATION OF THE EMISSION

The final test result shall be rounded in one step to the number of places
to the right of the decimal point indicated by the applicable emission
standard plus one additional significant figure, in accordance with
ASTM E 29-06b. No rounding of intermediate values leading to the
final brake-specific emission result shall be allowed.
A.1.3.1 Time Alinement of Data
To minimize the biasing effect of the time, lag between the different
signals on the calculation of mass emissions, the data relevant for
emissions calculation shall be time aligned, as described in clauses
A.1.3.1.1 to A.1.3.1.4 of this appendix.
A.1.3.1.1 Gas Analysers Data
The data from the gas analysers shall be properly aligned using the
procedure in clause 9.3.5. of chapter 3 of this part.
A.1.3.1.2 Gas analyzers and EFM data
The data from the gas analysers shall be properly aligned with the data
of the EFM using the procedure in clause A.1.3.1.4 of this appendix.
A.1.3.1.3 PEMS and Engine Data
The data from the PEMS (gas analysers and EFM) shall be properly
aligned with the data from the engine ECU using the procedure in
clause A.1.3.1.4 of this appendix.
A.1.3.1.4 Procedure for improved time-alignment of the PEMS data
The test data listed in Table 1 are split into 3 different categories:
1: Gas analysers (THC, CO, CO2, NOx concentrations);
2: Exhaust Flow Meter (Exhaust mass flow and exhaust temperature);
3: Engine (Torque, speed, temperatures, fuel rate, vehicle speed from
ECU).
The time alignment of each category with the other categories shall be
verified by finding the highest correlation coefficient between two
series of parameters. All the parameters in a category shall be shifted
to maximize the correlation factor. The following parameters shall be
used to calculate the correlation coefficients:
To time-align:
(a)Categories 1 and 2 (Analysers and EFM data) with category 3
(Engine data): the vehicle speed from the GPS and from the ECU.
(b)Category 1 with category 2: the CO2 concentration and the exhaust
mass.
(c)Category 2 with category 3: the CO2 concentration and the engine
fuel flow.
240/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A.1.3.2 Data Consistency Checks

A.1.3.2.1 Analysers and EFM data
The consistency of the data (exhaust mass flow measured by the EFM
and gas concentrations) shall be verified using a correlation between
the measured fuel flow from the ECU and the fuel flow calculated
using the formula in clause 8.4.1.6. of chapter3 of this part. A linear
regression shall be performed for the measured and calculated fuel rate
values. The method of least squares shall be used, with the best fit
equation having the form:
y = mx + b
Where:
Y is the calculated fuel flow [g/s]
m is the slope of the regression line
x is the measured fuel flow [g/s]
b is the y intercept of the regression line
The slope (m) and the coefficient of determination (r²) shall be
calculated for each regression line. It is recommended to perform this
analysis in the range from 15 per cent of the maximum value to the
maximum value and at a frequency greater or equal to 1 Hz. For a test
to be considered valid, the following two criteria shall be evaluated:
Table 2
Tolerances
Slope of the regression line, m 0.9 to 1.1 - Recommended
Coefficient of determination r2 min. 0.90 - Mandatory
A.1.3.2.2 ECU Torque Data
The consistency of the ECU torque data shall be verified by comparing
the maximum ECU torque values at different engine speeds with the
corresponding values on the official engine full load torque curve
according to clause 5. of this chapter.
A.1.3.2.3 Brake-Specific Fuel Consumption
The Brake Specific Fuel Consumption (BSFC) shall be checked using:
(a)The fuel consumption calculated from the emissions data (gas
analyser concentrations and exhaust mass flow data), according to the
formulae in clause 8.4.1.6. of chapter 3 of this part;
(b)The work calculated using the data from the ECU (Engine torque
and engine speed).
241/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A.1.3.2.4 Odometer
The distance indicated by the vehicle odometer shall be checked
against the GPS data and verified.
A.1.3.2.5 Ambient Pressure
The ambient pressure value shall be checked against the altitude
indicated by the GPS data.
A.1.3.3 Dry-Wet Correction
If the concentration is measured on a dry basis, it shall be converted to
a wet basis according to the formula in clause 8.1. of chapter3 of this
part
A.1.3.4 NOx correction for humidity and temperature
The NOx concentrations measured by the PEMS shall not be corrected
for ambient air temperature and humidity.
A.1.3.5 Calculation of the instantaneous gaseous emissions
The mass emissions shall be determined as described in clause 8.4.2.3.
of chapter 3 of this part.
A.1.4 DETERMINATION OF EMISSIONS AND CONFORMITY
FACTORS
A.1.4.1 Averaging Window Principle
The emissions shall be integrated using a moving averaging window
method, based on the reference CO2 mass or the reference work. The
principle of the calculation is as follows: The mass emissions are not
calculated for the complete data set, but for sub-sets of the complete
data set, the length of these sub-sets being determined so as to match
the engine CO2 mass or work measured over the reference laboratory
transient cycle. The moving average calculations are conducted with a
time increment equal to the data sampling period. These sub-sets used
to average the emissions data are referred to as “averaging windows”
in the following Sections.
Any Section of invalidated data shall not be considered for the
calculation of the work or CO2 mass and the emissions of the averaging
window.
The following data shall be considered as invalidated data:
(a) The periodic verification of the instruments and/or after the zero
drift verifications;
(b) The data outside the conditions specified in clauses 4.2. and 4.3. of
this chapter.
The mass emissions (mg/window) shall be determined as described in
clause 8.4.2.3. of chapter 3 of this part.
242/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Figure 1
Vehicle speed versus time and Vehicle averaged emissions,
starting from the first averaging window, versus time.
A.1.4.2 Work Based Method
243/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Figure 2. Work based method
The duration (t2i -t1i ) of the ith averaging window is determined by:
W (t2 ,i )  W (t1,i )  Wref

Where:
W (t j ,i )
is the engine work measured between the start and time tj,i,
kWh;
Wref
is the engine work for the WHTC, kWh
t2,i shall be selected such that:
W (t 2 ,i  t )  W (t1,i )  Wref  W (t 2,i )  W (t1,i )
Where t is the data sampling period, equal to 1 second or less.

A.1.4.2.1 Calculation of The Specific Emissions
The specific emissions egas (mg/kWh) shall be calculated for each
window and each pollutant in the following way:
m
e gas 
W (t 2,i )  W (t1,i )
Where:
m is the mass emission of the component, mg/window
W (t 2,i )  W (t1,i )
is the engine work during the ith averaging window,
kWh
A.1.4.2.2 Selection of Valid Windows
The valid windows are the windows whose average power exceeds the
power threshold of 20% of the maximum engine power. The
percentage of valid windows shall be equal or greater than 50 per cent.
A.1.4.2.2.1 If the percentage of valid windows is less than 50 per cent, the data
evaluation shall be repeated using lower power thresholds. The power
threshold shall be reduced in steps of 1 per cent until the percentage of
valid windows is equal to or greater than 50 per cent.
A.1.4.2.2.2 In any case, the lower threshold shall not be lower than 15 per cent.
244/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A.1.4.2.2.3 The test shall be void if the percentage of valid windows is less than
50 per cent at a power threshold of 15 per cent.
A.1.4.2.3 Calculation of the conformity factors
The conformity factors shall be calculated for each individual valid
window and each individual pollutant in the following way:
e
CF 
L
Where:
e is the brake-specific emission of the component, mg/kWh;
L is the applicable limit, mg/kWh.
A.1.4.3 CO2 Mass Based Method
Figure 3
CO2 mass based method
245/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
(t 2, i  t1,i )
The duration of the ith averaging window is determined
by:
mCO 2 (t 2,i )  mCO 2 (t1,i )  mCO 2, ref

Where:
mCO 2 (t j ,i )
is the CO2 mass measured between the test start and time
tj,i, kg;
mCO 2 ,ref
is the CO2 mass determined for the WHTC, kg;
t2,i shall be selected such as:
mCO2 (t2,i  t )  mCO2 (t1,i )  mCO2, ref  mCO2 (t2,i )  mCO2 (t1,i )
Where t is the data sampling period, equal to 1 second or less.

The CO2 masses are calculated in the windows by integrating the
instantaneous emissions calculated according to the requirements
introduced in clause A.1.3.5 of this appendix.
A.1.4.3.1 Selection of valid windows
The valid windows shall be the windows whose duration does not
exceed the maximum duration calculated from:
Wref
Dmax  3600 
0.2  Pmax
Dmax is the maximum window duration, s;
Pmax is the maximum engine power, kW.
A.1.4.3.1.1 If the percentage of valid windows is less than 50% the data evaluation
shall be using longer window durations. this is achieved by decreasing
the value of 0.2 in the formula given in clause A.1.4.3.1 by steps of
0.01 until the percentage of valid windows is equal to greater than 50%.
A.1.4.3.1.2 In any case the lowered value in the above formula shall not be lower
than 0.15
A.1.4.3.1.3 The test shall be void if the percentage of valid windows is less than
50% at a maximum window duration calculated in accordance with
clauses 1.4.3.1 ,1.4.3.1.1 and 1.4.3.1.2 of this appendix.
A.1.4.3.2 Calculation of the Conformity Factor
246/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
The conformity factors shall be calculated for each individual

window and each individual pollutant in the following way:
CFI
CF 
CFC
m
CFI 
mCO 2 (t 2,i )  mCO 2 (t1,i )
With (in service ratio)
and
mL
CFC 
mCO 2,ref
(Certification ratio)
m is the mass emission of the component,

mg/window
mCO 2 (t 2 ,i )  mCO 2 (t1,i ) is the CO2 mass during the ith averaging
window, kg;
m CO 2 , ref is the engine CO2 mass determined for

the WHTC, kg;
mL is the mass emission of the component

corresponding to the applicable limit on
the WHTC, mg.
247/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
PORTABLE EMISSION MEASURMENT EQUIPMENT
A.2.1 GENREAL
The gaseous emissions shall be measured according to the procedure
set out in Appendix 1 to this chapter. The present Appendix describes
the characteristics of the portable measurement equipment that shall
be used to perform such tests.
A.2.2 Measuring Equipment
A.2.2.1 Gas Analyser Specification
The PEMS gas analysers specifications shall meet the requirements
set out in clause 9.3.1. of chapter 3 of this part.
A.2.2.2 Gas Analyser Technology
The gases shall be analysed using the technologies specified in clause
9.3.1 of chapter 3 of this part.
The oxides of nitrogen analyser may also be of the Non-Dispersive
Ultra Violet (NDUV) type.
A.2.2.3 Sampling of gaseous emissions
The sampling probes shall meet the requirements defined in clause
A.2.1.2 and A.2.1.3 of Appendix 2 to chapter 3 of this part. The
sampling line shall be heated to 190°C (+/-10°C).
A.2.2.4 Other Instruments
The measuring instruments shall satisfy the requirements given in
Table 7 and clause 9.3.1 to chapter 3 of this part.
A.2.3 Auxiliary Equipment
A.2.3.1 Exhaust Gas Flow Meter (EFM) tailpipe connection
The installation of the EFM shall not increase the backpressure by
more than the value recommended by the engine manufacturer, nor
increase the length of the tailpipe by more than 1.2 m. As for the all
the components of the PEMS equipment, the installation of the EFM
shall comply with the locally applicable road safety standards and
insurance requirements.
A.2.3.2 PEMS Location and Mounting Hardware
The PEMS equipment shall be installed as specified in clause
A.1.2.4. of Appendix 1 of chapter 7of this part.
A.2.3.3 Electrical power:
The PEMS equipment shall be powered using the method described
in clause 4.6.6. of chapter 7 of this part.
248/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
CALIBRATION OF
PORTABLE EMISSION MEASURMENT EQUIPMENT
A.3.1. Equipment calibration and verification

A.3.1.1. Calibration gases
The PEMS gas analysers shall be calibrated using gases meeting the requirements as
set out in clause 9.3.3 of chapter 3.
A.3.1.2. Leakage test

The PEMS leakage tests shall be conducted following the requirements
defined in clause 9.3.4. of chapter 3 of this part.
A.3.1.3 Response time check of the analytical system
The response time check of the PEMS analytical system shall be
conducted in accordance with the requirements set out in clause 9.3.5.
of chapter 3 of this part.
249/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
METHOD TO CHECK THE CONFORMITY OF
THE ECU TORQUE-SIGNAL
A.4.1. INTRODUCTION
This Appendix describes in a non-detailed manner the method used
to check the conformity of the ECU torque-signal during ISC-
PEMS testing.
The detailed applicable procedure is left to the engine

manufacturer, subject to approval of the test agency.
A.4.2 THE "MAXIMUM TORQUE" METHOD
A.4.2.1 The "Maximum torque" method consists of demonstrating that a

point on the reference maximum torque curve as a function of the
engine speed has been reached during vehicle testing.
A.4.2.2 If a point on the reference maximum torque curve as a function of the

engine speed has not been reached during the ISC PEMS emissions
testing, the manufacturer is entitled to modify the load of the vehicle
and/or the testing route as necessary in order to perform that
demonstration after the ISC PEMS emissions test has been completed.
250/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
CHAPTER 8A
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEMS
1.1 INTRODUCTION
This Chapter sets out the functional aspects of on-board
diagnostic (OBD) systems for the control of emissions from
engine systems which are covered by this Standard.
2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1. The general requirements, including the specific requirements for

electronic system security, shall be those set out in clause 4 of
Chapter 8B and those described in clause 2 of this Chapter.
2.2. Requirements regarding operating sequences and driving cycles for

hybrid vehicles and vehicles with stop-start systems
2.2.1 Operating Sequence
2.2.1.1 For vehicles that employ engine shut-off strategies that are
commanded by the engine control system (for example hybrid bus
with engine shut-off at idle) and that are followed by an engine
cranking, the (engine shut-off – engine cranking) sequence shall be
considered as part of the existing operating sequence.
2.2.1.2 The manufacturer shall provide the description of such strategies in

the documentation considered in clauses 3.1.3. (a) and 3.1.3. (b) of
this part.
2.2.1.3 In the case of a hybrid vehicle, the operating sequence shall start at
the time of the engine start or at the time when the vehicle starts
moving, whichever occurs first.
2.2.2 Driving cycle
2.2.2.1 For vehicles that employ engine shut-off strategies that are
commanded by the engine control system (for example hybrid bus
with engine shut-off at idle) and that are followed by an engine
cranking, the (engine shut-off – engine cranking) sequence shall be
considered as part of the existing driving cycle
2.2.2.2 The manufacturer shall provide the description of such strategies in

the documentation considered in clauses 3.1.3. (a) and 3.1.3. (b) of
this part.
2.2.2.3 In the case of a hybrid vehicle, the driving cycle shall start at the time
of the engine start or at the time when the vehicle starts moving,
whichever occurs first."
251/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
2.3. Additional Provisions Concerning Monitoring Requirements.
2.3.1. Malfunctioning Injectors

2.3.1.1. The manufacturer shall submit to the test agency an analysis of the
long-term effects on the emission control system of malfunctioning
fuel injectors (for example clogged or soiled injectors) even if the
OBD Threshold Limits (OTLs) are not exceeded as a consequence of
these malfunctions.
2.3.1.2. After the period set out in clause 4.10.7 of Chapter-1 of this part the
manufacturer shall submit to the test agency a plan of the monitoring
techniques he intends to use in addition to those required by
Appendix 3 of chapter 8B in order to diagnose the effects considered
in clause 2.3.1.1.
2.3.1.2.1 After the approval of this plan by the Test Agency, the
manufacturer shall implement those techniques in the OBD
system in order to get type approval.
2.3.2. Monitoring requirements concerning particulate after treatment

devices
2.3.2.1 The performance of the particulate after treatment device including
the filtration and continuous regeneration processes shall be
monitored against the OBD threshold limit specified in clause 3.2.2
below.
2.3.2.2 In the case of a wall flow diesel particulate filter (DPF), the
manufacturer may choose to apply the performance monitoring
requirements set out in Appendix 8 of Chapter 8B instead of the
requirements of clause 2.3.2.1 of this chapter, if he can demonstrate
with technical documentation that in case of deterioration there is a
positive correlation between the loss of filtration efficiency and the
loss of pressure drop ("delta pressure") across the DPF under the
operating conditions of the engine specified in the test described in
Appendix 8 of Chapter 8B of this part.
2.4. Alternative Approval

2.4.1. If requested by the manufacturer, for vehicles of categories M2 and
N1, for vehicles of categories M1 and N2 with a technically
permissible maximum laden mass not exceeding 7.5 tonnes, and for
vehicles of category M3 of Type-I and Type-II (as defined in AIS-
052) with a permissible mass not exceeding 7.5 tonnes, compliance
with the requirements of chapter 10 of AIS 137 PART3 shall be
considered equivalent to the compliance with this Chapter
2.4.1.1 If such alternative approval is used, the information related to OBD
systems shall be as per AIS 137 PART 3.
2.4.12 The equivalence set out in clauses 2.4.1 shall apply in the following
manner
2.4.1.2.1 The requirements on NOx control measures described in clauses
2.1.2.2.1. to 2.1.2.2.4. of chapter 10 of this part shall apply.
252/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
2.4.2 As an alternative to the requirements set out in clause 4. Of chapter

8B and those described in this annex, engine manufacturers whose
annual production of engines within an engine type subject to this
standard is less than 250 engines per year, may obtain type approval
on the basis of the requirements of this standard when the emission
control components of the engine-system are at least monitored for
circuit continuity, and for rationality and plausibility of sensor
outputs, and when the after-treatment system is at least monitored for
total functional failure. Engine manufacturers whose annual
production of engines within an engine type subject to this standard
is less than 50 engines per year, may obtain type approval on the basis
of the requirements of this standard when the emission control
components of the engine system are at least monitored for circuit
continuity, and for rationality and plausibility of sensor outputs
("component monitoring").
A manufacturer shall not be permitted to use the alternative
provisions specified in this clause for more than 250 engines per year.
2.4.3 The test agencies shall inform the other test agencies of the
circumstances of each type approval granted under clause 2.4.1
and clause2.4.2 of this chapter.
2.5. Conformity of production
The OBD system is subject to the requirements for conformity of
production specified in clause 8.4. of Chapter-I of this standard.
If the test agency decides that verification of the conformity of
production of the OBD system is required, the verification shall
be conducted in accordance with the requirements specified in
clause 8.4 of Chapter-I of this part.
3.0 PERFORMANCE REQUIRMENTS
3.1. The performance requirements shall be those set out in clause 5 of
Chapter 8B.
3.2. OBD threshold Limits
3.2.1. The OBD threshold limits (hereinafter OTLs) applicable to the OBD
system are those specified in Gazette notification GSR-889(E) dated
16th Sep 2016 published by Ministry of Road Transport and
Highways (MoRTH).
3.2.2. The vehicles specified in this sub-rule shall be equipped with an On-
Board Diagnostic system for emission control which shall have the
capability of identifying the likely area of the malfunctions by means
of fault codes stored in computer memory and communicating that
information off-board, as per procedure described in this standard,
when that failure results in an increase in emission above the limits
as given in Table 1 or Table 2 below (as applicable) as notified in the
MoRTH. The implementation dates for BS-VI-OBD-I and BS-VI-
OBD-II shall be as specified in Gazette notification GSR-889(E)
dated 16th Sep 2016 published by Ministry of Road Transport and
Highways (MoRTH).
253/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
At the manufacturer’s request type approval may be granted for

compliance to BS-VI OBD-II requirements before its
implementation.
Table 1
OBD threshold Limits: (BS-VI OBD-I)
Limit in mg/kWh
NOx PM Mass
Compression Ignition Engine 1500 Performance
monitoring
Positive Ignition Engine 1500 -----
Table 2
OBD threshold Limits: (BS-VI OBD-II)
Limit in mg/kWh
NOx PM Mass CO
Compression Ignition Engine 1200 25 ----
Positive Ignition Engine 1200 ----- 7500
4. DEMONSTRATION REQUIREMENTS
4.1. The demonstration requirements and test procedures shall be those
set out in clauses 6 and 7 of Chapter 8B.
5. DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
5.1. The documentation requirements shall be those set out in clause 8 of

Chapter 8B.
6. In use performance requirements
The requirements of this clause shall apply to the OBD system
monitors in accordance with the provisions of chapter 8C. This
section shall be applicable from the date 1st Apr 2023 as specified in
Gazette Notification GSR 889(E) dated 16th September 2016
6.1 Technical Requirements
6.1.1 The requirements of this clause shall apply to the OBD system
monitors in accordance with the provisions of chapter 8C. This
section shall be applicable from the date 1st Apr 2023 as specified in
Gazette Notification GSR 889(E) dated 16th September 2016.
6.1.2 In particular, the in-use performance ratio (IUPRm) of a specific
monitor m of the OBD system shall be calculated by the following
formula:
IUPR m = Numerator m / Denominator m
where
‘Numerator m’ means the numerator of a specific monitor m and is a
counter indicating the number of times a vehicle has been operated
in such a way that all monitoring conditions necessary for that
specific monitor to detect a malfunction have been encountered;
and
254/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
‘Denominator m’ means the denominator of a specific monitor m and

is a counter indicating the number of vehicle driving cycles that are
of relevance to that specific monitor [or, “in which events occur that
are of relevance to that specific monitor.”].
6.1.3 The in-use performance ratio (IUPRg) of a group g of monitors on
board of a vehicle is calculated by the following formula:
IUPRg = Numerator g / Denominator g
where
‘Numerator g’ means the numerator of a group g of monitors and is
the actual value (Numerator m) of the specific monitor m that has the
lowest in-use performance ratio as defined in clause 6.1.2 of this
chapter of all monitors within that group g of monitors on board of a
particular vehicle;
‘Denominator g’ means the denominator of a group g of monitors
and is the actual value (Denominator m) of the specific monitor m that
has the lowest in-use performance ratio as defined in clause 6.1.2 of
this chapter of all monitors within that group g of monitors on board
of a particular vehicle.
6.2. Minimum in-use performance ratio
6.2.1. The in-use performance ratio IUPR m of a monitor m of the OBD
system as defined in clause 5 of chapter 8C of this part, shall be
greater than or equal to the minimum in-use-performance ratio
IUPRm(min) applicable to the monitor m throughout the useful life of
the engine as specified in clause 5.4 of Chapter-I of this standard.
6.2.2. The value of minimum in-use-performance ratio IUPR (min) is 0.1
for all monitors.
6.2.3. The requirement of clause 6.2.1 of this chapter is deemed to be
fulfilled if for all groups of monitor’s g the following conditions are
met:
6.2.3.1. The average value of the values IUPRg of all vehicles equipped with
engines belonging to the OBD engine family under consideration is
equal to or above IUPR (min), and
6.2.3.2. More than 50% of all engines considered in clause 6.2.3.1. of this
chapter have an IUPRg equal to or above IUPR(min).
6.3 Documentation Requirements
6.3.1 The documentation associated with each monitored component or

system and required by clause 8 of Chapter 8B shall include the
following information concerning in-use performance data:
a) The criteria used for incrementing the numerator and the
denominator;
b) Any criterion for disabling incrementation of the numerator or of
the denominator.
6.3.1.1 Any criterion for disabling incrementation of the general
denominator shall be added to the documentation referred to in
255/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
6.4. Statement of OBD in-use Performance compliance

6.4.1. In the application for type approval, the manufacturer shall provide a
statement of OBD in-use Performance compliance in accordance
with the format set out in Appendix 2 to this chapter. In addition to
this statement, compliance with the requirements of clause 6.1 of
this chapter shall be verified through the additional assessment rules
specified in clause 6.5.of this chapter.
6.4.2. This statement referred to in clause 6.4.1 of this chapter shall be
attached to the documentation related to the OBD engine-family
required by clause 5 and 6.3 of this chapter.
6.4.3. The manufacturer shall maintain records which contain all test data,
engineering and manufacturing analyses, and other information
which provides the basis for the OBD in-use performance
compliance statement. The manufacturer shall make such
information available to the test agency upon request.
6.4.4. During the phase-in period (from BSVI -OBD-1 to BS-VI-OBD-II)
set out in clause 4.10.7 of Chapter-1 of this part, the manufacturer
shall be exempted from providing the statement required by clause
6.5. Assessment of the in-use performance

6.5.1. The OBD in-use performance and compliance with clause 6.2.3 of
this chapter shall be demonstrated at least according to the procedure
set out in Appendix 1 to this chapter.
6.5.2. Test agencies may pursue further in-use performance surveys to
verify compliance with clause 6.2.3 of this chapter.
6.5.2.1 To demonstrate non-compliance with the requirements of clause
6.2.3 of this chapter, based on the provision of clause 6.5.2 of this
chapter, the test agencies must show for at least one of the
requirements of clause 6.2.3 of this Chapter non-compliance with a
statistical confidence level of 95%, based on a sample of at least 30
vehicles.
6.5.2.2 The manufacturer shall have the opportunity to establish compliance
with the requirements of clause 6.2.3 of this chapter, for which non-
compliance was demonstrated according to clause 6.5.2.1 of this
Chapter, by using a survey based on a sample of at least 30 vehicles,
with a better statistical confidence than the test mentioned in clause
6.5.2.1.
6.5.2.3 For tests performed according to clauses 6.5.2.1 and 6.5.2.2 both test
agencies and manufacturers must disclose relevant details, such as
those relating to the selection of the vehicles, to the other party.
6.5.3 If non-compliance with the requirements of clause 6.2.3 of this
chapter is established according to clauses 6.5.1 or 6.5.2. of this
chapter, remedial measures in accordance with clause 9.3 of Chapter-
I of this Standard shall be taken.
256/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
CHAPTER 8A - APPENDIX 1
ASSESSMENT OF THE IN-USE PERFORMANCE OF THE ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
1.0 GENREAL
1.1 This Appendix sets out the procedure to be followed when

demonstrating the OBD in-use performance with regard to the
provisions set out in clause 6 of this Chapter.
2 Procedure for Demonstrating OBD in-use Performance
2.1. The OBD in-use performance of an engine family shall be

demonstrated by the manufacturer to the test agency that granted the
type-approval for the vehicles or engines concerned. The
demonstration shall require consideration of the OBD in-use
performance of all OBD engine families within the engine family
under consideration (Figure 1).
Figure 1
Two OBD Engine Families within one Engine Family
2.1.1. The demonstration of OBD in-use performance shall be organised and
conducted by the manufacturer, in close cooperation with the test
agency.
2.1.2. The manufacturer may use in the demonstration of conformity relevant

elements that were used to demonstrate the conformity of an OBD
engine family within another engine family provided that this earlier
demonstration took place no more than two years before the current
demonstration (Figure 2).
2.1.2.1. A manufacturer may not, however, then use these elements in
demonstrating conformity of a third or subsequent, engine family
unless each of these demonstrations takes place within two years of the
first use of the elements in a demonstration of conformity.
257/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Figure 2
Previously demonstrated conformity of an OBD engine family
2.2. The demonstration of OBD in-use performance shall be performed at

the same time and at the same frequency as the in-service conformity
demonstration specified in chapter 7 of this part.
2.3. The manufacturer shall report the initial schedule and the sampling
plan for conformity testing to the test agency at the time of the initial
type approval of a new engine family.
2.4. Vehicle types without a communication interface which permits the

collection of the necessary in-use performance data as specified in
chapter 8C, with missing data or with a non-standard data protocol
shall be considered as non-compliant.
2.4.1. Individual vehicles with mechanical or electrical faults which prevent

the collection of the necessary in-use performance data as specified in
chapter 8C of this part shall be excluded from the conformity testing
survey and the vehicle type shall not be considered non-compliant
unless insufficient vehicles that meet the sampling requirements can
be found to permit the survey to be properly conducted.
2.5. Engine or vehicle types where the collection of in-use performance

data influences the
258/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
3. OBD in-use performance data

3.1. The OBD in-use performance data to be considered for assessing the
conformity of an OBD engine family shall be those recorded by the
OBD system according to clause6 of chapter 8C, and made available
according to clause 7 of that chapter of this part.
4. ENGINE OR VEHICLE SELECTION
4.1. Engine Selection
4.1.1. In the case where an OBD engine-family is used in several engine
families (Figure 2), engines from each of these engine families shall
be selected by the manufacturer for demonstrating the in-use
performance of that OBD engine family.
4.1.2. Any engine of a particular OBD-engine family may be included in the
same demonstration even if the monitoring systems with which they
are equipped are of different generations or at different modification
states.
4.2. Vehicle Selection
4.2.1. Vehicle segments
4.2.1.1. For the purpose of classifying the vehicles subject to demonstration, 6
vehicle segments shall be considered:
(a)for vehicles of class N: long-haul vehicles, distribution vehicles, and
others such as construction vehicles.
(b)for vehicles of class M: coaches and inter-city buses, city buses, and
others such as M1 vehicles.
4.2.1.2. Where possible, vehicles shall be selected from each segment in a
survey.
4.2.1.3. There shall be a minimum of 15 vehicles per segment.
4.2.1.4. In the case where an OBD engine-family is used in several engine
families (Figure 2), the number of engines from each of these engine
families within a vehicle segment shall be as representative as possible
of their volume share, in terms of vehicles sold and in use, for that
vehicle segment.
4.2.2. Vehicle qualification
4.2.2.1. The engines selected shall be fitted to vehicles registered and used in
India.
4.2.2.2. Each vehicle selected shall have a maintenance record to show that the
vehicle has been properly maintained and serviced in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations.
4.2.2.3. The OBD system shall be checked for proper functioning. Any
malfunction indications relevant to the OBD system itself that are
stored in the OBD memory shall be recorded and the required repairs
shall be carried out.
259/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
4.2.2.4. The engine and vehicle shall exhibit no indications of abuse such as
overloading, misfueling, or other misuse, or other factors such as
tampering that could affect the OBD performance. OBD system fault
codes and information on operating hours stored in the computer
memory shall be amongst the evidence taken into account in
determining whether the vehicle has been subject to abuse or is
otherwise ineligible for inclusion in a survey.
4.2.2.5. All emission control system and OBD components on the vehicle shall
be as stated in the applicable type-approval documents.
5. In-use performance surveys
5.1. Collection of in-use performance data
5.1.1. In accordance with the provisions of clause 6, the manufacturer shall

retrieve the following information from the OBD system of each
vehicle in the survey:
(a)The VIN (Vehicle Identification Number);
(b)The numerator and denominator for each group of monitors
recorded by the system in accordance with the requirements of
clause 6 of Chapter 8C of this part;
(c)The general denominator;
(d)The value of the ignition cycle counter;
(e)The total engine running hours.
5.1.2. The results from the group of monitors under evaluation shall be
disregarded if a minimum value of 25 for its denominator has not been
reached.
5.2. Assessment of the in-use performance
5.2.1. The actual performance ratio per group of monitors of an individual

engine (IUPRg) shall be calculated from the numerator and
denominator retrieved from the OBD system of that vehicle.
5.2.2. The assessment of the in-use performance of the OBD engine family
in accordance with the requirements of clause 6.5.1 of chapter 8B of
this part shall be made for each group of monitors within the OBD-
engine family considered in a vehicle segment.
5.2.3. For any segment of vehicles defined in clause 4.2.1 of this Appendix,
the OBD in-use performance is considered as being demonstrated for
the purposes of clause 6.5.1 of chapter 8B of this part if, and only if,
for any group g of monitors the following conditions are met:
(a)the average value of the IUPRg values of the considered sample is
greater than 88 per cent of IUPR(min); and
(b) More than 34 per cent of all engines in the considered sample have
an IUPRg value of more or equal than IUPR(min).
260/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
6. Report to the Test Agency
The manufacturer shall provide the test agency with a report on

the in-use performance of the OBD engine family that contains
the following information:
6.1. The list of the engine families within the considered OBD engine
family (Figure 1)
6.2 The following information concerning the vehicles considered in the
demonstration,
(a) The total number of vehicles considered in the demonstration;
(b) The number and the type of vehicle segments;
(c) The VIN, and a short description (type-variant-version) of each
vehicle
6.3 In-use performance information for each vehicle:
(a)The numerator, denominator, and in-use performance ratio

(IUPRg) for each group of monitors;
(b)The general denominator, the value of the ignition cycle counter,

the total engine running hours.
6.4 The results of the in-use performance statistics for each group of
monitors:
(a)The average value of the IUPRg values of the sample;
(b)The number and the percentage of engines in the sample that have
an IUPRg equal to or above IUPRm (min).
261/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
CHAPTER 8A - APPENDEX 2
MODELS OF AN OBD IN USE PERFORMANCE COMPLIANACE
STATEMENT
"(Name of manufacturer) attests that the engines within this OBD engine family
have been so designed and manufactured as to comply with all requirements of
clauses 6.1 and 6.2 of Chapter 8A of this part.
(Name of manufacturer) makes this statement in good faith, after having performed
an appropriate engineering evaluation of the OBD in-use performance of the engines
within the OBD engine family over the applicable range of operating and ambient
conditions."
[date]
262/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
CHAPTER 8B
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEMS
1. INTRODUCTION
This chapter set out the technical requirements of an on-board
diagnostic (OBD) system for the control of emission from engine
systems.
2. Reserved
3.0 DEFINITIONS
3.1. "Alert system" means a system on-board the vehicle which informs
the driver of the vehicle or any other interested party that the OBD
system has detected a malfunction.
3.2. "Test Agency" means the authority that grants the compliance
approval of an OBD system considered by this chapter. .
3.3. "Calibration verification number" means the number that is
calculated and reported by the engine system to validate the
calibration/software integrity.
3.4. "Component monitoring" means the monitoring of input components
for electrical circuit failures and rationality failures and monitoring of
output components for electrical circuit failures and functionality
failures. It refers to components that are electrically connected to the
controller(s) of the engine system.
3.5. "Confirmed and active DTC" means a DTC that is stored during
the time the OBD system concludes that a malfunction exists.
3.6. "Continuous-MI" means the malfunction indicator showing a
steady indication at all times while the key is in the on (run) position
with the engine running (ignition on - engine on).
3.7. "Deficiency" means an OBD monitoring strategy or other OBD
feature that does not meet all the detailed requirements of this chapter.
3.8. "Diagnostic trouble code (DTC)" means a numeric or alphanumeric
identifier which identifies or labels a malfunction.
3.9. "Electrical circuit failure" means a malfunction (e.g. open circuit
or short circuit) that leads to the measured signal (i.e. voltages,
currents, frequencies, etc.) being outside the range where the transfer
function of the sensor is designed to operate.
3.10. "Emission OBD family" means a manufacturer's grouping of engine
systems having common methods of monitoring/diagnosing emission-
related malfunctions.
263/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
3.11 "Emission Threshold Monitoring" means monitoring of a

malfunction that leads to an excess of the OTLs. It consists of:
(a)Direct emissions measurement via a tailpipe emissions sensor(s)
and a model to correlate the direct emissions to test-cycle specific
emissions; and/or
(b)Indication of an emissions increase via correlation of computer
input/output information to test-cycle specific emissions.
3.12 "Engine System" means the engine as it would be configured when

tested for its exhaust emissions on a approval test-bed, including:
(a)The engine's electronic management controller(s);
(b)The exhaust after treatment system(s);
(c)Any emission-related component of the engine or the exhaust
system which supplies input to, or receives output from, the engine's
electronic management controller(s); and
(d)The communication interface (hardware and messages) between
the engine's electronic management controller(s) and any other power
train or vehicle control unit if the exchanged information has an
influence on the control of emissions.
3.13. "Functionality failure" means a malfunction where an output
component does not respond to a computer command in the expected
way.
3.14. "Malfunction emission control strategy (MECS)" means a strategy
within the engine system that is activated as a result of an emission-
related malfunction.
3.15. "Malfunction indicator (MI)" is an indicator which clearly informs
the driver of the vehicle in the event of a malfunction. The MI is part
of the alert system (see "continuous-MI", "on-demand-MI", and
"short-MI").
3.16. "Malfunction" means a failure or deterioration of an engine system,
including the OBD system, that may lead either to an increase in any
of the regulated pollutants emitted by the engine system or to a
reduction in the effectiveness of the OBD system.
3.17. "MI status" means the command status of the MI, being either
continuous-MI, Short-MI, on-demand-MI, or off.
3.18. "Monitoring" (see "emission threshold monitoring", "performance
monitoring", and "total functional failure monitoring")
3.19. "OBD test-cycle" means the cycle over which an engine system is
operated on an engine test-bed to evaluate the response of an OBD
system to the presence of a qualified deteriorated component.
3.20. "OBD-parent engine system" means an engine system that has been
selected from an emission-OBD family for which most of its OBD
elements of design are representative of that family.
264/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
3.21 "On-board diagnostic system (OBD)" means a system on-board a

vehicle or engine which has the capability:
(a)of detecting malfunctions, affecting the emission performance of
the engine system;
(b)of indicating their occurrence by means of an alert system;
(c)of identifying the likely area of the malfunctions by means of
information stored in computer memory and/or communicating that
information off-board.
3.22. "On-demand-MI" means the malfunction indicator showing a steady
indication in response to a manual demand from the driving position
when the key is in the on (run) position with the engine off (ignition
on - engine off).
3.23. "Operating sequence" means a sequence consisting of an engine

start-up, an operating period, an engine shut-off, and the time until the
next start-up, where a specific OBD monitor runs to completion and a
malfunction would be detected if present.
3.24. "Pending DTC" means a DTC that is stored by the OBD system
because a monitor has detected a situation where a malfunction may
be present during the current or last completed operating sequence.
3.25. "Performance monitoring" means malfunction monitoring that

consists of functionality checks and monitoring parameters that are not
correlated to emission thresholds. Such monitoring is typically done
on components or systems to verify that they are operating within the
proper range (e.g. differential pressure in case of a DPF).
3.26. "Potential DTC" means a DTC that is stored by the OBD system
because a monitor has detected a situation where a malfunction may
be present but requires further evaluation to be confirmed. A potential
DTC is a pending DTC which is not a confirmed and active DTC.
3.27. "Previously active DTC" means a formerly confirmed and active

DTC that remains stored after the OBD system has concluded that the
malfunction that caused the DTC is no longer present.
3.28. "Qualified deteriorated component or system (QDC)"means a

component or system that has been intentionally deteriorated (e.g.
accelerated aging) and/or manipulated in a controlled manner and
which has been accepted by the test agencies according to the
provisions set in this chapter.
3.29. "Rationality failure" means a malfunction where the signal from an

individual sensor or component is at variance with that expected when
assessed against signals available from other sensors or components
within the control system. Rationality failures include malfunctions
that lead to the measured signal (i.e. voltages, currents, frequencies,
etc.) being inside the range where the transfer function of the sensor is
designed to operate.
265/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
3.30. "Readiness" means a status indicating whether a monitor or a group

of monitors have run since the last erasing by an external request or
command (for example through an OBD scan-tool).
3.31. "Scan-tool" means an external test equipment used for standardized

off-board communication with the OBD system in accordance with the
requirements of this chapter.
3.32. "Short-MI" means the malfunction indicator showing a 15 second

steady indication from the time the key is moved to on (run) position
and the engine is started (ignition on - engine on) or the vehicle starts
moving, and extinguishing after these 15 seconds or when the key is
moved to off, whichever occurs first.
3.33. "Software calibration identification" means a series of

alphanumeric characters that identifies the emission-related calibration
/ software version(s) installed in the engine system.
3.34. "Total functional failure monitoring" means monitoring a

malfunction which is leading to a complete loss of the desired function
of a system.
3.35. "Warm-up cycle" means sufficient engine operation such that the
coolant temperature has risen by at least 22 K (22 °C / 40 °F) from
engine starting and reaches a minimum temperature of 333 K (60 °C /
140 °F)1(1).
3.36. Abbreviations
CV Crankcase Ventilation
DOC Diesel Oxidation Catalyst
DPF Diesel Particulate Filter or Particulate Trap including
catalyzed DPFs and Continuously Regenerating Traps
(CRT)
DTC Diagnostic trouble code
EGR Exhaust Gas Recirculation
HC Hydrocarbon
LNT Lean NOx Trap (or NOx absorber)
LPG Liquefied Petroleum Gas
MECS Malfunction Emission Control Strategy
NG Natural Gas
NOx Oxides of Nitrogen
OTL OBD Threshold Limit
PM Particulate Matter
(1)
This definition does not imply that a temperature sensor is necessary to measure the coolant temperature
266/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
SCR Selective Catalytic Reduction

SW Screen Wipers
TFF Total Functional Failure monitoring
VGT Variable Geometry Turbocharger
VVT Variable Valve Timing
4.0 GENERAL REQUIRMENTS
In the context of this chapter, the OBD system shall have the capability
of detecting malfunctions, of indicating their occurrence by means of
a malfunction indicator, of identifying the likely area of the
malfunctions by means of information stored in computer memory,
and communicating that information off-board.
The OBD system shall be designed and constructed so as to enable it
to identify types of malfunctions over the complete life of the
vehicle/engine. In achieving this objective, the test agency will
recognize that engines which have been used in excess of their
regulatory useful life may show some deterioration in OBD system
performance and sensitivity such that the OBD thresholds may be
exceeded before the OBD system signals a malfunction to the driver
of the vehicle.
The above paragraph does not extend the engine manufacturer's
compliance liability for an engine beyond its regulated useful life (i.e.
the time or distance period during which emission standards or
emission limits continue to apply).
4.1 Application for approval of an OBD system.
4.1.1 Primary Approval
The manufacturer of an engine system may apply for the approval of

its OBD system in one of the three following manners:
(a)The manufacturer of an engine system applies for the approval of
an individual OBD system by demonstrating that OBD system
complies with all the provisions of this chapter.
(b)The manufacturer of an engine system applies for the approval of
an emission-OBD family by demonstrating that the OBD-parent
engine system of the family complies with all the provisions of this
chapter.
(c) The manufacturer of an engine system applies for the approval of
an OBD system by demonstrating that OBD system meets the
criteria for belonging to an emission-OBD family that has already
been certified.
4.1.2 Extension /Modification of an Existing Certificate

4.1.2.1 At the request of the manufacturer and upon approval of the test
agency, a new engine system may be included as a member of a
certified emission-OBD family if all the engine systems within the so-
267/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
extended emission-OBD family still have common methods of

monitoring / diagnosing emission-related malfunctions.
If all OBD elements of design of the OBD-parent engine system are

representative of those of the new engine system, then the OBD-parent
engine system shall remain unchanged and the manufacturer shall
modify the application document according to clause 8 of this chapter.
If the new engine system contains elements of design that are not
represented by the OBD-parent engine system but itself would
represent the whole family, then the new engine system shall become
the new OBD-parent engine system. In this case the new OBD
elements of design shall be demonstrated to comply with the
provisions of this chapter, and the documentation package shall be
modified according to clause 8. of this chapter.
4.1.2.2 Extension to address a design change that affects the OBD system
At the request of the manufacturer and upon approval of the test
agency, an extension of an existing certificate may be granted in the
case of a design change of the OBD system if the manufacturer
demonstrates that the design changes comply with the provisions of
this chapter.
The documentation package shall be modified according to clause 8.
of this chapter.
If the existing certificate applies to an emission-OBD family, the
manufacturer shall justify to the test agency that the methods of
monitoring/diagnosing emission-related malfunctions are still
common within the family and that the OBD-parent engine system
remains representative of the family.
4.1.2.3 Certificate Modification to Address A Malfunction

Reclassification.
This clause applies when, following a request by the test agency that
granted the approval, or at its own initiative, the manufacturer applies
for a modification of an existing certificate in order to reclassify one
or several malfunctions.
The compliance of the new classification shall then be demonstrated
according to the provisions of this chapter and the documentation
package shall be modified according to clause 8 of this chapter.
4.2 Monitoring Requirements
All emission-related components and systems included in an engine

system shall be monitored by the OBD system in accordance with the
requirements set in Appendix 3 of this chapter and in the case of dual
fuel engines or vehicles in clause 7 of chapter 14 of this part.
However, the OBD system is not required to use a unique monitor to
detect each malfunction referred to in Appendix 3 of this chapter and
268/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
in the case of dual fuel engines or vehicles in clause 7 of chapter 14 of

this part.
The OBD system shall also monitor its own components.
The items of Appendix 3 list the systems or components required to

be monitored by the OBD system and describes the types of
monitoring expected for each of these components or systems (i.e.
emission threshold monitoring, performance monitoring, total
functional failure monitoring, or component monitoring).
The manufacturer can decide to monitor additional systems and
components.
4.2.1 Selection of the Monitoring Technique

Test agencies may approve a manufacturer's use of another type of
monitoring technique than the one mentioned in Appendix 3 of this
chapter or in the case of dual fuel engines or vehicles in clause 7 of
chapter 14 of this part The chosen type of monitoring shall be shown
by the manufacturer, to be robust, timely and efficient (i.e. through
technical considerations, test results, previous agreements, etc.).
In case a system and/or component is not covered by Appendix 3 of
this chapter or in the case of dual fuel engines or vehicles in clause 7
of chapter 14 of this part the manufacturer shall submit for approval
to the test agency an approach to monitoring. The test agency will
approve the chosen type of monitoring and monitoring technique (i.e.
emission threshold monitoring, performance monitoring, total
functional failure monitoring, or component monitoring) if it has been
shown by the manufacturer, by reference to those detailed in Appendix
3 of this chapter or in the case of dual fuel engines or vehicles in clause
7 of chapter 14 of this part to be robust, timely and efficient (i.e.
through either technical considerations, test results, previous
agreements, etc.).
4.2.1.1 Correlation to Actual Emissions
In the case of emission threshold monitoring, a correlation to test-
cycle specific emissions shall be required. This correlation would
typically be demonstrated on a test engine in a laboratory setting.
In all other monitoring cases (i.e. performance monitoring, total
functional failure monitoring, or component monitoring), no
correlation to actual emissions is necessary. However, the test agency
may request test data to verify the classification of the malfunction
effects as described in clause 6.2. of this chapter.
Examples:
An electrical malfunction may not require a correlation because this is
a yes/no malfunction. A DPF malfunction monitored via delta
pressure may not require a correlation because it anticipates a
malfunction.
If the manufacturer demonstrates, according to the demonstration

requirements of this chapter, that emissions would not exceed the OBD
269/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
threshold limits upon total failure or removal of a component or

system, a performance monitoring of this component or system shall
be accepted.
When a tailpipe emission sensor is used for monitoring the emissions
of a specific pollutant all other monitors may be exempted from further
correlation to the actual emissions of that pollutant. Nevertheless, such
exemption shall not preclude the need to include these monitors, using
other monitoring techniques, as part of the OBD system as the
monitors are still needed for the purpose of malfunction isolation.
A malfunction shall always be classified according to clause 4.5. of
this chapter based on its impact on emissions, regardless of the type of
monitoring used to detect the malfunction.
4.2.2 Component monitoring (input/output components/systems)

In the case of input components that belong to the engine system, the
OBD system shall at a minimum detect electrical circuit failures and,
where feasible, rationality failures.
The rationality failure diagnostics shall then verify that a sensor output
is neither inappropriately high nor inappropriately low (i.e. there shall
be "two-sided" diagnostics).
To the extent feasible, and with the agreement of the test agency, the
OBD system shall detect separately, rationality failures (e.g.
inappropriately high and inappropriately low), and electrical circuit
failures (e.g. out-of-range high and out-of-range low). Additionally,
unique DTCs for each distinct malfunction (e.g. out-of-range low, out-
of-range high and rationality failure) shall be stored.
In the case of output components that belong to the engine system, the
OBD system shall at a minimum detect electrical circuit failures, and,
where feasible, if the proper functional response to computer
commands does not occur.
To the extent feasible, and with the agreement of the Test Agency, the
OBD system shall detect separately functionality failures, electrical
circuit failures (e.g. out-of-range high and out-of-range low) and store
unique DTCs for each distinct malfunction (e.g. out-of-range low, out-
of-range high, functionality failure).
The OBD system shall also perform rationality monitoring on the
information coming from or provided to components that do not
belong to the engine system when this information compromises the
emission control system and/or the engine system for proper
performance.
4.2.2.1 Exception to Component Monitoring
Monitoring of electrical circuit failures, and to the extent feasible,
functionality, and rationality failures of the engine system shall not be
required if all the following conditions are met:
(a)The failure results in an emission increase of any pollutant of less than 50
per cent of the regulated emission limit, and
270/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
(b)The failure does not cause any emission to exceed the regulated emission
limit1, and
(c)The failure does not affect a component or system enabling the proper
performance of the OBD system, and
(d)the failure does not substantially delay or affect the ability of the emission
control system to operate as originally designed (for example a breakdown
of the reagent heating system under cold conditions cannot be considered as
an exception).
Determination of the emissions impact shall be performed on a stabilized
engine system in an engine dynamometer test cell, according to the
demonstration procedures of this chapter.
When such a demonstration would not be conclusive regarding
criterion (d), the manufacturer shall submit to the test agency
appropriate design elements such as good engineering practice,
technical considerations, simulations, test results, etc.
(1) The measured value shall be considered taking into account the
relevant precision tolerance of the test cell system and the increased
variability in the test results due to the malfunction.
4.2.3 Monitoring Frequency
Monitors shall run continuously, at any time where the monitoring
conditions are fulfilled, or once per operating sequence (e.g. for
monitors that lead to an increase of emission when it runs).
At the request of the manufacturer, the Test Agency may approve
monitors that do not run continuously. In that case the manufacturer
shall clearly inform the test agency and describe the conditions under
which the monitor runs and justify the proposal by appropriate design
elements (such as good engineering practice).
The monitors shall run during the applicable OBD test-cycle as
specified in clause 7.2.2. of this chapter.
A monitor shall be regarded as running continuously, if it runs at a rate
not less than twice per second and concludes the presence or the
absence of the failure relevant to that monitor within 15 seconds. If a
computer input or output component is sampled less frequently than
one sample per second for engine control purpose, a monitor shall also
be regarded as running continuously, if the system concludes the
presence or the absence of the failure relevant to that monitor each time
sampling occurs.
For components or systems monitored continuously, it is not required
to activate an output component/system for the sole purpose of
monitoring that output component/system.
4.3 Requirements for Recording OBD Information

When a malfunction has been detected but is not yet confirmed, the
possible malfunction shall be considered as a "Potential DTC" and
accordingly a "Pending DTC" status shall be recorded. A "Potential
DTC" shall not lead to an activation of the alert system according to
clause 4.6. of this chapter.
271/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Within the first operating sequence, a malfunction may be directly

considered "confirmed and active" without having been considered a
"potential DTC". It shall be given the "Pending DTC" and a
"confirmed and active DTC" status.
In case a malfunction with the previously active status occurs again,
that malfunction may at the choice of manufacturer be directly given
the "Pending DTC "and "confirmed and active DTC" status without
having been given the "potential DTC" status. If that malfunction is
given the potential status, it shall also keep the previously active status
during the time it is not yet confirmed or active.
The monitoring system shall conclude whether a malfunction is
present before the end of the next operating sequence following its
first detection. At this time, a "confirmed and active" DTC shall be
stored and the alert system be activated according to clause 4.6. of this
chapter.
In case of a recoverable MECS (i.e. the operation automatically
returns to normal and the MECS is de-activated at the next engine
ON), a "confirmed and active" DTC need not be stored unless the
MECS is again activated before the end of the next operating
sequence. In case of a non-recoverable MECS, a "confirmed and
active" DTC shall be stored as soon as the MECS is activated.
In some specific cases where monitors need more than two operating
sequences to accurately detect and confirm a malfunction (e.g.
monitors using statistical models or with respect to fluid consumption
on the vehicle), the test agency may permit the use of more than two
operating sequences for monitoring provided the manufacturer
justifies the need for the longer period (e.g. by technical rationale,
experimental results, in house experience, etc.).
When a confirmed and active malfunction is no longer detected by the
system during a complete operating sequence, it shall be given the
previously active status by the start of the next operating sequence and
keep that status until the OBD information associated with this
malfunction is erased by a scan tool or erased from the computer
memory according to clause 4.4. of this chapter.
Note: The requirements prescribed in this clause are illustrated in
Appendix 2 of this chapter.
4.4 Requirements for erasing OBD information
DTC and the applicable information (inclusive the associated freeze
frame) shall not be erased by the OBD system itself from the computer
memory until that DTC has been in the previously active status for at
least 40 warm-up cycles or 200 engine operating hours, whichever
occurs first. The OBD system shall erase all the DTCs and the
applicable information (inclusive the associated freeze frame) upon
request of a scan tool or a maintenance.
272/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
4.5 Requirements for malfunction classification

Malfunction classification specifies the class to which a malfunction
is assigned when such a malfunction is detected, according to the
requirements of clause 4.2. of this chapter.
A malfunction shall be assigned to one class for the actual life of the
vehicle unless the test agency that granted the certificate or the
manufacturer determines that reclassification of that malfunction is
necessary.
If a malfunction would result in a different classification for different

regulated pollutant emissions or for its impact on other monitoring
capability, the malfunction shall be assigned to the class that takes
precedence in the discriminatory display strategy (for example Class
A takes precedence over Class B1).
If an MECS is activated as a result of the detection of a malfunction,

this malfunction shall be classified based on either the emission impact
of the activated MECS or its impact on other monitoring capability.
The malfunction shall then be assigned to the class that takes
precedence in the discriminatory display strategy.
4.5.1 Class A Malfunction

A malfunction shall be identified as Class A when the relevant OBD
threshold limits (OTLs) are assumed to be exceeded.
It is accepted that the emissions may still remain below the OTLs
when this class of malfunction occurs.
4.5.2 Class B1 Malfunction
A malfunction shall be identified as Class B1 where circumstances
exist that have the potential to lead to emissions being above the OTLs
but for which the exact influence on emission cannot be estimated and
thus the actual emissions according to circumstances may be above or
below the OTLs.
Examples of Class B1 malfunctions may include malfunctions
detected by monitors that infer emission levels based on readings of
sensors or restricted monitoring capability.
Class B1 malfunctions shall include malfunctions that restrict the
ability of the OBD system to carry out monitoring of Class A or B1
malfunctions.
4.5.3 Class B2 Malfunction
A malfunction shall be identified as Class B2 when circumstances
exist that are assumed to influence emissions but not to a level that
exceeds the OTL.
Malfunctions that restrict the ability of the OBD system to carry out
monitoring of Class B2 malfunctions shall be classified into Class B1
or B2.
273/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
4.5.4 Class C Malfunction

A malfunction shall be identified as Class C when circumstances exist
that, if monitored, are assumed to influence emissions but to a level
that would not exceed the regulated emission limits.
Malfunctions that restrict the ability of the OBD system to carry out
monitoring of Class C malfunctions shall be classified into Class B1
or B2.
4.6 Alert System
The failure of a component of the alert system shall not cause the OBD
system to stop functioning.
4.6.1 MI Specification
The malfunction indicator shall be perceptible by the driver from the
driver's seat position under all lighting conditions. The malfunction
indicator shall comprise a yellow or amber warning signal identified
by the 0640 symbol in accordance with ISO Standard 7000:2004.
274/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
4.6.2 MI Illumination Schemes

Depending on the malfunction(s) detected by the OBD system, the
MI shall be illuminated according to one of the activation modes
described in the following table:
Activati Activati
on on Activation Activation
mode mode mode 3 mode 4
1 2
Class A
Class B
Conditio No malfunc
malfunction
ns of malfu Class C tion or
and B1
activati nctio malfunction B1
counters
on n counter
< 200 h
> 200 h
Discrimina Discriminat
Key on No Discriminato
tory ory
engine displ ry display
display display
on ay strategy
strategy strategy
Harmon Harmonize
Key on Harmoniz Harmonized
ized d
engin ed display display
display display
e off strategy strategy
strategy strategy
The display strategy requires the MI to be activated according to the

class in which a malfunction has been classified. This strategy shall
be locked by software coding that shall not be routinely available
via the scan tool.
The MI activation strategy at key on, engine off is described in
clause 4.6.4.
Figures B1 and B2 illustrate the prescribed activation strategies at
key on, engine on or off..
275/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Figure B1
Bulb test and Readiness Indication
276/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Figure B2
Malfunction display strategy: only the discriminatory strategy is
applicable
4.6.3 MI Activation at "engine on"

When the key is placed in the on position and the engine is started
(engine on), the MI shall be commanded off unless the provisions
of clause 4.6.3.1. of this chapter have been met.
4.6.3.1 MI Display Strategy
For the purpose of activating the MI, continuous-MI shall take
precedence to short-MI and on-demand-MI. For the purpose of
activating the MI, short-MI shall take precedence to on-demand-MI.
4.6.3.1.1 Class A malfunctions
The OBD system shall command a continuous-MI upon storage of
a confirmed DTC associated with a Class A malfunction.
277/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
4.6.3.1.2 Class B malfunctions

The OBD system shall command a "short-MI" at the next key-on
event following storage of a confirmed and active DTC associated
with a Class B malfunction.
Whenever B1 counter reaches to 200h, the OBD system shall
command a continuous-MI.
4.6.3.1.3 Class C malfunctions
The manufacturer may make available information on Class C
malfunctions through the use of an on-demand-MI that shall be
available until the engine is started.
4.6.3.1.4 MI de-activation Scheme
The "continuous-MI" shall switch to a "short-MI" if a single
monitoring event occurs and the malfunction that originally
activated the continuous-MI is not detected during the current
operating sequence and a continuous-MI is not activated due to
another malfunction.
The "short-MI" shall be deactivated if the malfunction is not
detected during 3 subsequent sequential operating sequences
following the operating sequence when the monitor has concluded
the absence of the considered malfunction and the MI is not
activated due to another Class A or B malfunction.
Figures 1, 4A and 4B in Appendix 2 to this chapter illustrate
respectively the short and continuous MI deactivation in different
use-cases.
4.6.4 MI activation at key-on/engine-off
The MI activation at key-on/engine-off shall consist of two
sequences separated by a 5 seconds MI off:
(a) The first sequence is designed to provide an indication of the MI
functionality and the readiness of the monitored components;
(b) The second sequence is designed to provide an indication of the
presence of a malfunction.
The first sequence starts from the first time the system is at key-on
position and stops either at its normal completion or when the key
is set to key-off position, whichever occurs first.
The second sequence is repeated until either the engine is started,
the vehicle starts moving, or the key is set to the key-off position,
whichever occurs first
4.6.4.1. MI functionality/readiness
The MI shall show a steady indication for 5 seconds to indicate
that the MI is functional.
The MI shall remain at the off position for 10 seconds.
The MI shall then remain at the on position for 5 seconds to
indicate that the readiness for all monitored components is
complete.
278/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
The MI shall blink once per second for 5 seconds to indicate that
the readiness for one or more of the monitored components is not
complete.
The MI shall then remain off for 5 seconds.
4.6.4.2. Presence / absence of a malfunction
Following the sequence described in clause 4.6.4.1, of this chapter
the MI shall indicate the presence of a malfunction by a series of
flashes or a continuous illumination, depending on the applicable
activation mode, as described in the following clauses, or absence
of a malfunction by a series of single flashes. When applicable,
each flash consists of a 1s MI-on followed by a 1s MI-off, and the
series of flashes will be followed by a period of four seconds with
the MI off.
Four activation modes are considered, where activation mode 4
shall take precedence over activation modes 1, 2 and 3, activation
mode 3 shall take precedence over activation modes 1 and 2, and
activation mode 2 shall take precedence over activation mode 1 .
4.6.4.2.1 Activation mode 1 - absence of malfunction

The MI shall blink for one flash.
4.6.4.2.2 Activation mode 2 - "On-demand-MI"
The MI shall show blink for two flashes if the OBD system would
command an on-demand-MI according to the discriminatory
display strategy described in clause 4.6.3.1.of this chapter.
4.6.4.2.3 Activation mode 3 - "short-MI"
The MI shall blink for three flashes if the OBD system would
command a short-MI according to the discriminatory display
strategy described in clause 4.6.3.1. of this chapter.
4.6.4.2.4 Activation mode 4 - "Continuous-MI"
The MI shall remain continuously ON ("continuous-MI") if the
OBD system would command a continuous-MI according to the
discriminatory display strategy described in clause 4.6.3.1.of this
chapter.
4.6.5. Counters associated with malfunction
4.6.5.1 MI counters
4.6.5.1.1. Continuous-MI Counter
The OBD system shall contain a continuous-MI counter to record
the number of hours during which the engine has been operated
while a continuous-MI is activated.
The continuous-MI counter shall count up to the maximum value
provided in a 2-byte counter with 1-hour resolution and hold that
value unless the conditions allowing the counter to be reset to zero
are met.
The continuous-MI counter shall operate as follows:
279/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
a) If starting from zero, the continuous-MI counter shall begin

counting as soon as a continuous-MI is activated;
b) The continuous-MI counter shall halt and hold its present value
when the continuous-MI is no longer activated;
c) The continuous-MI counter shall continue counting from the
point at which it had been held if a malfunction that results in a
continuous-MI is detected within 3 operating sequences;
d) The continuous-MI counter shall start again counting from zero
when a malfunction that results in a continuous-MI is detected
after 3 operating sequences since the counter was last held;
e) The continuous-MI counter shall be reset to zero when:
I. No malfunction that results in a continuous-MI is detected
during 40 warm up cycles or 200 engine operating hours
since the counter was last held whichever occurs first; or
II. The OBD scan tool commands the OBD System to clear
OBD information
3 op. sequences 40 op. sequences

or 200 op. hours
cumulative MI
counter
Continuous-MI
counter
Continuous-MI
< 3 op. > 3 op. > 40 op.

sequences sequences sequences
Figure C1
Illustration of the MI counters activation principles
280/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
3 op. sequences 200 op. hours
200 hrs
B1 counter
MI set continuously ON
YES
B1 malfunction
< 3 op. > 3 op. sequences < 3 op.

sequences sequences
Figure C2
Illustration of the B1 counter activation principles
4.6.5.1.2 Cumulative continuous-MI counter
The OBD system shall contain a cumulative continuous-MI counter
to record the cumulative number of hours during which the engine
has been operated over its life while a continuous-MI is activated.
The cumulative continuous-MI counter shall count up to the
maximum value provided in a 2-byte counter with 1hour resolution
and hold that value.
The cumulative continuous-MI counter shall not be reset to zero by
the engine system, a scan tool or a disconnection of a battery.
The cumulative continuous-MI counter shall operate as follows:
(a)The cumulative continuous-MI counter shall begin counting
when the continuous-MI is activated.
(b)The cumulative continuous-MI counter shall halt and hold its
present value when the continuous-MI is no longer activated.
(c)The cumulative continuous-MI counter shall continue counting
from the point it had been held when a continuous-MI is
activated.
Figure C1 illustrates the principle of the cumulative continuous-MI
counter and Appendix 2 contains examples that illustrate the logic
281/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
4.6.5.2 Counters associated with Class B1 malfunctions

4.6.5.2.1 Single B1 -Counter
The OBD system shall contain a B1 counter to record the number
of hours during which the engine has operated while a Class B1
malfunction is present.
The B1 counter shall operate as follows:
(a)The B1 counter shall begin counting as soon as a Class B1
malfunction is detected and a confirmed and active DTC has
been stored.
(b)The B1 counter shall halt and hold its present value if no Class
B1 malfunction is confirmed and active, or when all Class B1
malfunction have been erased by a scan tool.
(c)The B1 counter shall continue counting from the point it had
been held if a subsequent Class B1 malfunction is detected
within 3 operating sequences.
In the case where the B1 counter has exceeded 200 engine running
hours, the OBD system shall set the counter to 190 engine running
hours when the OBD system has determined that a Class B1
malfunction is no longer confirmed and active, or when all Class
B1 malfunctions have been erased by a scan tool. The B1 counter
shall begin counting from 190 engine running hours if a subsequent
Class B1 malfunction is present within 3 operating sequences.
The B1 counter shall be reset to zero when three consecutive
operating sequences have occurred during which no Class B1
malfunctions have been detected.
(Note: The B1 counter does not indicate the number of engine
running hours with a single Class B1 malfunction present.)
The B1 counter may accumulate the number of hours of 2 or more
different Class B1 malfunctions, none of them having reached the
time the counter indicates.
The B1 counter is only intended to determine when the continuous-
MI shall be activated.
Figure C2 illustrates the principle of the B1 counter and
Appendix 2 contains examples that illustrate the logic.
4.6.5.2.2 Multiple B1-counters

A manufacturer may use multiple B1 counters. In that case the
system shall be capable of assigning a specific B1 counter to each
class B1 malfunction.
The control of the specific B1 counter shall follow the same rules
as the single B1 counter, where each specific B1 counter shall begin
counting when the assigned Class B1 malfunction is detected.
282/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
4.7 OBD Information

4.7.1 Recorded Information
The information recorded by the OBD system shall be available
upon off- board request in the following packages manner:
(a) Information about the engine state;
(b) Information about active emission-related malfunctions;
(c) Information for repair.
4.7.1.1 Information about the engine state

This information will provide an enforcement agency2 with the
malfunction indicator status and associated data (e.g. continuous-
MI counter, readiness).
The OBD system shall provide all information (according to the
applicable standard set in Appendix 6) for the external roadside
check test equipment to assimilate the data and provide an
enforcement agent with the following information:
(a) Discriminatory/non-discriminatory display strategy;
(b) The VIN (vehicle identification number);
(c) Presence of a continuous-MI;
(d) The readiness of the OBD system;
(e) The number of engine operating hours during which a
continuous-MI was last activated (continuous-MI counter).
This information shall be read only access (i.e. no clearing).
(3)A typical use of this information package may be to establish
basic emission road worthiness of the engine system.
4.7.1.2 Information about active emission-related malfunctions

This information will provide any inspection station3 with a subset
of engine related OBD data including the malfunction indicator
status and associated data (MI counters), a list of active/confirmed
malfunctions of classes A and B and associated data (e.g. B1-
counter).
applicable standard set in Appendix 6) for the external inspection
test equipment to assimilate the data and provide an inspector with
a) Type approval marking;
b) Discriminatory/ non-discriminatory display strategy;
c) The VIN (vehicle identification number);
2
A typical use of this information package may be to establish basic emission road-
worthiness of the engine system.
283/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
d) The Malfunction Indicator status;

e) The Readiness of the OBD system;
f) Number of warm-up cycles and number of engine operating
hours since recorded OBD information was last cleared;
g) The number of engine operating hours during which a
continuous-MI was last activated (continuous-MI counter);
h) The cumulated operating hours with a continuous-MI
(cumulative continuous-MI counter);
i) The value of the B1 counter with the highest number of engine
operating hours;
j) The confirmed and active DTCs for Class A malfunctions;
k) The confirmed and active DTCs for Classes B (B1 and B2)
malfunctions;
l) The confirmed and active DTCs for Class B1 malfunctions;
m) The software calibration identification(s);
n) The calibration verification number(s).
This information shall be read only access (i.e. no clearing).
(3)A typical use of this information package may be to
establish basic emission road worthiness of the engine system.
4.7.1.3 Information for Repair

This information will provide repair technicians with all OBD data
specified in this chapter (e.g. freeze frame information).
applicable standard set in Appendix 6 of chapter 8B) for the
external repair test equipment to assimilate the data and provide a
repair technician with the following information:
a) Type Approval Marking;
b) VIN (vehicle identification number);
c) Malfunction indicator status;
d) Readiness of the OBD system;
e) Number of warm-up cycles and number of engine operating
hours since recorded OBD information was last cleared;
f) Monitor status (i.e. disabled for the rest of this drive cycle
complete this drive cycle, or not complete this drive cycle)
since last engine shut-off for each monitor used for
readiness status;
g) Number of engine operating hours since the malfunction
indicator has been activated (continuous MI counter);
h) Confirmed and active DTCs for Class A malfunctions;
284/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
i) Confirmed and active DTCs for Classes B (B1 and B2)

malfunctions;
j) Cumulated operating hours with a continuous-MI
(cumulative continuous-MI counter);
k) Value of the B1 counter with the highest number of engine
operating hours;
l) Confirmed and active DTCs for Class B1 malfunctions and
the number of engine operating hours from the B1-
counter(s);
m) Confirmed and active DTCs for Class C malfunctions;
n) Pending DTCs and their associated class;
o) Previously active DTCs and their associated class;
p) Real-time information on OEM selected and supported
sensor signals, internal and output signals (see clause 4.7.2
and Appendix 5 of this chapter);
q) Freeze frame data requested by this chapter (see clause
4.7.1.4. and Appendix 5 of this chapter);
r) Software calibration identification(s)
s) Calibration verification number(s).
The OBD system shall clear all the recorded malfunctions of the
engine system and related data (operating time information, freeze
frame, etc.) in accordance with the provisions of this chapter, when
this request is provided via the external repair test equipment
according to the applicable standard set in Appendix 6 of chapter
8B.
4.7.1.4 Freeze Frame Information

At least one "freeze frame" of information shall be stored at the time
that either a potential DTC or a confirmed and active DTC is stored
at the decision of the manufacturer. The manufacturer is allowed to
update the freeze frame information whenever the pending DTC is
detected again.
The freeze frame shall provide the operating conditions of the
vehicle at the time of malfunction detection and the DTC associated
with the stored data. The freeze frame shall include the information
as shown in Table 1 in Appendix 5 of this chapter. The freeze frame
shall also include all of the information in Tables 2 and 3 of
Appendix 5 of this chapter that are used for monitoring or control
purposes in the specific control unit that stored the DTC.
Storage of freeze frame information associated with a Class A
malfunction shall take precedence over information associated with
a Class B1 malfunction which shall take precedence over
information associated with a Class B2 malfunction and likewise
for information associated with a Class C malfunction. The first
285/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
malfunction detected shall take precedence over the most recent

malfunction unless the most recent malfunction is of a higher class.
In case a device is monitored by the OBD system and is not be
covered by Appendix 5 the freeze frame information shall include
elements of information for the sensors and actuators of this device
in a way similar to those described in Appendix 5 of chapter 8B.
This shall be submitted for approval by the test agency at the time
of approval.
4.7.1.5 Readiness
With the exceptions specified in clauses 4.7.1.5.1., 4.7.1.5.2. and
4.7.1.5.3. of this chapter, a readiness shall only be set to "complete"
when a monitor or a group of monitors addressed by this status have
run and concluded the presence (that means stored a confirmed and
active DTC) or the absence of the failure relevant to that monitor
since the last erasing by request of an external OBD scan-tool.
Readiness shall be set to "not complete" by erasing the fault code
memory (see clause 4.7.4. of this chapter) by an external request
or command (for example through an OBD scan-tool).
Normal engine shutdown shall not cause the readiness to change.
4.7.1.5.1 The manufacturer may request, subject to approval by the test

agency that the ready status for a monitor be set to indicate
"complete" without the monitor having run and concluded the
presence or the absence of the failure relevant to that monitor.
Such a request only be approved if during a multiple number of
operating sequences (minimum 9 operating sequences or 72
operation hours):
(a) Monitoring is temporarily disabled according to clause 5.2 of
this chapter due to the continued presence of extreme operating
conditions (e.g. cold ambient temperatures, high altitudes).
(b) The system that is monitored is not in operation and the DTC
associated to that system does not have the confirmed and active or
the previously active status at the time when the readiness status
becomes incomplete during a repair.
Any such request must specify the conditions for monitoring
system disablement and the number of operating sequences that
would pass without monitor completion before ready status would
be indicated as "complete".
The extreme ambient or altitude conditions considered in the
manufacturer's request shall never be less severe than the
conditions specified by this chapter for temporary disablement of
the OBD system.
4.7.1.5.2 Monitors subject to readiness
Readiness shall be supported for each of the monitors or groups of
monitors that are identified in this Chapter and that are required
when and by referring to this Chapter, with the exception of items
11 and 12 of Appendix 3 to this chapter.
286/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
4.7.1.5.3 Readiness for continuous monitors

Readiness of each of the monitors or groups of monitors that are
identified in items 1, 7 and 10 of Appendix 3 to chapter 8B, required
when and by referring to this chapter, and that are considered by this
chapter as running continuously, shall always indicate "complete".
4.7.2 Data Stream Information

The OBD system shall make available to a scan tool in real time
the information shown in Tables 1 to 4 in Appendix 5 of chapter
8B, upon request (actual signal values should be used in favour of
surrogate values).
For the purpose of the calculated load and torque parameters, the
OBD system shall report the most accurate values that are
calculated within the applicable electronic control unit (e.g. the
engine control computer).
Table 1 in Appendix 5 of chapter 8B gives the list of mandatory
OBD information relating to the engine load and speed.
Table 3 in Appendix 5 of chapter 8B shows the other OBD
information which must be included if used by the emission or
OBD system to enable or disable any OBD monitors.
Table 4 in Appendix 5 of chapter 8B shows the information which
is required to be included if the engine is so equipped, senses or
calculates the information. At the decision of the manufacturer,
other freeze frame or data stream information may be included.
In case a device is monitored by the OBD system and is not
covered by Appendix 5 (e.g. SCR), the data-stream information
shall include elements of information for the sensors and actuators
of this device in a way similar to those described in Appendix 5.
This shall be submitted for approval by the Test Agency at the
time of approval.
4.7.3. Access to OBD information

Access to OBD information shall be provided only in accordance
with the standards mentioned in Appendix 6 of this chapter and
the following sub-clauses. Access to the OBD information shall
not be dependent on any access code or other device or method
obtainable only from the manufacturer or its suppliers.
Interpretation of the OBD information shall not require any
unique decoding information, unless that information is publicly
available.
A single access method (e.g. a single access point/node) to OBD
information shall be supported to retrieve all OBD information.
This method shall permit access to the complete OBD information
required by this chapter. This method shall also permit access to
specific smaller information packages as defined in this chapter
(e.g. road worthiness information packages in case of emission
related OBD)
287/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Access to OBD information shall be provided using, at least one

of the following series of standards mentioned in Appendix 6 of
chapter 8B:
(a)ISO 27145 with ISO 15765-4 (CAN-based)
(b)ISO 27145 with ISO 13400 (TCP/IP-based)
(c)SAE J1939-73
Manufacturers shall use appropriate ISO or SAE-defined fault
codes (for example, P0xxx, P2xxx) whenever possible. If such
identification is not possible, the manufacturer may use diagnostic
trouble codes according to the relevant clauses in ISO 27145 or
SAE J1939. The fault codes must be fully accessible by
standardized diagnostic equipment complying with the provisions
of this chapter.
The manufacturer shall provide the ISO or SAE
standardization body through the appropriate ISO or SAE process
with emission-related diagnostic data not specified by ISO 27145
or SAE J1939 but related to this chapter.
Access to OBD information shall be possible by the means of a
wired connection.
OBD data shall be provided by the OBD system upon request using
scan tool that complies with the requirements of the applicable
standards mentioned in Appendix 6 (communication with external
tester).
4.7.3.1. CAN based wired communication

The communication speed on the wired data link of the OBD system
shall be either 250 kbps or 500 kbps.
It is the manufacturer's responsibility to select the baud-rate and to
design the OBD system according to the requirements specified in
the standards mentioned in Appendix 6 of chapter 8B, and referred
to in this chapter. The OBD system shall be tolerant against the
automatic detection between these two baud-rates exercised by the
external test equipment.
The connection interface between the vehicle and the external
diagnostic test equipment (e.g. scan-tool) shall be standardized and
shall meet all of the requirements of ISO 15031-3 Type A (12 VDC
power supply), Type B (24 VDC power supply) or SAE J1939-13
(12 or 24 VDC power supply).
4.7.3.2 (Reserved for TCP/IP (Ethernet) based wired communication.)

4.7.3.3 Connector Location
The connector shall be located in the driver's side foot-well region
of the vehicle interior in the area bound by the driver's side of the
vehicle and the driver's side edge of the Centre console (or the
vehicle centre line if the vehicle does not have a centre console) and
at a location no higher than the bottom of the steering wheel when
in the lowest adjustable position. The connector may not be located
288/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
on or in the centre console (i.e. neither on the horizontal faces near

the floor-mounted gear selector, parking brake lever, or cup holders
nor on the vertical faces near the stereo/radio, climate system, or
navigation system controls). The location of the connector shall be
capable of being easily identified and accessed (e.g. to connect an
off-board tool). For vehicles equipped with a driver's side door, the
connector shall be capable of being easily identified and accessed
by someone standing (or "crouched") outside the driver's side of the
vehicle with the driver's side door open.
The Test Agency may approve upon request of the manufacturer an
alternative location provided the installation position shall be easily
accessible and protected from accidental damage during normal
conditions of use, e.g. the location as described in ISO 15031 series
of standards.
If the connector is covered or located in a specific equipment box,
the cover or the compartment door must be removable by hand
without the use of any tools and be clearly labelled "OBD" to
identify the location of the connector.
The manufacturer may equip vehicles with additional diagnostic
connectors and data-links for manufacturer-specific purposes other
than the required OBD functions. If the additional connector
conforms to one of the standard diagnostic connectors allowed in
Appendix 6, only the connector required by this chapter shall be
clearly labelled "OBD" to distinguish it from other similar
connectors.
4.7.4 Erasing / resetting OBD information by a scan-tool
On request of the scan tool, the following data shall be erased or
reset to the value specified in this chapter from the computer
memory.
OBD information data ErasableResetable3
Malfunction indicator status X
Readiness of the OBD system X
Number of engine operating hours
since the malfunction indicator has
X
been activated (continuous MI
counter)
All DTCs X
The value of the B1 counter with the
highest number of engine operating X
hours
The number of engine operating hours
X
from the B1-counter(s)
The freeze frame data requested by
X
this chapter
3
to the value specified in the appropriate section of this chapter
289/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
OBD information shall not be erased by disconnection of the

vehicle's battery(s).
4.8 Electronic Security
Any vehicle with an emission control unit must include features to
deter modification, except as authorized by the manufacturer. The
manufacturer shall authorize modifications if these modifications
are necessary for the diagnosis, servicing, inspection, retrofitting or
repair of the vehicle.
Any reprogrammable computer codes or operating parameters shall
be resistant to tampering and afford a level of protection at least as
good as the provisions in ISO 15031-7 (SAE J2186) or J1939-73
provided that the security exchange is conducted using the
protocols and diagnostic connector as prescribed in this chapter.
Any removable calibration memory chips shall be potted, encased
in a sealed container or protected by electronic algorithms and shall
not be changeable without the use of specialized tools and
procedures.
Computer-coded engine operating parameters shall not be
changeable without the use of specialized tools and procedures (e.g.
soldered or potted computer components or sealed (or soldered)
computer enclosures).
Manufacturers shall take adequate steps to protect the maximum
fuel delivery setting from tampering while a vehicle is in-service.
Manufacturers may apply to the Test Agency for an exemption
from one of these requirements for those vehicles that are unlikely
to require protection. The criteria that the test agency will evaluate
in considering an exemption will include, but are not limited to, the
current availability of performance chips, the high-performance
capability of the vehicle and the projected sales volume of the
vehicle.
Manufacturers using programmable computer code systems
(e.g. electrical erasable programmable read-only memory,
EEPROM) shall deter unauthorized reprogramming.
Manufacturers shall include enhanced tamper-protection strategies
and write protect features requiring electronic access to an off-site
computer maintained by the manufacturer. Alternative methods
giving an equivalent level of tamper protection may be approved
by the test agency.
4.9 Durability of the OBD System

The OBD system shall be designed and constructed so as to enable
it to identify types of malfunctions over the complete life of the
vehicle or engine system.
Any additional provisions addressing the durability of OBD
systems are contained in this chapter.
An OBD system shall not be programmed or otherwise designed to
partially or totally deactivate based on age and/or mileage of the
290/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
vehicle during the actual life of the vehicle, nor shall the system
contain any algorithm or strategy designed to reduce the
effectiveness of the OBD system over time.
5.0 Performance Requirements

5.1 Thresholds
The OTLs for the applicable monitoring criteria defined in
Appendix 3 are defined in the chapter-8A of this part.
5.2 Temporary disablement of the OBD system
Test Agencies may approve that an OBD system be temporarily
disabled under the conditions specified in the following sub-
clauses.
At the time of approval or type-approval, the manufacturer shall
provide the test agency with the detailed description of each of the
OBD system's temporary disablement strategies and the data and/or
engineering evaluation demonstrating that monitoring during the
applicable conditions would be unreliable or impractical.
In all cases, monitoring shall resume once the conditions justifying
temporary disablement are no longer present.
5.2.1 Engine vehicle operational safety
Manufacturers may request approval to disable the affected OBD
monitoring systems when operational safety strategies are
activated.
The OBD monitoring system is not required to evaluate
components during malfunction if such evaluation would result in
a risk to the safe use of the vehicle.
5.2.2 Ambient temperature and altitude conditions

Manufacturers may request approval to disable OBD system
monitors:
(a) at ambient engine start temperatures below 273 K (0 degrees
Celsius) in the case where the coolant temperature has not
reached a minimum temperature of at least 333 K (60 degrees
Celsius), or
(b) at ambient temperatures below 273K (0 degrees Celsius) in
the case of frozen reagent,) or
(c) at ambient temperatures above 315 K (42 degrees Celsius
(d) at elevations above 2,500 meters above sea level.
(e) Below 400m under sea level; or
(f) With the exception of electrical circuit failures, at ambient
temperatures below 266K (-7°C).
A manufacturer may further request approval that an OBD system
monitor be temporarily disabled at other ambient temperatures and
291/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
altitude conditions upon determining that the manufacturer has

demonstrated with data and/or an engineering evaluation that
misdiagnosis would occur at the ambient temperatures because of
its effect on the component itself (e.g. component freezing, effect
on the compatibility with sensor tolerances).
Note: Ambient conditions may be estimated by indirect methods.
For example, ambient temperature conditions may be determined
based on intake air temperature.
5.2.3 Low Fuel Level

Manufacturers may request approval to disable monitoring systems
that are affected by low fuel level / pressure or running out of fuel
(e.g. diagnosis of a malfunction of the fuelling system or misfiring)
as follows:
292/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
DIESEL GAS
CNG LPG
The low fuel level considered for
such a disablement shall not
X X
exceed 100 litres or 20 per cent of
the nominal capacity of the fuel
tank, whichever is lower.
The low fuel pressure in the tank X
considered for such a
disablement shall not exceed 20
per cent of the usable range of
fuel tank pressure.
5.2.4 Vehicle battery or system voltage levels
Manufacturers may request approval to disable monitoring systems
that can be affected by vehicle battery or system voltage levels.
5.2.4.1 Low Voltage
For monitoring systems affected by low vehicle battery or system
voltages, manufacturers may request approval to disable
monitoring systems when the battery or system voltage is below 90
per cent of the nominal voltage (or 11.0 Volts for a 12 Volt battery,
22.0 Volts for a 24 Volt battery). Manufacturers may request
approval to utilize a voltage threshold higher than this value to
disable system monitoring.
The manufacturer shall demonstrate that monitoring at the voltages
would be unreliable and that either operation of a vehicle below the
disablement criteria for extended periods of time is unlikely or the
OBD system monitors the battery or system voltage and will detect
a malfunction at the voltage used to disable other monitors.
5.2.4.2 High Voltage
For emission related monitoring systems affected by high vehicle
battery or system voltages, manufacturers may request approval to
disable monitoring systems when the battery or system voltage
exceeds a manufacturer-defined voltage.
The manufacturer shall demonstrate that monitoring above the
manufacturer-defined voltage would be unreliable and that either
the electrical charging system/alternator warning light is
illuminated (or voltage gauge is in the "red zone") or the OBD
system monitors the battery or system voltage and will detect a
malfunction at the voltage used to disable other monitors.
5.2.5 Active PTO (power take off units)
The manufacturer may request approval to temporarily disable
affected monitoring systems in vehicles equipped with a PTO unit,
under the condition where that PTO unit is temporarily active.
5.2.6 Forced Regeneration
293/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
The manufacturer may request approval to disable the affected OBD

monitoring systems during the forced regeneration of an emission
control system downstream of the engine (e.g. a particulate filter).
5.2.7 AECS
The manufacturer may request approval to disable OBD system
monitors during the operation of an AECS, including MECS, under
conditions not already covered in clause 5.2 of this chapter. if the
monitoring capability of a monitor is affected by the operation of an
AECS.
5.2.8 Re-fueling
After a refuelling, the manufacturer of a gaseous-fuelled vehicle
may temporarily disable the OBD system when the system has to
adapt to the recognition by the ECU of a change in the fuel quality
and composition.
The OBD system shall be re-enabled as soon as the new fuel is
recognized and the engine parameters are readjusted. This
disablement shall be limited to a maximum of 10 minutes.
6.0 Demonstration Requirements

The basic elements for demonstrating the compliance of an OBD
system with the requirements of this chapter are as follows:
a) Procedure for selecting the OBD-parent engine system. The
OBD-parent engine system is selected by the manufacturer
in agreement with the Test Agency
b) Procedure for demonstrating the classification of a
malfunction. The manufacturer submits to the Test Agency
the classification of each malfunction for that OBD-parent
engine system and the necessary supporting data in order to
justify each classification.
c) Procedure for qualifying a deteriorated component. The
manufacturer shall provide, on request of the Test Agency,
deteriorated components for OBD testing purposes. These
components are qualified on the basis of supporting data
provided by the manufacturer.
d) Procedure for selecting the reference fuel in case of a gas
engine.
6.1 Emission-OBD family
The manufacturer is responsible for determining the composition of
an emission-OBD family. Grouping engine systems within an
emission-OBD family shall be based on good engineering judgment
and be subject to approval by the test agency. Engines that do not
belong to the same engine family may still belong to the same
emission-OBD family
294/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
6.1.1 Parameters defining an emission-OBD family

An emission-OBD family is characterized by basic design
parameters that shall be common to engine systems within the
family.
In order that engine systems are considered to belong to the same
OBD-engine family, the following list of basic parameters shall be
similar:
(a)Emission control systems
(b)Methods of OBD monitoring
(c)Criteria for performance and component monitoring
(d)Monitoring parameters (e.g. frequency)
These similarities shall be demonstrated by the manufacturer by
means of relevant engineering demonstration or other appropriate
procedures and subject to the approval of the test agency.
The manufacturer may request approval by the test agency of minor
differences in the methods of monitoring/diagnosing the engine
emission control system due to engine system configuration
variation, when these methods are considered similar by the
manufacturer and:
(a)They differ only to match specificities of the considered
components (e.g. size, exhaust flow, etc.); or
(b)Their similarities are based on good engineering judgement.
6.1.2 OBD-Parent Engine System
Compliance of an emission-OBD family with the requirements of
this chapter is achieved by demonstrating the compliance of the
OBD-parent engine system of this family.
The selection of the OBD-parent engine system is made by the
manufacturer and subject to the approval of the test agency.
Prior to testing the test agency may decide to request the
manufacturer to select an additional engine for demonstration.
The manufacturer may also propose to the test agency to test
additional engines to cover the complete emission-OBD family.
6.2 Procedures for demonstrating the malfunction classification
The manufacturer shall provide the documentation justifying the
proper classification of each malfunction to the test agency. This
documentation shall include a failure analysis (for example
elements of a "failure mode and effect analysis") and may also
include:
a) Simulation results;
b) Test results;
c) Reference to previously approved classification.
295/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
In the following paragraphs the requirements for demonstrating the

correct classification are listed, including requirements for testing.
The minimum number of tests is four and the maximum number of
tests is four times the number of engine families considered within
the emission OBD family. The test agency may decide to curtail
the test at any time before this maximum number of failure tests has
been reached.
In specific cases where the classification testing is not possible (for
example, if an MECS is activated and the engine cannot run the
applicable test, etc.), the malfunction may be classified based on
technical justification. This exception shall be documented by the
manufacturer and is subject to the agreement of the Test Agency.
6.2.1 Demonstration of classification into Class A

The classification by the manufacturer of a malfunction into Class
A shall not be subject to a demonstration test.
If the test agency disagrees with a manufacturer's classification of a
malfunction as Class A, the test agency requires the classification
of the malfunction into Class B1, B2 or C, as appropriate.
In that case the approval document shall record that the malfunction
classification has been assigned according to the request of the test
agency.
6.2.2 Demonstration of classification into Class B1 (distinguishing
between A and B1)
In order to justify the classification of a malfunction into Class B1
the documentation shall clearly demonstrate that, in some
circumstances4, the malfunction results in emissions that are lower
than the OTLs.
In the case that the test agency requires an emission test for
demonstrating the classification of a malfunction into Class B1 the
manufacturer shall demonstrate that the emissions due to that
particular malfunction are, in selected circumstances, below the
OTLs:
a) The manufacturer selects the circumstances of the test in
agreement with the test agency;
b) The manufacturer shall not be required to demonstrate that in
other circumstances the emissions due to the malfunction are
actually above the OTLs.
If the manufacturer fails to demonstrate the classification as Class
B1, the malfunction is classified as Class A.
(6) examples of circumstances that may influence if and when OTL
are exceeded are the of the engine system or whether the test is
conducted with a new or aged component.
10
Examples of circumstances that may influence if and when OTLs are exceeded are the
age of the engine system or whether the test is conducted with a new or aged
component.
296/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)

between B2 and B1)
malfunction as Class B1 because it considers that the OTLs are not
exceeded, the test agency requires the reclassification of that
malfunction into Class B2 or C. In that case the approval documents
shall record that the malfunction classification has been assigned
according to the request of the test agency.
between B2 and B1)
In order to justify the classification of a malfunction into Class B2
the manufacturer shall demonstrate that emissions are lower than
the OTLs.
In case the test agency disagrees with the classification of a
malfunction as Class B2 because it considers that the OTLs are
exceeded, the manufacturer may be required to demonstrate by
testing that the emissions due to the malfunction are below the
OTLs. If the test fails, then the test agency shall require the
reclassification of that malfunction into A or B1 and the
manufacturer shall subsequently demonstrate the appropriate
classification and the documentation shall be updated.
between B2 and C)
malfunction as Class B2 because it considers the regulated emission
limits are not exceeded, the test agency requires the reclassification
of that malfunction into Class C. In that case the approval
documents shall record that the malfunction classification has been
assigned according to the request of the test agency.
6.2.6 Demonstration of classification into Class C
In order to justify the classification of a malfunction into Class C
the manufacturer shall demonstrate that emissions are lower than
the regulated emission limits.
In case the test agency disagrees with the classification of a
malfunction as Class C the manufacturer may be required to
demonstrate by testing that the emissions due to the malfunction are
below the regulated emission limits.
If the test fails, then the test agency shall request the reclassification
of that malfunction and the manufacturer shall subsequently
demonstrate the appropriate reclassification and the documentation
shall be updated.
6.3 Procedures for demonstrating the OBD performance
The manufacturer shall submit to the test agency a complete
documentation package justifying the compliance of the OBD
system as regards its monitoring capability, which may include:
297/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
(a) Algorithms and decision charts

(b) Tests and/or simulation results
(c) Reference to previously approved monitoring systems, etc.
In the following paragraphs the requirements for demonstrating the
OBD performance are listed, including requirements for testing.
The number of tests shall be four times the number of engine
families considered within the emission OBD family, but shall not
be less than 8.
The monitors selected shall reflect the different types of monitors
mentioned in clause 4.2. of this chapter (I.e. emission threshold
monitoring, performance monitoring, total functional failure
monitoring, or component monitoring) in a well-balanced manner.
The monitors selected shall also reflect the different items listed in
Appendix 3 of this chapter in a well-balanced manner.
6.3.1 Procedures for demonstrating the OBD performance by

Testing
In addition to the supporting data referred to in clause 6.3. of this
chapter, the manufacturer shall demonstrate the proper monitoring
of specific emission control systems or components by testing them
on an engine test-bed according to the test procedures specified in
clause 7.2. Of this chapter.
In that case, the manufacturer shall make available the qualified
deteriorated components or the electrical device which would be
used to simulate a malfunction.
The proper detection of the malfunction by the OBD system and its
proper response to that detection (cf. MI indication, DTC storage,
etc.) shall be demonstrated according to clause 7.2. of this chapter.
6.3.2 Procedures for qualifying a deteriorated component (or
system)
This clause applies to the cases where the malfunction selected for
an OBD demonstration test is monitored against tailpipe emissions5
(emission threshold monitoring - see clause 4.2. of this chapter) and
it is required that the manufacturer demonstrates, by an emission
test, the qualification of that deteriorated component.
In very specific cases the qualification of deteriorated components
or systems by testing may not be possible (for example, if an MECS
is activated and the engine cannot run the applicable test, etc.). In
such cases, the deteriorated component shall be qualified without
testing. This exception shall be documented by the manufacturer
and is subject to the agreement of the test agency.
6.3.2.1 Procedure for qualifying a deteriorated component used to

demonstrate the detection of classes A and B1 malfunctions.
11
This paragraph will be extended to other monitors than emission threshold monitors at a later
stage.
298/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
6.3.2.1.1 Emission Threshold Monitoring

In the case the malfunction selected by the test agency results in
tailpipe emissions that may exceed an OBD threshold limit, the
manufacturer shall demonstrate by an emission test according to
clause 7. of this chapter that the deteriorated component or device
does not result in the relevant emission exceeding its OTL by more
than 20 per cent.
6.3.2.1.2 Performance Monitoring

At the request of the manufacturer and with the agreement of the test
agency, in the case of performance monitoring, the OTL may be
exceeded by more than 20 per cent. Such request shall be justified on
a case by case basis.
In the case when the performance monitoring of an abnormality of the
gaseous fuel consumption of a dual fuel engine or vehicle is required
by chapter 14 a deteriorated component is qualified without reference
to the OTL.
6.3.2.1.3 Component Monitoring
In the case of component monitoring, a deteriorated component is
qualified without reference to the OTL.
6.3.2.2 Qualification of deteriorated components used to demonstrate the

detection of Class B2 malfunctions
In the case of Class B2 malfunctions, and upon request of the test
agency, the manufacturer shall demonstrate by an emission test
according to clause 7. Of this chapter that the deteriorated component
or device does not lead the relevant emission to exceed its applicable
OTL.
6.3.2.3 Qualification of deteriorated components used to demonstrate the

detection of class C malfunctions.
In the case of Class C malfunctions, and upon request of the test agency, the
manufacturer shall demonstrate by an emission test according to clause 7.
Of this chapter that the deteriorated component or device does not lead the
relevant emission to exceed its applicable regulated emission limit.
6.3.3 Test Report

The test report shall contain, at a minimum, the information set out in
Appendix 4.
6.4 Approval of an OBD system containing deficiencies
6.4.1 Test agencies may approve upon request of a manufacturer an OBD
system even though the system contains one or more deficiencies.
In considering the request, the test agency shall determine whether
compliance with the requirements of this chapter is feasible or
unreasonable.
The test agency shall take into consideration data from the
manufacturer that details such factors as, but not limited to, technical
299/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
feasibility, lead time and production cycles including phase-in or

phase-out of engines designs and programmed upgrades of computers,
the extent to which the resultant OBD system will be effective in
complying with the requirements of this chapter and that the
manufacturer has demonstrated an acceptable level of effort toward
meeting the requirements of the chapter.
The test agency will not accept any deficiency request that includes
the complete lack of a required diagnostic monitor (i.e. a complete lack
of the monitors required in Appendix 3).
6.4.2 Deficiency Period

A deficiency is granted for a period of one year after the date of
approval of the engine system.
If the manufacturer can adequately demonstrate to the test agency that
substantial engine modifications and additional lead time would be
necessary to correct the deficiency, then this deficiency can be granted
again for an additional one year, provided that the total deficiency
period does not exceed 3 years (i.e. 3 times one-year deficiency
allowance is permitted).
The manufacturer cannot apply for a renewal of the deficiency period.
6.5 Procedure for selecting the reference fuel in case of a gas engine
Demonstration of the OBD performance and malfunction
classification shall be performed by using one of the reference fuels
mentioned in Chapter 5 on which the engine is designed to operate.
The selection of this reference fuel is done by the test agency, who
shall provide sufficient time for the test laboratory to supply the
selected reference fuel.
7.0 TEST PROCEDURES

7.1 Testing process
The demonstration by testing of the proper malfunction classification
and the demonstration by testing of the proper monitoring performance
of an OBD system are issues that shall be considered separately during
the testing process. For example, a Class A malfunction will not
require a classification test while it may be subject to an OBD
performance test.
Where appropriate, the same test may be used to demonstrate the
correct classification of a malfunction, the qualification of a
deteriorated component provided by the manufacturer and the correct
monitoring by the OBD system.
The engine system on which the OBD system is tested shall comply
with the emission requirements of this standard.
300/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
7.1.1 Testing process for demonstrating the malfunction classification

When, according to clause 6.2. of this chapter, the test agency requests
the manufacturer to justify by testing the classification of a specific
malfunction, the compliance demonstration will consist of a series of
emission tests.
According to clause 6.2.2. of this chapter, when testing is required by

the test agency to justify the classification of a malfunction into Class
B1 rather than in Class A, the manufacturer shall demonstrate that the
emissions due to that particular malfunction are, in selected
circumstances, below the OTLs:
a) The manufacturer selects these circumstances of test in
agreement with the test agency
b) The manufacturer shall not be required to demonstrate that in
other circumstances the emissions due to the malfunction are
actually above the OTLs.
The emission test may be repeated upon request of the manufacturer
up to three times.
If any of these tests leads to emissions below the considered OTL, then
the malfunction classification into Class B1 shall be approved.
When testing is required by the test agency to justify the classification
of a malfunction into Class B2 rather than in Class B1 or into Class C
rather than in Class B2, the emission test shall not be repeated. If the
emissions measured in the test are above the OTL or the emission
limit, respectively, then the malfunction shall require a
reclassification.
Note: According to clause 6.2.1. of this chapter, this clause does not
apply to malfunctions classified into Class A.
7.1.2 Testing process for demonstrating the OBD performance

When the test agency requests to test the OBD system performance
according to clause 6.3. of this chapter, the compliance demonstration
shall consist of the following phases:
a) A malfunction is selected by the test agency and a corresponding
deteriorated component or system shall be made available by the
manufacturer;
b) When appropriate and if requested, the manufacturer shall
demonstrate by an emission test that the deteriorated component
is qualified for a monitoring demonstration;
c) The manufacturer shall demonstrate that the OBD system
responds in a manner that complies with the provisions of this
chapter (i.e. MI indication, DTC storage, etc.) At the latest by the
end of a series of OBD test-cycles.
301/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
7.1.2.1 Qualification of the Deteriorated Component

When the test agency requests the manufacturer to qualify a
deteriorated component by testing according to clause 6.3.2. of this
chapter, this demonstration shall be made by performing an emissions
test.
If it is determined that the installation of a deteriorated component or
device on an engine system means that a comparison with the OBD
threshold limits is not possible (e.g. because the statistical conditions
for validating the applicable emission test cycle are not met), the
malfunction of that component or device may be considered as
qualified upon the agreement of the test agency based on technical
rationale provided by the manufacturer.
In the case that the installation of a deteriorated component or device
on an engine means that the full load curve (as determined with a
correctly operating engine) cannot be attained during the test, the
deteriorated component or device may be considered as qualified
upon the agreement of the test agency based on technical rationale
provided by the manufacturer.
7.1.2.2 Malfunction Deactivation

Each monitor selected by the test agency to be tested on an engine
test-bed, shall respond to the introduction of a qualified deteriorated
component in a manner that meets the requirements of this chapter
within two consecutive OBD test-cycles according to clause 7.2.2. of
this chapter.
When it has been specified in the monitoring description and agreed
by the test agency that a specific monitor needs more than two
operating sequences to complete its monitoring, the number of OBD
test-cycles may be increased according to the manufacturer's request.
Each individual OBD test-cycle in the demonstration test shall be
separated by an engine shut-off. The time until the next start-up shall
take into consideration any monitoring that may occur after engine
shut-off and any necessary condition that must exist for monitoring to
occur at the next start up.
The test is considered complete as soon as the OBD system has
responded in a manner that meets the requirements of this chapter.
7.2 Applicable Tests
In the context of this chapter:
a) The emission test-cycle is the test-cycle used for the
measurement of the regulated emissions when qualifying a
deteriorated component or system,
b) The OBD test-cycle is the test-cycle used to demonstrate the
capacity of the OBD monitors to detect malfunctions.
7.2.1 Emission Test Cycle
The test-cycle considered in this chapter for measuring emissions is
the WHTC test-cycle as described in Chapter 3 of this part.
302/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
7.2.2 OBD Test Cycle

The OBD test-cycle considered in this chapter is the hot part of the
WHTC cycle as described in chapter 3 of this part.
On request of the manufacturer and after approval of the test agency,
an alternative OBD test-cycle can be used (e.g. the cold part of the
WHTC cycle) for a specific monitor. The request shall contain
documentation (technical considerations, simulation, test results, etc.)
showing that:
a) The requested test-cycle appropriate to demonstrate monitoring
occurs under real world driving conditions, and,
b) The hot part of the WHTC cycle appears as less appropriate for
the considered monitoring (e.g. fluid consumption monitoring).
7.2.3 Test Operating Conditions
The conditions (i.e. temperature, altitude, fuel quality etc.) for
conducting the tests referred to in clauses 7.2.1. and 7.2.2. of this
chapter shall be those required for operating the WHTC test cycle as
described in Chapter 3 of this part.
In the case of an emission test aimed at justifying the classification of
a specific malfunction into Class B1, the test operating conditions
may, per decision of the manufacturer, deviate from the ones in the
clauses above according to clause 6.2.2.
7.3 Demonstration Process for Performance Monitoring
The manufacturer may use the demonstration requirements as set out
in Appendix 7 in case of performance monitoring.
Test agencies may approve a manufacturer's use of a type of
performance monitoring technique other than the one referred to in
Appendix 7. The chosen type of monitoring shall be demonstrated by
the manufacturer by a robust technical case based upon the design
characteristics, or by presentation of test results, or by reference to
previous approvals, or by some other acceptable method, to be at least
as robust, timely and efficient as the ones mentioned in Appendix 7.
7.4 Test Reports

The test report shall contain, at a minimum, the information set out in
Appendix 4 of this chapter.
8 Documentation Requirements
8.1 Documentation for purpose of approval
The manufacturer shall provide a documentation package that includes
a full description of the OBD system. The documentation package
shall be made available in two parts:
a) A first part, which may be brief, provided that it exhibits evidence
concerning the relationships between monitors, sensors/actuators,
and operating conditions (i.e. describes all enable conditions for
monitors to run and disable conditions that cause monitors not to run).
The documentation shall describe the functional operation of the
OBD, including the malfunction ranking within the hierarchical
303/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
classification. This material shall be retained by the test agency. This

information may be made available to interested parties upon request.
b) A second part containing any data, including details of qualified
deteriorated components or systems and associated test results, which
are used as evidence to support the decision process referred to above,
and a listing of all input and output signals that are available to the
engine system and monitored by the OBD system. This second part
shall also outline each monitoring strategy and the decision process.
This second part shall remain strictly confidential. It may be kept by
the test agency, or, at the discretion of the test agency, may be retained
by the manufacturer but shall be made open for inspection by the test
agency at the time of approval or at any time during the validity of the
approval.
8.1.1 Documentation associated with each monitored component or system

The documentation package included in the second part shall contain
but shall not be limited to the following information for each
monitored component or system:
a) The malfunctions and associated DTC(s);
b) The monitoring method used for malfunction detection;
c) The parameters used and the conditions necessary for
malfunction detection and when applicable the fault criteria
limit (performance and component monitoring);
d) The criteria for storing a DTC;
e) The monitoring "time length" (i.e. the operation time/procedure
necessary to complete the monitoring) and the monitoring
"frequency" (e.g. continuous, once per trip, etc.).
8.1.2 Documentation associated with the malfunction classification
but shall not be limited to the following information for malfunction
classification.
The malfunction classification of each DTC shall be documented.
This classification may be different for different engine types (e.g.
different engine ratings) within the same emission-OBD family.
This information shall include the technical justification required in
clause 4.2. of this chapter for classification into Class A, Class B1 or
Class B2.
8.1.3 Documentation associated with the emission-OBD family
but shall not be limited to the following information for emission
OBD-family:
A description of the emission-OBD family shall be provided. This
description shall include a list and a description of the engine types
within the family, the description of the OBD-parent engine system,
and all elements that characterize the family according to clause 6.1.1.
of this chapter.
304/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
In the case where the emission-OBD family includes engines

belonging to different engine families, a summary description of these
engine families shall be provided.
In addition, the manufacturer shall provide a list of all electronic input,
output and identification of the communication protocol utilized by
each emission-OBD family.
8.2 Documentation for installing in a vehicle an OBD equipped
engine system
The engine manufacturer shall include in the installation documents of
its engine system the appropriate requirements that will ensure the
vehicle, when used on the road or elsewhere as appropriate, will
comply with the requirements of this chapter. This documentation
shall include but is not limited to:
a) The detailed technical requirements, including the provisions
ensuring the compatibility with the OBD system of the engine
system;
b) The verification procedure to be completed.
The existence and the adequacy of such installation requirements may
be checked during the approval process of the engine system.
Note: In the case a vehicle manufacturer applies for a direct approval
of the installation of the OBD system on the vehicle, this
documentation is not required.
305/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
CHAPTER 8B - APPENDIX 1
APPROVAL OF INSTALLATION OF OBD SYSTEMS
This appendix considers the case where the vehicle manufacturer

requests approval of the installation on a vehicle of (an) OBD
system(s) within an emission OBD family, that is (are) certified to
the requirements of this chapter.
In this case, and in addition to the general requirements of this

chapter, a demonstration of the correct installation is required. This
demonstration shall be done on the basis of the appropriate element
of design, results of verification tests, etc. and address the conformity
of the following elements to the requirements of this chapter:
a) The installation on-board the vehicle as regards its

compatibility with the OBD system of the engine-system
(a) The MI (pictogram, activation schemes, etc.);
(b) The wired communication interface.
Correct MI illumination, information storage and on-board off-board

OBD communication will be checked. But any check shall not force
dismounting the engine system (e.g. an electric disconnection may
be selected).
306/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
MALFUNCTIONS ILLUSTRATION OF THE DTC STATUS-
ILLUSTRATION OF THE MI AND COUNTERS ACTIVATION
SCHEMES
This appendix aims at illustrating the requirements set in clauses 4.3.
and 4.6.5. of this chapter.
It contains the following figures:
Figure 1: DTC status in case of a class B1 malfunction
Figure 2: DTC status in case of 2 consecutive different class B1
Figure 3: DTC status in case of re-occurrence of a class B1
malfunction
Figure 4A: Class A malfunction -activation of the MI and MI counters
Figure 4B: Illustration of the continuous MI deactivation principle
Figure 5: Class B1 malfunction - activation of the B1 counter in 5 use
cases.
Figure 1
DTC status in case of a class B1 malfunction
Notes:
 Means the point a monitoring of the concerned malfunction occurs
N, M The chapter requires the identification of "key" operating sequences
during which some events occurs, and the counting of the subsequent
operating sequences. For the purpose of illustrating this requirement,
the "key" operating sequences have been given the values N and M.
307/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
E.g. M means the first operating sequence following the detection of a

potential malfunction, and N means the operating sequence during
which the MI is switched OFF.
Figure 2
DTC status in case of 2 consecutive different class B1 malfunctions
Notes:
 Means the point a monitoring of the concerned malfunction occurs
N, M,
N', M' The chapter requires the identification of "key" operating
sequences during which some events occurs, and the counting of
the subsequent operating sequences. For the purpose of illustrating
this requirement, the "key" operating sequences have been given
the values N and M for the first malfunction, respectively N' and
M' for the second one.
E.g. M means the first operating sequence following the detection
of a potential malfunction, and N means the operating sequence
during which the MI is switched OFF.
N + 40 the fortieth operating sequence after the first extinction of the MI
or 200 engine operating hours, whichever the earliest.
308/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Figure 3
DTC status in case of the re-occurrence of a class B1 malfunction
Notes:
 means the point a monitoring of the concerned malfunction
occurs
N, M,
N', M' The chapter requires the identification of "key" operating
sequences during which some events occurs, and the counting
of the subsequent operating sequences. For the purpose of
illustrating this requirement, the "key" operating sequences
have been given the values N and M for the first occurrence of
a malfunction, respectively N' and M' for the second one.
E.g. M means the first operating sequence following the
detection of a potential malfunction, and N means the operating
sequence during which the MI is switched OFF.
309/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Figure 4A
Class A malfunction - activation of the MI and MI counters
Note: Details related to the deactivation of the continuous MI are
illustrated in Figure 4B below in the specific case where a
potential state is present.
Deactivation of the Continuous MI for Three Use Cases

case 1 case 2 case 3
 
YES
failure
   
NO
Confirmed &
Active
DTC
Previously
Active
Continuous
MI
short
1 operating 2 operating 1 operating

sequence sequences sequence
Figure 4B
Illustration of the continuous MI deactivation principle
Notes:
 means the point where monitoring of the concerned malfunction
occurs.
M means the operating sequence when the monitor concludes for the
first time that a confirmed and active failure is no longer present.
310/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
case 1 means the case where the monitor does not conclude the presence
of failure during the operating sequence M.
case 2 means the case where the monitor has previously concluded, during
the operating sequence M, the presence of the malfunction.
case 3 means the case where the monitor concludes during the operating
sequence M the presence of the malfunction after having first
concluded to its absence.
Figure 5
Class B1 malfunction - activation of the B1 counter in 5 use Cases
Note: In this example it is assumed that there is a single B1 counter
311/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
MONITORING REQUIRMENTS
The items of this appendix list the systems or components required to be
monitored by the OBD system, according to clause 4.2 of this chapter.
Unless specified otherwise, the requirements apply to all engine types..
Appendix 3 - Item 1
Electric / Electronic Components Monitoring
Electric/electronic components used to control or monitor the emission
control systems described in this appendix shall be subject to Component
Monitoring according to the provisions of clause 4.2. of this chapter.
This includes, but is not limited to, pressure sensors, temperature
sensors, exhaust gas sensors and oxygen sensors when present, knock
sensors, in-exhaust fuel or reagent injector(s), in-exhaust burners or
heating elements, glow plugs, intake air heaters.
Wherever a feedback control loop exists, the OBD system shall monitor
the system's ability to maintain feedback control as designed (possible
errors are for example. not entering feedback control within a
manufacturer specified time interval, system fails to maintain feedback
control, feedback control has used up all the adjustment capability
allowed by the manufacturer and the system cannot achieve the target) -
component monitoring.
In particular, in the case where the control of reagent injection is
performed by means of a closed loop system, the monitoring
requirements set out in this item shall apply, but the failures detected
shall not be classified as class C failures.
Note: These provisions apply to all electric-electronic components, even
if they belong to any of the monitors described in the other items of this
appendix.
Appendix 3 - Item 2
DPF system
The OBD system shall monitor the following elements of the DPF
system on engines so-equipped for proper operation:
(a)DPF substrate: the presence of the DPF substrate - total functional
failure monitoring
(b)DPF performance: clogging of the DPF - total functional failure
(c1)DPF filtering performance: the filtering and continuous regeneration
process of the DPF. This requirement would apply to PM emissions only
- emission threshold monitoring.
Note: C1 is applicable to OBD stage II and C2 is applicable to
OBD stage I
(c2)DPF performance: filtering and regeneration processes (e.g.
particulate accumulation during the filtering process and particulate
312/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
removal during a forced regeneration process) - performance monitoring

according to Appendix 8 to this chapter.
The periodic regeneration shall be monitored against the ability of the
device to perform as designed (for example to perform regeneration
within a manufacturer-specified time interval, to perform regeneration
upon demand, etc.). This will constitute one element of the component
monitoring associated with the device.
Appendix 3 - Item 3
Selective catalytic reduction (SCR) monitoring
For the purpose of this Item, SCR means selective catalytic reduction or
other lean NOx catalyst device. The OBD system shall monitor the
following elements of the SCR system on engines so-equipped for proper
operation:
(a)Active/intrusive reagent injection system: the system's ability to
regulate reagent delivery properly, whether delivered via an in-exhaust
injection or an in-cylinder injection - performance monitoring.
(b)Active/intrusive reagent: the on-board availability of the reagent,
the proper consumption of the reagent if a reagent other than fuel is used
(e.g. urea) - performance monitoring.
(c)Active/intrusive reagent: to the extent feasible the quality of the
reagent if a reagent other than fuel is used (e.g. urea) - performance
monitoring.
(d)SCR catalyst conversion efficiency: the catalyst's SCR ability to
convert NOx emission threshold monitoring.
Appendix 3 - Item 4
Lean-NOx trap /LNT, or NOx adsorber)
The OBD system shall monitor the following elements of the LNT
(a)LNT capability: the LNT system's ability to adsorb/store and
convert NOx - performance monitoring.
(b)LNT active/intrusive reagent injection system: the system's ability
to regulate reagent delivery properly, whether delivered via an in-
exhaust injection or an in-cylinder injection - performance monitoring.
Appendix 3 - Item 5
Oxidation catalysts (incl. diesel oxidation catalyst – DOC)
monitoring
This item applies to oxidation catalysts that are separate from other after
treatment systems. Those that are included in the canning of an after
treatment system are covered within the appropriate item of this
appendix.
The OBD system shall monitor the following elements of the oxidation
catalysts on engines so-equipped for proper operation:
313/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
(a)HC conversion efficiency: the oxidation catalysts ability to convert

HC upstream of other after treatment devices - total functional failure
monitoring.
(b)HC conversion efficiency: the oxidation catalysts ability to convert
HC downstream of other after treatment devices - total functional failure
monitoring.
Appendix 3 - Item 6
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system monitoring
The OBD system shall monitor the following elements of the EGR
Diesel Gas
(a1) EGR low/high flow: the EGR
system's ability to maintain the
X
commanded EGR flow rate,
detecting both "flow rate too
low" and "flow rate too high"
conditions – emission
threshold monitoring.
(a2) EGR low/high flow: the EGR

X
detecting both "flow rate too
low" and "flow rate too high"
conditions - performance
monitoring.
(monitoring requirement to be
further discussed)
(a3) EGR low flow: the EGR
X X
detecting "flow rate too low"
conditions – total functional
failure or performance
monitoring as specified in this
item.
(b) Slow response of the EGR
actuator: the EGR system's
X X
ability to achieve the
commanded flow rate within a
manufacturer specified time
interval following the
command - performance
monitoring.
(c1) EGR cooler under cooling
performance: the EGR cooler
X X
system's ability to achieve the
314/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
manufacturer's specified
cooling performance -
performance monitoring.
(c2) EGR cooler under cooling
performance: the EGR cooler
X X
system's ability to achieve the
manufacturer's specified
cooling performance - total
functional failure monitoring
as specified in this item.
(a3) EGR low flow (total functional failure or performance
monitoring)
In the case where the emissions would not exceed the OBD threshold
limits even upon total failure of the EGR system's ability to maintain
the commanded EGR flow rate (for example, because of the correct
functioning of an SCR system downstream of the engine), then:
1. Where the control of the EGR flow rate is performed by means
of a closed-loop system, the OBD system shall detect a
malfunction when the EGR system cannot increase the EGR
flow to achieve the demanded flow rate.
Such a malfunction shall not be classified as a class C failure.
1 Where the control of the EGR flow rate is performed by means
of an open-loop system, the OBD system shall detect a
malfunction when the system has no detectable amount of EGR
flow when EGR flow is expected.
(c2) EGR cooler under cooling performance (total functional
failure monitoring)
In the case where total failure of the EGR cooler system's ability to
achieve the manufacturer's specified cooling performance would not
result in the monitoring system detecting a failure (because the resulting
increase in emissions would not reach the OBD threshold limit for any
pollutant), the OBD system shall detect a malfunction when the system
has no detectable amount of EGR cooling.
Appendix 3 - Item 7
Fuel System monitoring
The OBD system shall monitor the following elements of the fuel
DIESEL GAS
(a) Fuel system pressure control: fuel

system ability to achieve the X
commanded fuel pressure in closed loop
control - performance monitoring.
315/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
(b) Fuel system pressure control: fuel

system ability to achieve the
commanded fuel pressure in closed loop
control in the case where the system is X
so constructed that the pressure can be
controlled independently of other
parameters - performance monitoring.
(c) Fuel injection timing: fuel system

ability to achieve the commanded fuel
timing for at least one of the injection X
events when the engine is equipped with
the appropriate sensors - performance
monitoring.
(d) Fuel injection quantity: fuel system

ability to achieve the commanded fuel
quantity by detecting errors from
desired fuel quantity in at least one of X
the injection events when the engine is
equipped with the appropriate sensors
(e.g. pre-main or post-injection) –
emission threshold monitoring
(e) Fuel injection system: ability to

maintain the desired air-fuel ratio (incl. X
but not limited to self-adaptation
features) – performance monitoring.
Appendix 3 - Item 8
Air Handling and Turbocharger/Boost Pressure Control System
The OBD system shall monitor the following elements of the Air
Handling and Turbocharger/Boost Pressure Control System on engines
so-equipped for proper operation.
DIESEL GAS
(a1) Turbo under/over boost: turbo boost

commanded boost pressure, detecting X
both "boost pressure too low" and
"boost pressure too high" conditions –
emission threshold monitoring.
(a2) Turbo under/over boost: turbo boost

commanded boost pressure, detecting X
both "boost pressure too low" and
"boost pressure too high" conditions –
performance monitoring
316/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
(a3) Turbo under boost: turbo boost system's

ability to maintain the commanded
boost pressure, detecting "boost X X
pressure too low" conditions – total
functional failure or performance
monitoring as specified in this item.
(b) Variable geometry turbo (VGT) slow

response: VGT system's ability to
achieve the commanded geometry X X
within a manufacturer specified time-
(c) Charge air cooling: Charge air cooling

system efficiency - total functional X X
failure.
(a3) Turbo under boost (total functional failure monitoring)
1 In the case where the emissions would not exceed the OBD
threshold limits even upon total failure of the boost system's ability
to maintain the demanded boost pressure and the control of the
boost pressure is performed by means of a closed-loop system, the
OBD system shall detect a malfunction when the boost system
cannot increase the boost pressure to achieve the demanded boost
pressure.
2 In the case where the emissions would not exceed the OBD
threshold limits even upon total failure of the boost system's ability
to maintain the demanded boost pressure and the control of the
boost pressure is performed by means of an open-loop system, the
OBD system shall detect a malfunction when the system has no
detectable amount of boost pressure when boost pressure is
expected.
Appendix 3 - Item 9
Variable Valve Timing (VVT) System
The OBD system shall monitor the following elements of the Variable
Valve Timing (VVT) System on engines so-equipped for proper
operation:
a) VVT target error: VVT system’s ability to achieve the commanded
valve timing - performance monitoring.
b) VVT slow response: VVT system’s ability to achieve the
commanded valve timing within a manufacturer specified time
interval following the command-performance monitoring.
317/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Appendix 3 - Item 10
Misfire Monitoring
DIESEL GAS
No prescriptions X
Misfire that may cause catalyst damage (e.g.
by monitoring a certain percentage of
X
misfiring in a certain period of time)-
Crankcase Ventilation System Monitoring
No prescriptions
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM MONITORING
The OBD system shall monitor the following elements of the
Engine cooling system for proper operation
(a)Engine coolant temperature (thermostat): Stuck open thermostat.
Manufacturers need not monitor the thermostat if its failure will not disable
any other OBD monitors - total functional failure.
Manufacturers need not monitor the engine coolant temperature or the
engine coolant temperature sensor if the engine coolant temperature or the
engine coolant temperature sensor is not used to enable closed-
loop/feedback control of any emissions control systems and/or will not
disable any other monitor.
Manufacturers may suspend or delay the monitor for the time to reach close
loop to enable temperature if the engine is subjected to conditions that could
lead to false diagnosis (e.g. vehicle operation at idle for more than 50 to
75 per cent of the warm-up time).
Exhaust Gas and Oxygen Sensors Monitoring
The OBD system shall monitor:
DIESEL GAS
(a) The electrical elements of the exhaust gas
sensors on engines so-equipped for proper
X X
operation according to item 1 to this appendix
– component monitoring.
(b) Both the Primary and Secondary (fuel
control) oxygen sensors. These sensors are
considered as exhaust gas sensors to be
X
monitored for proper operation according to
item 1 to this appendix – component
monitoring.
318/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Idle Speed Control System Monitoring
The OBD system shall monitor the electrical elements of the idle speed
control systems on engines so-equipped for proper operation according to
item 1 to this appendix.
THREE WAY CATALYST
The OBD system shall monitor the three-way catalyst on
engines so-equipped for proper operation:
(a) Three-way Catalyst Conversion DIESEL GAS
efficiency: the catalyst ability to convert X
NOx and CO – performance monitoring
319/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
TECHNICAL COMPLIANCE REPORT
This report is issued by the test agency, according to clauses 6.3.3.
and 7.3., after examination of an OBD system or an emission OBD
family when that system or family complies with the requirements of
this appendix.
The exact reference (including its version number) of this appendix
shall be included in this report.
The exact reference (including its version number) to this standard.
shall be included.
This report contains a cover page indicating the final compliance of
the OBD system or emission OBD family and the following 5 items:
Item 1 Information concerning the OBD system
Item 2 Information concerning the conformity of the OBD system
Item 3 Information concerning deficiencies
Item 4 Information concerning demonstration tests of the OBD
system
Item 5 Test protocol
The content of the technical report, including its Items, shall, at a
minimum, include the elements given in the following examples.
This report shall state that reproduction or publication in extracts of
this report is not permitted without the written consent of the
undersigned test agency.
Final Compliance Report
The documentation package and the herewith described OBD system
/ emission OBD family comply with the requirements of the following
standard:
Item 1 to the Technical Compliance Report (example)
Information concerning the OBD system
320/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
1 TYPE REQUESTED APPROVAL

Information concerning the OBD YES/NO
system.
Approval of an emission OBD YES/NO
family
Approval of an OBD system as member of a YES/NO
certified emission OBD family
Extension to include a new engine system YES/NO
into an emission OBD family
Extension to address a design change that YES/NO
affects the OBD system
Extension to address a malfunction YES/NO
reclassification
2 Information Concerning the OBD system.

Approval of an individual OBD system
- type(s)6 of the engine system family (where ....
applicable, see clause 6.1. of this chapter), or ....
type(s)11 of the single engine system(s)
- OBD description (issued by the manufacturer):
reference and date
Approval of an emission OBD family
- List of the engine families concerned by the ....
emission OBD family (when applicable, see
clause 6.1.) ....
- Type11 of the parent engine system within the ....
emission OBD family
....
- List of the engine types11 within the emission
OBD family
- OBD description (issued by the manufacturer):
reference and date
Approval of an OBD system as member of a certified
emission OBD family ....
- List of the engine families concerned by the
emission OBD family (when applicable, see
clause 6.1.) ....
- Type11 of the parent engine system within the ....
emission OBD family ....
- List of the engine types11 within the emission ....
OBD family
- Name of the engine system family concerned by ....
the new OBD system (when applicable)
- Type11 of the engine system concerned by the
new OBD system
- Extended OBD description (issued by the
6
As reported in the approval document
321/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
manufacturer): reference and date

Extension to include a new engine system into an
emission OBD family
- List (extended if necessary) of the engine ....
families concerned by the emission OBD family
(when applicable, see clause 6.1.) ....
- List (extended if necessary) of the engine
types11 within the emission OBD family ....
- Actualized (new or unchanged) type11 of the
parent engine system within the emission OBD ....
family
- Extended OBD description (issued by the
Extension to address a design change that affects
the OBD system ....
- List of the engine families (when applicable) ....
concerned by the design change
- List of the engine types11 concerned by the ....
design change
- Actualized (when applicable, new or ....
unchanged) type11 of the parent engine system
within the emission OBD family
Modified OBD description (issued by the
Extension to address a malfunction
reclassification
- List of the engine families (when applicable) ....
concerned by the reclassification ....
- List of the engine types11 concerned by the ....
reclassification
Modified OBD description (issued by the
Item 2 to the technical compliance report (example)
Information concerning the conformity of the OBD system
1.Documentation Package
The elements provided by the manufacturer in the

documentation package of the emission OBD
family, is complete and complies with the
requirements of clause 8. of this chapter, on the
following issues:
YES / NO
- Documentation associated with each
monitored component or system
- Documentation associated with each DTC YES/NO
- Documentation associated with the
322/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
malfunction classification YES /NO

- Documentation associated with the
emission OBD family YES / NO
- The documentation required in clause 8.2.

of this chapter for installing an OBD YES / NO
system in a vehicle has been provided by
the manufacturer in the documentation
package, is complete, and complies with
the requirements of this chapter:
- The installation of the engine system YES / NO
equipped with the OBD system complies
with Appendix 1 of this chapter
323/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
2 CONTENT OF THE DOCUMENTATION

Monitoring
The monitors comply with the requirements of clause YES / NO
4.2. of this chapter:
Classification
The malfunction classification complies with the YES / NO
requirements of clause 4.5. of this chapter
MI activation scheme
According to clause 4.6.3. of this chapter, the MI- Discriminatory
activation scheme is: /
The activation and the extinguishing of the Non-
malfunction indicator comply with the requirements discriminatory
of clause 4.6. of this chapter: YES / NO
DTCs recording & erasing
The recording and erasing of DTCs comply with the YES / NO
requirements of clauses 4.3. and 4.4. of this chapter:
Disablement of the OBD system
The strategies described in the documentation YES / NO
package for a momentary disconnection or
disablement of the OBD system comply with the
requirements of clause 5.2. of this chapter
Electronic system security
The measures described by the manufacturer for YES / NO
electronic system security comply with the
requirements of clause 4.8. of this chapter:
Information Concerning Deficiencies
Number of deficiencies of OBD (ex: 4 deficiencies)
system
The deficiencies comply with the YES / NO
requirements of clause 6.4. of chapter
Deficiency No. 1
- Object of the deficiency e.g. measuring of the Urea
concentration (SCR) within
defined tolerances
- Period of the deficiency e.g. one year / six months after
the date of approval
(Description of deficiencies 2 to n-1)
324/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Deficiency No. n
- Object of the deficiency e.g. measuring of NH3

concentration behind SCR
system
- Period of the deficiency e.g. one year / six months after
the date of approval
Demonstration tests of the OBD system
1. Test result of the OBD system
Results of the tests
The OBD system described in the above complying
documentation package has been tested with success
according to clause 6 of this chapter for demonstrating the YES/NO
compliance of monitors and of malfunction classifications
as listed in item 5:
Details to the conducted demonstration tests are given in item5.
1.1 OBD System Tested on the Engine Test Bed
Engine
- Engine name (manufacturer and commercial ………
names): ………
- Engine type (as reported in the approval ………
document):
- Engine number (serial number):
Control units concerned by this chapter (incl. engine
ECUs)
- Main functionality: ……..
- Identification number (software and calibration): ……..
Diagnostic tool (scan tool used during testing)
- Manufacturer: ……..
- Type: ……..
……..
- Software / version
Test information
- Ambient testing conditions (temperature, humidity, ……..
pressure):
- Place of test (incl. altitude): ……..
……..
- Reference fuel: ……..
- Engine lubricating oil: ……..
……..
- Date of test:
325/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
2 Demonstration tests of the installation of the OBD system
In addition to the demonstration of the OBD system / emission

OBD family, the installation of the OBD system / of the OBD YES/NO
systems within the emission OBD family has been tested on a
vehicle, according to the provisions of Appendix 1 of the
referenced chapter
2.1 Test result of the installation of the OBD system
Results of the test
If the installation of the OBD system has been tested on YES/NO
a vehicle, the installation of the OBD system has been
tested with success according to Appendix 1 to the
referenced chapter
2.2 Tested installation
If the installation of the OBD system has been tested on
a vehicle:
Tested vehicle
- Vehicle name (manufacturer and commercial ……..
names): ……..
- Vehicle type: ……..
- Vehicle Identification Number (VIN):
Diagnostic tool (scan tool used for testing)
- Manufacturer: ……..
- Type: ……..
- Software / version: ……..
Test information
……..
- Place and date:
326/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Item 5 to the technical compliance report (example)

Test protocol
327/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
FREEZE FRAME AND DATA STREAM INFORMATION
The following tables list the pieces of information that are
considered in clauses 4.7.1.4. and 4.7.2. of this chapter.
TABLE 1
Mandatory Requirements
Freeze Data
frame stream
Calculated load (engine torque as a percentage of x x
maximum torque available at the current engine
speed)
Engine speed x x
Engine coolant temperature (or equivalent) x x
Barometric pressure (directly measured or x x
estimated)
Reference maximum engine torque X
Net brake engine torque (as percentage of X
reference max. engine torque), or actual engine
torque/indicated torque (as percentage of
reference max. engine torque, e.g. calculated
from commanded injection fuel quantity)
Friction torque (as percentage of reference max. X
engine torque)
Engine fuel flow X
TABLE 2
Optional Engine Speed and Load Information.
Freeze Data
frame stream
Driver’s demand engine torque (as a percentage
x x
of maximum engine torque)
Actual engine torque (calculated as a percentage
of maximum engine torque, e.g. calculated from x x
commanded injection fuel quantity)
Reference maximum engine torque as a function
x
of engine speed
Time elapsed since engine start x x
328/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
TABLE 3
Optional information, if used by the emission or the OBD system
to enable or disable any OBD information
Freeze Data
frame stream
Fuel level (e.g. percentage of the nominal
capacity of the fuel tank) or tank fuel pressure
x x
(e.g. percentage of the usable range of fuel tank
pressure), as appropriate
Engine oil temperature x x
Vehicle speed x x
Status of the fuel quality adaptation (active / not
x
active) in case of gas engines
Engine control computer system voltage (for the
x x
main control chip)
TABLE 4
Optional information, if the engine is so equipped, senses or
calculates the information
Freez Data
e stream
frame
Absolute throttle position / intake air throttle
position (position of valve used to regulate intake x x
air)
Diesel fuel control system status in case of a close
loop system (e.g. in case of a fuel pressure close x x
loop system)
Fuel rail pressure x x
Injection control pressure (i.e. pressure of the fluid
x x
controlling fuel injection)
Representative fuel injection timing (beginning of
x x
first main injection)
Commanded fuel rail pressure, x x
Commanded injection control pressure (i.e. pressure
x x
of the fluid controlling fuel injection)
Intake air temperature x x
Ambient air temperature x x
Turbocharger inlet / outlet air temperature
x x
(compressor and turbine)
329/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Turbocharger inlet / outlet pressure (compressor

x x
and turbine)
Charge air temperature (post intercooler if fitted) x x
Actual boost pressure x x
Air flow rate from mass air flow sensor x x
Commanded EGR valve duty cycle/position,
x x
(provided EGR is so controlled)
Actual EGR valve duty cycle/position x x
PTO status (active or not active) x x
Accelerator pedal position x x
Redundant absolute pedal position if
x
sensed
Instantaneous fuel consumption x x
Commanded/target boost pressure (if boost pressure
x x
used to control turbo operation)
DPF inlet pressure x x
DPF outlet pressure x x
DPF delta pressure x x
Engine-out exhaust pressure x x
DPF inlet temperature x x
DPF outlet temperature x x
Engine-out exhaust gas temperature x x
Turbocharger/turbine speed x x
Variable geometry turbo position x x
Commanded variable geometry turbo position x x
Wastegate valve position x x
Air/fuel ratio sensor output x
Oxygen sensor output x
Secondary Oxygen sensor output (when fitted) x
NOx sensor output x
330/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
ANNEX 8B - APPENDIX 6
REFERENCE STANDARD DOCUMENTS
This appendix contains the references to the industry standards that are
to be used in accordance to the provisions in this chapter to provide the
serial communications interface to the vehicle/engine. There are two
allowed solutions identified:
(a)ISO 27145 with either ISO 15765-4 (CAN based) with either ISO
15765-4 (CAN based) or with ISO 13400 (TCP/IP based),
(b)SAE J1939-73.
In addition, there are other ISO or SAE standards that are applicable in
accordance with the provisions of this chapter.
Reference by this chapter to ISO 27145 means reference to:
(a)ISO 27145-1 -Road vehicles — Implementation of WWH-OBD
communication requirements — Part 1 — General Information and use
case definitions
(b)ISO 27145-2-Road vehicles — Implementation of WWH-OBD
communication requirements — Part 2 — Common emissions-related
data dictionary;
(c)ISO 27145-3-Road vehicles — Implementation of WWH-OBD
communication requirements — Part 3 — Common message
dictionary;
(d)ISO 27145-4-Road vehicles — Implementation of WWH-OBD
communication requirements — Part 4 — Connection between vehicle
and test equipment.
Reference by this chapter to J1939-73 means reference to:
J1939-73 "APPLICATION LAYER - DIAGNOSTICS", dated o year
2011.
Reference by this chapter to ISO 13400 means reference to:
ISO 13400: [information on date, "exact title", several parts etc. shall
be added]
Reference by this annex to ISO 13400 means reference to:
(a)FDIS 13400-1: 2011 Road vehicles — Diagnostic communication
over Internet
Protocol (DoIP) —Part 1: General information and use case definition;
(b)FDIS 13400-3: 2011 Road vehicles — Diagnostic communication
over Internet
Protocol (DoIP) — Part 2: Network and transport layer requirements
and services;
(c)FDIS 13400-3: 2011 Road vehicles — Diagnostic communication
over Internet
Protocol (DoIP) — Part 3: IEEE 802.3 based wired vehicle interface;
(d) [not yet finalized] 13400-4: 2011 Road vehicles — Diagnostic
communication over
Internet Protocol (DoIP) — Part 4: Ethernet-based high-speed data link
connector.
331/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
PERFORMANCE MONITERING
GENERAL
1.1. This Appendix sets out provisions relating to the demonstration process
applicable in some cases of performance monitoring.
2. DEMONSTRATION OF PERFORMANCE MONITORING
2.1. Approval of the failure classification
2.1.1. As specified in clause 4.2.1.1 of this Chapter, in the case of
performance monitoring no correlation to actual emissions is necessary.
However, the test agency may request test data in order to verify the
classification of the malfunction effects as described in clause 6.2. of
this Chapter.
2.2. Approval of the performance monitoring selected by the
manufacturer
2.2.1. In arriving at an approval decision on the choice of the performance
monitoring selected by the manufacturer, the test agency shall consider
technical information provided by the manufacturer.
2.2.2. The performance threshold selected by the manufacturer for the
monitor under consideration shall be determined on the parent engine
of the OBD engine family during a qualification test performed as
follows:
2.2.2.1. The qualification test is performed in the same way as specified in
clause 6.3.2. of this Chapter.
2.2.2.2. The decrease of performance of the component under consideration is
measured and subsequently serves as the performance threshold for the
parent engine of the OBD engine family.
2.2.3. The performance monitoring criteria approved for the parent engine
will be considered to be applicable to all other members of the OBD
engine family without further demonstration.
2.2.4 Upon agreement between the manufacturer and the test agency,
adaption of the performance threshold to different members of the OBD
family in order to cover different design parameters (for example EGR
cooler size) shall be possible. Such agreement shall be based on
technical elements showing its pertinence.
2.2.4.1 At the request of the test agency, a second member of the OBD engine
family may be subjected to the approval process described in clause
2.3. Qualification of a deteriorated component
2.3.1. For the purpose of demonstrating the OBD performance of the selected
monitor of an OBD engine family, a deteriorated component shall be
qualified on the parent engine of the OBD engine family in accordance
with clause 6.3.2. of this Chapter.
332/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
2.3.2 In case of a second engine tested in accordance with clause 2.2.4.1, the
deteriorated component shall be qualified on that second engine in
accordance with clause 6.3.2 of this chapter.
2.4. Demonstration of the OBD performance
2.4.1. The demonstration of the OBD performance shall be conducted
according to the requirements of clause 7.1.2. of this Chapter using the
qualified deteriorated component that is qualified for use with the
parent engine.
333/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
DEMONSTRATION REQUIREMENTS IN CASE OF
PERFORMANCE MONITORING OF
A WALL-FLOW DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER
1. GENERAL
1.1. This Appendix specifies the OBD demonstration process applicable in
the case where the filtering process of a wall-flow diesel particulate
filter (DPF) is subject to performance monitoring.
1.1.1. A deteriorated wall-flow DPF can be created, for example, by drilling
holes into the DPF substrate or by grinding the end caps of the DPF
substrate.
2. QUALIFICATION TEST
2.1. Principle
2.1.1. A deteriorated wall-flow DPF is considered as a "Qualified
Deteriorated Component" if, under the operating conditions of the
engine specified for the purpose of that test, the pressure drop ("delta
pressure") across that deteriorated wall-flow DPF exceeds or is no less
than 60% of the pressure drop measured across a clean and non-
deteriorated wall-flow DPF of the same type.
2.1.1.1. The manufacturer shall demonstrate that this clean and non-deteriorated
wall-flow DPF leads to the same back-pressure as the deteriorated one
before its deterioration.
2.1.2. Upon request of the manufacturer, the test agency may accept per
derogation a pressure drop threshold of 50% instead of 60%. In order
to apply for that derogation, the manufacturer shall justify his request
by sound technical arguments, such as the spread in new filter quality,
etc.
2.2. Qualification Process
2.2.1. For qualifying a deteriorated wall-flow DPF, the engine equipped with
that wall-flow DPF shall be operated under stabilized steady-state
conditions, set at the speed and load values specified for mode 9 in the
WHSC test cycle specified in Chapter 3 to this standard. (55%
normalized speed and 50% normalized torque).
2.2.2. To qualify a deteriorated wall-flow DPF as a "Qualified Deteriorated
Component", the manufacturer shall demonstrate that the pressure drop
across that deteriorated wall-flow DPF, measured when the engine
system is operated under the conditions specified in clause 2.2.1. of this
Appendix, is no less than the percentage of the pressure drop across a
clean and non-deteriorated DPF under the same conditions which is
applicable in accordance with clauses 2.1.1 and 2.1.2 of this Appendix.
2.3. Demonstration of the OBD performance
2.3.1. The demonstration of the OBD performance shall be conducted in
accordance with the requirements of clause 7.1.2 of this Chapter with
the qualified deteriorated wall-flow DPF mounted on the parent engine
system
334/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
CHAPTER 8C
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ASSESSING THE IN-
USE PERFORMANCE OF ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEMS (OBD)
1. Applicability
In its current version, this chapter is only applicable to road-vehicles
equipped with a Diesel engine
2. Reserved
3 Definitions
3.1 "In-Use performance ratio"
The in-use performance ratio (IUPR) of a specific monitor m of the
OBD system is:
IUPRm = Numeratorm / Denominatorm
3.2. "Numerator"
The numerator of a specific monitor m (Numeratorm) is a counter
indicating the number of times a vehicle has been operated such that
all monitoring conditions necessary for that specific monitor to detect
a malfunction have been encountered.
3.3 "Denominator"
The denominator of a specific monitor m (Denominatorm) is a counter
indicating the number of vehicle driving events, taking into account
conditions specific to that specific monitor.
3.4 "General Denominator"
The general denominator is a counter indicating the number of times
a vehicle has been operated, taking into account general conditions.
3.5 Abbreviations
IUPR In-Use Performance Ratio
IUPRm In-Use Performance Ratio of a specific monitor m
4.0 General Requirements
The OBD system shall have the capability of tracking and recording in-
use performance data (clause 6.of this chapter) of the OBD monitors
specified in this paragraph, of storing these data in computer memory
and communicating them off-board upon request ( clause 7. of this
chapter).
The in-use performance data of a monitor consists of the numerator and
denominator enabling the calculation of the IUPR.
335/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
4.1 IUPR Monitors

4.1.1 Group of Monitors
Manufacturers shall implement software algorithms in the OBD system
to individually track and report in-use performance data of the groups
of monitors mentioned in Appendix 1 of this chapter.
Manufacturers are not required to implement software algorithms in the
OBD system to individually track and report in-use performance data
of monitors running continuously as defined in clause 4.2.3. of Chapter
8B if these monitors are already part of one of the groups of monitors
mentioned in Appendix 1 of this chapter.
In-use performance data of monitors associated to different exhaust
lines or engine banks within a group of monitors shall be tracked and
recorded separately as specified in clause 6 and reported as specified in
clause 7. Of this chapter.
4.1.2 Multiple monitors
For each group of monitors which are required to be reported by
clause 4.1.1. of this chapter, the OBD system shall separately track in-
use performance data, as specified in clause 6. of this chapter, for each
of the specific monitors belonging to that group.
4.2 Limitation of the use of in-use performance data
In-use performance data of a single vehicle are used for the statistical
evaluation of the in-use performance of the OBD system of a larger
group of vehicles.
Contrary to other OBD data, in-use performance data cannot be used to
draw conclusions concerning the road-worthiness of an individual
vehicle.
5 Requirements for calculating in-use performance ratios
5.1 Calculation of the in-use performance ratio
For each monitor m considered in the present chapter, the in-use
performance ratio is calculated with the following formula:
IUPRm = Numeratorm / Denominatorm
where the Numeratorm and Denominatorm are incremented according
to the specifications of this clause
5.1.1 Requirements for The Ratio when Calculated and Stored by System
Each IUPRm ratio shall have a minimum value of zero and a
maximum value of 7.99527 with a resolution of 0.000122(1).
A ratio for a specific component shall be considered to be zero
whenever the corresponding numerator is equal to zero and the
corresponding denominator is not zero.
336/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A ratio for a specific component shall be considered to be the

maximum value of 7.99527 if the corresponding denominator is zero
or if the actual value of the numerator divided by the denominator
exceeds the maximum value of 7.99527
Note This value corresponds to a maximum hexadecimal value of 0xFFFF with a

resolution of 0x1.
5.2 Requirements for Incrementing the Numerator
The numerator shall not be incremented more than once per driving
cycle.
The numerator for a specific monitor shall be incremented within 10
seconds if and only if the following criteria are satisfied on a single
driving cycle:
(a)Every monitoring condition necessary for the monitor of the
specific component to detect a malfunction and store a potential DTC
has been satisfied, including enable criteria, presence or absence of
related DTCs, sufficient length of monitoring time, and diagnostic
executive priority assignments (e.g., diagnostic "A" shall execute
prior to diagnostic "B").
Note: For the purpose of incrementing the numerator of a specific
monitor, it may not be sufficient to satisfy all the monitoring
conditions necessary for that monitor to determine the absence of a
malfunction.
(b)For monitors that require multiple stages or events in a single
driving cycle to detect a malfunction, every monitoring condition
necessary for all events to have been completed shall be satisfied.
(c)For monitors which are used for failure identification and that run
only after a potential DTC has been stored, the numerator and
denominator may be the same as those of the monitor detecting the
original malfunction.
(d)For monitors that require an intrusive operation to further
investigate the presence of a malfunction, the manufacturer may
submit to the test agency an alternative way to increment the
numerator. This alternative should be equivalent to that which would,
had a malfunction been present, have permitted to increment the
numerator.
For monitors that run or complete during engine-off operation, the
numerator shall be incremented within 10 seconds after the monitor
has completed during engine-off operation or during the first 10
seconds of engine start on the subsequent driving cycle.
5.3 Requirements for Incrementing the Denominator
5.3.1 General incrementing rules
The denominator shall be incremented once per driving cycle, if during
this driving cycle
337/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
a) The general denominator is incremented as specified in clause 5.4.

of this chapter, and
b) The denominator is not disabled according to clause
5.6. of this chapter, and
c) When applicable, the specific additional incrementing rules
specified in clause 5.3.2. of this chapter are met.
5.3.2 Additional Monitor Specific Incrementing Rules
5.3.2.1 Specific denominator for evaporative system (Reserved)
5.3.2.2 Specific denominator for secondary air systems (Reserved)
5.3.2.3 Specific denominator for components / systems that operate at engine
start-up only
In addition to the requirements of clause 5.3.1. (a) and (b), the
denominator(s) for monitors of components or systems that are not
continuously commanded to function (e.g. Variable Valve Timing
systems - VVT- or EGR valves), shall be incremented if that
component or system is commanded to function (e.g., commanded
"on", "open", "closed", "locked") on two or more occasions during the
driving cycle, or for a cumulative time greater than or equal to 10
seconds, whichever occurs first.
5.3.2.4 Specific denominator for components or systems that are not
continuously commanded to function
In addition to the requirements of clause 5.3.1. (a) and (b), the
denominator(s) for monitors of components or systems that are not
continuously commanded to function (e.g. Variable Valve Timing
systems - VVT- or EGR valves), shall be incremented if that
component or system is commanded to function (e.g., commanded
"on", "open", "closed", "locked") on two or more occasions during the
driving cycle, or for a cumulative time greater than or equal to 10
seconds, whichever occurs first.
5.3.2.5 Specific denominator for DPF
In addition to the requirements of clause 5.3.1. (a) and (b), in at least
one driving cycle the denominator(s) for DPF shall be incremented if
at least 800 cumulative kilometers of vehicle operation or alternatively
at least 750 minutes of engine run time have been experienced since
the last time the denominator was incremented.
5.3.2.6 Specific Denominator for Oxidation Catalysts
In addition to the requirements of clause 5.3.1 (a) and (b), in at least
one driving cycle the denominator(s) for monitors of oxidation
catalyst used for the purpose of DPF active regeneration shall be
incremented if a regeneration event is commanded for a time greater
than or equal to 10 seconds.
5.3.2.7 Specific denominator for hybrids (reserved)
5.4 Requirements for incrementing the general denominator
338/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
The general denominator shall be incremented within 10 seconds, if

and only if, all the following criteria are satisfied on a single driving
cycle:
(a)Cumulative time since start of driving cycle is greater than or equal
to 600 seconds while remaining:
(i)At an elevation of less than 2,500 meters above sea level, and
(ii)At an ambient temperature of greater than or equal to 273 K
(0 degrees Celsius), and Temperature boundary conditions will be
reviewed based on data collection.
(iii) At an ambient temperature of lower than or equal to 315 K
(42 degrees Celsius)..
(b)Cumulative engine operation at or above 1150 min-1 for greater
than or equal to 300 seconds while under the conditions specified in
the above subparagraph (a); as alternatives left to the manufacturer an
engine operation at or above 15 per cent calculated load or a vehicle
operation at or above 40 km/h may be used in lieu of the 1150 min -1
criterion.
(c)Continuous vehicle operation at idle (e.g., accelerator pedal
released by driver and either vehicle speed less than or equal to
1.6 km/h or engine speed less than or equal to 200 min-1 above normal
warmed-up idle) for greater than or equal to 30 seconds while under
the conditions specified in the above subparagraph (a).
5.5. Requirements for incrementing the ignition cycle counter
The ignition cycle counter shall be incremented once and only once
per engine start.
5.6. Incrementing disablement of the numerators, of the denominators
and of the general denominator
5.6.1 Within 10 seconds of a malfunction being detected (i.e. a potential or
a confirmed and active DTC is stored), which disables a monitor, the
OBD system shall disable further incrementing of the corresponding
numerator and denominator for each monitor that is disabled.
When the malfunction is no longer detected (e.g. the potential DTC is
erased through self-clearing or through a scan-tool command),
incrementing of all corresponding numerators and denominators shall
resume within 10 seconds.
5.6.2 Within 10 seconds of the start of operation of a Power Take-Off unit
(PTO) that disables a monitor as permitted in clause 5.2.5. of chapter
8B, the OBD system shall disable further incrementing of the
corresponding numerator and denominator for each monitor that is
disabled.
5.6.3. In the case of a malfunction (i.e. a potential or confirmed and active
DTC has been stored) preventing determination of whether the criteria
for the Denominatorm of a monitor m mentioned in clause 5.3. of this
339/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
chapter are satisfied7, the OBD system shall disable further

incrementing the Numeratorm and Denominatorm within 10 seconds.
Incrementing the Numeratorm and Denominatorm shall resume within
10 seconds when the malfunction is no longer present (e.g., pending code
erased through self-clearing or by a scan tool command).
5.6.4. In the case of a malfunction (i.e. a potential or confirmed and active
DTC has been stored) preventing determination of whether the criteria
for the General denominator mentioned in clause 5.4. of this chapter
are satisfied, the OBD system shall disable further incrementing the
general denominator within 10 seconds.
Incrementing the general denominator shall resume within 10 seconds
when the malfunction is no longer present (e.g., pending code erased
through self-clearing or by a scan tool command).
The general denominator may not be disabled from incrementing for
any other condition.
6.0 Requirements for tracking and recording in-use performance
data
For each group of monitors listed in Appendix 1 to this chapter, the
OBD system shall separately track numerators and denominators for
each of the specific monitors listed in Appendix 3 of chapter 8B and
belonging to that group.
It shall report only the corresponding numerator and denominator for
the specific monitor that has the lowest numerical ratio.
If two or more specific monitors have identical ratios, the
corresponding numerator and denominator for the specific monitor
that has the highest denominator shall be reported for the specific
group of monitors.
In order to determine without bias the lowest ratio of a group, only the
monitors specifically mentioned in that group shall be taken into
consideration (e.g. a NOx sensor when used to perform one of the
monitors listed in Chapter 8B, Appendix 3, item 3 "SCR" will be taken
into consideration into the "exhaust gas sensor" group of monitors and
not in the "SCR" group of monitors)
The OBD system shall also track and report the general denominator
and the ignition cycle counter.
Note: according to clause 4.1.1. of this chapter, manufacturers are not
required to implement software algorithms in the OBD system to
individually track and report numerators and denominators of
monitors running continuously.
7
e.g. vehicle speed / engine speed / calculated load, ambient temperature, elevation, idle operation,
or time of operation.
340/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
7.0 Requirements for storing and communicating in-use

performance data
Communication of the in-use performance data is a new use-case and
is not included in the three existing use-cases which are dedicated to
the presence of possible malfunctions.
7.1 Information about in-use performance data
The information about in-use performance data recorded by the OBD
system shall be available upon off-board request according to clause
This information will provide test agencies with in use performance
data.
applicable standard set in Appendix 6 to chapter 8B) for the external
IUPR test equipment to assimilate the data and provide an inspector
with the following information:
(a) The VIN (vehicle identification number),
(b) The numerator and denominator for each group of monitors
recorded by the system according to 6. Of this chapter,
(c) The general denominator,
(d) The value of the ignition cycle counter,
(e) The total engine running hours,
(f) Confirmed and active DTCs for Class A malfunctions,
(g) Confirmed and active DTCs for Class B (B1 and B2)
malfunctions
7.2 Access to in-use performance data
Access to in-use performance data shall be provided only in
accordance with the standards mentioned in Appendix 6 of chapter 8B
and the following sub-clauses8.
Access to the in-use performance data shall not be dependent on any
access code or other device or method obtainable only from the
manufacturer or its suppliers. Interpretation of the in-use performance
data shall not require any unique decoding information, unless that
information is publicly available.
The access method (i.e. the access point/node) to in-use performance
data shall be the same as the one used to retrieve all OBD information.
This method shall permit access to the complete in-use performance
data required by this chapter.
8
The manufacturer is allowed to use an additional on-board diagnostic display,
such as a dashboard mounted video display device, for providing access to in-use performance
data. Such an additional device is not subject to the requirements of this chapter.
341/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
7.3 Reinitializing in-use performance data

7.3.1 Reset to Zero
Each number shall be reset to zero only when a non-volatile random
access memory (NVRAM) reset occurs (e.g., reprogramming event).
Numbers may not be reset to zero under any other circumstances
including when a scan tool command to clear fault codes is received.
7.3.2 Reset in case of memory overflow
If either the numerator or denominator for a specific monitor reaches
65,535 ± 2, both numbers shall be divided by two before either is
incremented again to avoid overflow problems.
If the ignition cycle counter reaches the maximum value of 65,535 ±
2, the ignition cycle counter may rollover and increment to zero on the
next ignition cycle to avoid overflow problems.
If the general denominator reaches the maximum value of 65,535 ± 2,
the general denominator may rollover and increment to zero on the
next driving cycle that meets the general denominator definition to
avoid overflow problems.
342/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
CHAPTER 8C - APPENDIX 1
GROUP OF MONITERS
The groups of monitors considered in this chapter are the
following.
A. Oxidation catalysts
The monitors specific to that group are those listed in item 5 of
Appendix 3 to chapter 8B.
B. Selective Catalytical Reduction Systems (SCR)
C. Exhaust gas and oxygen sensors
The monitors specific to that group are those listed in item 13
of Appendix 3 to chapter 8B.
D. EGR systems and VVT
The monitors specific to that group are those listed in items 6
and 9 and of Appendix 3 to chapter 8B.
E. DPF systems
F. Boost Pressure Control System
G. NOx Adsorber
H. Three-way Catalyst
The monitors specific to that group are those listed in item 15
of Appendix 3 to chapter 8B.
I. Evaporative Systems (reserved)
J. Secondary Air system (reserved)
A specific monitor shall belong only to one of these groups
343/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
CHAPTER 9
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS ON OFF-CYCLE EMISSIONS (OCE)
AND IN USE EMISSIONS
1 APPLICABILITY
This chapter sets out the performance requirements and prohibition of
defeat strategies for engines and vehicles type-approved according to this
standard so as to achieve effective control of emissions under a broad
range of engine and ambient operating conditions encountered during
normal in-use vehicle operation. This chapter also sets out the test
procedures for testing off-cycle emissions during type-approval and in
actual use of the vehicle.
2 Reserved (1)
3 DEFINATIONS
3.1. "Engine starting" means the process from the initiation of engine
cranking until the engine reaches a speed 150 min-1 below the normal,
warmed up idle speed (as determined in the drive position for vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmission).
3.2. "Engine warm-up" means sufficient vehicle operation such that the
coolant temperature reaches a minimum temperature of at least 70 °C.
3.3. "Rated speed" means the maximum full load speed allowed by the
governor as specified by the manufacturer in his sales and service
literature, or, if such a governor is not present, the speed at which the
maximum power is obtained from the engine, as specified by the
manufacturer in his sales and service literature.
3.4. "Regulated emissions" means "gaseous pollutants" defined as carbon
monoxide, hydrocarbons and/or non-methane hydrocarbons (assuming a
ratio of CH1.85 for diesel, CH2.525 for LPG and CH2.93 for NG, and an
assumed molecule CH3O0.5 for ethanol fuelled diesel engines), methane
(assuming a ratio of CH4 for NG) and oxides of nitrogen (expressed in
nitrogen dioxide (NO2) equivalent) and "particulate matter" (PM)
defined as any material collected on a specified filter medium after
diluting exhaust with clean filtered air to a temperature between 315 K
(42 °C) and 325 K (52 °C), as measured at a point immediately upstream
of the filter, this is primarily carbon, condensed hydrocarbons, and
sulphates with associated water.
4. General Requirements
Any engine system and any element of design liable to affect the
emission of regulated pollutants shall be designed, constructed,
assembled and installed so as to enable the engine and vehicle to comply
with the provisions of this chapter.
4.1. Prohibition of defeat strategies
Engine systems and vehicles shall not be equipped with a defeat strategy.
4.2. World-harmonized Not-To-Exceed Emission Requirement
This chapter requires that engine systems and vehicles comply with the
WNTE emission limit values described in clause 5.2. of this chapter. For
laboratory based testing according to clause 7.4. of this chapter, no test
result shall exceed the emissions limits specified in clause 5.2. of this
chapter.
344/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
5. Performance Requirements
5.1. Emission strategies
Emission strategies shall be designed so as to enable the engine system,
in normal use, to comply with the provisions of this chapter. Normal use
is not restricted to the conditions of use as specified in clause 6. Of this
chapter.
5.1.1. Requirements for Base Emission Strategies (BES)
A BES shall not discriminate between operation on an applicable type
approval or certification test and other operation and provide a lesser
level of emission control under conditions not substantially included in
the applicable type approval or certification tests.
5.1.2. Requirements for Auxiliary Emission Strategies (AES)
An AES shall not reduce the effectiveness of the emission control
relative to a BES under conditions that may reasonably be expected to
be encountered in normal vehicle operation and use, unless the AES
satisfies one the following specific exceptions:
a) Its operation is substantially included in the applicable type-
approval tests, including the off-cycle test procedures under
clause 7. Of this chapter of this chapter and the in-service
provisions set out in clause 9 of Chapter-I of this standard.;
b) It is activated for the purposes of protecting the engine and/or
vehicle from damage or accident;
c) It is only activated during engine starting or warm up as defined
in this chapter;
d) Its operation is used to trade-off the control of one type of
regulated emissions in order to maintain control of another type
of regulated emissions under specific ambient or operating
conditions not substantially included in the type approval or
certification tests. The overall effect of such an AES shall be to
compensate for the effects of extreme ambient conditions in a
manner that provides acceptable control of all regulated
emissions.
5.2. World-harmonized Not-To-Exceed limits for gaseous and
Particulate Exhaust Emissions
5.2.1. Exhaust emissions shall not exceed the applicable emission limits
5.2.2. The applicable emission limits shall be as specified in Gazette
Notification GSR-889(E) dated 16th Sep 2016 published by MoRTH, as
amended from time to time
Test CO THC NOx PM
cycle
mg/kWh mg/kWh mg/kWh mg/kWh
WNTE 2000 220 600 16
345/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
6.0 Ambient and Operating Conditions

The WNTE emission limits shall apply at:
( a ) All atmospheric pressures greater than or equal to 82.5 kPa;
(b) All temperatures less than or equal to the temperature
determined by equation 5 at the specified atmospheric
pressure:
T = -0.4514 x (101.3 – pb) + 311
Where:
T is the ambient air temperature, K
pb is the atmospheric pressure, kPa
(c) All engine coolant temperature above 343 K (70°C).
(d)
The applicable ambient atmospheric pressure and temperature
conditions are shown in Figure 1.
WNTE Atmospheric Pressure and Temperature Range
45.0
40.0
35.0
30.0
T e m p e ra tu r e (C )
25.0
20.0
15.0
10.0
5.0
0.0
80 85 90 95 100 105
Atmospheric Pressure (kPa)
WNTE Maximum Temperature
Figure 1
Illustration of atmospheric pressure and temperature conditions
7. Off-cycle laboratory testing at type-approval
The off-cycle laboratory test requirements shall not apply for the type-
approval of positive ignition engine under this standard.
7.1. World-harmonized Not-To-Exceed control area
The WNTE control area consists of the engine speed and load points
defined in clauses 7.1.1. through 7.1.6. of this chapter. Figure 2 is an
example illustration of the WNTE control area.
346/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
7.1.1. Engine Speed Range

The WNTE control area shall include all operating speeds between the
30th percentile cumulative speed distribution over the WHTC test cycle,
including idle, (n30) and the highest speed where 70 per cent of the
maximum power occurs (nhi). Figure 3 is an example of the WNTE
cumulative speed frequency distribution for a specific engine.
7.1.2. Engine Torque Range
The WNTE control area shall include all engine load points with a
torque value greater than or equal to 30 per cent of the maximum torque
value produced by the engine.
7.1.3. Engine power range
Notwithstanding the provisions of clause 7.1.1. and 7.1.2., speed and
load points below 30 per cent of the maximum power value produced
by the engine shall be excluded from the WNTE Control Area for all
emissions.
7.1.4. Application of Engine Family Concept
In principal, any engine within a family with a unique torque/power
curve will have its individual WNTE control area. For in-use testing,
the individual WNTE control area of the respective engine shall apply.
For type approval (certification) testing under the engine family concept
of the WHDC GTR the manufacturer may optionally apply a single
WNTE control area for the engine family under the following
provisions:
(a) A single engine speed range of the WNTE control area may be used;
if the measured engine speeds n30 and nhi are within ± 3 per cent of
the engine speeds as declared by the manufacturer. If the tolerance
is exceeded for any of the engine speeds, the measured engine
speeds shall be used for determining the WNTE control area;
(b)A single engine torque/power range of the WNTE control area may
be used, if it covers the full range from the highest to the lowest
rating of the family. Alternatively, grouping of engine ratings into
different WNTE control areas is permitted.
347/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
120%
100%
80%
E n g in e T o r q u e WNTE Control Area
60%
40%
20%
30% torque line
0%
n30 nhi
Engine Speed
Figure 2
Example WNTE Control Area
120%
100%
C u m u la tiv e F re q u e n c y
80%
60%
40%
20%
n30
0%
400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200
Engine Speed
Figure 3
Example of WNTE cumulative speed frequency distribution
348/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
7.1.5. Compliance exclusion from certain WNTE operating points

The manufacturer may request that the test agency excludes operating
points from the WNTE control area defined in clause7.1.1 through
7.1.4 of this chapter during the certification/type approval. The test
agency may grant this exclusion if the manufacturer can demonstrate
that the engine is never capable of operating at such points when used
in any vehicle combination.
7.2. Minimum World-harmonized Not-To-Exceed event duration and
data sampling frequency
7.2.1. To determine compliance with the WNTE emissions limits specified in
clause 5.2., the engine shall be operated within the WNTE control area
defined in clause 7.1. and its emissions shall be measured and integrated
over a minimum period of 30 seconds. A WNTE event is defined as a
single set of integrated emissions over the period of time. For example,
if the engine operates for 65 consecutive seconds within the WNTE
control area and ambient conditions this would constitute a single
WNTE event and the emissions would be averaged over the full 65
second period. In the case of laboratory testing, the integrating period
defined in clause 7.5. of this chapter shall apply.
7.2.2. For engines equipped with emission controls that include periodic
regeneration events, if a regeneration event occurs during the WNTE
test, then the averaging period shall be at least as long as the time
between the events multiplied by the number of full regeneration events
within the sampling period. This requirement only applies for engines
that send an electronic signal indicating the start of the regeneration
event.
7.2.3. A WNTE event is a sequence of data collected at the frequency of at
least 1 Hz during engine operation in the WNTE control area for the
minimum event duration or longer. The measured emission data shall
be averaged over the duration of each WNTE event.
7.3. In-use testing
A PEMS demonstration test shall be performed at type approval by
testing the parent engine in a vehicle using the procedure described in
7.3.1 The manufacturer may select the vehicle that shall be used for testing
but the vehicle choice shall be subject to the agreement of the Test
Agency. The characteristics of the vehicle used for the PEMS
demonstration test shall be representative for the category of vehicle
intended for the engine system. The vehicle may be a prototype vehicle.
7.3.2 At the request of the Test Agency, an additional engine within the
engine family or an equivalent engine representing a different vehicle
category may be tested in a vehicle.
349/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
7.4. World-harmonized Not-To-Exceed Laboratory Testing

Where the provisions of this chapter are used as the basis for laboratory
testing the following provision shall apply:
7.4.1. The specific mass emissions of regulated pollutants shall be determined
on the basis of randomly defined test points distributed across the
WNTE control area. All the test points shall be contained within 3
randomly selected grid cells imposed over the control area. The grid
shall comprise of 9 cells for engines with a rated speed less than 3000
min-1 and 12 cells for engines with a rated speed greater than or equal
to 3000 min-1. The grids are defined as follows:
(a) The outer boundaries of the grid are aligned to the WNTE
control area;
(b) 2 vertical lines spaced at equal distance between engine
speeds n30 and nhi for 9 cell grids, or 3 vertical lines spaced
at equal distance between engine speeds n30 and nhi
for 12 cell grids; and
(c) 2 lines spaced at equal distance of engine torque (⅓) at each
vertical line within the WNTE control area.
Examples of the grids applied to specific engines are shown in Figures 5
and 6.
7.4.2. The 3 selected grid cells shall each include 5 random test points, so a
total of 15 random points shall be tested within the WNTE control area.
Each cell shall be tested sequentially; therefore, all 5 points in one grid
cell are tested before transiting to the next grid cell. The test points are
combined into a single ramped steady state cycle.
7.4.3. The order in which each of the grid cells are tested, and the order of
testing the points within the grid cell, shall be randomly determined.
The 3 grid cells to be tested, the 15 test points, the order of testing the
grid cells, and the order of the points within a grid cell shall be selected
by the test agency using acknowledged statistical methods of
randomization.
7.4.4. The average specific mass emissions of regulated gaseous pollutants
shall not exceed the WNTE limit values specified in clause 5.2. of this
chapter when measured over any of the cycles in a grid cell with 5 test
points.
7.4.5. The average specific mass emissions of regulated particulate pollutants
shall not exceed the WNTE limit values specified in clause 5.2. of this
chapter when measured over the whole 15 test point cycle.
7.5. Laboratory test procedure
7.5.1. After completion of the WHSC cycle, the engine shall be
preconditioned at mode 9 of the WHSC for a period of three minutes.
The test sequence shall start immediately after completion of the
preconditioning phase.
350/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
7.5.2. The engine shall be operated for 2 minutes at each random test point.
This time includes the preceding ramp from the previous steady state
point. The transitions between the test points shall be linear for engine
speed and load and shall last 20 ± 1 seconds.
7.5.3. The total test time from start until finish shall be 30 minutes. The test
of each set of 5 selected random points in a grid cell shall be 10 minutes,
measured from the start of the entry ramp to the 1st point until the end
of the steady state measurement at the 5th point. Figure 4 illustrates the
sequence of the test procedure.
7.5.4. The WNTE laboratory test shall meet the validation statistics of clause
7.8.7. of chapter 3.
7.5.5. The measurement of the emissions shall be carried out in accordance
with clauses 7.5., 7.7. and 7.8. of chapter3
7.5.6. The calculation of the test results shall be carried out in accordance with
clause 8 of chapter 3
Figure 4
Schematic example of the start of the WNTE test Cycle
351/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
WNTE Area
Engine Rated Speed < 3000 rpm
1/3 3
E ngin e Torq ue [N .m ]
1/3
2
5 9
1/3 8
1
4
7
30% Maximum
Torque
1/3 1/3 1/3
n30 Engine Speed [rpm] nHigh
Figure 5
WNTE Test Cycle Grids
WNTE Area
Engine Rated Speed ≥ 3000 rpm
1/3 3
6
E n g in e T o r q u e [N .m ]
1/3
2
5
12
8
1/3
1 11
4
7
10
30% Maximum
Torque
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
n30 Engine Speed [rpm] nHigh
Figures 6
WNTE Test Cycle Grids
7.6. Rounding
Each final test result shall be rounded in one step to the number of
places to the right of the decimal point indicated by the applicable
WHDC emission standard plus one additional significant figure, in
accordance with ASTM E 29-06. No rounding of intermediate values
leading to the final brake specific emission result is permitted.
352/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
8. Statement of off-cycle emission compliance

In the application for type-approval, the manufacturer shall provide a
statement that the engine family or vehicle complies with the
requirements of this Standard limiting off-cycle emissions. In addition
to this statement, compliance with the applicable emission limits and
in use requirements shall be verified through additional tests.
8.1 Example statement of off cycle emission compliance
8.2 Basis for off cycle emission compliance statement
9. Documentation
The test agency may decide to require that the manufacturer provides a
documentation package. This should describe any element of design
and emission control strategy of the engine system and the means by
which it controls its output variables, whether that control is direct or
indirect.
The information may include a full description of the emission control
strategy. In addition, this could include information on the operation of
all AES and BES, including a description of the parameters that are
modified by any AES and the boundary conditions under which the
AES operate, and indication of which AES and BES are likely to be
active under the conditions of the test procedures in this chapter.
353/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
PEMS DEMONSTRATION TEST AT TYPE APPROVAL
1.1 INTRODUCTION
This appendix describes the procedure for PEMS demonstration test
at type approval.
1.2 TEST VEHICLE
1.2.1 The vehicle used for demonstrating the PEMS demonstration test shall
be representative for the vehicle category intended for the installation
of the engine system. The vehicle may be a prototype vehicle or an
adapted production vehicle.
1.2.2 The availability and conformity of the ECU data-stream information
shall be demonstrated (for example following the provision of clause
5 of Chapter 7 of this part).
1.3 TEST CONDITIONS
1.3.1 The vehicle payload shall be 50-60 per cent of the maximum vehicle
payload in accordance with Chapter 7 of this part.
1.3.2 The test shall be conducted under ambient conditions as described in
clause 4.2. of Chapter 7 of this part.
1.3.3 The engine coolant temperature shall be in accordance with clause 4.3.
of Chapter 7 of this part.
1.3.4 The fuel, lubricating oil and reagent for the exhaust after-treatment
system shall follow the provisions of clause 4.4. of Chapter 8B of this
part.
1.3.5 Trip and operational Requirements
The trip and operational requirements shall be those described in
clauses 4.5. to 4.6.8. of Chapter 7 of this part.
1.4 Emissions evaluation
1.4.1 The test shall be conducted and the test results calculated in
accordance with clause 6. of Chapter 7 of this part.
1.5 REPORT
A technical report describing the PEMS demonstration test
shall show the activities and results and give at least the
following information
a) General information as described in clause 10.1.1. of Chapter 7;
(b)Explanation as to why the vehicle(s) used for the test can be
considered to be representative for the category of vehicles
intended for the engine system;
(c) Information about test equipment and test data as described in
clauses10.1.3. and 10.1.4. of Chapter 7 of this part;
354/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
(d)Information about the tested engine as described in clause 10.1.5.

of Chapter 7 of this part;
(e) Information about the vehicle used for the test as described in
clause 10.1.6. of Chapter 7 of this part;
(f) Information about the route characteristics as described in clause
10.1.7. of Chapter 7 of this part;
(g)Information about instantaneous measured and calculated data as
described in clause 10.1.8. and 10.1.9. of Chapter 7 of this part;
(h)Information about averaged and integrated data as described in
clause 10.1.10. of Chapter 7 of this part;
(i) Pass-fail results as described in clause 10.1.11. of Chapter 7 of
this part;
(j) Information about test verifications as described in clause
10.1.12. of Chapter 7 of this part.
355/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
CHAPTER 10
REQUIREMENTS TO ENSURE THE CORRECT OPERATION OF
NOX CONTROL MEASURES
1. Introduction
This chapter sets out the requirements to ensure the correct operation
of NOx control measures. It includes requirements for vehicles that
rely on the use of a reagent in order to reduce emissions.
2. General requirements
Any engine system falling within the scope of this chapter shall be
designed, constructed and installed so as to be capable of meeting these
requirements throughout the normal life of the engine under normal
conditions of use. In achieving this objective, it is acceptable that
engines which have been used in excess of the appropriate durability
period referred to in clause 5.4 of Chapter-1 of this Standard may show
some deterioration in performance and sensitivity of the monitoring
system.
2.1. ALTERNATIVE APPROVAL
2.1.1 If requested by the manufacturer for vehicles of categories M2 and N1
for vehicles of categories M1 and N2 for a technically permissible
maximum laden mass not exceeding 7.5 tonnes and for vehicles of
categories M3 of Type-I and Type-II (as defined in AIS-052) with a
permissible mass not exceeding 7.5 tonnes compliance with the
requirements of chapter 16 of AIS 137 PART 3 shall be considered
equivalent to the compliance with this chapter.
2.1.2 If the alternative approval is used
2.1.2.1 The information related to the correct operation of Nox control measures
in chapter 2 of this standard is replaced by the information of AIS137
PART 3.
2.1.2.2 The following exceptions shall apply regarding the application of the
requirements set out in chapter 16 of AIS137 PART 3 and those of this
chapter.
2.1.2.2.1 The provision on reagent quality monitoring set out in clauses 7.1 to
7.1.2 of this chapter shall apply instead of clauses 4.1 to 4.2 of chapter
16 to AIS137 PART 3.
2.1.2.2.2 The provision on dosing activity monitoring set out in clause 8.4 of this
chapter shall apply instead of clause 5 of chapter 16 of AIS-137 Part 3.
2.1.2.2.3 The driver warning system referred to in clauses 4 7 and 8 of this chapter
shall be understood as the driver warning system in clause 3 of chapter
16 of AIS137 PART 3.
2.1.2.2.4 Clause 6 of chapter 16 of AIS137 PART 3shall not apply.
2.1.2.2.5 The provision set out in clause 5.2 of this chapter shall apply in the case
of vehicles for use by the rescue services or to vehicles designed and
constructed for use by the armed services, civil defence, fire services
and forces responsible for maintaining public order.
356/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
2.2 REQUIRED INFORMATION

2.2.1. Information that fully describes the functional operational
characteristics of an engine system covered by this chapter shall be
provided by the manufacturer in the format in chapter-2 of this part.
2.2.2. In its application for type-approval, the manufacturer shall specify the
characteristics of all reagents consumed by any emission control
system. This specification shall include types and concentrations,
operational temperature conditions, and references to international
standards.
2.2.3. Detailed written information fully describing the functional operation
characteristics of the driver warning system as provided in accordance
with clause 4 of this chapter and of the driver inducement system as
provided in accordance with clause 5 of this chapter shall be submitted
to the test agency at the time of application for the type-approval.
2.2.4. When a manufacturer applies for an approval of an engine or engine
family as a separate technical unit, it shall include in the technical
specifications (as submitted as per Chapter-2 of this standard). the
appropriate requirements that will ensure that the vehicle, when used
on the road or elsewhere as appropriate, will comply with the
requirements of this chapter. This documentation shall include the
following:
a) The detailed technical requirements including the provisions
ensuring the compatibility with the monitoring, warning, and
inducement systems present in the engine system for the
purpose of complying with the requirements of this chapter;
b) The verification procedure to be complied with for installation
of the engine in the vehicle.
The existence and the adequacy of such installation requirements may
be checked during the approval process of the engine system.
The documentation referred to in points (a) and (b) shall not be
required if the manufacturer applies for an type approval of a vehicle
with regard to emissions.
2.3 OPERATING CONDITIONS
2.3.1. Any engine system falling within the scope of this chapter shall retain
its emission control function during all conditions regularly pertaining
within the Indian Territory.
2.3.2 The emission control monitoring system shall be operational:
(a) At ambient temperatures between 273 K and 315 K (0°C and
42°C)
(b)At all altitudes below 1600 m;
(c) At engine coolant temperatures above 343 K (70°C).
This clause shall not apply in the case of monitoring for reagent level in
the storage tank, where monitoring shall be conducted under all
conditions where measurement is technically feasible including all
conditions when a liquid reagent is not frozen
NOTE: Boundary conditions for ambient to be aligned with HDV in-service conformity test technical
committee recommendation
357/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
2.4 Reagent Freeze protection

2.4.1 The manufacturer may use a heated or a non-heated reagent tank and
dosing system, in accordance with the general requirements of clause
2.3.1.of this chapter A manufacturer shall ensure system meets of
clause 2.4.2.of this chapter. A non-heated system shall meet the
requirements of clause 2.4.3. of this chapter.
2.4.1.1 The use of a non-heated reagent tank and dosing system shall be
indicated in written instructions to the owner of the vehicle.
2.4.2. Heated reagent tank and dosing system
2.4.2.1 If the reagent has frozen, the manufacturer shall ensure that reagent
is available for use within a maximum of 70 minutes after the start
of the vehicle at 266 K (- 7 °C) ambient temperature.
2.4.2.2. Demonstration: Demonstration test at the time of type approval is not
mandatory.
2.4.2.2.1. The reagent tank and dosing system shall be soaked at 255 K (-18
°C) for 72 hours or until the bulk of the reagent becomes solid.
2.4.2.2.2. After the soak period provided in clause 2.4.2.2.1. of this chapter the
engine shall be started and operated at 266 K (- 7 °C) ambient
temperature as follows: 10 to 20 minutes idling, followed by up to
50 minutes at no more than 40 per cent load.
2.4.2.2.3 The reagent dosing system shall be fully functional at the end of the
test procedures described in clauses 2.4.2.2.1. and 2.4.2.2.2 of this
chapter.
2.4.2.2.4. Demonstration of compliance with the requirements of clause
2.4.2.2. may be done in a cold chamber test cell equipped with an
engine or vehicle dynamometer or may be based on vehicle field
tests, as approved by the Test Agency
2.4.3 Non-Heated Reagent Tank and Dosing System
2.4.3.1. The driver warning system described in 4. shall be activated if no
reagent dosing occurs at an ambient temperature ≥ 273 K (0 °C).
The driver inducement system as per clause 8.5 shall be activated if
no reagent dosing occurs at an ambient temperature >=273 K (0 deg
C).
2.5 Each separate reagent tank installed on a vehicle shall include a
means for taking a sample of any fluid inside the tank and for doing
so without the need for information not stored on-board the vehicle.
The sampling point shall be easily accessible without the use of any
specialized tool or device. Keys or systems which are normally
carried on the vehicle for locking access to the tank shall not be
considered to be specialized tools or devices for the purpose of this
clause.
358/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
3. Maintenance requirements
3.1. The manufacturer shall furnish or cause to be furnished to all owners
of new vehicles or new engines type-approved in accordance with
this Standard written instruction about the emission control system
and its correct operation.
Those instructions shall state that if the vehicle emission control
system is not functioning correctly the driver will be informed of a
problem by the driver warning system, and that operation of the
driver inducement system as a consequence of ignoring this warning
will result in the vehicle being unable to efficiently conduct its
mission.
3.2. The instructions shall indicate requirements for the proper use and
maintenance of vehicles in order to maintain their emissions
performance, including, where relevant, the proper use of
consumable reagents.
3.3. The instructions shall be written in clear and non-technical language
and in the official languages.
3.4. The instructions shall specify if consumable reagents have to be
refilled by the vehicle operator between normal maintenance
intervals. The instructions shall also specify the required reagent
quality. They shall indicate how the operator should refill the reagent
tank. The information shall also indicate a likely rate of reagent
consumption for the type of vehicle and how often it is likely to need
to be replenished.
3.5. The instructions shall specify that use of, and refilling with, a
required reagent of the correct specifications is essential in order for
the vehicle to comply with the requirements for the issuing of the
fitness certificate for that vehicle type.
3.6. The instructions shall state that it may be a criminal offence to use a
vehicle that does not consume any reagent if the reagent is required
for the reduction of emissions.
3.7. The instructions shall explain how the warning system and driver
inducement systems work. In addition, the consequences, in terms of
vehicle performance and fault logging, of ignoring the warning
system and not replenishing the reagent or rectifying a problem shall
be explained
4.0 DRIVER WARNING SYSTEM
4.1. The vehicle shall include a driver warning system using visual alarms
that informs the driver when a low reagent level, incorrect reagent
quality, too low a rate of reagent consumption, or a malfunction, has
been detected that may be due to tampering and that will lead to
operation of the driver inducement system if not rectified in a timely
manner. The warning system shall also be active when the driver
inducement system described in clause 5 of this chapter has been
activated.
359/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
4.2. The vehicle On-Board Diagnostics (OBD) display system described

in chapter 8B shall not be used for the purpose of providing the visual
alarms described in clause 4.1.of this chapter. The warning shall not
be the same as the warning used for the purposes of OBD (that is, the
MI – malfunction indicator) or other engine maintenance. It shall not
be possible to turn off the warning system or visual alarms by means
of a scan-tool if the cause of the warning activation has not been
rectified. Conditions for activation and deactivation of the warning
system and visual alarms are described in Appendix 2 of this chapter.
4.3. The driver warning system may display short messages, including
messages indicating clearly the following:
a) The remaining distance or time before activation of the low-level
or severe inducements,
b) The level of torque reduction,
c) The conditions under which vehicle disablement can be cleared.
The system used for displaying the messages referred to in this point
may be the same as the one used for OBD or other maintenance
purposes.
4.4. At the choice of the manufacturer, the warning system may include
an audible component to alert the driver. The cancelling of audible
warnings by the driver is permitted.
4.5. The driver warning system shall be activated as specified in clauses
6.2., 7.2., 8.4., and 9.3. of this chapter.
4.6. The driver warning system shall be deactivated when the conditions
for its activation have ceased to exist. The driver warning system
shall not be automatically deactivated without the reason for its
activation having been remedied.
4.7. The warning system may be temporarily interrupted by other
warning signals providing important safety-related messages.
4.8. A facility to permit the driver to dim the visual alarms provided by
the warning system may be provided on vehicles for use by the
rescue services or on vehicles designed and constructed for use by
the armed services, civil defence, fire services and forces responsible
for maintaining public order.
4.9. Details of the driver warning system activation and deactivation
procedures are specified in Appendix 2 to this chapter.
4.10. As part of the application for type-approval under this Standard, the
manufacturer shall demonstrate the operation of the driver warning
system, as specified in Appendix 1 to this chapter.
5. Driver Inducement System
5.1. The vehicle shall incorporate a two-stage driver inducement system
starting with a low-level inducement (a performance restriction)
followed by a severe inducement (effective disablement of vehicle
operation).
360/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
5.2. The requirement for a driver inducement system shall not apply to
engines or vehicles for use by the rescue services or to engines or
vehicles designed and constructed for use by the armed services, civil
defence, fire services and forces responsible for maintaining public
order. Permanent deactivation of the driver inducement system shall
only be done by the engine or vehicle manufacturer.
5.3. Low-level inducement system
The low-level inducement system shall reduce the maximum
available engine torque across the engine speed range by 25 per cent
between the peak torque speed and the governor breakpoint as
described in Appendix 3 to this chapter. The maximum available
reduced engine torque below the peak torque speed of the engine
before imposition of the torque reduction shall not exceed the
reduced torque at that speed.
The low level inducement system shall be activated when the vehicle
becomes stationary(1) for the first time after the conditions specified
in clause 6.3.,7.3,8.5 and 9.4 below have occurred .
(1)vehicle shall be considered as stationary at latest 1 mintue after
the vehicle speed has been reduced to 0 km/hr enagement of any
device such as park brake ,trailer brake or hand brake shall not be
necessary for being stationary .
5.4. Severe inducement system
The vehicle or engine manufacturer shall incorporate at least one of
the severe inducement systems described in clauses 5.4.1. to 5.4.3
and the “disable on time limit” system described in clause 5.4.4.
5.4.1. A “disable after restart” system shall limit the vehicle speed to 20
km/h ("creep mode") after the engine has been shut down at the
request of the driver (“key-off”).
5.4.2. A “disable after fueling” system shall limit the vehicle speed to 20
km/h ("creep mode") after the fuel tank level has risen a measurable
amount, which shall not be more than 10 per cent of the fuel tank
capacity and shall be approved by the test agency based on the
technical capabilities of the fuel level meter and a declaration by the
manufacturer.
5.4.3. A “disable after parking” system shall limit the vehicle speed to 20
km/h ("creep mode") after the vehicle has been stationary for more
than one hour.
5.4.4. A “disable on time limit” system shall limit the vehicle speed to 20
km/h (“creep mode”) on the first occasion when the vehicle becomes
stationary (1) after eight hours of engine operation if none of the
systems described in clauses 5.4.1. to 5.4.3. has been previously
been activated.
(1) vehicle shall be considered as stationary at latest 1 mintue after
the vehicle speed has been reduced to 0 km/hr enagement of any
device such as park brake ,trailer brake or hand brake shall not be
necessary for being stationary .
361/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
5.5. The driver inducement system shall be enabled as specified in

clauses 6.3., 7.3., 8.5., and 9.4. of this chapter.
5.5.1 When the driver inducement system has determined that the severe
inducement system shall be activated, the low-level inducement
system shall remain activated until the vehicle speed has been limited
to 20 km/h ("creep mode").
5.6. The driver inducement system shall be deactivated when the
conditions for its activation have ceased to exist. The driver
inducement system shall not be automatically deactivated without
the reason for its activation having been remedied.
5.7. Details of the driver inducement system activation and deactivation
procedures are described in Appendix 2 to this chapter.
5.8. As part of the application for type-approval under this Standard, the
manufacturer shall demonstrate the operation of the driver
inducement system, as specified in Appendix 1 to this chapter.
6.0 REAGENT AVAIBILITY
6.1. Reagent Indicator
The vehicle shall include a specific indicator on the dashboard that
clearly informs the driver of the level of reagent in the reagent
storage tank. The minimum acceptable performance level for the
reagent indicator is that it shall continuously indicate the reagent
level whilst the driver warning system referred to in clause 4 of this
chapter is activated to indicate problems with reagent availability.
The reagent indicator may be in the form of an analogue or digital
display, and may show the level as a proportion of the full tank
capacity, the amount of remaining reagent, or the estimated driving
distance remaining.
The reagent indicator shall be placed in close proximity to the fuel
level indicator.
6.2. Activation of the driver warning system
6.2.1. The driver warning system specified in clause 4 of this chapter shall
be activated when the level of reagent is less than 10 per cent of the
capacity of the reagent tank or a higher percentage at the choice of
the manufacturer.
6.2.2. The warning provided shall be sufficiently clear for the driver to
understand that the reagent level is low. When the warning system
includes a message display system, the visual warning shall display
a message indicating a low level of reagent. (for example, “urea level
low”, “AdBlue level low”, or “reagent low”).
6.2.3. The driver warning system does not initially need to be continuously
activated, however activation shall escalate in intensity so that it
becomes continuous when the level of the reagent is approaching a
very low proportion of the capacity of the reagent tank and the point
where the driver inducement system will come into effect is
approached. It shall culminate in a driver notification at a level that
is at the choice of the manufacturer, but is sufficiently more
362/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
noticeable than the point where the driver inducement system in

clause 6.3. of this chapter comes into effect.
6.2.4. The continuous warning shall not be easily disabled or ignored.
When the warning system includes a message display system, an
explicit message shall be displayed (for example. “fill up urea”, “fill
up AdBlue”, or “fill up reagent”). The continuous warning may be
temporarily interrupted by other warning signals providing important
safety related messages.
6.2.5. It shall not be possible to turn off the driver warning system until the
reagent has been replenished to a level not requiring its activation.
6.3. Activation of the driver inducement system
6.3.1 The low-level inducement system described in clause 5.3. of this
chapter shall be enabled, and subsequently activated according to the
requirements of that clause, if the reagent tank level goes below 2.5
% of its nominally full capacity or a higher percentage at the choice
of the manufacturer.
6.3.2. The severe inducement system described in clause 5.4. of this chapter
shall be enabled, and subsequently activated according to the
requirements of that clause, if the reagent tank is empty (that is, the
dosing system is unable to draw further reagent from the tank) or at
any level below 2.5 % of its nominally full capacity at the discretion
6.3.3. It shall not be possible to turn off the low-level or severe driver
inducement system until the reagent has been replenished to a level
not requiring their respective activation.
7. Reagent Quality Monitoring
7.1. The vehicle shall include a means of determining the presence of an
incorrect reagent on board a vehicle.
7.1.1. The manufacturer shall specify a minimum acceptable reagent
concentration CDmin, which results in tailpipe emissions not
exceeding the limit values specified in clause 5.3 of chapter 1.
7.1.1.1. During the OBD-1 period specified in clause 4.10.7 of Chapter1 of
this Standard and upon request of the manufacturer for the purpose
of clause 7.1.1 of this chapter the reference to the NOx emission limit
specified in Table-1 in clause 5.3 of Chapter-1 of this part. to this
Standard shall be replaced by the value of 900 mg/kWh.
7.1.1.2. The value of CD min shall be demonstrated during type approval by
the procedure defined in Appendix 6 to this chapter and recorded in
the extended documentation package as specified in clause 5.1.4. of
chapter-1 of this Standard.
7.1.2 Any reagent concentration lower than CD min shall be detected and
be regarded, for the purpose of clause 7.1. of this chapter, as being
incorrect reagent.
363/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
7.1.3. A specific counter ("the reagent quality counter") shall be attributed

to the reagent quality. The reagent quality counter shall count the
number of engine operating hours with an incorrect reagent.
7.1.4. Details of the reagent quality counter activation and deactivation
criteria and mechanisms are described in Appendix 2 of this chapter.
7.1.5. The reagent quality counter information shall be made available in a
standardized manner in accordance with the provisions of Appendix
5 to this chapter.
When the monitoring systems detects or, as appropriate, confirms
that the reagent quality is incorrect, the driver warning system
described in clause 4 of this chapter shall be activated. When the
warning system includes a message display system, it shall display a
message indicating the reason for the warning (for example. “in
correct urea detected”, “incorrect AdBlue detected”, or “incorrect
reagent detected”).
7.3 Activation of the driver inducement system
7.3.1. The low-level inducement system described in clause 5.3. of this
requirements of that clause, if the reagent quality is not rectified
within 10 engine operating hours after the activation of the driver
warning system described in clause 7.2.of this chapter.
Shall be enabled, and subsequently activated according to the
requirements of that clause, if the reagent quality is not rectified
within 20 engine operating hours after the activation of the driver
warning system described in clause 7.2. of this chapter.
7.3.3. The number of hours prior to activation of the inducement systems
shall be reduced in case of a repetitive occurrence of the malfunction,
in accordance with the mechanism described in Appendix 2 to this
chapter.
8. Reagent Consumption and Dosing Activity Monitoring
8.1 The vehicle shall include a means of determining reagent
consumption and providing off-board access to consumption
information.
8.2. Reagent consumption and dosing activity counters
8.2.1. A specific counter shall be attributed to the reagent consumption (the
"reagent consumption counter") and another to the dosing activity
(the "dosing activity counter"). These counters shall count the
number of engine operating hours which occur with an incorrect
reagent consumption and, respectively, an interruption of the reagent
dosing activity.
8.2.2. Details of the reagent consumption counter and dosing counter
activation and deactivation criteria and mechanisms are described in
364/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
8.2.3. The reagent consumption counter and the dosing counter information
shall be made available in a standardised manner according to the
provisions of Appendix 5 to this chapter.
8.3. Monitoring conditions
8.3.1 The maximum detection period for insufficient reagent consumption
is 5 hours or the period equivalent to a demanded reagent
consumption of at least 2 liters, whichever is longer., whichever is
longer.
8.3.1.1 When the reagent consumption is monitored by using at least one of
the following parameters:
(a)The level of reagent in the on-vehicle storage tank;
(b)The flow of reagent or quantity of reagent injected at a position as
close as technically possible to the point of injection into an exhaust
after treatment system.
The maximum detection period for insufficient reagent consumption
is extended to 48h or to the period equivalent to a demanded reagent
consumption of at least 15 liters, whichever is longer.
8.4.1. The driver warning system described in clause 4 of this chapter shall
be activated if a deviation of more than fifty percent between the
average reagent consumption and the average demanded reagent
consumption by the engine system over a period to be defined by the
manufacturer, which shall not be longer than the maximum period
defined in clause 8.3.1, or when applicable, clause 8.3.1.1. of this
chapter, is detected. When the warning system includes a message
display system, it shall display a message indicating the reason for
the warning (for example, “urea dosing malfunction”, “AdBlue
dosing malfunction”, or “reagent dosing malfunction”).
8.4.2. The driver warning system described in clause 4 of this chapter shall
be activated in the case of interruption in reagent dosing. When the
warning system includes a message display system, it shall display a
message indicating an appropriate warning. This activation shall not
be required where the interruption is demanded by the engine ECU
because the vehicle operating conditions are such that the vehicle’s
emission performance does not require reagent dosing.
requirements of that clause, if an error in the reagent consumption or
an interruption in reagent dosing is not rectified within 10 engine
operating hours after the activation of the driver warning system
specified in clauses 8.4.1. and 8.4.2.of this chapter.
requirements of that clause, if an error in the reagent consumption or
an interruption in reagent dosing is not rectified within 20 engine
365/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
operating hours after the activation of the driver warning system in

clauses 8.4.1. and 8.4.2. of this chapter.
shall be reduced in case of a repetitive occurrence of the malfunction
chapter.
9. Monitoring failures that may be attributed to tampering
9.1. In addition to the level of reagent in the reagent tank, the reagent
quality, and the reagent consumption, the following failures shall be
monitored by the anti-tampering system because they may be
attributed to tampering:
a) Impeding of the EGR valve operation;
b) Failures of the anti-tampering monitoring system, as described in
9.2. Monitoring Requirements
9.2.1. The anti-tampering monitoring system shall be monitored for
electrical failures and for removal or deactivation of any sensor that
prevents it from diagnosing any other failures mentioned in clauses
6 to 8 (component monitoring) of this chapter.
A non-exhaustive list of sensors that affect the diagnostic capability
are those directly measuring NOx concentration, urea quality
sensors, ambient sensors, and sensors used for monitoring reagent
dosing activity, reagent level, or reagent consumption.
9.2.2. EGR Valve Counter
9.2.2.1. A specific counter shall be attributed to an impeded EGR valve. The
EGR valve counter shall count the number of engine operating hours
when any DTC associated with an impeded EGR valve is confirmed
to be active.
9.2.2.2. Details of the EGR valve counter activation and deactivation criteria
and mechanisms are described in Appendix 2 to this chapter.
9.2.2.3. The EGR valve counter information shall be made available in a
standardized manner in accordance with the provisions of Appendix
5 to this chapter.
9.2.3. Monitoring System Counters
9.2.3.1. A specific counter shall be attributed to each of the monitoring
failures considered in point (b) of clause 9.1. of this chapter. The
monitoring system counters shall count the number of engine
operating hours when the DTC associated with a malfunction of the
monitoring system is confirmed to be active. Grouping of several
faults into a single counter is permitted.
9.2.3.2. Details of the criteria for activation and deactivation of the
monitoring system counters and the associated mechanisms are
described in Appendix 2 to this chapter.
366/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
9.2.3.3. The monitoring system counter information shall be made available

in a standardized manner in accordance with the provisions of
9.3 Activation of the driver warning system
The driver warning system described in clause 4 shall be activated in
the case where any of the failures specified in clause 9.1. of this
chapter occurs, and shall indicate that an urgent repair is required.
When the warning system includes a message display system, it shall
display a message indicating either the reason for the warning (for
example, “reagent dosing valve disconnected”, or "critical emission
failure").
requirements of that clause, if a failure specified in clause 9.1.of this
chapter is not rectified within 36 engine operating hours after the
activation of the driver warning system in clause 9.3. of this chapter.
requirements of that clause, if a failure specified in clause 9.1. of this
chapter is not rectified within 100 engine operating hours after the
activation of the driver warning system in clause 9.3. of this chapter.
shall be reduced in case of a repetitive occurrence of the malfunction
chapter.
367/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
DEMONSTRATION REQUIRMENTS
A.1.1. General
A.1.1.1 The manufacturer shall submit to the test agency a complete
documentation package justifying the compliance of the SCR system
with the requirements of this chapter as regards its capabilities for
monitoring and activation of the driver warning and inducement
system, which may include:
(a) Algorithms and decision charts
(b) Tests and/or simulation results
(c) Reference to previously approved monitoring systems, etc.
A.1.1.2 Compliance with the requirements of this chapter shall be
demonstrated during type-approval by performing, as illustrated in
Table 1 and specified in this Appendix, the following
demonstrations:
(a)a demonstration of the warning system activation.
(b) a demonstration of the low level inducement system activation.
(c) a demonstration of the severe inducement system activation.
Table 1
Illustration of the content of the demonstration process in
accordance with the provisions in clauses A.1.3, A.1.4 and A.1.5
Mechanism Demonstration elements
Warning system (a) 4 activation tests (incl. lack of
activation reagent)
specified in (b) Supplementary demonstration
clause A.1.3. elements, as appropriate
Low-level (a) 2 activation tests (incl. lack of

inducement reagent)
activation (b) Supplementarydemonstration
specified in elements.
clause A.1.4 (c ) 1 torque reduction test.
(a) 2 activation tests (incl. lack of

Severe reagent)
inducement
(b) Supplementary demonstration
activation
elements, as appropriate
specified in
clause A.1.1.25 (c) Demonstration elements of correct
vehicle behavior during inducement.
A.1.2. Engine families or OBD Engine Families
The compliance of an engine family or an OBD engine family with
the requirements of this chapter may be demonstrated by testing one
368/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
of the members of the family under consideration, provided that the

manufacturer demonstrates to the test agency that the monitoring
systems necessary for complying with the requirements of this
chapter x are similar within the family.
A.1.2.1. This demonstration may be performed by presenting to the test
agencies such elements as algorithms, functional analyses, etc.
A.1.2.2. The test engine is selected by the manufacturer in agreement with the
test agency. It may or may not be the parent engine of the considered
family.
A.1.2.3. In the case where engines of an engine family belong to an OBD
engine family that has already been type-approved according to
clause A.1.2.1 of this appendix (Figure 1), the compliance of that
engine family is deemed to be demonstrated without further testing,
provided the manufacturer demonstrates to the test agency that the
monitoring systems necessary for complying with the requirements
of this chapter are similar within the engine and OBD engine families
under consideration.
Figure 1
Previously demonstrated conformity of an OBD engine family.
A.1.3. Demonstration of the warning system activation
A.1.3.1. The compliance of the warning system activation shall be
demonstrated by performing one test for each of the failure
categories considered in clauses 6 to 9 of this chapter such as: lack
of reagent, low reagent quality, low reagent consumption, failure of
components of the monitoring system.
369/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A.1.3.2. Selection of The Failures to be Tested

A.1.3.2.1. For the purpose of demonstrating the activation of the warning
system in case of a wrong reagent quality, a reagent shall be selected
with a concentration of the active ingredient equal to or higher than
the minimum acceptable reagent concentration CD min,
communicated by the manufacturer in accordance with the
requirements of clause 7.1.1 of this chapter
system in the case of an incorrect rate of reagent consumption, it shall
be sufficient to arrange an interruption of the dosing activity.
A.1.3.2.2.1. Where activation of the warning system has been demonstrated by
interruption of the dosing activity, the manufacturer shall, in
addition, present the test agency with evidence such as algorithms,
functional analyses, the results of previous tests, etc. to show that the
warning system will activate correctly in the case of an incorrect rate
of reagent consumption due to other causes.
system in case of failures that may be attributed to tampering, as
defined in clause 9 of this chapter, the selection shall be performed
in accordance with the following requirements:
A.1.3.2.3.1. The manufacturer shall provide the test agency with a list of such
potential failures.
A.1.3.2.3.2. The failure to be considered in the test shall be selected by the test
agency from this list referred to in clause A.1.3.2.3.1. o0f this
appendix.
A.1.3.3. Demonstration
A.1.3.3.1. For the purposes of this demonstration of the activation of the
warning system a separate test shall be performed for each of the
failures considered in clause A.1.3.1. of this appendix.
A.1.3.3.2. During a test, no failure shall be present other than the one addressed
by the test.
A.1.3.3.3. Prior to starting a test, all DTC shall have been erased.
A.1.3.3.4. At the request of the manufacturer, and with the agreement of the test
agency, the failures subject to testing may be simulated.
A.1.3.3.5. For failures other than lack of reagent, once the failure has been
induced or simulated, the detection of that failure shall be performed
in accordance with clause 7.1.2.2. of chapter 8B.
A.1.3.3.5.1. The detection sequence shall be stopped once the DTC of the selected
failure has got the “confirmed and active” status.
system in case of lack of reagent availability, the engine system shall
be operated over one or more operating sequences at the discretion
370/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A.1.3.3.6.1. The demonstration shall start with a level of reagent in the tank to be
agreed between the manufacturer and the test agency but
representing not less than 10 per cent of the nominal capacity of the
tank.
A.1.3.3.6.2. The warning system is deemed to have performed in the correct
manner if the following conditions are met simultaneously:
(a)The warning system has been activated with a reagent availability
greater or equal to 10 per cent of the capacity of the reagent tank;
(b)The "continuous" warning system has been activated with a
reagent availability greater or equal to the value declared by the
manufacturer according to the provisions of clause 6 of this
chapter.
A.1.3.4. The demonstration of the warning system activation is deemed to be
accomplished for reagent level events if, at the end of each
demonstration test performed according to clause A.1.3.2.1. of this
appendix, the warning system has been properly activated.
A.1.3.5. The demonstration of the warning system activation is deemed to be
accomplished for DTC triggered events if, at the end of each
demonstration test performed according to clause A.1.3.2.1 of this
Appendix, the warning system has been properly activated and the
DTC for the selected failure has got the status shown in Table 1 in
A.1.4. Demonstration of the inducement system
A.1.4.1. The demonstration of the inducement system shall be done by tests
performed on an engine test bench.
A.1.4.1.1. Any additional vehicle components or sub-systems, such as ambient
temperature sensors, level sensors, and driver warning and
information systems, that are required in order to perform the
demonstrations shall be connected to the engine system for that
purpose, or shall be simulated, to the satisfaction of the test agency.
A.1.4.1.2. If the manufacturer chooses, and subject to the agreement of the test
agency, the demonstration tests may be performed on a complete
vehicle either by mounting the vehicle on a suitable test bed or by
running it on a test track under controlled conditions.
A.1.4.2. The test sequence shall demonstrate the activation of the inducement
system in case of lack of reagent and in case of one of the failures
defined in clauses 7, 8, or 9 of this chapter.
A.1.4.3. For the purpose of this demonstration,
(a)the test agency shall select, in addition to the lack of reagent, one
of the failures defined in clauses 7,8 or 9 of this chapter that has been
previously used in the demonstration of the warning system,
(b)the manufacturer shall be permitted to simulate, in agreement with
the test agency, the achievement of a certain number of operating
hours.
371/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
(c)The achievement of the torque reduction required for low-

inducement may be demonstrated at the same time as the general
engine performance approval process performed in accordance with
this Standard. Separate torque measurement during the inducement
system demonstration is not required in this case. The speed
limitation required for severe inducement shall be demonstrated in
accordance with the requirements of clause5 of this chapter.
A.1.4.4. The manufacturer shall, in addition, demonstrate the operation of the
inducement system under those failure conditions defined in clauses
7, 8 or 9 of this chapter which have not been chosen for use in
demonstration tests described in clauses A.1.4.1., A.1.4.2. and
A.1.4.3. of this appendix. These additional demonstrations may be
performed by presentation to the test agency of a technical case using
evidence such as algorithms, functional analyses, and the results of
previous tests.
A.1.4.4.1. These additional demonstrations shall, in particular, demonstrate to
the satisfaction of the test agency the inclusion of the correct torque
reduction mechanism in the engine ECU.
A.1.4.5. Demonstration test of the low level inducement system
A.1.4.5.1. This demonstration starts when the warning system, or when
appropriate "continuous" warning system, has been activated as a
result of the detection of a failure selected by the test agency.
A.1.4.5.2. When the system is being checked for its reaction to the case of lack
of reagent in the tank, the engine system shall be run until the reagent
availability has reached a value of 2.5 per cent of the nominal full
capacity of the tank or the value declared by the manufacturer in
accordance with clause 6.3.1 of this chapter at which the low-level
inducement system is intended to operate.
A.1.4.5.2.1. The manufacturer may, with the agreement of the test agency,
simulate continuous running by extracting reagent from the tank,
either whilst the engine is running or whilst it is stopped.
A.1.4.5.3. When the system is checked for its reaction in the case of a failure
other than a lack of reagent in the tank, the engine system shall be
run for the relevant number of operating hours indicated in Table 2
of Appendix 2 or, at the choice of the manufacturer, until the relevant
counter has reached the value at which the low-level inducement
system is activated.
A.1.4.5.4. The demonstration of the low level inducement system shall be
deemed to be accomplished if, at the end of each demonstration test
performed in accordance with clauses A.1.4.5.2. and A.1.4.5.3. of
this appendix, the manufacturer has demonstrated to the test agency
that the engine ECU has activated the torque reduction mechanism.
A.1.4.6. Demonstration test of the severe inducement system
A.1.4.6.1. This demonstration shall start from a condition where the low-level
inducement system has been previously activated, and may be
372/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
performed as a continuation of the tests undertaken to demonstrate

the low-level inducement system.
A.1.4.6.2. When the system is checked for its reaction in the case of lack of
reagent in the tank, the engine system shall be run until the reagent
tank is empty (that is, until the dosing system cannot draw further
reagent from the tank), or has reached the level below 2.5 per cent of
nominal full capacity of the tank at which the manufacturer has
declared that the severe inducement system will be activated.
A.1.4.6.2.1. The manufacturer may, with the agreement of the test agency,
simulate continuous running by extracting reagent from the tank,
either whilst the engine is running or whilst it is stopped.
A.1.4.6.3. When the system is checked for its reaction in the case of a failure
that is not a lack of reagent in the tank, the engine system shall then
be run for the relevant number of operating hours indicated in Table
2 of Appendix 2 or, at the choice of the manufacturer, until the
relevant counter has reached the value at which the severe
inducement system is activated.
A.1.4.6.4. The demonstration of the severe inducement system shall be deemed
to be accomplished if, at the end of each demonstration test
performed in accordance with A.1.4.6.2 and A.1.4.6.3 the
manufacturer has demonstrated to the test agency that the required
vehicle speed limitation mechanism has been activated.
A.1.5. Demonstration of the vehicle speed limitation following
activation of the severe inducement system
A.1.5.1. The demonstration of the vehicle speed limitation following
activation of the severe inducement system shall be performed by the
presentation to the test agency of a technical case using evidence
such as algorithms, functional analyses, and the result of previous
tests.
A.1.5.1.1. Alternatively, if the manufacturer chooses, and subject to the
agreement of the test agency, the demonstration of vehicle speed
limitation may be performed on a complete vehicle in accordance
with the requirements of clause A.1.5.4, either by mounting the
vehicle on a suitable test bed or by running it on a test track under
controlled conditions.
A.1.5.2. When the manufacturer applies for an approval of an engine or
engine family as a separate technical unit, the manufacturer shall
provide the test agency with evidence that the installation
documentation package complies with the provisions of clause
2.2.4.of this chapter concerning the measures to ensure that the
vehicle, when used on the road or elsewhere as appropriate, will
comply with the requirements of this chapter regarding severe
inducement.
A.1.5.3. If the test agency is not satisfied with the evidence of proper
operation of the severe inducement system that is provided by the
manufacturer, the test agency may request a demonstration on a
single representative vehicle in order to confirm proper operation of
373/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
the system. The vehicle demonstration shall be performed in

accordance with the requirements of clause A.1.5.4. of this appendix.
A.1.5.4. Additional demonstration for confirming the effect of activation
of the severe inducement system on a vehicle
A.1.5.4.1. This demonstration shall be performed at the request of the test
agency when it is not satisfied with the evidence of proper operation
of the severe inducement system provided by the manufacturer. This
demonstration shall be performed at the earliest opportunity in
agreement with the test agency.
A.1.5.4.2. One of the failures defined in clauses 6 to 9 of this chapter shall be
selected by the manufacturer, and shall be introduced or simulated
on the engine system, as the manufacturer and the test agency agree.
A.1.5.4.3. The inducement system shall be brought by the manufacturer to a
state where the low-level inducement system has been activated and
the severe inducement system has not yet been activated.
A.1.5.4.4. The vehicle shall be operated until the counter associated with the
selected failure has reached the relevant number of operating hours
indicated in Table 2 of Appendix 2 or, as appropriate, until either the
reagent tank is empty or, has reached the level below 2.5 per cent of
nominal full capacity of the tank at which the manufacturer has
chosen to activate the severe inducement system.
A.1.5.4.5. If the manufacturer has opted for the “disable after restart” approach
referred to in clause 5.4.1. of this chapter, the vehicle shall be
operated until the end of the current operating sequence, which must
include a demonstration that the vehicle is capable of exceeding 20
km/h. After restart, the vehicle speed shall be limited to no more than
20 km/h.
A.1.5.4.6. If the manufacturer has opted for the “disable after fuelling”
approach referred to in clause 5.4.2. of this chapter, the vehicle shall
be operated for a short distance, chosen by the manufacturer, after it
has been brought to a state where there is sufficient spare capacity in
the tank to permit it to be refuelled with the amount of fuel defined
in clause 5.4.2. of this chapter. The vehicle operation before refueling
shall include a demonstration that the vehicle is capable of exceeding
20 km/h. After re-fuelling the vehicle with the amount of fuel defined
in clause 5.4.2. of this chapter the vehicle speed shall be limited to
no more than 20 km/h.
A.1.5.4.7. If the manufacturer has opted for the “disable after parking”
approach referred to in clause 5.4.3. of this chapter, the vehicle shall
be stopped after having been run for a short distance, chosen by the
manufacturer, which is sufficient to demonstrate that the vehicle is
capable of exceeding a speed of 20 km/h. After the vehicle has been
stationary for more than one hour, the vehicle speed shall be limited
to no more than 20 km/h.
374/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
DESCRIPTION OF THE DRIVER WARNING AND
INDUCEMENT ACTIVATION AND DEACTIVATION
MECHANISMS
A.2.1. To complement the requirements specified in this chapter concerning
the driver warning and inducement activation and deactivation
mechanisms, this Appendix specifies the technical requirements for an
implementation of those activation and deactivation mechanisms
consistent with the OBD provisions of chapter 8B.
All definitions used in chapter 8B are applicable to this Appendix.
A.2.2. Activation and deactivation mechanisms of the driver warning system
A.2.2.1. The driver warning system shall be activated when the diagnostic
trouble code (DTC) associated with a malfunction justifying its
activation has the status defined in Table 1.
Table 1
Activation of the Driver Warning System
Failure type DTC status for activation of the
warning system
poor reagent quality confirmed and active
Low reagent potential (if detected after
consumption 10 hours), potential or confirmed
and active otherwise
absence of dosing confirmed and active
impeded EGR valve confirmed and active
malfunction of the confirmed and active
monitoring system
A.2.2.1.1. If the counter associated with the relevant failure is not at zero, and is
consequently indicating that the monitor has detected a situation where
the malfunction may have occurred for a second or subsequent time,
the driver warning system shall be activated when the DTC has the
status "potential".
A.2.2.2. The driver warning system shall be deactivated when the diagnostic
system concludes that the malfunction relevant to that warning is no
longer present or when the information, including DTCs relative to the
failures, justifying its activation is erased by a scan tool.
A.2.2.2.1 Erasing of failure information by means of a scan tool
A.2.2.2.1.1. Erasing of information, including DTCs relative to failures justifying
the activation of a driver warning signal and of their associated data,
by means of a scan tool shall be performed in accordance with chapter
8B.
A.2.2.2.1.2. The erasing of failure information shall only be possible under
“engine-off” conditions.
375/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A.2.2.2.1.3. When failure information, including DTCs, is erased, any counter

associated with these failures and which is specified in this chapter as
one that must not be erased shall not be erased.
A.2.3. Activation and deactivation mechanism of the driver inducement
system
A.2.3.1. The driver inducement system shall be activated when the warning
system is active and the counter relevant to the type of malfunction
justifying its activation has reached the value specified in Table 2.
A.2.3.2. The driver inducement system shall be deactivated when the system
no longer detects a malfunction justifying its activation, or if the
information, including the DTCs, relative to the failures justifying its
activation has been erased by a scan tool or maintenance tool.
A.2.3.3. The driver warning and inducement systems shall be immediately
activated or deactivated as appropriate in accordance with the
provisions of clause 6 of this chapter after assessment of the reagent
quantity in the reagent tank. In that case, the activation or deactivation
mechanisms shall not depend upon the status of any associated DTC.
A.2.4. Counter Mechanism
A.2.4.1. General
A.2.4.1.1. To comply with the requirements of this chapter, the system shall
separate counters to record the number of hours during which the
engine has been operated while the system has detected any of the
following:
(a)An incorrect reagent quality;
(b)An incorrect reagent consumption;
(c) An interruption of reagent dosing activity;
(d)An impeded EGR valve,
(e)A failure of the monitoring system as defined in point (b) of clause
9.1 of this chapter.
A.2.4.1.2. Each of these counters shall count up to the maximum value provided
in a 2byte counter with 1-hour resolution, and shall hold that value
unless the conditions allowing the counter to be reset to zero are met.
A.2.4.1.3. A manufacturer may use a single or multiple monitoring system
counters.
A single counter may accumulate the number of hours of 2 or more
different malfunctions relevant to that type of counter.
A.2.4.1.3.1. When the manufacturer decides to use multiple monitoring system
counters, the system shall be capable of assigning a specific
monitoring system counter to each malfunction that is relevant, in
accordance with this chapter, to that type of counter.
376/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A.2.4.2. Principle of Counter Mechanisms

A.2.4.2.1. Each of the counters shall operate as follows:
A.2.4.2.1.1. If starting from zero, the counter shall begin counting as soon as a
malfunction relevant to that counter is detected and the corresponding
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has the status described in Table 1.
A.2.4.2.1.2. The counter shall halt and hold its current value if a single monitoring
event occurs and the malfunction that originally activated the counter
is no longer detected or if the failure has been erased by a scan tool or
a maintenance tool.
A.2.4.2.1.2.1. If the counter stops counting when the severe inducement system is
active, the counter shall be kept frozen at the value defined in Table 2
A.2.4.2.1.2.2 In the case of a single monitoring system counter, that counter shall
continue counting if a malfunction relevant to that counter has been
detected and its corresponding Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has the
status "confirmed and active". It shall halt and hold the value specified
in clause A.2.4.2.1.2, or A.2.4.2.1.2.1 of this appendix as appropriate,
if no malfunction that would justify the counter activation is detected
or if all the failures relevant to that counter have been erased by a scan
tool or a maintenance tool.
Table 2
Counters and Inducement
DTC status Counter Coun Frozen
for first value for ter value held
activation of low level value by the
the counter inducement for counter
sever during the
e period just
induc after serve
ement inducement
Reagent Confirmed and 10 hours 20 18 hours
quality counter active hours
Reagent Potential or 10 hours 20 18 hours
consumption confirmed and hours
counter active
(see Table 1)
Dosing counter Confirmed and 10 hours 20 18 hours
active hours
EGR valve Confirmed and 36 hours 100 95 hours
counter active hours
Monitoring Confirmed and 36 hours 100 95 hours
system counter active hours
377/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A.2.4.2.1.3. Once frozen, the counter shall be reset to zero when the monitors
relevant to that counter have run at least once to completion of their
monitoring cycle without having detected a malfunction and no
malfunction relevant to that counter has been detected during 36 engine
operating hours since the counter was last held (see Figure 1).
A.2.4.2.1.4. The counter shall continue counting from the point at which it had been
held if a malfunction relevant to that counter is detected during a period
when the counter is frozen (see Figure 1).
Figure 1
Reactivation and resetting to zero of a counter
after a period when its value has been frozen
A.2.5. Illustration of the activation and deactivation and counter

mechanisms.
A.2.5.1. This clause illustrates the activation and deactivation and counter
mechanisms for some typical cases. The figures and descriptions given
in clauses A2.5.2, A.2.5.3 and A.2.5.4. of this appendix are provided
solely for the purposes of illustration in this chapter and should not be
referenced as examples of either the requirements of this Standard or as
definitive statements of the processes involved. For simplification
purposes, for example, the fact that the warning system will also be
active when the inducement system is active has not been mentioned in
the illustrations given.
A.2.5.2. Figure 2 illustrates the operation of the activation and deactivation
mechanisms when monitoring the reagent availability for five cases:
378/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
(a)Use case 1: the driver continues operating the vehicle in spite of the
warning until vehicle operation is disabled;
(b)Repair case 1 ("adequate" refilling): the driver refills the reagent tank
so that a level above the 10% threshold is reached. Warning and
inducement are de-activated;
(c)Repair cases 2 and 3 ("inadequate" refilling): The warning system is
activated. The level of warning depends on the amount of available
reagent;
(d)Repair case 4 ("very inadequate" refilling): The low-level inducement
is activated immediately.
Figure 2
Reagent Availability
2.5.3 Figure 3 illustrates three cases of wrong urea quality:
(a) Use case 1: the driver continues operating the vehicle in spite of
the warning until vehicle operation is disabled.
(b)Repair case 1 ("bad" or "dishonest" repair): after disablement of
the vehicle, the driver changes the quality of the reagent, but, soon
after, changes it again for a poor quality one. The inducement
system is immediately reactivated and vehicle operation is
disabled after 2 engine operating hours.
(c) Repair case 2 ("good" repair): after disablement of the vehicle, the
driver rectifies the quality of the reagent. However, sometime
afterwards, he refills again with a poor quality reagent. The
warning, inducement, and counting processes restart from zero.
379/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Figure 3 -Filling with poor reagent quality

2.5.4 Figure 4 illustrates three cases of failure of the urea dosing system.
This figure also illustrates the process that applies in the case of the
monitoring failures described in clause 9 of this chapter.
(a)Use case 1: the driver continues operating the vehicle in spite of
the warning until vehicle operation is disabled.
(b)Repair case 1 ("good" repair): after disablement of the vehicle, the
driver repairs the dosing system. However, sometime afterwards,
the dosing system fails again. The warning, inducement, and
counting processes restart from zero.
(c)Repair case 2 ("bad" repair): during the low-level inducement time
(torque reduction), the driver repairs the dosing system. Soon after,
however, the dosing system fails again. The low-level inducement
system is immediately reactivated and the counter restarts from the
value it had at the time of repair.
Figure 4
Failure of the Reagent Dosing System
380/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
LOW LEVEL INDUCEMENT TORQUE REDUCTION SCHEME
This diagram illustrates the provisions of clause 5.3 of this chapter on
torque reduction.
381/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
DEMONSTRATION OF CORRECT INSTALLATION ON A VEHICLE IN
THE CASE OF ENGINES TYPE-APPROVED AS A SYSTEM
This chapter applies when the vehicle manufacturer requests type-approval of a

vehicle with an approved engine with regard to emissions in accordance with this
Standard.
In this case, and in addition to the installation requirements of clause 6 of Chapter-
1 of this part, a demonstration of the correct installation is required. This
demonstration shall be performed by the presentation to the test agency of a
technical case using evidence such as engineering drawings, functional analyses,
and the results of previous tests.
Where appropriate, and if the manufacturer chooses, the evidence presented may
include installations of systems or components on real or simulated vehicles,
provided that the manufacturer can present evidence that the presented installation
properly represents the standard that will be achieved in production.
The demonstration shall address the conformity of the following elements to the
requirements of this chapter:
(a)The installation on board the vehicle as regards its compatibility with the
engine system (hardware, software and communication);
(b)The warning and inducement systems (for example, pictograms, activation
schemes, etc.);
(c)The reagent tank and the elements (for example, sensors) mounted on the
vehicle for the purpose of complying with this chapter.
Correct activation of the warning and inducement systems, and of the information
storage and on-board and off-board communication systems, may be checked. No
check of these systems shall require the dismounting of the engine system or
components, nor shall it generate unnecessary testing burden by requiring
processes such as changing of the urea quality or running of the vehicle or engine
for long periods of time. In order to minimize the burden upon the vehicle
manufacturer, electric disconnections and simulation of counters with high
operating hours shall be selected as checks on these systems if possible.
382/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
ACCESS TO "NOx CONTROL INFORMATION”
5.1. This Appendix describes the specifications permitting access to

information required in order to check the status of the vehicle with
regard to the correct operation of the NOx control system ("NOx
control information").
5.2. Access Methods
5.2.1. The "NOx control information" shall be provided only in accordance
with the standard or standards used in association with the retrieval of
engine system information from the OBD system.
5.2.2. Access to the "NOx control information" shall not be dependent on any
access code or other device or method obtainable only from the
manufacturer or the manufacturer’s suppliers. Interpretation of that
information shall not require any specialized or unique decoding
information, unless that information is publicly available.
5.2.3. It shall be possible to retrieve all "NOx control information" from the
system using the access method that is used to retrieve OBD
information in accordance with chapter 8A.
5.2.4. It shall be possible to retrieve all "NOx control information"
information from the system using the test equipment that is used to
retrieve OBD information in accordance with chapter 8A.
5.2.5. The "NOx control information" shall be available through "read-only"
access (that is, it shall not be possible to clear, reset, erase, or modify
any of the data).
5.3. Information Content
5.3.1. The "NOx control information" shall contain at least the following
information:
(a)The VIN (vehicle identification number);
(b)The status of the warning system (active; non-active);
(c)The status of the low-level inducement system (active; enabled; non-
active);
(d)The status of the severe inducement system (active; enabled; non-
active);
(e)Number of warm-up cycles and number of engine operating hours
since recorded "NOx control information" was cleared due to
service or repair;
(f)The types of the counters relevant to this chapter (reagent quality,
reagent consumption, dosing system, EGR valve, monitoring system)
and the number of engine operating hours indicated by each of these
counters; in the case of multiple counters being used, the value to be
considered for the purposes of the "NOx control information" is the
value of each of the counters relative to the failure under consideration
having the highest value;
(g)The DTCs associated with the malfunctions relevant to this chapter
and when their status is 'potential' or 'confirmed and active';
383/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
DEMONSTRATION OF THE MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE REAGENT
CONCENTRATION CD MIN
1. The manufacturer shall demonstrate the correct value of the minimum

acceptable reagent quality CD min during type approval by performing
the hot part of the WHTC cycle, in accordance with the provisions of
chapter 3 of this standard, using a reagent with the concentration CD
min.
2 The test shall follow the appropriate pre-conditioning cycle, permitting

a closed loop NOx control system to perform adaptation to the quality
of the reagent with the concentration CD min.
3.. The pollutant emissions resulting from this test shall be lower than the
emission limits specified in clauses 7.1.1 or 7.1.1.1 of this chapter.
384/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
CHAPTER 11
CO2 EMISSIONS AND FUEL CONSUMPTION
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 This chapter sets out the provisions and test procedures for reporting
CO2 emissions and fuel consumption.
2.0 General Requirements
2.1. CO2 emissions and fuel consumption shall be determined over the
WHTC and WHSC test cycles in accordance with clauses 7.2 to 7.8
of chapter 3 of this part
2.2. The test results shall be reported as cycle averaged brake specific
values and expressed in the unit of g/kWh.
3. Determination of CO2 emissions
3.1. Raw measurement
This clause shall apply, if CO2 is measured in the raw exhaust gas.
3.1.1. Measurement
CO2 in the raw exhaust gas emitted by the engine submitted for
testing shall be measured with a non-dispersive infrared (NDIR)
analyzer in accordance with clause 9.3.2.3 and Appendix 2 to
chapter3 of this part.
The measurement system shall meet the linearity requirements of
clause 9.2. and Table 7 of chapter3 of this part.
The measurement system shall meet the requirements of clauses
9.3.1., 9.3.4. and 9.3.5. of chapter3 of this part.
3.1.2. Data Evaluation
The relevant data shall be recorded and stored in accordance with
clause 7.6.6. of chapter3 of this part.The traces of the recorded
concentrations and the trace of the exhaust gas mass flow rate shall
be time aligned with the transformation time as defined in clause
3.1.30. of chapter3 of this part.
3.1.3. Calculation of cycle Averaged Emission
8.1. of chapter3 of this part. shall be applied to the instantaneous
concentration values before any further calculation is done.
The mass of CO2 (g/test) shall be determined by calculating the

instantaneous mass emissions from the raw CO2 concentration and
the exhaust gas mass flow, aligned with respect to their
transformation times as determined in accordance with clause
8.4.2.2. Of chapter3.integrating the instantaneous values over the
cycle, and multiplying the integrated value with the u values of CO2
from Table 5 of chapter3.
385/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
in
1
mCO2 = u
i 1
CO2  c CO2,i  q mew,i 
f
(in g/test)
where:
uCO2 is the ratio between CO2 density and density of the
exhaust gas
cCO2,i is the instantaneous CO2 concentration in the exhaust gas,
ppm
qmew, i is the instantaneous exhaust mass flow, kg/s
Optionally, the CO2 mass may be calculated in accordance with
clause 8.4.2.4. of chapter3. 4 by using a CO2 molar mass (MCO2) of
44.01 g/mol.
3.2. Dilute measurement
This clause applies, if CO2 is measured in the dilute exhaust gas.
3.2.1. Measurement
CO2 in the dilute exhaust gas emitted by the engine submitted for
testing shall be measured with a non-dispersive infrared (NDIR)
analyzer in accordance with clause 9.3.2.3 and Appendix 2 to
chapter3 of this part. Dilution of the exhaust shall be done with
filtered ambient air, synthetic air or nitrogen. The flow capacity of
the full flow system shall be large enough to completely eliminate
water condensation in the dilution and sampling systems.
The measurement system shall meet the linearity requirements of
clause 9.2. and Table 7 of chapter3 of this part.
The measurement system shall meet the requirements of clauses
9.3.1., 9.3.4. and 9.3.5. of chapter3 of this part.
3.2.2. Data evaluation
clause 7.6.6. of chapter3 of this part.
3.2.3. Calculation of cycle averaged emission
8.1. of chapter3 shall be applied.
For systems with constant mass flow (with heat exchanger), the mass
of CO2 (g/test) shall be determined with the following equation:
mCO2 = 0.001519 x cCO2 x med (in g/test)

Where
cCO2 is the average background corrected CO2 concentration
0.001519 is the ratio between CO2 density and density of air (u
factor)
386/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
med is the total diluted exhaust mass over the cycle, kg

For systems with flow compensation (without heat exchanger), the
mass of CO2 (g/test) shall be determined by calculating the
instantaneous mass emissions and integrating the instantaneous
values over the cycle. Also, the background correction shall be
applied directly to the instantaneous concentration values. The
following equation shall be applied:
MCO2=
 m
n
ed,i  cCO2,e  0.001519   med  cCO2,d  1  1/D   0.001519 

i 1
where:
cCO2,e is the CO2 concentration measured in the diluted exhaust
gas, ppm
cCO2,d is the CO2 concentration measured in the dilution air,
ppm
0.001519 is the ratio between CO2 density and density of
air (u factor)
med,i is the instantaneous mass of the diluted exhaust gas, kg
med is the total mass of diluted exhaust gas over the cycle, kg
Optionally, the u factor may be calculated with equation 57 in
clause 8.5.2.3.1. of chapter3 by using a CO2 molar mass
(MCO2) of 44.01 g/mol.
CO2 background correction shall be applied in accordance with
clause 8.5.2.3.2. of chapter3.
3.3 Calculation of Brake Specific Emissions
The cycle work needed for the calculation of brake specific CO2
emissions shall be determined in accordance with clause 7.8.6. of
chapter3 of this part.
3.3.1 WHTC
The brake specific emissions eCO2 (g/kWh) shall be calculated

as follows.
0.14  m CO2,cold   0.86  m CO2,hot 
eCO 2 
0.14  W act, cold   0.86  W act, hot 
where
mCO2, cold is the CO2 mass emissions of the cold start
test, g/test
mCO2, hot is the CO2 mass emissions of the hot start
test, g/test
387/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Wact, cold is the actual cycle work of the cold start

test, kWh
Wact, hot is the actual cycle work of the hot start test,
kWh
3.3.2 WHSC
The brake specific emissions eCO2 (g/kWh) shall be calculated as

follows:
mCO2
eCO 2 
Wact
where
mCO2 is the CO2 mass emissions, g/test
Wact is the actual cycle work, kWh
4 Determination of Fuel Consumption
4.1 Measurement
Measurement of the instantaneous fuel flow shall be done by

systems that preferably measure mass directly such as the
following:
(a)mass flow sensor
(b)fuel weighing
(c)Coriolis meter
The fuel flow measurement system shall have the following:
a) an accuracy of ± 2 per cent of the reading or ± 0.3 per cent of
full scale whichever is better;
b) a precision of ± 1 per cent of full scale or better;
c) a rise time that does not exceed 5 s.
The fuel flow measurement system shall meet the linearity
requirements of clause 9.2. And Table 7 of chapter3.
Precautions shall be taken to avoid measurement errors. Such
precautions shall at least include the following:
(a) The careful installation of the device according to the
instrument manufacturers’ recommendations and to good
engineering practice,
(b) Flow conditioning as needed to prevent wakes, eddies,
circulating flows, or flow pulsations that affect accuracy
or precision of the fuel flow system,
(c) Account for any fuel that bypasses the engine or returns from
the engine to the fuel storage tank.
388/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
4.2 Data Evaluation

clause 7.6.6. of chapter3 of this part.
4.3 Calculation of cycle averaged fuel consumption.
The mass of fuel (g/test) shall be determined by the sum of the
instantaneous values over the cycle, as follows:
in
1
qmf = q
i 1
mf,i 
f
 1000
where:
qmf,i is the instantaneous fuel flow, kg/s
4.4 Calculation of brake specific fuel consumption
The cycle work needed for the calculation of the brake specific fuel
consumption shall be determined in accordance with clause 7.8.6. of
chapter3 of this part
4.4.1. WHTC
The brake specific fuel consumption ef (g/kWh) shall be

0.14  q mf,cold   0.86  q mf,hot 
ef 
0.14  Wact,cold   0.86  W act, hot 
where
qmf, cold is the fuel mass of the cold start test, g/test
qmf, hot is the fuel mass of the hot start test, g/test
Wact, cold is the actual cycle work of the cold start test, kWh
Wact, hot is the actual cycle work of the hot start test, kWh
4.4.2 WHSC
The brake specific fuel consumption ef (g/kWh) shall be

q mf
ef 
Wact
where
qmf is the fuel mass, g/test
Wact is the actual cycle work, kWh
389/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
PROVISIONS ON CO2 EMISSIONS AND FUEL
CONSUMPTION FOR EXTENSION OF A TYPE APPROVAL
FOR A VEHICLE TYPE APPROVED UNDER THIS
STANDARD WITH A REFERENCE MASS EXCEEDING
2,380 KG BUT NOT EXCEEDING 2,610 KG
A.1.1. Introduction
A.1.1.1. This Appendix sets out the provisions and test procedures for
reporting CO2 emissions and fuel consumption for extension of type
approval for a vehicle type approved under this Standard to a vehicle
with a reference mass exceeding 2,380 kg but not exceeding 2,610
kg.
A.1.2. General Requirements
A.1.2.1. In order to receive an extension of an type-approval for a vehicle in
respect of its engine type approved under this Standard to a vehicle
with a reference mass exceeding 2,380 kg but not exceeding 2,610kg
the manufacturer shall meet the requirements of chapter 19 of AIS-
137 (Part 3) with the exceptions specified below.
A.1.2.1.2. Chapter 19 of AIS-137 (Part 3) shall be understood as follows:
(1)Density: measured on the test fuel according to ISO 3675 or an
equivalent method. For petrol, diesel, ethanol (E85) and ethanol
for dedicated C.I. engines (ED95) the density measured at 288 K
(15°C) will be used; for LPG and natural gas/biomethane a
reference density shall be used, as follows:
0.538kg/L for LPG
0.654 kg/m3 for NG
(2) Hydrogen-carbon-oxygen ratio: fixed values shall be used
which are:
C1H1,93O0,032 for petrol (E10),
C1H1,86O0,006 for diesel (B7),
C1H2,525 for LPG (liquefied petroleum gas),
CH4 for NG (natural gas) and biomethane,
C1H2,74O0,385 for ethanol (E85),
C1H2,92O0,46 for ethanol for dedicated C.I. engines (ED95)
A 1.2.1.3 Chapter 19 of AIS-137 (Part 3) shall be understood as follows:
(a) for
vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol
(E10):
FC = (0.120/D) ∙ [(0.831 ∙ HC) + (0.429 ∙ CO) + (0.273 ∙ CO2)]
for vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG:
FC norm = (0.1212/0,538) ∙ [(0.825 ∙ HC) + (0.429 ∙ CO) + (0.273 ∙ CO2)]
390/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from the
composition that is assumed for the calculation of the normalised
consumption, on the manufacturer’s request a correction factor cf
may be applied, as follows
FC norm = (0.1212/0,538) ∙ (cf) ∙ [(0.825 ∙ HC) + (0.429 ∙ CO)
+ (0.273 ∙ CO2)]
The correction factor cf, which may be applied, is determined as
follows:
C .f = 0.825 + 0.0693 nactual
where:
nactual is the actual H/C ratio of the fuel used
(c) for vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with

NG/biomethane:
FC norm = (0.1336/0,654) ∙ [(0.749 ∙ HC) + (0.429 ∙ CO) + (0.273 ∙
CO2)]
(d) for vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with
ethanol (E85):
FC = (0.1742/D) ∙ [(0.574 ∙ HC) + (0.429 ∙ CO) + (0.273 ∙ CO2)]
(e ) for vehicles with a compression ignition engine fuelled with
diesel (B7):
FC = (0.1165/D) ∙ [(0.859 ∙ HC) + (0.429 ∙ CO) + (0.273 ∙ CO2)]
(f) for vehicles with a dedicated compression ignition engine
fuelled with ethanol (ED95)
FC = (0.186/D) ∙ [(0.538 ∙ HC) + (0.429 ∙ CO) + (0.273 ∙ CO2
In these formulae:
FC is the fuel consumption in litre per 100 km (in the case of
petrol, ethanol, LPG, diesel or biodiesel) or in m3 per 100 km
(in the case of natural gas)
HC is the measured emission of hydrocarbons in g/km
CO is the measured emission of carbon monoxide in g/km
CO2 is the measured emission of carbon dioxide in g/km
D is the density of the test fuel
In case of gaseous fuels this is the density at 288K (150C)
391/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
CHATER 12
TYPE APPROVAL OF REPLACEMENT POLLUTION CONTROL
DEVICES AS SEPARATE TECHNICAL UNIT
1. Introduction
1.1. This chapter contains additional requirements for the type approval
of replacement pollution control devices as separate technical units.
1.2. Definition
1.2.1. "Type of pollution control device" means catalytic converters and
particulate filters which do not differ in any of the following
essential aspects:
(a) Number of substrates, structure and material;
(b) Type of activity of each substrate;
(c) Volume, ratio of frontal area and substrate length;
(d) Catalyst material content;
(e) Catalyst material ratio;
(f) Cell density;
(g) Dimensions and shape;
(h) Thermal protection.
2.1. Marking
2.1.1. Each Replacement pollution control device shall bear at least the
following identifications:
(a) The manufacturer’s name or trade mark;
(b)The make and identifying part number of the replacement
pollution control device as recorded in the information document
issued in accordance with the model set out in Appendix 1 to this
chapter.
2.1.2 Each original replacement pollution control device shall bear at
least the following identifications:
(a) The vehicle or engine manufacturer’s name or trade mark;
(b)The make and identifying part number of the original
replacement pollution control device as recorded in the information
referred to in clause 2.3.
2.2 Documentation
2.2.1 Each replacement pollution control device shall be accompanied by
(a) The manufacturer’s name or trade mark;
(b) The make and identifying part number of the replacement
pollution control device as recorded in the information
392/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
document issued in accordance with the model set out in

Appendix 1 to this chapter;
(c) The vehicles or engines including year of manufacture for which
the replacement pollution control device is approved,
including, where applicable, a marking to identify if the
replacement pollution control device is suitable for fitting to a
vehicle that is equipped with an onboard diagnostic (OBD)
system;
(d) Installation instructions.
The information referred to in this point shall be available in the
product catalogue distributed to points of sale by the manufacturer
of replacement pollution control devices.
2.2.2 Each original replacement pollution control device shall be
accompanied by the following information:
(a) The vehicle or engine manufacturer’s name or trade mark;
(b)The make and identifying part number of the original
replacement pollution control device as recorded in the
information mentioned in clause 2.3.;
(c) The vehicles or engines for which the original replacement
pollution control device is of a type covered by clause
3.2.12.2.1. of Part 1 of chapter 1, including, where applicable,
a marking to identify if the original replacement pollution
control device is suitable for fitting to a vehicle that is equipped
with an on-board diagnostic (OBD) system;
(d) Installation instructions.
This information referred to in this point shall be available in
the product catalogue distributed to points of sale by the
vehicle or engine manufacturer.
2.3 For an original replacement pollution control device, the vehicle or
engine manufacturer shall provide to the test agency the necessary
information in electronic format which makes the link between the
relevant part numbers and the type approval documentation.
This information shall contain the following:
(a) Make(s) and type(s) of vehicle or engine;
(b) Make(s) and type(s) of original replacement pollution control
device;
(c) Part number(s) of original replacement pollution control device;
(d) Type approval number of the relevant engine or vehicle type(s).
393/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
3. Separate Technical Unit Type Approval Mark

3.1. Every replacement pollution control device conforming to the type
approved under this Standard as a separate technical unit shall bear
a type approval mark.
4. Technical requirements
4.1. General requirements
4.1.1. The replacement pollution control device shall be designed,
constructed and capable of being mounted so as to enable the
engine and vehicle to comply with the rules with which it was
originally in compliance and that pollutant emissions are
effectively limited throughout the normal life of the vehicle under
normal conditions of use.
4.1.2. The installation of the replacement pollution control device shall be
at the exact position of the original equipment pollution control
device, and the position on the exhaust line of the exhaust gas,
temperature and pressure sensors shall not be modified.
4.1.3. If the original equipment pollution control device includes thermal
protections, the replacement pollution control device shall include
equivalent protections.
4.1.4. Upon request of the applicant for the type approval of the
replacement component, the test agency that granted the original
type approval of the engine system shall make available on a non-
discriminatory basis, the information referred to in clauses
3.2.12.2.6.8.1.1. and 3.2.12.2.6.8.2.1. in the information document
contained in chapter 2 for each engine to be tested.
4.2 General Durability Requirements
The replacement pollution control device shall be durable, that is
designed, constructed and capable of being mounted so that
reasonable resistance to the corrosion and oxidation phenomena to
which it is exposed is obtained, having regard to the conditions of
use of the vehicle.
The design of the replacement pollution control device shall be such
that the elements active in controlling emissions are adequately
protected from mechanical shock so as to ensure that pollutant
emissions are effectively limited throughout the normal life of the
vehicle under normal conditions of use.
The applicant for type approval shall provide to the test agency
details of the test used to establish robustness to mechanical shock
and the results of that test.
4.3 Requirements Regarding Emission
4.3.1 Outline of procedure for evaluation of emissions
The engines indicated in clause 3.4.4. (a) of Chapter-1 of this part
equipped with a complete emissions control system including the
replacement pollution control device of the type for which approval
is requested, shall be subjected to tests appropriate for the intended
application as described in chapter 3 , in order to compare its
394/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
performance with the original emissions control system according

to the procedure described below.
4.3.1.1 Where the replacement pollution control device does not comprise
the complete emissions control system, only new original
equipment or new original replacement pollution control
components shall be used to provide a complete system.
4.3.1.2 The emissions control system shall be aged according to the
procedure described in clause 4.3.2.4. and retested to establish the
durability of its emissions performance.
The durability of a replacement pollution control device is
determined from a comparison of the 2 successive sets of exhaust
gas emissions tests.
(a) The first set is that made with the replacement pollution control
device which has been run in with 12 WHSC cycles;
(b) The second set is that made with the replacement pollution
control device which has been aged by the procedures detailed
below.
Where approval is applied for different types of engines from the
same engine manufacturer, and provided that these different types
of engines are fitted with an identical original equipment pollution
control system, the testing may be limited to at least two engines
selected after agreement with the test agency
4.3.2 Procedure for evaluation of emissions performance of a
replacement pollution control device.
4.3.2.1 The engine or engines shall be fitted with a new original equipment
pollution control device according to clause 4.11.4. of Chapter-1 of
this Standard.
The exhaust after-treatment system shall be preconditioned with 12
WHSC cycles. After this preconditioning, the engines shall be
tested according to the WHDC test procedures specified in chapter
3. Three exhaust gas tests of each appropriate type shall be
performed.
The test engines with the original exhaust after-treatment system or
original replacement exhaust after-treatment system shall comply
with the limit values according to the type approval of the engine
or vehicle.
4.3.2.2 Exhaust Gas Test with Replacement Pollution Control Device
The replacement pollution control device to be evaluated shall be
fitted to the exhaust after-treatment system tested according to the
requirements of clause 4.3.2.1., replacing the relevant original
equipment exhaust after treatment device.
The exhaust after-treatment system incorporating the replacement
pollution control device shall then be preconditioned with 12
WHSC cycles. After this preconditioning, the engines shall be
tested according to the WHDC procedures described in chapter3 of
395/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
this part. Three exhaust gas tests of each appropriate type shall be
performed.
4.3.2.3 Initial evaluation of the emission of pollutants of engines equipped
with replacement pollution control devices.
The requirements regarding emissions of the engines equipped with
the replacement pollution control device shall be deemed to be
fulfilled if the results for each regulated pollutant (CO, HC, NMHC,
methane, NOx, NH3, particulate mass and particle number as
appropriate for the type approval of the engine) meet the following
conditions:
(1) M ≤ 0.85S + 0.4G
(2) M ≤ G
Where:
M: mean value of the emissions of one pollutant obtained
from the three tests with the replacement pollution
control device;
S: mean value of the emissions of one pollutant obtained
from the three tests with the original or original
replacement pollution control device;
G: limit value of the emissions of one pollutant
according to the type approval of the vehicle.
4.3.2.4 Durability of Emissions Performance
The exhaust after-treatment system tested in clause 4.3.2.2. and
incorporating the replacement pollution control device shall be
subjected to the durability procedures described in Appendix 4 to
this chapter.
4.3.2.5 Exhaust gas test with aged replacement pollution control device
The aged exhaust after-treatment systems shall be preconditioned
with 12 WHSC cycles and subsequently tested using the WHDC
procedures described in chapter3. Three exhaust gas tests of each
appropriate type shall be performed
4.3.2.6 Determination of ageing factor for the replacement pollution control
device
The ageing factor for each pollutant shall be the ratio of the applied
emission values at the useful life end point and at the start of the
service accumulation.
(e.g. if the emissions of pollutant A at the useful life end point are
1.50 g/kWh and those at the start of the service accumulation are 1.82
g/kWh, the ageing factor is 1.82/1.50 = 1.21).
4.3.2.7 Evaluation of the emission of pollutants of engines equipped with
replacement pollution control devices
The requirements regarding emissions of the engines equipped with
the aged replacement pollution control device (as described in clause
4.3.2.5.) shall be deemed to be fulfilled if the results for each
regulated pollutant (CO, HC, NMHC, methane, NOx, NH3,
particulate mass and particle number as appropriate for the type
approval of the engine) meet the following condition:
396/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
M*AF ≤ G
Where:
M: mean value of the emissions of one pollutant obtained from the
three tests with the preconditioned replacement pollution
control device before ageing (i.e. results from clause 4.3.2.);
AF: the ageing factor for one pollutant;
G: limit value of the emissions of one pollutant according to the
type approval of the vehicle(s).
4.3.3 Replacement Pollution Control Device Technology Family
The manufacturer may identify a replacement pollution control
device technology family, to be identified by basic characteristics
which shall be common to devices within the family. To belong to
the same replacement pollution control device technology family, the
replacement pollution control devices shall have the following:
(a) The same emissions control mechanism (oxidation catalyst,
three-way catalyst, particulate filter, selective catalytic
reduction for NOx etc.);
(b) The same substrate material (same type of ceramic, or same type
of metal);
(c) The same substrate type and cell density;
(d) The same catalytically active materials and, where more than
one, the same ratio of catalytically active materials;
(e) The same total charge of catalytically active materials;
(f) The same type of wash coat applied by the same process. The
aged exhaust after-treatment system incorporating the aged
replacement control device shall then be fitted to the test engine
used in clauses 4.3.2.1. and 4.3.2.2
4.3.4 Assessment of the durability of emissions performance of a
replacement pollution control device by use of a technology family
ageing factor.
Where the manufacturer has identified a replacement pollution
control technology family, the procedures described in clause 4.3.2.
may be used to determine the ageing factors for each pollutant for the
parent of that family. The engine on which these tests are conducted
shall have a minimum engine displacement of 0.75 dm³ per cylinder.
4.3.4.1 Determination of Durability Performance of Family Members
A replacement pollution control device A within a family and
intended to be mounted on an engine of displacement CA may be
considered to have the same ageing factors as the parent replacement
pollution control device P, determined on an engine of displacement
CP, if the following conditions are fulfilled:
VA/CA ≥ VP/CP Where:
VA: Substrate volume (in dm³) of replacement pollution control
device A
VP: Substrate volume (in dm³) of the parent replacement pollution
control device P of the same family and both engines use the same
397/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
method for regeneration of any emissions control devices

incorporated in the original exhaust after-treatment system. This
requirement shall apply only where devices requiring regeneration
are incorporated in the original exhaust after-treatment system.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the emissions durability
performance of other members of the family may be determined
from the emissions results (S) of that family member determined
according to the requirements set out in clauses 4.3.2.1., 4.3.2.2.
and 4.3.2.3. and using the ageing factors determined for the parent
of that family.
4.4 Requirements regarding exhaust back-pressure
The back pressure shall not cause the complete exhaust system to
exceed the value specified according to clause 6.1.2. of Chapter-1
of this part.
4.5. Requirements regarding OBD compatibility (applicable only to
replacement pollution control devices intended to be fitted to
vehicles equipped with an OBD system)
4.5.1. OBD compatibility demonstration is required only when the
original pollution control device was monitored in the original
configuration.
4.5.2. The compatibility of the replacement pollution control device with
the OBD system shall be demonstrated by using the procedures
described in chapter 8Bfor replacement pollution control devices
intended to be fitted to engines or vehicles type-approved in
accordance with this Standard.
4.5.3. The provisions in this Standard applicable to components other than
pollution control devices shall not
4.5.4. In this case, the test agency which granted original type approval of
an engine of a vehicle shall provide, on request and on a non-
discriminatory basis, appendix on test conditions to chapter 1 which
contains the number and type of preconditioning cycles and the type
of test cycle used by the original equipment manufacturer for OBD
testing of the pollution control device.
4.5.5. In order to verify the correct installation and functioning of all other
components monitored by the OBD system, the OBD system shall
indicate no malfunction and have no stored fault codes prior to the
installation of any of the replacement pollution control device. An
evaluation of the status of the OBD system at the end of the tests
described in clauses 4.3.2. to 4.3.2.7. may be used for this purpose.
4.5.6. The malfunction indicator shall not activate during vehicle operation
required by clauses 4.3.2. to 4.3.2.7.
5. Conformity of production
5.1. Measures to ensure the conformity of production shall be taken in
accordance with clause 8. of Chapter-1 of this part.
398/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
5.2. Special provisions

5.2.1. For the application of clause 8. of Chapter-1 of this part, the tests
described in clause 4.3. of this chapter (requirements regarding
emissions) may be carried out. In this case, the holder of the approval
may request, as an alternative, to use as a basis for comparison not
the original equipment pollution control device, but the replacement
pollution control device which was used during the type approval
tests (or another sample that has been proven to conform to the
approved type). Emissions values measured with the sample under
verification shall then on average not exceed by more than 15 per
cent the mean values measured with the sample used for reference.
399/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
MODEL INFORMATION DOCUMENT
Information document No …
Relating to the type approval of replacement pollution control devices
The following information shall be supplied in triplicate and include a
list of contents. Any drawings shall be supplied in appropriate scale and
sufficient detail on size A4 or on a folder of A4 format. Photographs, if
any, shall show sufficient detail.
If the systems, components or separate technical units have electronic
controls, information concerning their performance shall be supplied.
0. General
0.1 Make (trade name of manufacturer): ................................................
0.2. Type: ..................................................................................................
0.2.1. Commercial name(s) (if available): ....................................................
0.3. Means of identification of type: .........................................................
0.5. Name and address of manufacturer: ....................................................
0.7. In the case of components and separate technical units, location and
method of affixing of the approval mark: .......................................
0.8. Name(s) and address (es) of assembly plant(s): ..............................
0.9 Name and address of the manufacturer’s authorised representative (if
any): ...
1.0 Description of the device
1.1. Type of the replacement pollution control device: (oxidation catalyst,
three-way catalyst, SCR catalyst, particulate filter etc.):
............................................
1.2. Drawings of the replacement pollution control device, identifying in
particular all the characteristics referred to under "type of pollution
control device" in clause 1.2.1. of this chapter: ............................
1.3. Description of the engine and vehicle type or types for which the
replacement pollution control device is intended: ...........................
1.3.1. Number(s) and/or symbol(s) characterising the engine and vehicle
type(s): ....
1.3.2. Number(s) and/or symbol(s) characterising the original pollution
control device(s) which the replacement pollution control device is
intended to replace: .......................................... ........................
.......................
1.3.3. Is the replacement pollution control device intended to be compatible
with OBD requirements? (Yes/No)1
1.3.4. Is the replacement pollution control device compatible with existing
vehicle/engine control systems? (Yes/No)1
1.4. Description and drawings showing the position of the replacement
pollution control device relative to the engine exhaust manifold(s):
...............................
400/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
COMMUNICATION CONCERNING THE APPROVAL OF A
REPLACEMENT POLLUTION CONTROL DEVICE PURSUANT TO
AIS 137 PART4 AND ITS AMENDMENTS
SECTION 1
0.1. Make (trade name of manufacturer): .............................................
0.2. Type-................................................................................................
0.3. Means of identification of type marked on the component/separate
technical unit3 (Identifying Part Number): .....................................
0.3.1. Location of that marking: .........................................................
0.4. Name and address of manufacturer: .........................................
0.5. In the case of components and separate technical units, location and
method of affixing of the approval mark: ..........................
0.6. Name and address(es) of assembly plant(s): ..................................
0.7. Name and address of manufacturer’s representative: ......................
SECTION II
1. Additional information
1.1. Make and type of the replacement pollution control device:
(oxidation catalyst, three-way catalyst, SCR catalyst, particulate
filter etc.……………….
1.2. Engine and vehicle type(s) for which the pollution control device
type-………….
1.3. Type(s) of engine on which the replacement pollution control
device has been tested……….
1.3.1. Has the replacement pollution control device demonstrated
compatibility with OBD requirements (Yes/No)4
2. Test Agency responsible for carrying out the tests:
3. Date of test report: ...................................................................
4. Number of test report: ............................................................
5. Remarks: ..............................................................................
401/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
AGEING PROCEDURE FOR EVALUATION OF DURABILITY
1. This appendix set out the procedures for ageing a replacement
pollution control device for the purpose of evaluating the durability.
2. For demonstrating the durability, the replacement pollution control
device shall be subject to the requirements set out in clauses 1. to
3.4.2. of chapter 6 of this part
2.1 For the purpose of demonstrating durability of the replacement
pollution control device the minimum service accumulation periods
as set out in chapter 6 of this part
1. This appendix set out the procedures for ageing a replacement
pollution control device for the purpose of evaluating the durability.
2. For demonstrating the durability, the replacement pollution control
device shall be subject to the requirements set out in clauses 1. to
3.4.2. of chapter 6 of this part.
Table 1
Minimum Service Accumulation Period
Category of vehicle in which engine will Minimum service
be installed accumulation
period
Category N1 vehicles
Category N2 vehicles
Category N3 vehicles with a maximum

technically permissible mass not
exceeding 16 tonnes
Category N3 vehicles with a maximum
technically permissible mass exceeding
16 tonnes
Category M1 vehicles
Category M2 vehicles
Category M3 vehicles of classes I, II, A

and B, with a maximum technically
permissible mass not exceeding 7.5
tonnes
Category M3 vehicles of classes III and B
with a maximum technically permissible
mass exceeding 7.5 tonnes
402/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
CHAPTER 13
ACCESS TO VEHICLE OBD INFORMATION
1. ACCESS TO OBD INFORMATION
1.1. Applications for type approval or amendment of a type approval shall
be accompanied by the relevant information concerning the engine or
vehicle OBD system. This relevant information shall enable
manufacturers of replacement or retrofit components to make the
parts they manufacture compatible with the vehicle OBD system with
a view to fault-free operation assuring the vehicle user against
malfunctions. Similarly, such relevant information shall enable the
manufacturers of diagnostic tools and test equipment to make tools
and equipment that provide for effective and accurate diagnosis of
engine or vehicle emission control systems.
1.2. Upon request, the Test agency shall make clause 2of this chapter
containing the relevant information on the OBD system available to
any interested components, diagnostic tools or test equipment
manufacturer on a non-discriminatory basis.
1.3. If a test agency receives a request from any interested components,
diagnostic tools or test equipment manufacturer for information on
the OBD system of an engine system or vehicle that has been type
approved to this Standard:
The test agency shall, within 30 days, request the manufacturer of the
vehicle in question to make available the information required in
clause 2.1. of this chapter:
The manufacturer shall submit this information to the test agency
within two months of the request;
The test agency shall attach this information to test report
1.4. This requirement shall not invalidate any approval previously granted
pursuant to this Standard nor prevent extensions to such approvals
under the terms of the Standard under which they were originally
granted.
1.5. Information can only be requested for replacement or service
components that are subject to CMVR type approval, or for
components that form part of a system that is subject to CMVR type
approval.
1.6. The request for information shall identify the exact specification of
the engine system or vehicle model for which the information is
required. It shall confirm that the information is required for the
development of replacement or retrofit parts or components or
diagnostic tools or test equipment.
2. OBD DATA
403/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
2.1. The following additional information shall be provided by the engine

or vehicle manufacturer for the purposes of enabling the manufacture
of OBD compatible replacement or service parts and diagnostic tools
and test equipment, unless such information is covered by intellectual
property rights or constitutes specific know-how of the manufacturer
or the OEM supplier(s).
2.1.1. A description of the type and number of the pre-conditioning cycles
used for the original type approval of the engine or vehicle.
2.1.2. A description of the type of the OBD demonstration cycle used for
the original type approval of the engine or vehicle for the component
monitored by the OBD system.
2.1.3. A comprehensive document describing all sensed components with
the strategy for fault detection and MI activation (fixed number of
driving cycles or statistical method), including a list of relevant
secondary sensed parameters for each component monitored by the
OBD system and a list of all OBD output codes and format used (with
an explanation of each code and format) associated with individual
emission-related power-train components and individual non-
emission related components, where monitoring of the component is
used to determine MI activation. In particular, in the case of vehicle
types that use a communication link in accordance with ISO 15765-4
"Road vehicles — Diagnostics on Controller Area Network (CAN) -
Part 4: Requirements for emissions-related systems", a
comprehensive explanation for the data given in service $ 05 Test ID
$ 21 to FF and the data given in service $ 06, and a comprehensive
explanation for the data given in service $06 Test ID $ 00 to FF, for
each OBD monitor ID supported, shall be provided. In case other
communication protocols standards are used, equivalent
comprehensive explanation shall be provided.
2.1.4. The information required by this clause may, for example, be defined
by completing a table as follows:
component FAULT Monitoring Fault MI Secondary Preconditio Demonstra
CODE strategy detection activatio parameter ning tion test
criteria n criteria
SCR P20EE NOx Differe Engine One
catalyst sensor 1 nce speed, OBD
OBD
and 2 betwee 2nd engine test
test
signals n cycle load,
cycle cycle
sensor catalyst
(WHTC
1 and temperat (WHTC
,
sensor ure, , hot
2 reagent hot part
part
signals activity,
exhaust
mass
flow
404/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
CHAPTER 14
ADDITIONAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
DIESEL-GAS DUAL-FUEL ENGINES AND VEHICLES
1. Scope
This chapter shall apply to dual-fuel engines and dual-fuel vehicles.
2. Definitions and Abbreviations
2.1. "Gas Energy Ratio (GER)" means in case of a dual-fuel engine the
ratio (expressed as a percentage) of the energy content of the gaseous
fuel1 over the energy content of both fuels (diesel and gaseous).
2.2. "Average gas ratio" means the average gas energy ratio calculated
over a specific operating sequence.
2.3. "Heavy-Duty Dual-Fuel (HDDF) Type 1A engine" means a dual-
fuel engine that operates over the hot part of the WHTC test-cycle
with an average gas ratio that is not lower than 90 per cent
(GERWHTC ≥ 90 %), and that does not idle using exclusively diesel
fuel, and that has no diesel mode.
2.4 . "Heavy-Duty Dual-Fuel (HDDF) Type 1B engine" means a Dual-
Fuel engine that operates over the hot part of the WHTC test-cycle
with an average gas ratio that is not lower than 90 per cent
(GERWHTC ≥ 90 %), and that does not idle using exclusively diesel
fuel in dual-fuel mode, and that has a diesel mode.
2.5. "Heavy-Duty Dual-Fuel (HDDF) Type 2A engine" means a Dual-
with an average gas ratio between 10 per cent and 90 per cent (10 %
< GERWHTC < 90 %) and that has no diesel mode or that operates
over the hot part of the WHTC test-cycle with an average gas ratio
that is not lower than 90 per cent (GERWHTC ≥90 %), but that idles
using exclusively diesel fuel, and that has no diesel mode.
2.6. "Heavy-Duty Dual-Fuel (HDDF) Type 2B engine" means a Dual-
with an average gas ratio between 10 per cent and 90 per cent (10 %
< GERWHTC < 90 %) and that has a diesel mode or that operates
over the hot part of the WHTC test-cycle with an average gas ratio
that is not lower than 90 per cent (GERWHTC ≥90 %), but that can
idle using exclusively diesel fuel in dual-fuel mode, and that has a
diesel mode.
2.7. "Heavy-Duty Dual-Fuel (HDDF) Type 3B engine"2 means a dual-
fuel engine that operates over the hot part of the WHTC test-cycle
with an average gas ratio that does not exceed 10 per cent
(GERWHTC ≤ 10 %) and that has a diesel mode.
405/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
3. Dual-Fuel Specific Additional Approval Requirements

3.1. Dual-Fuel-Engine Family
3.1.1. Criteria for belonging to a dual-fuel engine family All engines within
a dual-fuel engine family shall belong to the same type of dual-fuel
engines defined in clause 2.3, and operate with the same types of fuel
or when appropriate with fuels declared according to this standard as
being of the same range(s). All engines within a dual-fuel engine
family shall meet the criteria defined by this standard for belonging
to a compression ignition engine family. The difference between the
highest and the lowest GERWHTC (i.e. the highest GERWHTC
minus the lowest GERWHTC) within a dual-fuel engine family shall
not exceed 30 per cent.
3.1.2. Selection of the parent engine
The parent engine of a dual-fuel engine family shall be selected
according to the criteria defined by this standard for selecting the
parent engine of a compression ignition engine family.
4.1. Operating Modes of Dual-Fuel Engines and Vehicles
4.1.1. Conditions for a dual-fuel engine to operate in diesel mode
A dual-fuel engine may only operate in diesel mode if, when
operating in diesel mode, it has been certified according to all the
requirements of this standard concerning diesel engines. When a
dual-fuel engine is developed from an already certified diesel engine,
then re-certification is required in the diesel mode.
4.1.2. Conditions for a HDDF engine to idle using diesel fuel exclusively
4.1.2.1. HDDF Type 1A engines shall not idle using diesel fuel exclusively
except under the conditions defined in clause 4.1.3. For warm-up and
start.
4.1.2.2. HDDF Type 1B engines shall not idle using diesel fuel exclusively
in dual fuel mode.
4.1.2.3. HDDF Types 2A, 2B and 3B engines may idle using diesel fuel
exclusively.
4.1.3. Conditions for a HDDF engine to warm-up or start using diesel fuel
solely
4.1.3.1. A Type 1B, Type 2B, or Type 3B dual-fuel engine may warm-up or
start using diesel fuel solely. However, in that case, it shall operate in
diesel mode.
4.1.3.2. A Type 1A or Type 2A dual-fuel engine may warm-up or start using
diesel fuel solely. However, in that case, the strategy shall be declared
as an AES and the following additional requirements shall be met:
406/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
4.1.3.2.1. The strategy shall cease to be active when the coolant

temperature has reached a temperature of 343 K (70 °C), or within 15
minutes after it has been activated, whichever occurs first; and
4.1.3.2.2. The service mode shall be activated while the strategy is active.
4.2. Service Mode
4.2.1. Conditions for dual-fuel engines and vehicles to operate in service
mode
When its engine is operating in service mode, a dual-fuel vehicle is
subject to an operability restriction and is temporarily exempted from
complying with the requirements related to exhaust emissions, OBD
and NOx control described in this standard.
4.2.2. Operability Restriction in Service Mode
The operability restriction applicable to dual-fuel vehicles when they
operate in service mode is the one activated by the "severe
inducement system" specified in chapter 10 of this part. The
operability restriction shall not be deactivated by either the activation
or deactivation of the warning and inducement systems specified in
chapter 10. The activation and the deactivation of the service mode
shall not activate or deactivate the warning and inducement systems
specified in chapter 10 of this part. Illustrations of the operability
restriction requirements are given in Appendix 2 of this part.
4.2.2.1. Activation of the operability restriction
The operability restriction shall be automatically activated when the
service mode is activated.
In the case where the service mode is activated according to clause
4.2.3. of this chapter. Because of a malfunction of the gas supply
system or because of an abnormality of gas consumption, the
operability restriction shall become active after the next time the
vehicle is stationary or within 30 minutes operating time after the
service mode is activated, whichever comes first.
In the case where the service mode is activated because of an empty
gas tank, the operability restriction shall become active as soon as the
service mode is activated.
4.2.2.2. Deactivation of the operability restriction
In case of an empty gas tank, the operability restriction in dual fuel
mode due to a lack of gaseous fuel, shall be deactivated as soon as
the gas tank is refilled above the critical level.
4.2.2.3 Repair and maintenance of LNG type A Dual fuel engines and
vehicles
In the case of LNG Type A Dual fuel engines and vehicles the
manufacturer may instead of limiting the speed at 20 km/h opt for
limiting the power of the engine to 20% of the declared maximum
power in dual fuel mode and this at any engine speed when the
service mode is activated during a repair or maintenance operation
4.2.2.3.1 The power limitation option may only be activated if the system
concludes that the gas tank is empty not later than 5 min after engine
cranking, the engine being at idle.
407/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
4.2.2.3.2 The power limitation option shall not be activated when the system
concludes that gas tank is empty from a previous driving cycle and
the gas tank has not been filled.
4.2.2.3.3 The manufacturer shall demonstrate at type approval that the power
limitation option can be activated during a repair or maintenance
operation.
4.2.3. Unavailability of gaseous fuel when operating in a dual-fuel mode
In order to permit the vehicle to keep moving and eventually to move
out of the main-stream traffic, upon detection of an empty gaseous
fuel tank, or of a malfunctioning gas supply system according to
clause 7.2. of this chapter, or of an abnormality of gas consumption
in dual-fuel mode according to clause 7.3. of this chapter:
(e) Dual-fuel engines of Types 1A and 2A shall activate the service
mode
(f) Dual-fuel engines of Types 1B, 2B and 3B shall operate in diesel
mode.
4.2.3.1. Unavailability of gaseous fuel – empty gaseous fuel tank
In the case of an empty gaseous fuel tank, the service mode or, as
appropriate according to clause 4.2.3. of this chapter, the diesel mode
shall be activated as soon as the engine system has detected that the
tank is empty.
When the gas availability in the tank again reaches the level that
justified the activation of the empty tank warning system specified in
clause 4.3.2. of this chapter, the service mode may be deactivated, or,
when appropriate, the dual-fuel mode may be reactivated.
4.2.3.2. Unavailability of gaseous fuel – malfunctioning gas supply
In the case of a malfunctioning gas supply system according to 7.2.
of this chapter, the service mode or, as appropriate according to
clause 4.2.3. of this chapter, the diesel mode shall be activated when
the DTC relevant to that malfunction has the confirmed and active
status. As soon as the diagnostic system concludes that the
malfunction is no longer present or when the information, including
DTCs relative to the failures, justifying its activation is erased by a
scan tool, the service mode may be deactivated, or, when appropriate,
the dual-fuel mode may be reactivated.
4.2.3.2.1 If the counter specified in clause 4.4. of this chapter and associated
with a malfunctioning gas supply system is not at zero, and is
consequently indicating that the monitor has detected a situation
when the malfunction may have occurred for a second or subsequent
time, the service mode or, as appropriate, the diesel mode shall be
activated when the DTC has the status "potential".
4.2.3.3. Unavailability of gaseous fuel – abnormality of gas consumption
In case of an abnormality of gas consumption in dual-fuel mode
according to clause 7.3., the service mode or, as appropriate
according to clause 4.2.3., the diesel mode shall be activated when
the DTC relevant to that malfunction has reached the potential status.
408/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
As soon as the diagnostic system concludes that the malfunction is

no longer present or when the information, including DTCs relative
to the failures, justifying its activation is erased by a scan tool, the
service mode may be deactivated, or, when appropriate, the dual-fuel
mode may be reactivated.
4.3. Dual-fuel Indicators
4.3.1 Dual-fuel operating mode indicator
Dual-fuel engines and vehicles shall provide to the driver a visual
indication of the mode under which the engine operates (dual-fuel
mode, diesel mode, or service mode).
The characteristics and the location of this indicator are left to the
decision of the manufacturer and may be part of an already existing
visual indication system
This indicator may be completed by a message display. The system
used for displaying the messages referred to in this clause may be the
same as the ones used for OBD, correct operation of NOx control
measures, or other maintenance purposes.
The visual element of the dual-fuel operating mode indicator shall
not be the same as the one used for the purposes of OBD (that is, the
MI – malfunction indicator), for the purpose of ensuring the correct
operation of NOx control measures, or for other engine maintenance
purposes.
Safety alerts always have display priority over the operating mode
indication.
4.3.1.1. The dual-fuel mode indicator shall be set to service mode as soon as
the service mode is activated (i.e. before it becomes actually active)
and the indication shall remain as long as the service mode is active.
4.3.1.2. The dual-fuel mode indicator shall be set for at least one minute on
dual-fuel mode or diesel mode as soon as the engine operating mode
is changed from diesel to dual-fuel vice-versa. This indication is also
required at key-on for at least 1 minute or at the request of the
manufacturer at engine cranking. The indication shall also be given
upon driver's request.
4.3.2. Empty gaseous fuel tank warning system (dual-fuel warning system)
A dual-fuel vehicle shall be equipped with a dual-fuel warning
system that alerts the driver that the gaseous fuel tank will soon
become empty. The dual-fuel warning system shall remain active
until the tank is refuelled to a level above which the warning system
is activated. The dual-fuel warning system may be temporarily
interrupted by other warning signals providing important safety-
related messages. It shall not be possible to turn off the dual-fuel
warning system by means of a scan-tool as long as the cause of the
warning activation has not been rectified.
409/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
4.3.2.1. Characteristics of the dual-fuel warning system

The dual-fuel warning system shall consist of a visual alert system
(icon, pictogram, etc.) left to the choice of the manufacturer.
It may include, at the choice of the manufacturer, an audible
component. In that case, the cancelling of that component by the
driver is permitted.
The visual element of the dual-fuel warning system shall not be the
same as the one used for the OBD system (that is, the MI –
malfunction indicator), for the purpose of ensuring the correct
operation of NOx control measures, or for other engine maintenance
purposes.
In addition, the dual-fuel warning system may display short
messages, including messages indicating clearly the remaining
distance or time before the activation of the operability restriction.
The system used for displaying the messages referred to in this clause
may be the same as the one used for displaying additional OBD
messages, messages related to correct operation of NOx control
measures, or messages for other maintenance purposes.
A facility to permit the driver to dim the visual alarms provided by
the warning system may be provided on vehicles for use by the rescue
services or on vehicles designed and constructed for use by the armed
services, civil defense, fire services and forces responsible for
maintaining public order.
4.4. Malfunctioning Gas Supply Counter
The system shall contain a counting system to record the number of
hours during which the engine has been operated while the system
has detected a malfunctioning gas supply system according to clause
7.2 of this chapter
4.4.1. The activation and deactivation criteria and mechanisms of the
counter shall comply with the specifications of Appendix 2.
4.4.2. It is not required to have a counter as specified in clause 4.4., when
the manufacturer can demonstrate to the test agency (e.g. by means
of a strategy description, experimental elements, etc…) that the dual-
fuel engine automatically switches to diesel mode in case
malfunction is detected.
4.5 Demonstration of the dual-fuel indicators and operability
restriction
4.5.1 As part of the application for type-approval under this standard, the
manufacturer shall demonstrate the operation of dual-fuel indicators
and of the operability restriction in accordance with the provisions of
Appendix 3.
410/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
4.6. Communicated Torque

4.6.1. Communicated torque when a dual-fuel engine operates in dual-fuel
mode
When a dual-fuel engine operates in dual-fuel mode:
(a)The reference torque curve retrievable according to the
requirements related to data stream information specified in
chapter 8B and referred to by chapter7 shall be the one obtained
according to chapter 3when that engine is tested on an engine test
bench in the dual-fuel mode;
(b)The recorded actual torques (indicated torque and friction torque)
shall be the result of the dual-fuel combustion and not the one
obtained when operating with diesel fuel exclusively.
4.6.2. Communicated torque when a dual-fuel engine operates in diesel
mode
When a dual-fuel engine operates in diesel mode, the reference torque
curve retrievable according to the requirements related to data stream
information specified in chapter 8B and referred to by chapter 7 shall
be the one obtained according to chapter 3 when the engine is tested
on an engine test bench in diesel mode.
4.7. Requirements to limit Off-Cycle Emissions (OCE) and in-use
emissions
Dual-fuel engines shall be subject to the requirements of chapter 9,
whether operating in dual-fuel mode or in the case of Type 1B, Type
2B, and Type 3B in diesel mode.
4.7.1. PEMS Tests at Certification
The PEMS demonstration test at type-approval required in chapter 9
shall be performed by testing the parent engine of a dual-fuel engine
family when operating in dual-fuel mode.
4.7.1.1. In the case of Type 1B, Type 2B and Type 3B dual-fuel engines, an
additional PEMS test shall be performed in diesel mode on the same
engine and vehicle immediately after or before the PEMS
demonstration test performed in dual-fuel mode.
In that case, certification can only be granted if both the PEMS
demonstration test in dual-fuel mode and the PEMS demonstration
test in diesel mode have concluded to a pass.
4.7.2. Additional Requirements
4.7.2.1. Adaptive strategies of a dual-fuel engine are allowed, provided that:
(a)The engine always remains in the HDDF type (that is Type 1A,
Type 2B, etc.) that has been declared for type-approval; and
b) In case of a Type 2 engine, the resulting difference between the
highest and the lowest GERWHTC within the family shall never
exceed the percentage specified in clause (3.1.1.; and
(c)These strategies are declared and satisfy the requirements of
chapter9
411/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
5. Performance Requirements
5.1 Emission limits applicable to HDDF Type 1A and Type 1B
engines
5.1.1. The emission limits applicable to HDDF Type 1A engines and
HDDF Type 1B engines operating in dual-fuel mode are those
defined for PI engines in clause 5.3. of Chapter-1 of this part.
5.1.2. The emission limits applicable to HDDF Type 1B engines operating
in diesel mode are those defined for CI engines in clause 5.3. of
Chapter-1 of this of this part.
5.2. Emission limits applicable to HDDF Type 2A and Type 2B
engines
5.2.1. Emission limits applicable over the WHSC test-cycle
5.2.1.1. For HDDF Type 2A and Type 2B engines, the exhaust emission
limits (incl. the PM number limit) over the WHSC test-cycle
applicable to HDDF Type 2A engines and HDDF Type 2B engines
operating in dual-fuel mode are those applicable to CI engines over
the WHSC test-cycle and defined in the table of clause 5.3. of
Chapter-1 of this of this part.
5.2.1.2. The emission limits (incl. the PM number limit) over the WHSC test-
cycle applicable to HDDF Type 2B engines operating in diesel mode
are those defined for CI engines in clause 5.3. of Chapter-1 of this of
this part.
5.2.2. Emission limits applicable over the WHTC test-cycle
5.2.2.1 Emission Limits for CO, NOx, NH3 and PM mass
The CO, NOx, NH3 and PM mass emission limits over the WHTC
test-cycle applicable to HDDF Type 2A engines and HDDF Type 2B
engines operating in dual-fuel mode are those applicable to both CI
and PI engines over the WHTC test-cycle and defined in clause 5.3.
of Chapter-1 of this of this part.
5.2.2.2. Emission Limits for Hydrocarbons
5.2.2.2.1 NG Engines
The THC, NMHC and CH4 emission limits over the WHTC test-cycle
applicable to HDDF Type 2A engines and HDDF Type 2B engines
operating with Natural Gas in dual-fuel mode are calculated from
those applicable to CI and PI engines over the WHTC test-cycle and
defined in clause 5.3. of Chapter-1 of of this part. The calculation
procedure is specified in clause 5.3. of Chapter-1 of this chapter.
5.2.2.2.2. LPG Engines
The THC emission limits over the WHTC test-cycle applicable to
HDDF Type 2A engines and HDDF Type 2B engines operating with
LPG in dual fuel mode are those applicable to CI engines over the
WHTC test-cycle and defined in clause 5.3. of Chapter-1 of this part.
412/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
5.2.2.3 Emission Limits for PM Number

5.2.2.3.1 The PM number limit over the WHTC test-cycle applicable to HDDF
Type 2A engines and HDDF Type 2B engines operating in dual-fuel
mode are those applicable to CI engines over the WHTC test-cycle
and defined in clause 5.3. of Chapter-1 of this part. In the case a PM
number limit applicable to PI engines over the WHTC test-cycle
would be defined in clause 5.3. of Chapter-1 of this standard, then the
requirements of clause 5.2.4. of this chapter shall apply for
calculating the limit applicable to HDDF Type 2A engines and
HDDF Type 2B engines over that cycle.
5.2.2.3.2 The emission limits (incl. the PM number limit) over the WHTC test-
cycle applicable to HDDF Type 2B engines operating in diesel mode
are those defined for CI engines in clause 5.3 of Chapter-1 of this
part.
5.2.3 Hydrocarbon limits (in mg/kWh) applicable to HDDF Type 2A
engines and to HDDF Type 2B engines operating in dual-fuel mode
during the WHTC test cycle.
The following calculation procedure applies for HDDF Type2A and
HDDF Type 2B engines tested in the WHTC cycle while operating in
dual-fuel mode:
Calculate the average gas ratio GERWHTC over the hot part of the
WHTC test cycle.
Calculate a corresponding THCGER in mg/kWh using the following
formula:
THCGER = NMHCPI + (CH4PI * GERWHTC)
Determine the applicable THC limit in mg/kWh using the following
method:
If THCGER ≤ CH4PI, then
(a) THC limit value = THCGER; and
(b) No applicable CH4 and NMHC limit value
If THCGER > CH4PI, then

(a) No applicable THC limit value; and
(b) Both the NMHCPI and CH4PI limit values are applicable.
In this procedure:
NMHCPI is the NMHC emission limit over the WHTC test-cycle and
made applicable to PI engine by clause 5.3 of Chapter-1 of this part ;
CH4PI is the CH4 emission limit over the WHTC test-cycle and
applicable to PI engine by clause 5.3. of Chapter-1 of this standard.
413/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Figure 1:
Illustration of the HC limits in the case of a HDDF Type2
engine operating in dual-fuel mode during the WHTC cycle
(natural gas dual-fuel engines)
5.2.4 PM number limit (in #/kWh) applicable to HDDF Type 2A engines
and to HDDF Type 2B engines operating in dual-fuel mode during the
WHTC test cycle.
In the case a PM number limit applicable to PI engines over the WHTC
test cycle would be defined in clause 5.3. of Chapter-1 of this standard,
the following calculation procedure shall apply to HDDF Type 1A
engines, to HDDF Type 1B engines, to HDDF Type 2A engines, to
HDDF Type 2A and to HDDF Type 2B engines tested in the WHTC
cycle while operating in dual fuel mode:
Calculate the average gas ratio GERWHTC over the hot part of the
WHTC test cycle, then
Calculate the PM number limit values PN limit WHTC in #/kWh
applicable over the WHTC test-cycle using the following formula
(linear interpolation between the CI and PI PM number limit values):
PN limit WHTC = PN limit CI/WHTC + (PN limit PI/WHTC – PN limit
CI/WHTC)
*GERWHTC
Where:
PN limit PI/WHTC is the PM number limit applicable to PI engines over
the WHTC test cycle;
PN limit CI/WHTC is the PM number limit applicable to CI engines over
the WHTC test cycle.
414/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Figure 2
Illustration of the PN limits in the case of a HDDF Type 2 engine
operating in dual-fuel mode during the WHTC cycle
5.3 Emission limits applicable to HDDF Type 3B engines operating in dual-
fuel mode
The emissions limits applicable to HDDF Type 3B engines whether
operating in dual-fuel mode or in diesel mode are the exhaust emission
limits applicable to CI engines.
5.4 CONFORMITY FACTORS
Principally, the emission limit applicable for applying the conformity
factor used when performing a PEMS test, whether a PEMS test at
certification or a PEMS test when checking and demonstrating the
conformity of in-service engines and vehicles, should be determined
on the basis of the actual GER calculated from the fuel consumption
measured over the on-road test. However, in absence of a robust way
to measure the gas or the diesel fuel consumption, the manufacturer is
allowed to use the GERWHTC determined on the hot part of the WHTC
and calculated according to this chapter.
6. Demonstration Requirements
6.1. Dual-fuel engines shall be subject to the laboratory tests specified in
Table.
Laboratory tests to be performed by a dual-fuel engine
Type 1A Type 1B Type Type 2B Type 3B
2A
NMHC; Dual-fuel THC; Dual-fuel
mode: mode:
CH4; CO; NMHC
NMHC; ; THC;
NOx;
CH4; NMHC;
PM; CH4;
WHTC
CO; NOx; CO; CH4; CO;
PN; NH3
PM; NOx; THC;
NOx;
CO;
PN; NH3 PM; PM; PN;
NH3 NOx;
PN;
PM;
NH3
415/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Diesel Diesel PN; NH3

mode: mode:
THC; CO; THC;
NOx; CO;NOx;
PM; PN; PM; PN;
NH3 NH3
NMHC Dual-fuel
; mode:
CO; NMHC;
NO TEST THC;
NOx; CO;
CO;
WHSC NO TEST
PM; NOx;
NOx;
PN; PM; PN;
PM;
NH3 NH3
PN; NH3
Diesel Diesel
mode: mode:
THC; CO; THC;
NOx; CO; NOx;
PM; PN; PM; PN;
NH3 NH3
WNTE No test Dual-fuel Dual-fuel
Laborator mode: mode:
[HC];
y test
no test CO; [HC];
THC;
CO;NOx;
NOx; CO;
PM PM
NOx;
Diesel Diesel PM
mode: mode:
THC; CO; THC;
NOx; CO;NOx;
PM PM
6.2 Demonstrations in case of installation of type-approved HDDF
engines
In addition to the requirements of this standard related to the
installation of an engine that is type-approved as separate technical
unit, a demonstration of the correct installation on a vehicle of a dual-
fuel engine shall be done on the basis of appropriate elements of
design, results of verification tests, etc. It shall address the conformity
of the following elements to the requirements of this chapter:
(a) The dual-fuel indicators and warnings as specified in this chapter
(pictogram, activation schemes, etc.);
(b) The fuel storage system;
(c) The performance of the vehicle in service mode.
Correct indicator illumination and warning system activation will be
checked. But any check shall not force dismounting the engine
system (e.g. an electric disconnection may be selected).
416/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
6.3. Demonstration requirements in case of a Type 2 Engine

The manufacturer shall present the test agency with evidence
showing that the GERWHTC span of all members of the dual-fuel
engine family remains within the percentage specified in clause 3.1.1.
of this chapter(for example, through algorithms, functional analyses,
calculations, simulations, results of previous tests, etc.).
6.4. Additional demonstration requirements in case of a universal
fuel range Type Approval
On request of the manufacturer and with approval of the test agency,
a maximum of two times the last 10 minutes of the WHTC may be
added to the adaptation run between the demonstration tests.
6.5. Requirements for demonstrating the durability of a dual-fuel
Engine
Provisions of chapter 6 shall apply
7 OBD REQUIREMENTS
7.1 GENERAL OBD REQUIREMENTS
All dual-fuel engines and vehicles shall comply with the
requirements specified in chapter 8 and applicable to diesel engines,
independent whether operating in dual-fuel or diesel mode.
In case a dual-fuel engine system is equipped with oxygen sensor(s),
the requirements applicable to gas engines in item 13. in Appendix 3
of chapter 8B of this part shall apply.
In case a dual-fuel engine system is equipped with a 3-way catalyst,
the requirements applicable to gas engines in items 7., 10., and 15. in
Appendix 3 of chapter 8 B of this part shall apply.
7.1.1. Additional general OBD requirements in case of Type 1B, Type 2B
and Type 3B dual-fuel engines and vehicles.
7.1.1.1. In the case of malfunctions, the detection of which does not depend
on the operation mode of the engine, the mechanisms specified in
chapter 8B that are associated with the DTC status shall not depend
on the operation mode of the engine (for example, if a DTC reached
the potential status in dual-fuel mode, it will get the confirmed and
active status the next time the failure is detected, even in diesel
mode).
7.1.1.2. In the case of malfunctions where the detection depends on the
operation mode of the engine, DTCs shall not get a previously active
status in a different mode than the mode in which they reached the
confirmed and active status.
417/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
7.1.1.3. A change of the mode of operation (dual-fuel to diesel or vice-versa)

shall not stop nor reset the OBD mechanisms (counters, etc.).
However, in the case of failures the detection of which depends on
the actual operation mode, the counters associated with these
malfunctions may, at the request of the manufacturer and upon
approval of the test agency:
(a) Halt and, when applicable, hold their present value when the
operation mode changes;
(b) Restart and, when applicable, continue counting from the point at
which they have been held when the operation mode changes back
to the other operation mode.
7.1.1.4. A possible influence of the mode of operation on the malfunction
detection shall not be used to extend the time until an operability
restriction becomes active.
7.1.1.5. In case of a Type 1B, Type 2B, or Type 3B dual-fuel engine, the
manufacturer shall specify which malfunctions are operation mode
dependent. This information shall be included in the information
package required in clause 8.1. (a) of chapter 8B. The justification
for operation mode dependency shall be included in the information
package required in clause 8.1. (b) of chapter8B
7.2. Monitoring of The Gas Supply System
HDDF engines and vehicles shall monitor the gas supply system
within the engine system (incl. the signals coming from outside of the
engine system) according to the specifications of item 1. in Appendix
3 to chapter 8B of this part – component monitoring.
7.3. Monitoring of The Gaseous Fuel Consumption
Dual-fuel vehicles shall include a means of determining gas fuel
consumption and providing off-board access to consumption
information. Abnormality of the gaseous fuel consumption (e.g. a
deviation of 50 per cent of the normal gaseous fuel consumption)
shall be monitored – performance monitoring.
The monitor for insufficient gaseous fuel consumption shall run
continuously whenever in dual-fuel mode, however the maximum
detection period is 48 hours of operation in dual-fuel mode.
The monitor shall not be subject to the "IUPR" requirements.
7.4 OBD Deficiencies
The deficiency rules specified in chapter 8B and applicable to diesel
engines shall apply to dual-fuel engines.
A deficiency that is present both in diesel mode and in dual-fuel mode
shall not be counted for each mode separately.
7.5. Erasing of failure information by means of a scan-tool
7.5.1. Erasing of information by means of a scan tool, including DTCs
relative to the malfunctions considered in this chapter shall be
performed in accordance with chapter8B of this part.
418/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
7.5.2. The erasing of failure information shall only be possible under

"engine-off" conditions.
7.5.3. When failure information related to the gas supply system as
8. Requirements to ensure the correct operation of NOx control
measures
8.1. Chapter 10(on correct operation of NOx control measures) shall
apply to HDDF engines and vehicles, whether operating in dual-fuel
or diesel mode.
8.2. Additional general OBD requirements in case of Type 1B, Type 2B
and Type 3B dual-fuel engines and vehicles
8.2.1. In case of HDDF Type 1B, Type 2B and Type 3B, the torque
considered to apply low level inducement defined in chapter 10 shall
be the lowest of the torques obtained in diesel mode and in dual-fuel
mode.
8.2.2. The requirements of clause 7.1.1. Concerning additional general
OBD requirements in case of Type 1B, Type 2B and Type 3B dual-
fuel engines and vehicles shall also apply to the diagnostic system
related to the correct operation of NOx control systems.
8.2.2.1. A possible influence of the mode of operation on the malfunction
detection shall not be used to extend the time until an operability
restriction becomes active.
8.2.2.2. A change of the mode of operation (dual-fuel to diesel or vice-versa)
shall not stop nor does reset the mechanisms implemented to comply
with the specification of chapter 10 (counter, etc.). However, in the
case where one of these mechanisms (for example a diagnostic
system) depends on the actual operation mode the counter associated
with that mechanism may, at the request of the manufacturer and
upon approval of the test agency:
a) Halt and, when applicable, hold their present value when the
operation mode changes;
b) Restart and, when applicable, continue counting from the point at
which they have been held when the operation mode changes
backs to the other operation mode.
9. Conformity of in-service engines or vehicles/engines

The conformity of in-service dual-fuel engines and vehicles shall be
performed according to the requirements specified in chapter 7.
The PEMS tests shall be performed in dual-fuel mode.
419/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
9.1. In the case of Type 1B, Type 2B and Type 3B dual-fuel engines, an
additional PEMS test shall be performed in Diesel mode on the
same engine and vehicle immediately after, or before, a PEMS test is
performed in dual- fuel mode.
In that case the pass or fail decision of the lot considered in the
statistical procedure specified in chapter 8 shall be based on the
following:
a) A pass decision is reached for an individual vehicle if both the
PEMS test in dual-fuel mode and the PEMS test in Diesel mode
have concluded a pass;
b) A fail decision is reached for an individual vehicle if either the
PEMS test in dual-fuel mode or the PEMS test in Diesel mode
has concluded a fail.
10. Additional Test Procedures
10.1. Additional emission test procedure requirements for dual-fuel
engines
10.1.1. Dual-fuel engines shall comply with the requirements of Appendix 4
of this Chapter in addition to the requirements of this standard (incl.
chapter3) when performing an emission test.
10.2. Additional PEMS emission test procedure requirements for
dual-fuel engines
10.2.1. When subject to a PEMS test, dual-fuel engines shall comply with
the requirements of Appendix 5 of this chapter in addition to the other
PEMS requirements of this standard.
10.2.2. Torque correction
When necessary, for instance because of variation of the gas fuel
composition, the manufacturer may decide to correct the ECU torque
signal. In that case the following requirements shall apply.
10.2.2.1. Correction of the PEMS torque signal
The manufacturer shall submit to the test agency a description of the
relationship permitting to extrapolate the real torque from the torques
obtained during emission testing with the 2 appropriate reference
fuels and from the actually retrievable torque in the ECU.
10.2.2.1.1.In the case when the torques obtained with the two
reference fuels may be considered of the same magnitude (that is
within the 7 per cent considered in clause 9.4.2.5. of Chapter-1 of this
part) the use of the corrected ECU value is not necessary,
10.2.2.2. Torque value to consider in a PEMS test
For PEMS test (work based window) the corrected torque value shall
result from that interpolation
10.2.2.3. Conformity of the ECU torque-signal
The "Maximum torque" method specified in Appendix 4 to chapter 7
shall be understood as demonstrating that a point between the
reference maximum torque curves obtained at a certain engine speed
when testing with the 2 applicable reference fuels has been reached
during vehicle testing.
420/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
The value of that point shall be estimated with the agreement of the
test agency on the basis of the actual fuel composition sampled as
close as possible to the engine and the power curves obtained with
each of the reference fuels during the emission certification test.
10.3 Additional dual-fuel specific CO2 determination provisions
Clause 3.1. of chapter 11 regarding the determination of CO2
emissions in case of raw measurement is not applicable to dual-fuel
engines. Instead the following provisions shall apply:
The measured test-averaged fuel consumption according to clause 4.3.
of chapter 11 shall be used as the base for calculating the test averaged
CO2 emissions.
The mass of each fuel consumed shall be used to determine, according
to clause A.6.4. of this chapter, the molar hydrogen ratio and the mass
fractions of the fuel mix in the test.
The total fuel mass shall be determined according to equations 23 and
24.
mfuel, corr is the corrected fuel mass of both fuels, g/test

mfuel total fuel mass of both fuels, g/test
Mthc mass of total hydrocarbon emissions in the exhaust gas, g/test
mCO mass of carbon monoxide emissions in the exhaust gas,
g/test
mCO2, fuel CO2 mass emission coming from the fuel, g/test
wGAM Sulphur content of the fuels, per cent mass
wDEL nitrogen content of the fuels, per cent mass
wEPS oxygen content of the fuels, per cent mass
α molar hydrogen ratio of the fuels (H/C)
AC is the Atomic mass of Carbon: 12,011 g/mol
AH is the Atomic mass of Hydrogen: 1,0079 g/mol
MCOis the Molecular mass of Carbon monoxide: 28,011 g/mol
MCO2 is the Molecular mass of Carbon dioxide: 44,01 g/mol
The CO2 emission resulting from urea shall be calculated with
equation.
mCO2, urea = (c urea/100) x(mCO2/ M CO(NH2)2)x m urea
25
mCO2, urea CO2 mass emission resulting from urea, g/test
421/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
c urea urea concentration, per cent

M urea total urea mass consumption, g/test
M CO (NH2)2 is the Molecular mass of urea: 60,056 g/mol
Then the total CO2 emission shall be calculated with equation 26
mCO2= mCO2, fuel + mCO2, urea
The brake specific CO2 emissions, eCO2 shall then be calculated
according to clause 3.3. of chapter 11.
11. Documentation Requirements
11.1. Documentation for installing in a vehicle a type approved HDDF
engine
The manufacturer of a dual-fuel engine type-approved as separate
technical unit shall include in the installation documents of its engine
system the appropriate requirements that will ensure that the vehicle,
when used on the road or elsewhere as appropriate, will comply with
the requirements of this chapter. This documentation shall include
but is not limited to:
a) The detailed technical requirements, including the provisions
ensuring the compatibility with the OBD system of the engine
system;
b) The verification procedure to be completed.
The existence and the adequacy of such installation requirements
may be checked during the approval process of the engine system.
11.1.1. In the case when the vehicle manufacturer who applies for approval
of the installation of the engine system on the vehicle is the same
manufacturer who received the type-approval of the dual-fuel engine
as a separate technical unit, the documentation specified in clause
11.2. of this chapter is not required.
12 APPENDICES
Appendix 1 Types of HDDF engines and vehicles - illustration of
the definitions and requirements
Appendix 2 Activation and deactivation mechanisms of the
counter(s), warning system, operability restriction,
service mode in case of dual fuel engines and
vehicles- Description and illustrations
Appendix 3HDDF dual-fuel indicator, warning system,
operability restriction - Demonstration requirements
Appendix 4 Additional emission test procedure requirements for
dual-fuel engines
Appendix 5 Additional PEMS emission test procedure
requirements for dual-fuel engines
Appendix 6 Determination of molar component ratios and ugas
values for dual-fuel engines
422/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
TYPES OF HDDF ENGINES AND VEHICLES - ILLUSTRATION OF
THE DEFINITIONS AND MAIN REQUIREMENTS
423/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
ACTIVATION AND DEACTIVATION MECHANISMS OF THE
COUNTER(S), WARNING SYSTEM, OPERABILITY RESTRICTION,
SERVICE MODE IN CASE OF DUAL FUEL ENGINES AND VEHICLES-
DESCRIPTION AND ILLUSTRATIONS
A.2.1. Description of The Counter Mechanism
A.2.1.1. General
A.2.1.1.1. To comply with the requirements of this chapter, the system shall
contain a counter to record the number of hours during which the
engine has been operated while the system has detected a
malfunctioning gas supply.
A.2.1.1.2. This counter shall be capable of counting up to 30 minutes
operating time. The counter intervals shall be no longer than 3
minutes. When reaching its maximum value permitted by the
system, it shall hold that value unless the conditions allowing the
counter to be reset to zero are met.
A.2.1.2. Principle of the Counter Mechanism
A.2.1.2.1. The counters shall operate as follows:
A.2.1.2.1.1. If starting from zero, the counter shall begin counting as soon as
a malfunctioning gas supply is detected according to clause 7.2
of this chapter and the corresponding diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) has the status confirmed and active.
A.2.1.2.1.2. The counter shall halt and hold its current value if a single
monitoring event occurs and the malfunction that originally
activated the counter is no longer detected or if the failure has
been erased by a scan tool or a maintenance tool.
A.2.1.2.1.2.1. The counter shall also halt and hold its current value when the
service mode becomes active.
A.2.1.2.1.3. Once frozen, the counter shall be reset to zero and restart
counting if a malfunction relevant to that counter is detected and
the service mode activated.
A.2.1.2.1.3.1. Once frozen, the counter shall also be reset to zero when the
monitors relevant to that counter have run at least once to
completion of their monitoring cycle without having detected a
malfunction and no malfunction relevant to that counter has been
detected during 36 engine operating hours since the counter was
last held.
A.2.1.3. Figures 1 to 3 give via three use-cases an illustration of the
counter mechanism
424/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Figure 1
Illustration of the gas supply counter mechanism
(Type A HDDF) - use-case 1
A malfunction of the gas supply is detected for the very first time.
The service mode is activated and the counter starts counting once the
DTC gets the "confirmed and active" status (2nd detection).
The vehicle encounters a stand-still situation before reaching 30
minutes operating time after the service mode is activated.
The service mode becomes active and the vehicle speed is limited to
20 km/h (see clause 4.2.2.1. of this chapter). The counter freezes at its
present value.
Figure 2
425/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A malfunction of the gas supply is detected while the gas supply

malfunction counter is not at zero (in this use-case it indicates the value
it reached in use-case 1 when the vehicle became standstill).
The service mode is activated and the counter restarts counting from
zero as soon as the DTC gets the "potential" status (1st detection: see
clause 4.2.3.2.1. of this chapter).
After 30 minutes of operation without a standstill situation, the service
mode becomes active and the vehicle speed is limited to 20 km/h (see
clause 4.2.2.1 of this chapter).
The counter freezes at a value of 30 minutes operating time.
Figure 3
After 36 operating hours without detection of a malfunction of the gas
supply, the counter is reset to zero (see A.2.1.2.3.2.1 of this appendix).
A malfunction of the gas supply is again detected while the gas supply
malfunction counter is at zero (1st detection).
The service mode is activated and the counter starts counting once the
DTC gets the "confirmed and active" status (2nd detection).
After 30 minutes of operation without a standstill situation, the service
mode becomes active and the vehicle speed is limited to 20 km/h (see
clause 4.2.2.1 of this chapter).
The counter freezes at a value of 30 minutes operating time.
A.2.2. Illustration of the other activation and deactivation mechanisms
A.2.2.1. Empty gas tank
Figure 4 gives an illustration of the events occurring in the case of a
HDDF vehicle when a gas tank becomes empty through one typical use-
case.
426/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Figure 4
Illustration of the events occurring in case of an empty gas tank
(Types A and B HDDF)
In that use case:
(a) The warning system specified in clause 4.3.2. of this
chapter of becomes active when the level of gas reaches
the critical level defined by the manufacturer;
(b) The service mode is activated (in the case of a Type A
HDDF) or the engine switches to Diesel mode (in the case
of a Type B HDDF).
In the case of a Type A HDDF, the service mode becomes active
and the vehicle speed is limited to 20 km/h after the next time the
vehicle is stationary or after 30 minutes operating time without
standstill (see clause 4.2.2.1. of this chapter).
The gas tank is refilled.
The vehicle operates again in dual-fuel mode as soon as the tank
is refilled above the critical level.
A.2.2. Malfunctioning Gas Supply
Figure 5 gives via one typical use-case an illustration of the
events occurring in the case of a malfunction of the gas supply
system. This illustration should be understood as complementary
to that given in clause A.2.1 and dealing with the counter
mechanism.
427/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Figure 5
Illustration of the events occurring in case of a malfunctioning gas supply
system (Types A and B HDDF)
In that use case:
(a) The failure of the gas supply system occurs for the very first
time. The DTC gets the potential status (1st detection);
(b)The service mode is activated (in the case of a Type A HDDF)
or the engine switches to Diesel mode (in the case of a Type B
HDDF) as soon as the DTC gets the “confirmed and active”
status (2nd detection).
standstill (see clause 4.2.2.1 of this chapter).
The vehicle operates again in dual-fuel mode as soon as the
failure is repaired.
A.2.2.3. Abnormality of the Gas Consumption
Figure 6 gives via one typical use-case an illustration of the
events occurring in the case of an abnormality of the gas
consumption.
428/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Illustration of the events occurring in case of abnormality of gas

consumption (Types A and B HDDF)
Diesel
HDDF opera
Type .B tin
Dual-fuel
g
ON
opera
bility
OFF
restric
HDDF
Type .A Active
Ser
Activated
vic
e 30 minutes op.
OFF time or
m
standstill
DTC
al abnormal status
l ity of gas
HD consump
NO
DF tion
Figure 6
Illustration of the events occurring in case of abnormality of
gas consumption(Type A and Type B HDDF)
In that use case the service mode is activated (in the case of a
Type A HDDF) or the engine switches to Diesel mode (in the
case of a Type B HDDF) as soon as the DTC gets the "potential"
status (1st detection).
standstill (see clause 4.2.2.1. of this chapter).
The vehicle operates again in dual-fuel mode as soon as the
abnormality is rectified.
429/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
CHAPTER14 - APPENDIX 3
HDDF DUAL-FUEL INDICATOR, WARNING SYSTEM,
OPERABILITY RESTRICTION - DEMONSTRATION
REQUIREMENTS
A.3.1. Dual-fuel indicators
A.3.1.1. Dual-fuel mode indicator
In the case where a dual-fuel engine is type approved as a separate
technical unit, the ability of the engine system to command the
activation of the dual- fuel mode indicator when operating in dual-fuel
mode shall be demonstrated at type-approval.
In the case where a dual-fuel vehicle is type approved as regards to its
emissions, the activation of the dual-fuel mode indicator when
operating in dual-fuel mode shall be demonstrated at type-approval.
Note: Installation requirements related to the dual-fuel mode indicator
of an approved dual-fuel engine are specified in clause 6.2. of this
chapter.
A.3.1.2. Diesel Mode Indicator
In the case where a dual-fuel engine of Type 1B, Type 2B, or Type 3B
is type approved as a separate technical unit, the ability of the engine
system to command the activation of the diesel mode indicator when
operating in diesel mode shall be demonstrated at type-approval.
In the case where a dual-fuel vehicle of Type 1B, Type 2B, or Type 3B
is type approved as regards to its emissions, the activation of the diesel
mode indicator when operating in diesel mode shall be demonstrated at
type- approval.
Note: Installation requirements related to the diesel mode indicator of
an approved Type 1B, Type 2B, or Type 3B dual-fuel engine are
specified in clause 6.2. of this chapter.
A.3.1.3. Service Mode Indicator
activation of the service mode indicator when operating in service mode
shall be demonstrated at type-approval.
In the case where a dual-fuel vehicle is type approved with regard to its
emissions, the activation of the service mode indicator when operating
in service mode shall be demonstrated at type-approval.
Note: Installation requirements related to the service mode indicator of
an approved dual-fuel engine are specified in clause 6.2. of this chapter.
3.1.3.1 When so-equipped it is sufficient to perform the demonstration related
to the service mode indicator by activating a service mode activation
switch and to present the test agency with evidence showing that the
activation occurs when the service mode is commanded by the engine
system itself (for example, through algorithms, simulations, result of in-
house tests, etc).
430/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A.3.2. Warning System

activation of the warning system in the case that the amount of gas in
the tank is below the warning level, shall be demonstrated at type-
approval.
In the case where a dual-fuel vehicle is type-approved as regards to its
emissions the activation of the warning system in the case that the
amount of gas in the tank is below the warning level, shall be
demonstrated at type- approval. For that purpose, at the request of the
manufacturer and with the approval of the test agency, the actual
amount of gas may be simulated.
Note: Installation requirements related to the warning system of an
approved dual-fuel engine are specified in clause 6.2. of this chapter.
A.3.3. Operability Restriction
In the case where a Type 1A or Type 2A dual-fuel engine is type
approved as a separate technical unit, the ability of the engine system to
command the activation of the operability restriction upon detection of
an empty gaseous fuel tank, of a malfunctioning gas supply system, and
of an abnormality of gas consumption in dual-fuel mode shall be
demonstrated at type-approval.
In the case where a Type 1A or Type 2A dual-fuel vehicle is type
approved as regards to its emissions, the activation of the operability
restriction upon detection of an empty gaseous fuel tank, of a
malfunctioning gas supply system, and of an abnormality of gas
consumption in dual-fuel mode shall be demonstrated at type-approval.
Note: Installation requirements related to the operability restriction of
an approved
A.3.3.1. The malfunctioning of the gas supply and the abnormality of gas
consumption may be simulated at the request of the manufacturer and
with the approval of the test agency.
In the case where a Type 1A or Type 2A dual-fuel engine is type
approved as a separate technical unit, the ability of the engine system to
command the activation of the operability restriction upon detection of
an empty gaseous fuel tank, of a malfunctioning gas supply system, and
of an abnormality of gas consumption in dual-fuel shall be
demonstrated at type-approval.
In the case where a Type 1A or Type 2A dual-fuel vehicle is type
approved as regards to its emissions, the activation of the operability
restriction upon detection of an empty gaseous fuel tank, of a
malfunctioning gas supply system, and of an abnormality of gas
consumption in dual-fuel mode shall be demonstrated at type-approval.
Note: Installation requirements related to the operability restriction of
an approved dual-fuel engine are specified in clause 6.2. of this chapter.
431/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A.3.3.1. The malfunctioning of the gas supply and the abnormality of gas
consumption may be simulated at the request of the manufacturer and
with the approval of the test agency
A.3.3.2. It is sufficient to perform the demonstration in a typical use-case
selected with the agreement of the test agency and to present that test
agency with evidence showing that the operability restriction occurs in
the other possible use- cases (for example, through algorithms,
simulations, result of in-house tests, etc.
432/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
ADDITIONAL EMISSION TEST PROCEDURE
REQUIREMENTS FOR DUAL- FUEL ENGINES
A.4.1. General
This appendix defines the additional requirements and exceptions to

chapter 3 of this standard to enable emission testing of dual-fuel
engines independent whether these emissions are solely exhaust
emissions or also crankcase emissions added to the exhaust emissions
according to clause 6.10. of chapter 3 of this part.
Emission testing of a dual-fuel engine is complicated by the fact that

the fuel used by the engine can vary between pure diesel fuel and a
combination of mainly gaseous fuel with only a small amount of diesel
fuel as an ignition source. The ratio between the fuels used by a dual-
fuel engine can also change dynamically depending of the operating
condition of the engine. As a result special precautions and restrictions
are necessary to enable emission testing of these engines.
A.4.2. Test conditions (chapter 3 of this part)

A.4.2.1. Laboratory test conditions (chapter 3 of this part)
The parameter fa for dual-fuel engines shall be determined with
formula (a)(2) in clause 6.1. of chapter 3 to this standard.
A.4.3. Test procedures (chapter 3, clause 7.)
A.4.3.1. Measurement procedures (chapter 3, clause 7.1.3.)
The recommended measurement procedure for dual-fuel engines is
procedure (b) listed in clause 7.1.3. of chapter 3 (CVS system).
This measurement procedure ensures that the variation of the fuel

composition during the test will only influence the hydrocarbon
measurement results. This shall be compensated via one of the
methods described in clause 4.4.
Other measurement methods such as method (a) listed in clause 7.1.3.

of chapter 3 (raw gaseous/partial flow measurement) can be used with
some precautions regarding exhaust mass flow determination and
calculation methods. Fixed values for fuel parameters and ugas-values
shall be applied as described in Appendix 6 of chapter 3.
A.4.4. EMISSION CALCULATION (CHAPTER 3, CLAUSE 8.)

The emissions calculation on a molar basis, in accordance with chapter
6 of gtr No. 11 concerning the exhaust emission test protocol for Non-
Road Mobile Machinery (NRMM), is not permitted.
433/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A.4.4.1. Dry/Wet Correction (Chapter 3, Clause 8.1.)

A.4.4.1.1. Raw exhaust gas (chapter 3, clause 8.1.1.)
Equations 15 and 17 in chapter 3, clause 8.1.1. Shall be used to
calculate the dry/wet correction.
The fuel specific parameters shall be determined according to clauses
A.6.2. And A.6.3. of Appendix 6 of chapter 3.
A.4.4.1.2. Diluted exhaust gas (chapter 3, clause 8.1.2)
Equations 19 and 20 in chapter 3 clause 8.1.2. shall be used to
calculate the wet/dry correction.
The molar hydrogen ratio α of the combination of the two fuels shall
be used for the dry/wet correction. This molar hydrogen ratio shall be
calculated from the fuel consumption measurement values of both
fuels according to clause A.6.4. of Appendix 6.
A.4.4.2. NOx correction for humidity (chapter 3, clause 8.2.)
The NOx humidity correction for compression ignition engines as
specified in clause 8.2.1. of chapter 3 shall be used to determine the
NOx humidity correction for dual-fuel engines.
k h D =(15698 x Ha )/1000)+0.832
where:
Ha is the intake air humidity, g water per kg dry air
A.4.4.3. Partial flow dilution (PFS) and raw gaseous measurement
(chapter 3 4, clause 8.4.)
A.4.4.3.1. Determination of exhaust gas mass flow (chapter 3, clause 8.4.1.)
The exhaust mass flow shall be determined according to the direct
measurement method as described in clause 8.4.1.3.
Alternatively, the airflow and air to fuel ratio measurement method
according to clause 8.4.1.6. (Equations 30, 31 and 32) may be used
only if α, γ, and  values are determined according to clauses A.6.2.
and A.6.3. of Appendix 6. The use of a zirconia-type sensor to
determine the air fuel ratio is not allowed.
A.4.4.3.2. Determination of the gaseous components (chapter 3, clause 8.4.2.)
The calculations shall be performed according to chapter 3, clause 8.
but the ugas-values and molar ratios as described in clause A.6.2. and
A.6.3. of Appendix 6 shall be used
A.4.4.3.3. Particulate determination (chapter 3, clause 8.4.3.)
For the determination of particulate emissions with the partial dilution
measurement method the calculation shall be performed according to
chapter 3, clause 8.4.3.2.
434/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A.4.4.3.4. Additional requirements regarding the exhaust gas mass flow meter
A.4.4.4. Full Flow Dilution Measurement (CVS) (chapter 3, clause 8.5.)
The possible variation of the fuel composition will only influence the
hydrocarbons measurement results calculation. For all other
components the appropriate equations from clause 8.5.2. of chapter 3
shall be used.
The exact equations shall be applied for the calculation of the
hydrocarbon emissions using the molar component ratios determined
from the fuel consumption measurements of both fuels according to
clause A.6.4. of Appendix 6.
A.4.4.4.1. Determination of The Background Corrected Concentrations
(Chapter 3 of this part)
To determine the stoichiometric factor, the molar hydrogen ratio α of
the fuel shall be calculated as the average molar hydrogen ratio of the
fuel mix during the test according to clause A.6.4. of Appendix 6 of
chapter 3.
A.4.5. Equipment Specification and Verification (Chapter 3, Clause 9.)
A.4.5.1. Oxygen Interference Check Gases (Chapter 3, clause 9.3.3.4.)
The oxygen concentrations required for dual-fuel engines are equal to
those required for compression ignition engines listed in table 8 in
A.4.5.2. Oxygen Interference Check (Chapter 3, clause 9.3.7.3.)
Instruments used to measure dual-fuel engines shall be checked using
the same procedures as those used to measure compression ignition
engines. The 21 per cent oxygen blend shall be used under item (b) in
A.4.5.3. Water Quench Check (Chapter 3, clause 9.3.9.2.2.)
The water quench checks in clause 9.3.9.2.2. of chapter 3 to this
standard applies to wet NOx concentration measurements only. For
dual-fuel engines fuelled with natural gas this check should be
performed with an assumed H/C ratio of 4 (Methane). In that case Hm
= 2 x A. For dual-fuel engines fuelled with LPG this check should be
performed with an assumed H/C ratio of 2.525. In that case Hm = 1.25
xA
435/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
CHAPTER NO 14 - APPENDIX 5
ADDITIONAL PEMS EMISSION TEST PROCEDURE REQUIRMENTS
FOR DUAL FUEL ENGINES.
A 5.1 GENREAL
This appendix defines the additional requirements and exceptions to
chapter 7 of this standard to enable PEMS emission testing of dual-
fuel engines.
Emission testing of a dual-fuel engine is complicated by the fact that
the fuel used by the engine can vary between pure diesel fuel and a
combination of mainly gaseous fuel with only a small amount of diesel
fuel as an ignition source. The ratio between the fuels used by a dual-
fuel engine can also change dynamically depending of the operating
condition of the engine. As a result, special precautions and
restrictions are necessary to enable emission testing of these engines.
A.5.2. The following amendments to Appendix 1 of chapter 7 shall apply:
A.5.2.1. Note (2) of Table 1 in clause A.1.2.2. of this appendix shall read:
(2) Only for engines fuelled with natural gas
A.5.2.2. Clause A.1.3.3. of this appendix "Dry-Wet correction" shall read:
If the concentration is measured on a dry basis, it shall be converted
to a wet basis according to clause 8.1. of chapter 3 and clause 4.1.1.
of Appendix 4 to this chapter 3 of this part.
A.5.2.3. Clause A.1.3.5. "Calculation of the instantaneous gaseous emissions"
shall read:
The mass emissions shall be determined as described in clause 8.4.2.3.
of chapter 3 of this part..
The ugas values shall be determined according to clauses A.6.2. and
A.6.3. of appendix 6 of chapter 3 of this part.
436/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
CHAPTER NO 14 - APPENDIX 6
DETERMINATION OF MOLAR COMPONENT RATIOS AND U GAS
VALUES FOR DUAL-FUEL ENGINES
A.6.1. General
This appendix defines the determination of molar component ratios
and ugas values for the dry-wet factor and emissions calculations for
emission testing of dual-fuel engines.
A.6.2. Operation in dual-fuel mode
A.6.2.1. For Type 1A or 1B dual-fuel engines operating in dual-fuel mode the
molar component ratios and the ugas values of the gaseous fuel shall
be used.
A.6.2.2. For Type 2A or 2B dual-fuel engines operating in dual-fuel mode the
molar component ratios and the ugas values from Tables 1 and 2 shall
be used.
Table 1
Molar component ratios for a mixture of 50% gaseous
fuel and 50% diesel fuel (mass %)
Gaseous α γ į İ
CH4 2.8681 0 0 0.0040
GR 2.7676 0 0 0.0040
G23 2.7986 0 0.0703 0.0043
G25 2.7377 0 0.1319 0.0045
Propane 2.2633 0 0 0.0039
Butane 2.1837 0 0 0.0038
LPG 2.1957 0 0 0.0038
LPG Fuel A 2.1740 0 0 0.0038
LPG Fuel B 2.2402 0 0 0.0039
Table 2
Raw exhaust gas ugas values and component densities for a
mixture of 50% gaseous fuel and 50% diesel fuel (mass %)
Gas
NOx CO HC CO2 O2 CH4
Gaseous e
Fuel gas [kg/m3]
2.053 1.250 a) 1.9636 1.4277 0.716
ugasb)
CNG/LNG 1.2786 0.001606 0.000978 0.000528d) 0.001536 0.001117 0.000560
c)
Propane 1.2869 0.001596 0.000972 0.000510 0.001527 0.001110 0.000556
437/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
Butane 1.2883 0.001594 0.000971 0.000503 0.001525 0.001109 0.000556
LPGe) 1.2881 0.001594 0.000971 0.000506 0.001525 0.001109 0.000556
a) depending on fuel
b) at = 2, dry air, 273 K, 101.3 kPa
c) u accurate within 0.2 % for mass composition of: C = 58 - 76 %; H = 19
- 25 %; N = 0 - 14 % (CH4, G20, GR, G23 and G25)
d) NMHC on the basis of CH2.93 (for total HC the ugas coefficient of CH4
shall be used)
e) u accurate within 0.2 % for mass composition of: C3 = 27 - 90 %; C4 = 10 -
73 % (LPG Fuels A and B)
A.6.2.3. For Type 3B dual-fuel engines operating in dual-fuel mode the molar
component ratios and the ugas values of diesel fuel shall be used.
A.6.2.4. For the calculation of the hydrocarbon emissions of all types of dual-
fuel engines operating in dual-fuel mode, the following shall apply:
-For the calculation of the THC emissions, the ugas value of the
gaseous fuel shall be used.
-For the calculation of the NMHC emissions, the ugas value on the
basis of CH2.93 shall be used.
- For the calculation of the CH4 emissions, the ugas value of CH4 shall
be used.
A.6.3. Operation in diesel mode
For Type 1B, 2B or 3B dual-fuel engines operating in diesel mode, the
molar component ratios and the ugas values of diesel fuel shall be
used.
A.6.4. Determination of the molar component ratios when the fuel mix is
known
438/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A.6.4.1 Calculation of the fuel Mixture Components
439/440
AIS-137 (Part 4)
A6.4.2 Calculation of the molar ratios of H, C, S, N and O related to C

for the fuel mixture (according to ISO8178, Aneex A-A2.2.2)
α= 11.9164 x(WALF ÷WBET))
Where
wALF hydrogen content of fuel, per cent mass
wBET carbon content of fuel, per cent mass
wGAM sulphur content of fuel, per cent mass
wDEL nitrogen content of fuel, per cent mass
wEPS oxygen content of fuel, per cent mass
α molar hydrogen ratio (H/C)
γ molar sulphur ratio (S/C)
δ molar nitrogen ratio (N/C)
ε molar oxygen ratio (O/C)
A 6.4.3 Calculation of the ugas values for a fuel mixture
The raw exhaust gas ugas values for a fuel mixture can be calculated
with the exact equations in clause 8.4.2.4. of chapter 3 of this part
and the molar ratios calculated according to clause A.6.4.2.
For systems with constant mass flow, equation 57 in clause 8.5.2.3.1.
of chapter 3 of this part is needed to calculate the diluted exhaust gas
ugas values.
440/440

Ais 137 (Part - 4) Bs Vi

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ais 137 (Part - 4) Bs Vi

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ais 137 (Part - 4) Bs Vi

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AIS-137 (Part 4)

AUTOMOTIVE INDUSTRY STANDARD

Test Method, Testing Equipment and Related

Date of hosting on website: ----------------

UN Regulation 49 (Supplement 3 to the 06 series of Amendment date of Entry into

The Committee Composition for formulation of this standard is given in Annexure 1

After approval of the standard by SCOE, The Automotive Research Association of

CHAPTER & CONTENTS PAGE NO

Chapter7- Calibration of portable measurement equipment

Chapter 10 - Low level inducement torque reduction scheme

Chapter 12 Type Approval of Replacement Pollution Control

1.2 If a vehicle is tested for type approval on Chassis Dynamometer

1.3 This Part should be read in conjunction with applicable Gazette

1.5 TEST APPLICABILITY:

2.4 "Auxiliary Emission Strategy" (AES) means an emission strategy that

2.17 "Dual-fuel vehicle" means a vehicle that is powered by a dual-fuel

2.23 "Engine family" means a manufacturer’s grouping of engines which

2.28 Gaseous pollutants" means the exhaust gas emissions of carbon

2.29 "General Denominator" means a counter indicating the number of times

2.40 "On-board diagnostic system" (OBD system) means a system on-board

2.64 "Vehicle type or vehicle model with regard to emissions" means a

agency at the time of approval or at any time during the validity of

3.2 Application for type approval of a vehicle with an approved engine

3.3.3 The manufacturer shall provide a documentation package that fully

3.3.4 In addition to the information referred to in clause 3.3.3. of this chapter,

3.3.6 Changes to the make of a system, component or separate technical unit

3.4. Application for type approval of a type of replacement pollution

3.4.3 The manufacturer shall submit a Statement of compliance with the

The test engines shall respect the following requirements

(a) They shall have no emission control system defects;

4.5.1 Tables summarizing the requirements for approval of NG-Fuelled

𝑒𝑚𝑖𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑢𝑙𝑡 𝑜𝑛 𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑓𝑢𝑒𝑙 2

In the case of LPG there are variations in C3 /C4 composition. These

4.7.2 Exhaust emission type-approval of an engine running on natural gas or

4.8.1 Conditions for Applying for a Fuel-specific Type-approval in the Case

4.9 Exhaust Emissions Type-Approval of A Member of a Family

The following information shall be given:

The letters and figures shall be at least 4 mm in height.

Note: If lack of space prevents such labelling, a simplified code may

5 REQUIREMENTS AND TESTS

5.1.3 Requirements to limit off-cycle emissions

(a) The general requirements, including the performance

5.1.4.3 The extended documentation package shall include:

(c) It shall also include a full description of the inducement system

5.1.4.4 The extended documentation package shall remain strictly

5.1.5 Provisions for electronic system security

5.1.5.1 The general requirements, including the specific requirements for

5.2 Specifications Concerning the Emission of Gaseous and

5.3 EMISSION LIMITS

5.4 Durability and Deterioration Factors

technically permissible mass exceeding 7.5 t.

requirements as specified in Part 1 of chapter 2 of this part.

7.3 Extension to Include a New Engine System into an Engine-family

the type approval certificate or test report granted in accordance with

Three engines shall be taken from the series production. With

The tests shall be carried out according to Appendix 1 of this chapter

On the basis of a test of the engine, the production of a series is regarded

8.5 Common Requirements for Option 1 & Option 2

8.5.1.2 When the manufacturer requests to conduct a running-in procedure in